Kia, THE COMPANY · Kia, THE COMPANY Thank you for ... This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-

Kia, THE COMPANYThank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.

As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehi-

cles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you

with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.

All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the

time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes

at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can

be carried out.

This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip-

tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a

result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applica-

ble to your specific Kia vehicle.

Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!

i

Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.

When you require service, remember that your Kia dealerknows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained tech-nicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replace-ment parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfac-tion.

Because subsequent owners require this important informationas well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it issold.

This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manualthat provides important information on all warranties regardingyour vehicle.

We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow therecommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operationof your new vehicle.

Kia offers a great variety of options, components and featuresfor its various models. Therefore, some of the equipmentdescribed in this manual, along with the various illustrations,may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.

The information and specifications provided in this manualwere accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right todiscontinue or change specifications or design at any timewithout notice and without incurring any obligation. If youhave questions, always check with your Kia dealer.

We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoringpleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.

© 2016 Kia Canada Inc.

All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic ormechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by anyinformation storage and retrieval system or translation inwhole or part is not permitted without written authorizationfrom Kia Canada Inc..

Printed in U.S.A

Foreword

ii

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

I

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety features of your vehicle

Features of your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications & Consumer information

Index

table of contents

1

Introduction

How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . . 1-3

• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

• Operation in foreign countries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders. . 1-6

Introduction

21

HOW TO USE THIS MANUALWe want to help you get the greatestpossible driving pleasure from yourvehicle. Your Owner’s Manual canassist you in many ways. We strong-ly recommend that you read theentire manual. In order to minimizethe chance of death or injury, youmust read the WARNING and CAU-TION sections in the manual.Illustrations complement the wordsin this manual to best explain how toenjoy your vehicle. By reading yourmanual, you will learn about fea-tures, important safety information,and driving tips under various roadconditions.The general layout of the manual isprovided in the Table of Contents.Use the index when looking for aspecific area or subject; it has analphabetical listing of all informationin your manual.Sections: This manual has eight sec-tions plus an index. Each sectionbegins with a brief list of contents soyou can tell at a glance if that sectionhas the information you want.

You will find various WARNINGs,CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in thismanual. These WARNINGs were pre-pared to enhance your personal safe-ty.You should carefully read and followALL procedures and recommenda-tions provided in these WARNINGs,CAUTIONs and NOTICEs.

✽✽ NOTICEA NOTICE indicates interesting orhelpful information is being provided.

Your new vehicle is designed to useonly unleaded fuel having a pumpoctane number ((R+M)/2) of 87(Research Octane Number 91) orhigher. (Do not use methanol blend-ed fuels.)

Your new vehicle is designed toobtain maximum performance withUNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-mize exhaust emissions and sparkplug fouling.Never add any fuel system cleaningagents to the fuel tank other thanwhat has been specified. (Consult anauthorized Kia dealer for details.)• Tighten the cap until it clicks one

time, otherwise the Check Enginelight will illuminate.

WARNINGA WARNING indicates a situa-tion in which harm, serious bod-ily injury or death could result ifthe warning is ignored.

CAUTIONA CAUTION indicates a situationin which damage to your vehiclecould result if the caution isignored.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

1 3

Introduction

Gasoline containing alcohol andmethanolGasohol, a mixture of gasoline andethanol (also known as grain alco-hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-taining methanol (also known aswood alcohol) are being marketedalong with or instead of leaded orunleaded gasoline.

Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanolmay be used in your vehicle.Do not use gasohol containing morethan 15 percent ethanol, and do notuse gasoline or gasohol containingany methanol. Ethanol provides lessenergy than gasoline and it attractswater, and it is thus likely to reduceyour fuel efficiency and could loweryour MPG results.Methanol may cause drivability prob-lems and damage to the fuel system,engine control system and emissioncontrol system.Discontinue using gasohol of anykind if drivability problems occur.Vehicle damage or drivability prob-lems may not be covered by themanufacturer’s warranty if they resultfrom the use of:1. Gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol.2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.3. Gasohol containing more than 15

percent ethanol

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15percent gasoline, and is manufac-tured exclusively for use in FlexibleFuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compati-ble with your vehicle. Use of “E85”may result in poor engine perform-ance and damage to your vehicle'sengine and fuel system. Kia recom-mends that customers do not usefuel with an ethanol content exceed-ing 15 percent.

✽✽ NOTICEYour New Vehicle Limited Warrantydoes not cover damage to the fuel sys-tem or any performance problemscaused by the use of “E85” fuel.

✽✽ NOTICENever use any fuel containingmethanol. Discontinue use of anymethanol containing product whichmay inhibit proper drivability.

WARNING - Refueling• Do not "top off" after the noz-

zle automatically shuts off.Attempts to force more fuelinto the tank can cause fueloverflow onto you and theground causing a risk of fire.

• Always check that the fuel capis installed securely to pre-vent fuel spillage, especiallyin the event of an accident.

Introduction

41

Other fuelsUsing fuels that contain Silicone (Si),MMT (Manganese, Mn), Ferrocene(Fe), and Other metalic additives,may cause vehicle and engine dam-age or cause misfiring, poor acceler-ation, engine stalling, catalyst melt-ing, clogging, abnormal corrosion,life cycle reduction, etc.Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp(MIL) may illuminate.

✽✽ NOTICEDamage to the fuel system or per-formance problem caused by the useof these fuels may not be covered byyour New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Gasoline containing MMTSome gasoline contains harmful man-ganese-based fuel additives Such asMMT(Me thy l cyc lopen tad ieny lManganese Tricarbonyl). Kia does notrecommend the use of gasoline con-taining MMT. This type of fuel canreduce vehicle performance and affectyour emission control system. TheMalfunction Indicator Lamp on thecluster may come on.

Do not use methanolFuels containing methanol (wood alco-hol) should not be used in your vehicle.This type of fuel can reduce vehicleperformance and damage componentsof the fuel system, engine control sys-tem and emission control system.

Fuel AdditivesKia recommends that you use goodquality gasolines treated with deter-gent additives such as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline, which help pre-vent deposit formation in the engine.These gasolines will help the enginerun cleaner and enhance performanceof the Emission Control System. Formore information on TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline, please go to thewebsite (www.toptiergas.com)For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,and have problems starting or theengine does not run smoothly, addi-tives that you can buy separately maybe added to the gasoline.If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is notavailable, one bottle of additive shouldbe added to the fuel tank at every12,000 km (7,500 miles) or everyengine oil change is recommended.Additives are available from yourauthorized Kia dealer along with infor-mation on how to use them. Do notmix other additives.

1 5

Introduction

Operation in foreign countriesIf you are going to drive your vehiclein another country, be sure to:• Observe all regulations regarding

registration and insurance.• Determine that acceptable fuel is

available.

As with other vehicles of this type,failure to operate this vehicle correct-ly may result in loss of control, anaccident or vehicle rollover.Specific design characteristics (high-er ground clearance, track, etc.) givethis vehicle a higher center of gravitythan other types of vehicles. In otherwords they are not designed for cor-nering at the same speeds as con-ventional 2-wheel drive vehicles.Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-vers. Again, failure to operate thisvehicle correctly may result in loss ofcontrol, an accident or vehiclerollover. Be sure to read the“Reducing the risk of a rollover”driving guidelines, in section 5 ofthis manual.

No special break-in period is need-ed. By following a few simple precau-tions for the first 1,000 km (600miles) you may add to the perform-ance, economy and life of your vehi-cle.• Do not race the engine.• While driving, keep your engine

speed (rpm, or revolutions perminute) between 2,000 rpm and4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed forlong periods of time, either fast orslow. Varying engine speed isneeded to properly break-in theengine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-gencies, to allow the brakes to seatproperly.

• Don't tow a trailer during the first2,000 km (1,200 miles) of opera-tion.

VEHICLE BREAK-INPROCESS

VEHICLE HANDLINGINSTRUCTIONS

Introduction

61

This vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as anair bag deployment or hitting aroad obstacle, data that will assistin understanding how a vehicle'ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safety sys-tems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:• How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;• Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/ fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the acceleratorand/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was travel-ing.

These data can help provide a bet-ter understanding of the circum-stances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR dataare recorded by your vehicle onlyif a non-trivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded bythe EDR under normal drivingconditions and no personal data(e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) are recorded.However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type of per-sonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investiga-tion.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS


Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2


22

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Hood......................................................4-43

2. Head lamp..................................4-116, 7-83

3. Fog lamp ....................................4-119, 7-83

4. Wheel and tire................................7-52, 8-4

5. Outside rearview mirror.........................4-69

6. Panoramic sunroof ................................4-49

7. Front windshield wiper blades....4-123, 7-47

8. Windows ................................................4-39

OUMA014001

■ Front view

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

2 3


9. Door locks .............................................4-22

10. Fuel filler lid .........................................4-45

11. Rear combination lamp .......................7-88

12. High mounted stop lamp .....................7-90

13. Rear window wiper blade.........4-121, 7-47

14. Liftgate.................................................4-28

15. Rearview camera ..............................4-113

16. Parking assist system .......................4-109

OUMA014002

■ Rear view

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.


42

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Inside door handle...................................4-23

2. Power window switch...............................4-40

3. Central door lock switch ..........................4-24

4. Power window lock button .......................4-42

5. Outside rearview mirror control ...............4-70

6. Outside rearview mirror folding ...............4-72

7. Fuel filler lid open button .........................4-45

8. Power liftgate open/close button ................4-28

9. Instrument panel illumination control ......4-74

10. BSD On/Off button.................................5-85

11. LDWS On/Off button..............................5-92

12. AC inverter button................................4-165

13. ESC off button .......................................5-42

14. Steering wheel.......................................4-55

15. Tilt and telescopic steeringcontrol lever ...........................................4-56

16. Inner fuse panel.....................................7-67

17. Brake pedal............................................5-27

18. Hood release lever.................................4-43

19. Seat..........................................................3-2

OUMA014003❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW1. Driver’s front air bag ............................3-572. Horn.....................................................4-583. Instrument cluster................................4-734. Wiper and washer control lever.........4-1215. Ignition switch or

Engine start/stop button .................5-6, 5-96. Cruise control / Advanced smart

cruise control..............................5-62, 5-667. Hazard warning flasher .........................6-28. Climate control system...........4-130, 4-1419. Shift lever.............................................5-1310. Front seat warmer /

Seat cooler ...........................4-163, 4-16411. Heated steering wheel button ...........4-5712. Drive mode button .............................5-8113. AWD Lock button...............................5-2014. 360° camera monitoring system

On/Off button...................................4-11415. Rear parking assist system

On/Off button...................................4-10916. Electronic parking brake

(EPB) button......................................5-3017. AUTO HOLD button...........................5-3718. USB charger....................................4-16719. Power outlet.....................................4-16420. AC inverter ......................................4-16521. Glove box ........................................4-15922. Passenger’s front air bag ..................3-5723. Center console storage box ............4-159

OUMA014004❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

2 5



62

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OUM074100L

■■ Gasoline Engine (Theta II 2.4L) - GDI

❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-36

2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-35

3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-39

4. Air cleaner.........................................7-42

5. Fuse box ...........................................7-69

6. Negative battery terminal..................7-49

7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-49

8. Radiator cap .....................................7-38

9. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-34

10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir ...7-40

2 7


OUM074115L

■■ Gasoline Engine (THETA 2.0L) T-GDI

❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.




4. Air cleaner.........................................7-42

5. Fuse box ...........................................7-69



8. Radiator cap .....................................7-38




82

OUMA074001

■■ Gasoline Engine (Lambda 3.3L) - GDI





4. Air cleaner.........................................7-42

5. Fuse box ...........................................7-69



8. Radiator cap .....................................7-38




Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

• Front seat adjustment - manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

• Front seat adjustment - power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

• Driver position memory system (for power seat). . . . 3-9

• Headrest (for front seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

• Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

• Headrest (for rear seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

• Child restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

• Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

• Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Air bag

- advanced supplemental restraint system. . . . . . . . . . 3-44

• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

• Do not install a child restraint on the front

passenger’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

• Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

• Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61

• Inflation and non-inflation conditions

of the air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67

• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68

3


23

Front seat(1) Forward and backward(2) Seatback angle(3) Seat cushion height(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*(5) Cushion extension (Driver's seat)*(6) Driver position memory system(7) Headrest

2nd row seat(8) Forward and backward(9) Seatback angle and folding(10) Walk-in seat lever*(11) Headrest(12) Armrest(13) Remote folding*

3rd row seat*(14) Seatback folding(15) Headrest

* : if equipped

SEATS

OUMA034001

■ Manual seat

■ Power seat

3 3


WARNING - Uprightingseat

Do not press the release leveron a manual seatback withoutholding and controlling theseatback. The seatback willspring upright possibly impact-ing you or other passengers.

WARNING - Looseobjects

Do not place anything in the dri-ver's foot well or under the frontseats. Loose objects in the dri-ver's foot area could interferewith the operation of the footpedals.

WARNING - Seat cushionOccupants should never sit onaftermarket seat cushions or sit-ting cushions.The passenger's hips may slideunder the lap portion of the seatbelt during an accident or asudden stop.

WARNING - Driver respon-sibility for passengers

The driver must advise the pas-senger to keep the seatback inan upright position wheneverthe vehicle is in motion. If a seatis reclined during an accident,the occupant's hips may slideunder the lap portion of the seatbelt, applying great force to theunprotected abdomen.

1KMN3662


43

WARNING - Driver’s seat• Never attempt to adjust the

seat while the vehicle is mov-ing. This could result in lossof control of your vehicle.

• Do not allow anything to inter-fere with the normal position ofthe seatback and seatbackadjustment.

• Sit as far back as possible fromthe steering wheel while stillmaintaining comfortable con-trol of the your vehicle. A dis-tance of at least 10" from yourchest to the steering wheel isrecommended. Failure to do socan result in air bag inflationinjuries to the driver.

WARNING - UnexpectedSeat Movement

After adjusting a manual seat,always check that it is locked byshifting your weight to the frontand back. Sudden or unexpect-ed movement of the driver'sseat could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle.

WARNING - Rear seatbacksAlways lock the rear seatbackbefore driving. Failure to do socould result in passengers orobjects being thrown forwardinjuring vehicle occupants.

WARNING - Luggage andCargo

Do not stack pile or stack lug-gage or cargo higher than theseatback in the cargo area. In anaccident the cargo could strikeand injury a passenger. Ifobjects are large, heavy or mustbe piled, they must be securedin the cargo area.

WARNING - Cargo AreaDo not allow passengers to ridein the cargo area under any cir-cumstance. The cargo area issolely for the purpose of trans-porting luggage or cargo.

3 5


Front seat adjustment - manualForward and backward

To move the seat forward or back-ward:1. Pull the seat slide adjustment

lever up and hold it.2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.3. Release the lever and make sure

the seat is locked in place.Adjust the seat before driving, andmake sure the seat is locked securelyby trying to move forward and back-ward without using the lever. If theseat moves, it is not locked properly.

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the

seatback recline lever.2. Carefully lean back on the seat

and adjust the seatback of theseat to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make surethe seatback is locked in place.(The lever MUST return to its orig-inal position for the seatback tolock.)

WARNING - Seat adjust-ment

• Do not adjust the seat whilewearing seat belts. Moving theseat forward will cause strongpressure on the abdomen.

• Do not place your hand nearthe seat while adjusting theseat. Your hand could getcaught in the seat mechanism.

WARNING - Small objectsUse extreme caution when pick-ing small objects trapped underthe seats or between the seatand the center console. Yourhands might be cut or injuredby the sharp edges of the seatsmechanism.

OUM034002

OUM034004


63

Seat height (if equipped)

To change the height of the seat,push the lever upwards or down-wards.• To lower the seat cushion, push the

lever down several times.• To raise the seat cushion, pull the

lever up several times.

Lumbar support (if equipped)

The lumbar support can be adjustedby pressing the lumbar supportswitch on the side of the seat.1. Press the front portion of the

switch to increase support, or therear portion of the switch, todecrease support.

2. Release the switch once it reach-es the desired position.

Front seat adjustment - power (if equipped)The front seat can be adjusted byusing the control switches located onthe outside of the seat cushion.Before driving, adjust the seat to theproper position so you can easily con-trol the steering wheel, pedals andswitches on the instrument panel.

CAUTION - Power seatadjustments

The power seating controlsfunction by electronic motor.Excessive operation may causedamage to the electrical equip-ment.

WARNING - Unattendedchildren

Do not leave children unattend-ed in the vehicle. Children mightoperate features of the vehiclethat could injure them.

OUM034068OUM034003

3 7


When in operation, the power seat-consumes a large amount of electri-cal power. To prevent unnecessarycharging system drain, don’t adjustthe power seat longer than neces-sary while the engine is not running.

Forward and backward

Push the control switch forward orbackward to move the seat to thedesired position. Release the switchonce the seat reaches the desiredposition.

Cushion extension (for driver's seat, if equipped)

Press the front portion of the switchto raise the cushion extension, or therear portion of the switch to lower it.Release the switch once the cushionextension reaches the desired posi-tion.

CAUTION - Power SeatingDo not operate two or morepower seat control switches atthe same time. Doing so maydamage the power seat motor orelectrical components.

OUM034006

OUM034072L


83

Seatback angle

Push the control switch forward orbackward to move the seatback tothe desired angle. Release theswitch once the seat reaches thedesired position.

Seat height (if equipped)

Pull the front portion of the controlswitch up to raise or press down tolower the front part of the seat cush-ion. Pull the rear portion of the con-trol switch up to raise or press downto lower the rear part of the seatcushion. Release the switch once theseat reaches the desired position.

Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)

The lumbar support can be adjustedby pressing the lumbar supportswitch on the side of the seat.

Type A

1. Press the front portion of theswitch to increase support, or therear portion of the switch, todecrease support.

2. Release the switch once it reach-es the desired position.

OUM034008 OUM034068

■ Type A

OUM034007

3 9


Type B

1. Press the front portion of theswitch (1) to increase support, orthe rear portion of the switch (2),to decrease support.

2. Move the support position up anddown by pressing the switch (3) or(4).

3. Release the switch once the seatreaches the desired position.

Driver position memory system(if equipped, for power seat)

A driver position memory system isprovided to store and recall the driv-er seat and outside rearview mirrorposition with a simple button opera-tion. By saving the desired positioninto the system memory, differentdrivers can reposition the driver seatbased upon their driving preference.If the battery is disconnected, thedesired seat position memory willneed to be re-saved.

WARNING Never attempt to operate thedriver position memory systemwhile the vehicle is moving.This could result in loss of con-trol, and an accident causingdeath, serious injury.

OUM034073L

■ Type B

OUM034032


103

Storing positions into memoryusing the buttons on the doorStoring driver’s seat positions

1. Shift the shift lever into P while theengine start/stop button is ON orignition switch ON.

2. Adjust the driver’s seat and out-side rearview mirror comfortablefor the driver.

3. Press SET button on the controlpanel. The system will beep once.

4. Press one of the memory buttons(1 or 2) within 5 seconds afterpressing the SET button. The sys-tem will beep twice when memoryhas been successfully stored.

When recalling an adjustment mem-ory button while sitting in the vehicle,you can be surprised by the settingchosen if the memory has beenadjusted by someone else. If thatoccurs, immediately push the seatposition control knob in the directionof the desired position to stop furtherundesired movement.

Recalling positions from memory

1. Shift the shift lever into P while theengine start/stop button is ON orignition switch ON.

2. To recall the position in the memo-ry, press the desired memory but-ton (1 or 2). The system will beeponce, then the driver’s seat willautomatically adjust to the storedposition.

Adjusting the control switch for thedriver’s seat while the system isrecalling the stored position willcause the movement to stop andmove in the direction that the controlswitch is moved.

3 11


Easy access function (if equipped)The system will move the driver'sseat automatically as follows:• Without smart key system

- It will move the driver’s seat rear-ward when the ignition key isremoved.

- It will move the driver’s seat for-ward when the ignition key isinserted.

• With smart key system- It will move the driver’s seat rear-

ward when the engine start/stopbutton is changed to the OFFposition.

- It will move the driver’s seat for-ward when the engine start/stopbutton is changed to the ACC orSTART position.

You can activate or deactivate this fea-ture. Refer to "User settings" in chap-ter 4.

Headrest (for front seat)

The driver's and front passenger'sseats are equipped with a headrestfor the occupant's safety and comfort.The headrest not only provides com-fort for the driver and front passenger,but also helps protect the head andneck in the event of a rear collision.For maximum effectiveness in caseof an accident, the headrest shouldbe adjusted so the middle of theheadrest is at the same height of thecenter of gravity of an occupant'shead. Generally, the center of gravityof most people's head is similar withthe height of the top of their eyes.

Also, adjust the headrest as close toyour head as possible. For this rea-son, the use of a cushion that holdsthe body away from the seatback isnot recommended.

WARNING - Headrestremoval/adjustment

• Do not operate the vehiclewith the headrests removed.Headrests can provide criticalneck and head support in acrash.

• Do not adjust the headrestheight while the vehicle is inmotion. Driver may lose con-trol of the vehicle.

OHM038048N


123

Adjusting the height up and down To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower theheadrest, push and hold the releasebutton (2) on the headrest supportand lower the headrest to the desiredposition (3).

✽✽ NOTICEIf you recline the seatback towardsthe front with the headrest and seatcushion raised, the head rest maycome in contact with the sunvisor orother parts of the vehicle.

OUM034011

OUM034011L

OUMA036011

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type C

OYFH034205

3 13


Removal and reinstallation

To remove the headrest:1. Recline the seatback (2) with the

recline lever or switch (1).2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.

3. Press the headrest release button(3) or press the release button withslim tool (3) (for Type C and TypeD) while pulling the headrest up(4).

OUM034012

OUM034013

■ Type B

■ Type A

OUM034013L

OUMA036012

■ Type D

■ Type C

WARNINGNEVER allow anyone to ride in aseat with the headrest removed.


143

To reinstall the headrest :1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the

holes while pressing the releasebutton (1) or pressing the releasebutton with slim tool (1).

2. Recline the seatback (4) with therecline lever or switch (3).

3. Adjust the headrest to the appro-priate height.

OUM034014

OUM034015

■ Type B

■ Type A

OUM034015L

OUMA036015

■ Type D

■ Type C

3 15


Seatback pocket (if equipped)

The seatback pocket is provided onthe back of the front passenger’s anddriver’s seatbacks.

WARNING - HeadrestReinstallation

To reduce the risk of injury tothe head or neck, always makesure the headrest is locked intoposition and adjusted properlyafter reinstalling.

WARNING - Seatbackpockets

Do not put heavy or sharpobjects in the seatback pockets.In an accident they could comeloose from the pocket andinjure vehicle occupants.

OUM034083L


163

Rear seat adjustmentForward and backward (2nd row seat)

To move the seat forward or back-ward:1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever

up and hold it.2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.3. Release the lever and make sure

the seat is locked in place.Adjust the seat before driving, andmake sure the seat is locked securelyby trying to move forward and back-ward without using the lever. If theseat moves, it is not locked properly.

Seatback angle (2nd row seat)

To recline the seatback:1. Pull up the seatback recline lever

(for 2nd row outboard seat) orstrap (for 2nd row center or 3rdrow seat).

2. Hold the lever or strap and adjustthe seatback of the seat to theposition you desire.

3. Release the lever or strap andmake sure the seatback is lockedin place. (The lever MUST returnto its original position for the seat-back to lock.)

Walk-in seat (2nd row passengerside, if equipped)

To get in or out of the 3rd row seat,1. Route the seat belt webbing

through the rear seat belt guideclip. After inserting the seat belt,tighten the belt webbing by pullingit up.

2. Pull up the walk-in lever (1) on the2nd row seatback.

OUM034076L

OUM034077L

OUM034022/H

OUM034023L

3 17


3. Fold the 2nd row seatback andpush the seat to the farthest for-ward position.After getting in or out, slide the 2ndrow seat to the farthest rearwardposition and pull the seatback firmlybackward until it clicks into place.Make sure that the seat is locked inplace.

Folding the rear seatThe rear seatbacks can be folded tofacilitate carrying long items or toincrease the luggage capacity of thevehicle.

OUM034024L

WARNINGNever attempt to adjust the 2ndrow seat while the vehicle ismoving or the seat is occupiedas the seat may suddenly moveand cause the passenger on theseat to be injured. WARNING - Objects

Objects carried on the foldeddown seatback should notextend higher than the top ofthe front seatbacks. This couldallow cargo to slide forward andcause injury or damage duringsudden stops.

WARNINGNever allow passengers to sit ontop of the folded down seatbackwhile the vehicle is moving. Thisis not a proper seating positionand no seat belts are availablefor use. This could result in seri-ous injury or death in case of anaccident or sudden stop.


183

To fold down the rear seatback

1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle inthe pocket between the rear seat-back and cushion, and insert therear seat belt webbing in the guideto prevent the seat belt from beingdamaged.

2. Set the front seatback to theupright position and if necessary,slide the front seat forward.

3. Lower the rear headrests to thelowest position.Turn off the rear seat warmer (ifequipped) when you fold the 2ndrow seatback.

OUM034036/OUM034022

■ 2nd row seat

OUM034037/OUM034035

■ 3rd row seat (if equipped)

3 19


4.Pull on the seatback folding leveror strap, then fold the seat towardthe front of the vehicle. When youreturn the seatback to its uprightposition, always be sure it haslocked into position by pushing onthe top of the seatback.

5.To use the rear seat, lift and pullthe seatback backward by pullingon the folding lever or strap.Pull the seatback firmly until itclicks into place.Make sure the seatback is lockedin place.

6.Return the rear seat belt to theproper position.

OUM034025L/OUM034026L

■ 2nd row seat ■ 3rd row seat (if equipped)

OUMA034027/OUMA034028


203

2nd row seat folding (from outside, if equipped)

Pull the 2nd row seat back foldinglever out.The 2nd row seat back will be folded.If you pull the left side lever (1) out,left side seat back and center seatback will be folded.If you pull the right side lever (2) out,right side seat back will be folded.

To fold down the rear center seat-back (for 2nd row seat)

1. Lower the rear headrests to thelowest position.

2. Push the center seatback foldinglever up, then fold the seat towardthe front of the vehicle.

When you return the seatback to itsupright position, always be sure ithas locked into position by pushingon the top of the seatback.

WARNING - Rear seat folding

Do not fold the rear seats (2nd &3rd row seats), if passengers,pets or luggage are in the rearseats.It may cause injury or damageto passengers, pets or luggage.

OUMA034030 OUM034031L

3 21


Remember to return the rear shoulderbelts to their proper position. Routingthe seat belt webbing through the rearseat belt guides will help keep the beltsfrom being trapped behind or underthe seats.

WARNING - 2nd row cen-ter seat folding

• Do not fold the 2nd row centerseat, if there are occupants inthe 3rd row seats, as this mayresult in injury to occupants ifthe seat moves during a colli-sion. If occupants in the 3rdrow seats, fix the 2nd row cen-ter seat in its upright andlocked position.

• The 2nd row center seat backdoes not lock into positionwhen it is folded toward thefront of the vehicle. If you usethe 2nd row center seat backfolding function to carry longobjects, you should fix thelong object to prevent it frombeing thrown about the vehi-cle in a collision and causinginjury to vehicle occupants.

CAUTION - Damagingrear seat belt buckles

When you fold the rear (2ndand/or 3rd row) seatback, insertthe buckle in the pocket betweenthe rear seatback and cushion.Doing so can prevent the bucklefrom being damaged by the rearseatback.

OUN026140

WARNING - 3rd row seat3rd row occupants should alwaysremain in the center of the seatcushion so the occupants headis protected by the headrest.If not, the tailgate may hit theoccupant's head, which couldcause injury.

WARNING - CargoDo not place objects in the rear(2nd and/or 3rd row) seats,since they cannot be properlysecured and may hit the frontseat occupants in a collision.Cargo should always besecured to prevent it from beingthrown around in the vehicle ina collision causing injuries tovehicle occupants.


223

Armrest (2nd row seat)

To use the armrest, pull it forwardfrom the seatback.

Headrest (for rear seat)

The rear seat(s) is equipped withheadrests in all the seating positionsfor the occupant's safety and comfort.The headrests not only provide com-fort for passengers, but also helpsprotect the head and neck in theevent of a collision.

For maximum effectiveness in case ofan accident, the headrest should beadjusted so the middle of the head-rest is at the same height as the cen-ter of gravity of an occupant's head.Generally, the center of gravity ofmost people's head is similar withthe height of the top of their eyes.Also adjust the headrest as close toyour head as possible. For this rea-son, the use of a cushion that holdsthe body away from the seatback isnot recommended.

OUM034021L OHM038049N* : if equipped

**

3 23


Adjusting the height up and down(for 2nd row seats)

To raise the headrest :1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the headrest :1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the headrest support2. Lower the headrest to the desired

position (3).

Removal and reinstallation(for 2nd row seats)

OUMA034092

■ Outside

■ Center

OUM034019L OUM034087L

OUMA034093

■ Outside

■ Center


243

To remove the headrest :1. Raise it as far as it can go then

press the release button (1) whilepulling the headrest up (2).

To reinstall the headrest :1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the

holes while pressing the releasebutton (1).

2. Adjust it to the appropriate height.

3rd row headrest (if equipped)

The headrest will fold down automat-ically when folding the seatback.

To fold the headrest manually :Pull the strap.

To unfold the headrest :Raise the headrest manually.

Always be sure the headrest haslocked into position after you returnthe seatback.

WARNING• Make sure the headrest locks

in position after adjusting it toproperly protect the occu-pants.

• After installing the headrest,make sure that it is installedin the right direction.A headrest installed reverselycould increase whiplash injuryduring rear impact.

OUMA034091

OXM039061N

3 25


SEAT BELTSSeat belt restraint system• For maximum restraint system pro-

tection, the seat belts must alwaysbe used whenever the vehicle ismoving. A properly positionedshoulder belt should be positionedmidway over your shoulder acrossyour collarbone.

• Never allow children to ride in thefront passenger seat. See childrestraint system section for furtherdiscussion.

Seat belts are designed to bear uponthe bony structure of the body, andshould be worn low across the frontof the pelvis, chest and shoulders, asapplicable; wearing the lap section ofthe belt across the abdominal areamust be avoided.Seat belts should be adjusted asfirmly as possible, consistent withcomfort, to provide the protection forwhich they have been designed.A slack belt will greatly reduce theprotection afforded to the wearer.Care should be taken to avoid con-tamination of the webbing with pol-ishes, oils and chemicals, and partic-ularly battery acid. Cleaning maysafely be carried out using mild soapand water. The belt should bereplaced if webbing becomes frayed,contaminated or damaged.

WARNING - Damagedseat belt

Replace the entire seat beltassembly if any part of the web-bing or hardware is damage asyou can no longer be sure that adamage seat belt will provideprotection in a crash.

WARNING - Twisted seatbelt

Make sure your seat belt is nottwisted when worn. A twistedseat belt may not properly pro-tect you in an accident andcould even cut into your body.

WARNING - Shoulder Belt• Never wear the shoulder belt

under your arm or behindyour back. An improperlypositioned shoulder belt can-not protect the occupant in acrash.

• Always wear both the shoul-der portion and lap portion ofthe lap/shoulder belt.


263

• No modifications or additionsshould be made by the user whichwill either prevent the seat beltadjusting devices from operating toremove slack, or prevent the seatbelt assembly from being adjustedto remove slack.

• When you fasten the seat belt, becareful not to latch the seat belt inbuckles of other seat. It's very dan-gerous and you may not be pro-tected by the seat belt properly.

• Do not unfasten the seat belt anddo not fasten and unfasten the seatbelt repeatedly while driving. Thiscould result in loss of control, andan accident causing death, seriousinjury, or property damage.

• When fastening the seat belt,make sure that the seat belt doesnot pass over objects that are hardor can break easily.

Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)

The driver's seat belt warning lightand chime will activate according tothe following table when the ignitionswitch is in "ON" position.

1GQA2083

WARNING - Seat beltbuckle

Do not allow foreign material(gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) toobstruct the seat belt buckle.This may prevent the seat beltfrom fastening securely.

3 27


*1 Warning pattern repeats 11 times withan interval of 24 seconds. If the driver'sseat belt is buckled, the light will stopwithin 6 seconds and chime will stopimmediately.

*2 The light will stop within 6 seconds andchime will stop immediately.

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point systemwith emergency locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out ofthe retractor and insert the metal tab(1) into the buckle (2). There will bean audible "click" when the tab locksinto the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts tothe proper length only after the lapbelt portion is adjusted manually sothat it fits snugly around your hips. Ifyou lean forward in a slow, easymotion, the belt will extend and letyou move around. If there is a sud-den stop or impact, however, the beltwill lock into position. It will also lockif you try to lean forward too quickly.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you are not able to pull out theseat belt from the retractor, firmlypull the belt out and release it. Thenyou will be able to pull the belt outsmoothly.

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat BeltVehicle

SpeedLight-Blink

Chime-

Sound

Unbuckled 6 seconds

Buckled 6 seconds None

Buckled →Unbuckled

Below5 km/h

6 seconds None

5 km/h ~10 km/h

6 seconds

Above10 km/h

6 sec. on / 24 sec. off

(11 times)

Unbuckled

Above10 km/h

↓Below5 km/h

6 seconds *1

↓

Stop *2

B180A01NF-1

B200A02NF


283

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the shoul-der belt anchor to one of the 3 posi-tions for maximum comfort and safety.The height of the adjusting seat beltshould not be too close to your neck.The shoulder portion should beadjusted so that it lies across yourchest and midway over your shouldernear the door and not your neck.To adjust the height of the seat beltanchor, lower or raise the heightadjuster into an appropriate position.To raise the height adjuster, pull it up(1). To lower it, push it down (3) whilepressing the height adjuster button(2).

Release the button to lock theanchor into position. Try sliding theheight adjuster to make sure that ithas locked into position.

Seat belts - Front passenger andrear seat 3-point system withcombination locking retractorTo fasten your seat belt:

Combination retractor type seat beltsare installed in the rear seat posi-tions to help accommodate theinstallation of child restraint systems.Although a combination retractor isalso installed in the front passengerseat position, it is strongly recom-mended that children always beseated in the rear seat. NEVERplace any infant restraint system inthe front seat of the vehicle.This type of seat belt combines thefeatures of both an emergency lock-ing retractor seat belt and an auto-matic locking retractor seat belt. Tofasten your seat belt, pull it out of theretractor and insert the metal tab intothe buckle. There will be an audible"click" when the tab locks into thebuckle. When not securing a childrestraint, the seat belt operates in thesame way as the driver's seat belt(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).

OLM039026

Front seat

WARNING - Shoulder beltpositioning

Never position the shoulder beltacross your neck or face.

WARNING - Seat beltreplacement

Replace your seat belts afterbeing in an accident. Failure toreplace seat belts after an acci-dent could leave you with dam-aged seat belts that will not pro-vide protection in the event ofanother collision.

3 29


It automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portionof the seat belt is adjusted manuallyso that it fits snugly around your hips.When the seat belt is fully extendedfrom the retractor to allow the instal-lation of a child restraint system, theseat belt operation changes to allowthe belt to retract, but not to extend(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).Refer to “Using a child restraint sys-tem” in this section.

✽✽ NOTICEAlthough the combination retractorprovides the same level of protectionfor seated passengers in either emer-gency or automatic locking modes,have the seated passengers use theemergency locking feature for improv-ed convenience. The automatic lockingfunction is intended to facilitate childrestraint installation. To convert fromthe automatic locking feature to theemergency locking operation mode,allow the unbuckled seat belt to fullyretract.

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressingthe release button (1) on the lockingbuckle. When it is released, the beltshould automatically draw back intothe retractor.If this does not happen, check thebelt to be sure it is not twisted, thentry again.

CAUTIONDo NOT fold down the left por-tion of the rear seat back whenthe rear center seat belt is buck-led. ALWAYS UNBUCKLE therear center seat belt before fold-ing down the left portion of therear seat back. If the rear centerseat belt is buckled when theleft portion of the rear seat backis folded down, distortion anddamage to the top portion of theseat back and seat belt garnishmay result, causing the seatback to lock into the foldeddown position.

B210A01NF-1


303

Stowing the rear seat belt

The rear seat belt buckles can bestowed in the pocket between therear seatback and cushion when notin use.Routing the seat belt webbingthrough the rear seat belt guides willhelp keep the belts from beingtrapped behind or under the seats.After inserting the seat belt, tightenthe belt webbing by pulling it up.

CAUTION - Seatbelt GuideRemove the seat belt from theguides before using. If you pullon the seat belt when it is storedin the guides, it may damage theguides and/or belt webbing.

OUM034036

OUM034037

■ 2nd row seat

■ 3rd row seat OUM034022

OUM034035

■ 2nd row seat

■ 3rd row seat

3 31


Pre-tensioner seat belt

Your vehicle is equipped with driver'sand front passenger's pre-tensionerseat belts (retractor pretensioner andEFD (Emergency Fastening Device)).The pre-tensioner seat belts may beactivated, when a frontal collision issevere enough, together with the airbags.When the vehicle stops suddenly, orif the occupant tries to lean forwardtoo quickly, the seat belt retractormay lock into position. In certainfrontal collisions, the pre-tensionerwill activate and pull the seat belt intotighter contact against the occu-pant's body.

(1) Retractor PretensionerThe purpose of the retractor pre-tensioner is to make sure that theshoulder belts fit in tightly againstthe occupant's upper body in cer-tain frontal collisions.

(2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)The purpose of the EFD is tomake sure that the pelvis belts fitin tightly against the occupant'slower body in certain frontal colli-sions.

If the system senses excessive ten-sion on the driver or passenger'sseat belt when the pre-tensioner sys-tem activates, the load limiter insidethe retractor pre-tensioner will releasesome of the pressure on the affectedseat belt.

OXMA033101


323

The seat belt pre-tensioner systemconsists mainly of the following com-ponents.Their locations are shown inthe illustration:(1) SRS air bag warning light(2) Retractor pre-tensioner assembly(3) SRS control module(4) Emergency fastening device

(EFD)

✽✽ NOTICE• Both the driver's and front pas-

senger's seat belt pre-tensioner sys-tem may be activated not only incertain frontal collision but also incertain side collisions or rollovers,if the vehicle is equipped with aside or curtain air bag.

• Because the sensor that activatesthe SRS air bag is connected withthe pre-tensioner seat belt, theSRS air bag warning light onthe instrument panel will illumi-nate for approximately 6 secondsafter the ignition switch has beenturned to the ON position, andthen it should turn off.

ODMESA2024

WARNING - Skin Irritation Wash all exposed skin areasthoroughly after an accident inwhich the pre-tensioner seatbelts were activated. The finedust from the pre-tensioneractivation may cause skin irrita-tion and should not be breathedfor prolonged periods.

3 33


If the pre-tensioner seat belt systemare not working properly, this warninglight will illuminate even if there is nota malfunction with, the SRS air bag. Ifthe SRS air bag warning light doesnot illuminate when the ignitionswitch is turned ON, or if it remainsilluminated after illuminating forapproximately 6 seconds, or if it illu-minates while the vehicle is beingdriven, have an authorized Kia dealerinspect the pre-tensioner seat beltand SRS air bag system as soon aspossible. Pre-tensioners are designed to oper-

ate only one time. After activation,pre-tensioner seat belts must bereplaced. If the pre-tensioner mustbe replaced, contact an authorizedKia dealer.

Seat belt precautionsInfant or small childYou should be aware of the specificrequirements in your country. Childand/or infant seats must be properlyplaced and installed in the rear seat.For more information about the useof these restraints, refer to “Childrestraint system” in this section.

✽✽ NOTICESmall children are best protectedfrom injury in an accident whenproperly restrained in the rear seat bya child restraint system that meets therequirements of the safety standardsof your country. Before buying anychild restraint system, make sure thatit has a label certifying that it meetsthe safety standards of your country.The restraint must be appropriate foryour child's height and weight. Checkthe label on the child restraint for thisinformation. Refer to “Child restraintsystem” in this section.

WARNING - Hot preten-sioner

Do not touch the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies for severalminutes after they have beenactivated. When the pre-ten-sioner seat belt mechanismfires during a collision the pre-tensioner becomes hot and canburn you.


343

Larger childrenChildren who are too large for childrestraint systems should alwaysoccupy the rear seat and use theavailable lap/shoulder belts. The lapportion should be fastened andsnugged on the hips and as low aspossible. Check if the belt fits period-ically. A child's squirming could putthe belt out of position. Children aregiven the most safety in the event ofan accident when they are restrainedby a proper restraint system in therear seat. If a larger child (over age12) must be seated in the front seat,the child should be securelyrestrained by the available lap/shoul-der belt and the seat should beplaced in the rearmost position.Children age 12 and under should berestrained securely in the rear seat.NEVER place a child age 12 andunder in the front seat. NEVER placea rear facing child seat in the frontseat of a vehicle.

If the shoulder belt portion slightlytouches the child’s neck or face, tryplacing the child closer to the center ofthe vehicle. If the shoulder belt stilltouches their face or neck they need tobe returned to a child restraint system.

Restraint of pregnant women Pregnant women should wearlap/shoulder belt assemblies when-ever possible according to specificrecommendations by their doctors.The lap portion of the belt should beworn AS SECURELY AND LOW ASPOSSIBLE.WARNING - Small children

Do not allow small children toride in the vehicle without anappropriate child restraint sys-tem. If the shoulder belt comesin contact with your child's neckor face your child is too small toride in the vehicle. In a crash theseat belt will inflict injury to yourchild's neck, throat and face.

WARNING - Pregnantwomen

Pregnant women must neverplace the lap portion of the seatbelt above or on the abdomenwhere the fetus is located. Theforce of the seat belt during acollision will crush the fetus.

3 35


Injured personA seat belt should be used when aninjured person is being transported.When this is necessary, you shouldconsult a physician for recommenda-tions.

One person per beltTwo people (including children)should never attempt to use a singleseat belt. This could increase theseverity of injuries in case of an acci-dent.

Do not lie downTo reduce the chance of injuries inthe event of an accident and toachieve maximum effectiveness ofthe restraint system, all passengersshould be sitting up and the front andrear seats should be in an uprightposition when the vehicle is moving.A seat belt cannot provide properprotection if the person is lying downin the rear seat or if the front and rearseats are in a reclined position.

Care of seat beltsSeat belt systems should never bedisassembled or modified. In addi-tion, care should be taken to assurethat seat belts and belt hardware arenot damaged by seat hinges, doorsor other abuse.

Periodic inspectionAll seat belts should be inspectedperiodically for wear or damage ofany kind. Any damaged parts shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and drySeat belts should be kept clean anddry. If belts become dirty, they can becleaned by using a mild soap solu-tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,strong detergents or abrasivesshould not be used because theymay damage and weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat beltsThe entire in-use seat belt assemblyor assemblies should be replaced ifthe vehicle has been involved in anaccident. This should be done even ifno damage is visible. Additionalquestions concerning seat belt oper-ation should be directed to anauthorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Pinched seatbelt

Make sure that the webbingand/or buckle does not getcaught or pinched in the rearseat when returning the rearseatback to its upright position.A caught or pinched webbing/buckle may become damagedand could fail during a collisionor sudden stop.


363

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMChildren riding in the vehicle shouldsit in the rear seat and must alwaysbe properly restrained to minimizethe risk of injury in an accident, sud-den stop or sudden maneuver.According to accident statistics, chil-dren are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seats than inthe front seat. Larger children not ina child restraint should use one ofthe seat belts provided.You should be aware of the specificrequirements in your country. Childand/or infant safety seats must beproperly placed and installed in therear seat. You must use a commer-cially available child restraint systemthat meets the requirements of thesafety standards of your country.Child restraint systems are designedto be secured in vehicle seats by thelap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt,or by a tether anchor and/or LATCHanchors (if equipped).

Children could be injured or killed ina crash if their restraints are notproperly secured. For small childrenand babies, a child seat or infant seatmust be used. Before buying a par-ticular child restraint system, makesure it fits your vehicle seat and seatbelts, and fits your child.Follow all the instructions providedby the manufacturer when installingthe child restraint system.

When the child restraint system isnot in use, store it in the luggagearea or fasten it with a seat belt sothat it will not be thrown forward incase of a sudden stop or an acci-dent.

WARNING - Restraintlocation

Never install a child or infantseat on the front passenger'sseat. A child riding in the frontpassenger seat can be forceful-ly struck by an inflating airbag.

WARNING - Hot childrestraint

A child restraint system canbecome very hot if it is left in aclosed vehicle on a sunny day.Be sure to check the seat cover,buckles and latches beforeplacing a child in the restraintsystem.

3 37


Using a child restraint system

For small children and babies, theuse of a child seat or infant seat isrequired. The child seat or infant seatshould be of appropriate size for thechild and should be installed inaccordance with the manufacturer'sinstructions.

WARNING - Holding chil-dren

Never hold a child in your armsor lap when riding in a vehicle.The violent forces created dur-ing a crash will tear the childfrom your arms and throw thechild against the car’s interior.Always use a child restraintsystem which is appropriate foryour child's height and weight.

WARNING - UnattendedChildren

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle. The car can heat upvery quickly, resulting in seriousbodily injury or death to the childin the vehicle.

WARNING - Seat belt useDo not use one seat belt for twooccupants at the same time.This will eliminate any safetybenefit provided by the seat beltto the occupants.

CRS09

OUN026150

Forward-facing child restraint system

Rearward-facing child restraint system


383

For safety reasons, we recommendthat the child restraint system beused in the rear seats.Never place a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passenger seat,because of the danger an inflatingpassenger-side air bag could impactthe rear-facing child restraint and killthe child.Since all passenger seat belts movefreely under normal conditions andonly lock under extreme or emer-gency conditions (emergency lockmode), you must manually changethese seat belts to the auto lockmode to secure a child restraint.If the seat belt does not operate asdescribed in this section, have thesystem checked immediately by yourauthorized Kia dealer.

Placing a passenger seat beltinto the auto lock mode

The auto lock mode will help preventthe normal movement of the child inthe vehicle from causing the seat beltto loosen and compromise the childrestraint system. To secure a childrestraint system, use the followingprocedure.

To install a child restraint system onthe outboard or center rear seats, dothe following:1. Place the child restraint system in

the seat and route the lap/shoul-der belt around or through therestraint, following the restraintmanufacturer’s instructions. Besure the seat belt webbing is nottwisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latchinto the buckle. Listen for the dis-tinct “click” sound.

Position the release button so that itis easy to access in case of an emer-gency.

E2MS103005

OEN036101

3 39


If the vehicle headrest prevents prop-er installation of a child seat (asdescribed in the child seat systemmanual), the headrest of the respec-tive seating position shall be read-justed or entirely removed.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of theseat belt all the way out. When theshoulder portion of the seat belt isfully extended, it will shift theretractor to the “Auto Lock” (childrestraint) mode.

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portionof the seat belt to retract and listenfor an audible “clicking” or “ratchet-ing” sound. This indicates that theretractor is in the “Auto Lock”mode. If no distinct sound isheard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

OEN036103OEN036102


403

5. Remove as much slack from thebelt as possible by pushing downon the child restraint system whilefeeding the shoulder belt back intothe retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraintsystem to confirm that the seatbelt is holding it firmly in place. If itis not, release the seat belt andrepeat steps 2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor isin the “Auto Lock” mode byattempting to pull more of the seatbelt out of the retractor. If you can-not, the retractor is in the “AutoLock” mode.

The lap/shoulder belt automaticallyreturns to the “emergency lockmode” whenever the belt is allowedto retract fully. Therefore, the preced-ing seven steps must be followedeach time a child restraint is installed.To remove the child restraint, pressthe release button on the buckle andthen pull the lap/shoulder belt out ofthe restraint and allow the seat beltto retract fully.

When the seat belt is allowed toretract to its fully stowed position,the retractor will automaticallyswitch from the “Auto Lock” modeto the emergency lock mode fornormal adult usage.

OEN036104

WARNING - Auto lockmode

Set the retractor to AutomaticLock mode when installing anychild restraint system. If theretractor is not in the AutomaticLocking mode, the childrestraint can move when yourvehicle turns or stops suddenly.

3 41


Securing a child restraint seatwith tether anchor system

Child restraint hook holders arelocated on the back of the rear cush-ions.

1.Route the child restraint seat strapover the seatback.For vehicles with adjustable head-rests, route the tether strap underthe headrest and between theheadrest posts, otherwise routethe tether strap over the top of theseatback. In case of interferencebetween the child restraint seatand the headrest remove the par-ticular head restraint for better fit-ment of the child restraint seat.

2. Connect the tether strap hook tothe appropriate child restrainthook holder and tighten to securethe child restraint seat.

Check that the child restraint systemis secure by pushing and pulling it indifferent directions. Incorrectly fittedchild restraints may swing, twist, tipor separate causing death or seriousinjury.

WARNING - Tether strapNever mount more than onechild restraint to a single tetheror to a single lower anchoragepoint. The increased loadcaused by multiple seats maycause the tethers or anchoragepoints to break.

OUM034039L

OUM034038

■ 2nd row seat


423

Securing a child restraint seat withchild seat lower anchor system

Some child seat manufacturersmake child restraint seats that arelabeled as LATCH or LATCH-com-patible child restraint seats. LATCHstands for "Lower Anchors andTethers for Children". These seatsinclude two rigid or webbing mount-ed attachments that connect to twoLATCH anchors at specific seatingpositions in your vehicle. This type ofchild restraint seat eliminates theneed to use seat belts to attach thechild seat in the rear seats.

Child restraint symbols are locatedon the left and right 2nd row seatbacks to indicate the position of thelower anchors for child restraints.

Install the child restraint seat fullyrearward against the seatback withthe seatback reclined two positionsfrom the most upright latched posi-tion.

WARNING - Unused rearseatbelts

Always fasten the seatbeltsbehind the child restraint seatwhen they are not used tosecure the child seat. Failure todo so may result in child stran-gulation.

OXM039035

OUM034078L

Lower Anchor

Lower AnchorPosition Indicator

3 43


LATCH anchors have been providedin your vehicle. The LATCH anchorsare located in the left and right out-board rear seating positions. Theirlocations are shown in the illustra-tion. There is no LATCH anchor pro-vided for the center rear seatingposition.The LATCH anchors are locatedbetween the seatback and the seatcushion of the 2nd row seat left andright outboard seating positions.Follow the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions to properly install childrestraint seats with LATCH orLATCH-compatible attachments.Once you have installed the LATCHchild restraint, assure that the seat isproperly attached to the LATCH andtether anchors.Also, test the child restraint seatbefore you place the child in it. Tiltthe seat from side to side. Also try totug the seat forward. Check to see ifthe anchors hold the seat in place.

WARNING - LATCH loweranchors

Never attempt to attach aLATCH equipped seat in thecenter seating position. LATCHlower anchors are only to beused with the left and right rearoutboard seating positions. Youmay damage the anchors or theanchors may fail and break in acollision.


443

(1) Driver’s front air bag(2) Passenger’s front air bag(3) Side air bag(4) Curtain air bag

Even in vehicles with air bags, youand your passengers must alwayswear the safety belts provided inorder to minimize the risk and sever-ity of injury in the event of a collisionor rollover.

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OXMA032101

3 45


How does the air bag systemoperate? • Air bags are activated (able to

inflate if necessary) only when theignition switch is turned to the ONor START position.

• The appropriate air bags inflateinstantly in the event of a seriousfrontal collision or side collision inorder to help protect the occupantsfrom serious physical injury.

• There is no single speed at whichthe air bags will inflate.Generally, air bags are designed toinflate based upon the severity of acollision and its direction. Thesetwo factors determine whether thesensors produce an electronicdeployment/ inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on anumber of factors including vehiclespeed, angles of impact and thedensity and stiffness of the vehi-cles or objects which your vehiclehits in the collision. The determin-ing factors are not limited to thosementioned above.

• The front air bags will completelyinflate and deflate in an instant.It is virtually impossible for you tosee the air bags inflate during anaccident.It is much more likely that you willsimply see the deflated air bagshanging out of their storage com-partments after the collision.

• In addition to inflating in seriousside collisions, side and/or curtainair bags will inflate if the sensingsystem detects a rollover.

• When a rollover is detected, sideand/or curtain air bags will remaininflated longer to help provide pro-tection from ejection, especiallywhen used in conjunction with theseat belts.

• In order to help provide protection,the air bags must inflate rapidly.The speed of the air bag inflation isa consequence of extremely shorttime in which to inflate the air bagbetween the occupant and thevehicle structures before the occu-pant impacts those structures. Thisspeed of inflation reduces the riskof serious or life-threateninginjuries and is thus a necessarypart of the air bag design.However, air bag inflation can alsocause injuries which can includefacial abrasions, bruises and bro-ken bones because the inflationspeed also causes the air bags toexpand with a great deal of force.

• There are even circumstancesunder which contact with thesteering wheel or passenger airbag can cause fatal injuries,especially if the occupant ispositioned excessively close tothe steering wheel or passengerair bag.


463

Noise and smokeWhen inflated, the air bags make aloud noise and leave smoke andpowder in the air inside the vehicle.This is normal and is a result of theignition of the air bag inflator. Afterthe air bag inflates, you may feel sub-stantial discomfort in breathing dueto the contact of your chest with boththe seat belt and the air bag, as wellas from breathing the smoke andpowder. Open your doors and/orwindows as soon as possible afterimpact in order to reduce discom-fort and prevent prolonged expo-sure to the smoke and powder.Though smoke and powder are non-toxic, it may cause irritation to theskin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). Ifthis is the case, wash and rinse withcold water immediately and consult adoctor if the symptom persists.

WARNING - Hot compo-nents

Do not touch the air bag storagearea's internal componentsimmediately after airbag infla-tion. The air bag related parts inthe steering wheel, instrumentpanel and the roof rails abovethe front and rear doors arevery hot. Hot components canresult in burn injuries.

WARNING - Airbag infla-tion

Sit as far back as possible fromthe steering wheel while stillmaintaining comfortable con-trol of your vehicle. A distanceof at least 10" from your chestto the steering wheel is recom-mended. Failure to do so canresult in airbag inflation injuriesto the driver.

3 47


Do not install a child restraint onthe front passenger’s seat.

Never place a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passenger’sseat. If the air bag deploys, it wouldimpact the rear-facing child restraint,causing serious or fatal injury.In addition, do not place front-facingchild restraints in the front passen-ger’s seat either. If the front passen-ger air bag inflates, it could causeserious or fatal injuries to the child.

Air bag warning light

The purpose of air bag warning lightin your instrument panel is to alertyou of a potential problem with yourair bag system, which could includeyour side and/or curtain air bagsused for rollover protection.

1JBH3051

W7-147

WARNING - Air bagdeployment

When children are seated in therear outboard seats of a vehicleequipped with side and/or cur-tain air bags, install the childrestraint system as far awayfrom the door side as possible.Inflation of the side and/or cur-tain air bags could impact thechild.


483

SRS components and functions

The SRS consists of the followingcomponents:(1) Driver's front air bag module(2) Passenger's front air bag module(3) Side air bag modules(4) Curtain air bag modules(5) Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies(6) Air bag warning light(7) SRS control module (SRSCM)/

Rollover sensor(8) Front impact sensors(9) Side impact sensors

(10) PASSENGER “AIR BAG OFF”indicator (Front passenger’sseat only)

(11) Occupant detection system(Front passenger’s seat only)

(12) Driver’s and front passenger’sseat belt buckle sensors

(13) Emergency fastening device(EFD)

The SRSCM continually monitors allSRS components while the ignitionswitch is ON to determine if a crashimpact is severe enough to requireair bag deployment or pre-tensionerseat belt deployment.

If the air bag warning light is illumi-nated for more than 6 seconds afterthe ignition is turned on, or of it illu-minates during vehicle operation, anSRS component may not be func-tioning properly and you should haveyour vehicle checked by an author-ized Kia dealer.

W7-147

OXM033200L

3 49


If any of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionin the air bag system. Have anauthorized Kia dealer inspect the airbag system as soon as possible.• The light does not turn on briefly

when you turn the ignition ON.• The light stays on after illuminating

for approximately 6 seconds.• The light comes on while the vehi-

cle is in motion.• The light blinks when the ignition

switch is in ON position. The front air bag modules are locat-ed both in the center of the steeringwheel and in the front passenger'spanel above the glove box. When theSRSCM detects a sufficiently severeimpact to the front of the vehicle, itwill automatically deploy the front airbags.

Upon deployment, tear seams mold-ed directly into the pad covers willseparate under pressure from theexpansion of the air bags. Furtheropening of the covers then allows fullinflation of the air bags.

B240B01L

Driver’s front air bag (1)

B240B02L



503

A fully inflated air bag, in combina-tion with a properly worn seat belt,slows the driver's or the passenger'sforward motion, reducing the risk ofhead and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bagimmediately starts deflating, enablingthe driver to maintain forward visibilityand the ability to steer or operateother controls.

• If an air bag deploys, there may bea loud noise followed by a fine dustreleased in the vehicle. These con-ditions are normal and are not haz-ardous - the air bags are packed inthis fine powder. The dust generat-ed during air bag deployment maycause skin or eye irritation as wellas aggravate asthma for some per-sons. Always wash all exposedskin areas thoroughly with coldwater and a mild soap after anaccident in which the air bags weredeployed.

B240B03L


B240B05L

Passenger’s front air bag

WARNING - Air bagobstructions

Do not install or place anyaccessories on the steeringwheel, instrument panel, or onthe front passenger's panelabove the glove box in a vehi-cle. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles if the airbag deploys.

WARNING - Flying objectsDo not place any objects (anumbrella, bag, etc.) between thefront door and the front seat.Such objects may become dan-gerous projectiles if the sideairbag inflates.

3 51


• The SRS can function only whenthe ignition switch is in the ONposition. If the SRS air bag warninglight does not illuminate, or contin-uously remains on after illuminat-ing for about 6 seconds when theignition switch is turned to the ONposition, or after the engine isstarted, comes on while driving,the SRS is not working properly. Ifthis occurs, have your vehicleimmediately inspected by anauthorized Kia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEBefore you replace a fuse or discon-nect a battery terminal, turn theignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion and remove the ignition switch.Never remove or replace the air bagrelated fuse(s) when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position. Failureto heed this warning will cause theSRS air bag warning light to illumi-nate.

Occupant Detection System(ODS)

Your vehicle is equipped with anoccupant detection system in thefront passenger's seat.The occupant detection system isdesigned to detect the presence of aproperly-seated front passenger anddetermine if the passenger's front airbag should be enabled (may inflate)or not. Only the front passenger frontair bag is controlled by the OccupantDetection System.

Do not put anything in front of thepassenger air bag indicator.

OUMA034090


523

Main components of the occu-pant detection system• A detection device located within

the front passenger seat cushion.• An electronic system which deter-

mines whether the passenger airbag systems should be activatedor deactivated.

• A indicator light located on theinstrument panel which illuminatesthe words PASSENGER AIR BAG“OFF” indicating the front passen-ger air bag system is deactivated.

• The instrument panel air bag warn-ing light is interconnected with theoccupant detection system.

If the front passenger seat is occu-pied by a person that the systemdetermines to be of appropriate size,and he/she sits properly (sittingupright with the seatback in anupright position, centered on theseat cushion with their seat belt on,legs comfortably extended and theirfeet on the floor), the PASSENGERAIR BAG “OFF” indicator will turn offand the front passenger's air bag willbe able to inflate, if necessary, infrontal crashes.You will find the PASSENGER AIRBAG “OFF” indicator on the centerfacia panel. This system detects theconditions 1~4 in the following tableand activates or deactivates the frontpassenger air bag based on theseconditions.

Always be sure that you and all vehicleoccupants are seated and restrainedproperly (sitting upright with the seat inan upright position, centered on theseat cushion, with the person’s legscomfortably extended, feet on thefloor, and wearing the safety belt prop-erly) for the most effective protectionby the air bag and the safety belt.

• The ODS (Occupant DetectionSystem) may not function properly ifthe passenger takes actions whichcan defeat the detection system.These include:

(1) Failing to sit in an upright posi-tion.

(2) Leaning against the door or cen-ter console.

(3) Sitting towards the sides or thefront of the seat.

(4) Putting legs on the dashboard orresting them on other locationswhich reduce the passengerweight on the front seat.

(5) Improperly wearing the safetybelt.

(6) Reclining the seat back.

3 53


✽✽ NOTICEDo not modify or replace the frontpassenger seat. Don't place anythingon or attach anything such as a blan-ket, front seat cover or after marketseat heater to the front passengerseat. This can adversely affect theoccupant detection system.

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detectionsystem

*1 : The ODS system uses a field to evaluate a person's size to determine whether theair bag should deploy. It is possible for a child to be detected and activate the ODS,thus allowing the air bag to deploy.To maximize safety, do not allow children to ridein the front passenger seat.

*2 : Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

Condition detected by theoccupant detection

system

Indicator/Warning light Devices

"PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF"indicator light

SRS warninglight

Front passenger air bag

1. Adult or child*1 Off Off Activated

2. Child restraint system*2 On Off Deactivated

3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated

4. There is a malfunctionin the system

Off On Activated

WARNING - ODS SystemRiding in an improper positionadversely affects the OccupantDetection System and mayresult in the deactivation of thefront passenger airbag. It isimportant for the driver toinstruct the passenger as to theproper seating instructions ascontained in this manual.

(Continued)


543

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

1KMN3665

- Never sit with hips shiftedtowards the front of the seat.

- Never lean on the door or cen-ter console.

- Never sit on one side of thefront passenger seat.

- Never place feet on the dash-board.

OVQ036013N

1KMN3662

- Never put a heavy load or anactive electronic device onthe front passenger seat orseatback pocket.

- Never excessively recline thefront passenger seatback.

OVQ036014N

- Never place feet on the frontpassenger seatback.

(Continued)

3 55


When an adult is seated in the frontpassenger seat, if the PASSENGERAIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turnthe ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion and ask the passenger to sitproperly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position, centeredon the seat cushion with their seatbelt on, legs comfortably extendedand their feet on the floor). Restartthe engine and have the personremain in that position. This will allowthe system to detect the person andto enable the passenger air bag.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”indicator is still on, ask the passen-ger to move to the rear seat.

✽✽ NOTICEThe PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-onds after the ignition switch isturned to the ON position or afterthe engine is started. If the frontpassenger seat is occupied, the occu-pant detection sensor will then clas-sify the front passenger after severalmore seconds.

B990A01O

Proper position

WARNING - “AIR BAGOFF” light

Do not allow an adult passengerto ride in the front seat when thePASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”indicator is illuminated, becausethe air bag will not deploy in theevent of a crash. The drivermust instruct the passenger toreposition himself in the seat.Failure to properly positionyourself may lead to air bagdeactivation resulting in air bagnon-deployment in a collision. Ifthe PASSENGER AIR BAG“OFF” indicator remains illumi-nated after the passenger repo-sitions themselves properly andthe car is restarted, it is recom-mended that passenger move tothe rear seat because the pas-senger's front air bag will notdeploy.


563

• Even though your vehicle isequipped with the occupant detec-tion system, never install a childrestraint system in the front pas-senger's seat. A deploying air bagcan forcefully strike a child result-ing in serious injuries or death. Anychild age 12 and under should ridein the rear seat. Children too largefor child restraints should use theavailable lap/shoulder belts. Nomatter what type of crash, childrenof all ages are safer whenrestrained in the rear seat.

• If the PASSENGER AIR BAG“OFF” indicator is illuminated whenthe front passenger's seat is occu-pied by an adult and he/she sitsproperly (sitting upright with theseatback in an upright position,centered on the seat cushion withtheir seat belt on, legs comfortablyextended and their feet on thefloor), have that person sit in therear seat.

Any child age 12 and under shouldride in the rear seat. Children toolarge for child restraints should usethe available lap/shoulder belts. Nomatter what type of crash, children ofall ages are safer when restrained inthe rear seat.

If the occupant detection system isnot working properly, the SRS airbag warning light on the instrumentpanel will illuminate because thepassenger's front air bag is connect-ed with the occupant detection sys-tem. If there is a malfunction of theoccupant detection system, the PAS-SENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicatorwill not illuminate and the passen-ger's front air bag will inflate in frontalimpact crashes even if there is nooccupant in the front passenger'sseat.

WARNING - Replacement/ modifications

The front passenger seat, dash-board or door should not bereplaced except by an authorizedKia dealer using original Kia partsdesigned for this vehicle andmodel. Any other such replace-ment or modification couldadversely affect the operation ofthe occupant detection systemand your advanced air bags.

3 57


Driver's and passenger's front airbag

Your vehicle is equipped with anAdvanced Supplemental Restraint(Air Bag) System and lap/shoulderbelts at both the driver and passen-ger seating position.The indication of the system's pres-ence are the letters "AIR BAG" locat-ed on the air bag pad cover on thesteering wheel and the passenger'sside front panel pad above the glovebox.

The SRS consists of air bagsinstalled under the pad covers in thecenter of the steering wheel and thepassenger's side front panel abovethe glove box.The purpose of the SRS is to providethe vehicle's driver and/or the frontpassenger with additional protectionthan that offered by the seat belt sys-tem alone in case of a frontal impactof sufficient severity. The SRS usessensors to gather information aboutthe driver's and front passenger'sseat belt usage and impact severity.The seat belt buckle sensors deter-mine if the driver and front passen-ger's seat belts are fastened.

These sensors provide the ability tocontrol the SRS deployment based onwhether or not the seat belts are fas-tened, and how severe the impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the abilityto control the air bag inflation withtwo levels. A first stage level is pro-vided for moderate-severity impacts.A second stage level is provided formore severe impacts.

The passenger’s front air bag isdesigned to help reduce the injury ofchildren sitting close to the instru-ment panel in low speed collisions.However, children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear seat.

According to the impact severity andseat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRSControl Module) controls the air baginflation. Failure to properly wearseat belts can increase the risk orseverity of injury in an accident.

OUM034042

■ Driver’s front air bag

■ Passenger’s front air bagOUMA034041


583

Additionally, your vehicle is equippedwith an occupant detection system inthe front passenger's seat. The occu-pant detection system detects thepresence of a passenger in the frontpassenger's seat and will turn off thefront passenger's air bag under cer-tain conditions. For more detail, see"Occupant detection system" in thischapter.

Modification to the seat structure cancause the air bag to deploy at a dif-ferent level than should be provided.

Manufacturers are required by gov-ernment regulations to provide acontact point concerning modifica-tions to the vehicle for persons withdisabilities, which modifications mayaffect the vehicle’s advanced air bagsystem. However, Kia does notendorse nor will it support anychanges to any part or structure ofthe vehicle that could affect theadvanced air bag system, includingthe occupant detection system.

✽✽ NOTICEThe front passenger seat, dashboardor door should not be replacedexcept by an authorized Kia dealerusing original Kia parts designed forthis vehicle and model. Any othersuch replacement or modificationcould adversely affect the operationof the occupant detection systemand your advanced air bags.

Advanced air bags are combinedwith pre-tensioner seat belts to helpprovide enhanced occupant protec-tion in frontal crashes. Front air bagsare not intended to deploy in colli-sions in which sufficient protectioncan be provided by the pre-tensionerseat belt.Front air bags are not intended todeploy in side-impact, rear-impact orrollover crashes. However, whenfrontal deployment threshold is satis-fied at side-impact, front air bagsmay deploy. In addition, front air bagswill not deploy in frontal crashesbelow the deployment threshold.

3 59


Side air bag

Your vehicle is equipped with a sideair bag in each front seat. The pur-pose of the air bag is to provide thevehicle's driver and/or the front pas-senger with additional protection thanthat offered by the seat belt alone.

• The side air bags are designed todeploy during certain side-impactcollisions, depending on the crashseverity, angle, speed and point ofimpact. However, when side deploy-ment threshold is satisfied at front-impact, side air bags may deploy.

• The side air bags may deploy onthe side of the impact or on bothsides.

• The side and/or curtain air bags onboth sides of the vehicle will deployif a rollover or possible rollover isdetected.

• The side air bags are not designedto deploy in all side impact orrollover situations.

OUM034044

OUMA034095

WARNING - Unexpecteddeployment

Avoid impact to the side impactairbag sensor when the ignitionswitch is ON to prevent unex-pected deployment of the sideair bag.

WARNING - SRS WiringDo not tamper with or discon-nect SRS wiring or other com-ponents of the SRS system.Doing so could result in injury,due to accidental deployment ofthe air bags or by rendering theSRS inoperative.

WARNING - No attachingobjects

No objects (such as crash padcover, cellular phone holder, cupholder, perfume or stickers)should be placed over or near theair bag modules on the steeringwheel, instrument panel, wind-shield glass, and the front pas-senger's panel above the glovebox. Such objects could causeharm if the vehicle is in a crashsevere enough to cause the airbags to deploy. Do not place anyobjects over the air bag orbetween the air bag and yourself.


603

• The side air bag is supplemental tothe driver's and the passenger'sseat belt systems and is not a sub-stitute for them. Therefore yourseat belts must be worn at all timeswhile the vehicle is in operation.

• For best protection from the sideair bag system and to avoid beinginjured by the deploying side airbag, both front seat occupantsshould sit in an upright positionwith the seat belt properly fas-tened. The driver's hands shouldbe placed on the steering wheel atthe 9:00 and 3:00 positions. Thepassenger's arms and handsshould be placed on their laps.

• If seat or seat cover is damaged,have the vehicle checked andrepaired by an authorized Kia deal-er. Inform the dealer that your vehi-cle is equipped with side air bagsand an occupant detection system.

WARNING - Flyingobjects

Do not place any objects (anumbrella, bag, etc.) between thefront door and the front seat.Such objects may become dan-gerous projectiles if the sideairbag inflates.

WARNING - DeploymentDo not install any accessoriesincluding seat covers, on theside or near the side air bag asthis may affect the deploymentof the side air bags.


• Do not place any objects overthe air bag or between the airbag and yourself. Also, do notattach any objects around thearea the air bag inflates suchas the door, side door glass,front and rear pillar.

• Do not place any objectsbetween the door and theseat. They may become dan-gerous projectiles if the sideair bag inflates.

• Do not install any accessorieson the side or near the side airbags.

3 61


Curtain air bag

Curtain air bags are located alongboth sides of the roof rails above thefront and rear doors.

They are designed to help protectoccupants in certain side impactsand to help prevent them from eject-ing out of the vehicle as a result of arollover, especially when the seat-belts are also in use.• The curtain air bags are designed to

deploy during certain side impactcollisions, depending on the crashseverity, angle, speed and point ofimpact. However, when side deploy-ment threshold is satisfied at front-impact, side air bags may deploy.

• The curtain air bags may deploy onthe side of the impact or on bothsides.

• Also, the curtain air bags on bothsides of the vehicle will deploy incertain rollover situations.

• The curtain air bags are notdesigned to deploy in all sideimpact or rollover situations.

Do not allow the passengers to leantheir heads or bodies against thedoors, put their arms on the doors,stretch their arms out of the windowor place objects between the doorsand passengers when they are seat-ed on seats equipped with sideimpact and/or curtain air bags.

✽✽ NOTICENever try to open or repair any com-ponents of the side and curtain airbag system. This should only bedone by an authorized Kia dealer.

OUM034045

OUM034046


• Do not place any objects overthe air bag. Also, do not attachany objects around the areathe air bag inflates such as thedoor, side door glass, frontand rear pillar, roof side rail.

• Do not hang hard or breakableobjects on the clothes hanger.


623

Why didn’t my air bag go off in acollision? (Inflation and non-infla-tion conditions of the air bag)There are many types of accidentsin which the air bag would not beexpected to provide additionalprotection.These include rear impacts, sec-ond or third collisions in multipleimpact accidents, as well as lowspeed impacts.

Air bag collision sensors

(1) SRS control module/Rollover sensor

(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor(4) Side pressure sensor

OUMA034047/OUM034048/OUMA034049/OUM034050/OUM034051

3 63


Problems may arise if the sensorinstallation angles are changed dueto the deformation of the frontbumper, front end module, body orfront doors where side collision sen-sors are installed. Have the vehiclechecked and repaired by an author-ized Kia dealer.Installing bumper guards (or sidestep or running board) or replacing abumper (or front door module) withnon-genuine parts may adverselyaffect your vehicle’s collision and airbag deployment performance.

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflatein a frontal collision depending onthe intensity, speed or angles ofimpact of the front collision.

OUM034052

WARNING - Air bag sen-sors

• Do not hit or allow any objectsto impact the locations whereair bags or sensors areinstalled.This may cause unexpectedair bag deployment, whichcould result in serious per-sonal injury or death.

• If the installation location orangle of the sensors is alteredin any way, the air bags maydeploy when they should notor they may not deploy whenthey should.Therefore, do not try to per-form maintenance on oraround the air bag sensors.Have the vehicle checked andrepaired by an authorized Kiadealer.


643

Side and/or curtain air bags

Side and/or curtain air bags aredesigned to inflate when an impact isdetected by side collision sensorsdepending on the strength, speed orangles of impact resulting from aside impact collision.

Also, the side and curtain air bags aredesigned to inflate when a rollover isdetected by a rollover sensor.Although the front air bags (driver’sand front passenger’s air bags) aredesigned to inflate in frontal colli-sions, they also may inflate in othertypes of collisions if the front impactsensors detect a sufficient frontalforce in another type of impact. sidesand curtain air bags are designed toinflate in certain side impact colli-sions. They may inflate in other typesof collisions where a side force isdetected by the sensors. Side air bagand/or curtain air bags may alsoinflate where rollover sensors indi-cate the possibility of a rolloveroccurring (even if none actuallyoccurs) or in other situations, includ-ing when the vehicle is tilted whilebeing towed. Even where side and/orcurtain air bags would not provideimpact protection in a rollover, how-ever, they will deploy to prevent ejec-tion of occupants, especially thosewho are restrained with seat belts.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted bybumps or objects on unimprovedroads, the air bags may deploy. Drivecarefully on unimproved roads or onsurfaces not designed for vehicletraffic to prevent unintended air bagdeployment.

OUM034053

OUM034054

3 65


Air bag non-inflation conditions

• In certain low-speed collisions theair bags may not deploy. The airbags are designed not to deploy insuch cases because they may notprovide benefits beyond the pro-tection of the seat belts in such col-lisions.

• Air bags are not designed to inflatein rear collisions, because occu-pants are moved backward by theforce of the impact. In this case,inflated air bags would not be ableto provide any additional benefit.

• Front air bags may not inflate inside impact collisions, becauseoccupants move to the direction ofthe collision, and thus in sideimpacts, frontal air bag deploymentwould not provide additional occu-pant protection.

OUM034055

OUM034057OUM034056


663

• In an angled collision, the force ofimpact may direct the occupants ina direction where the air bagswould not be able to provide anyadditional benefit, and thus thesensors may not deploy any airbags.

• Just before impact, drivers oftenbrake heavily. Such heavy brakinglowers the front portion of the vehi-cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi-cle with a higher ground clearance.Air bags may not inflate in this"under-ride" situation becausedeceleration forces that are detect-ed by sensors may be significantlyreduced by such “under-ride” colli-sions.

• Front air bags may not inflate in allrollover accidents where theSRSCM indicates that the front airbag deployment would not provideadditional occupant protection.

1VQA2089 OUM034058 OUM034059

3 67


• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-cle collides with objects such asutility poles or trees, where thepoint of impact is concentrated toone area and the full force of theimpact is not delivered to the sen-sors.

SRS CareThe SRS is virtually maintenance-free and so there are no parts you cansafely service by yourself. If the SRSair bag warning light does not illumi-nate, or continuously remains on, haveyour vehicle immediately inspected byan authorized Kia dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, suchas removing, installing, repairing, orany work on the steering wheel, thefront passenger’s panel, front seatsand roof rails must be performed byan authorized Kia dealer. Improperhandling of the SRS system mayresult in serious personal injury.

For cleaning the air bag pad covers,use only a soft, dry cloth or one whichhas been moistened with plain water.Solvents or cleaners could adverselyaffect the air bag covers and properdeployment of the system.If components of the air bag systemmust be discarded, or if the vehiclemust be scrapped, certain safetyprecautions must be observed. Anauthorized Kia dealer knows theseprecautions and can give you thenecessary information. Failure to fol-low these precautions and proce-dures could increase the risk of per-sonal injury.

OUM034060

Adding equipment to or modi-fying your air bag-equippedvehicleIf you modify your vehicle by chang-ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys-tem, front end or side sheet metal orride height, this may affect the opera-tion of your vehicle's air bag system.

Air bag warning label

Air bag warning labels, somerequired by the Canada MotorVehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS),are attached to the sunvisor to alertthe driver and passengers of poten-tial risks of the air bag system.

WARNING - Tamperingwith SRS

Do not tamper with or discon-nect SRS wiring, or other com-ponents of the SRS system.Doing so could result in theaccidental inflation of the airbags or by rendering the SRSinoperative.

WARNING - Towing VehicleAlways have the ignition offwhen your vehicle is beingtowed. The side air bags mayinflate if the vehicle is tiltedsuch as when being towedbecause of the rollover sensorsin the vehicle.

OUM034094C

OUMA034061

3 68



Folding key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

• Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

• Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

• Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-22

• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-23

• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

• Child-protector rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Liftgate (for manual liftgate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

• Opening the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

• Closing the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

• Emergency liftgate safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Power liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28• Opening the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

• Closing the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

• Smart power liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

• Emergency liftgate safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

• Emergency fuel filler lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

• Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

• Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

4

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55• Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

• Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

• Outside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69

Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73• Instrument cluster control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

• LCD display control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75

• Transaxle shift indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

• Icy Road Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79• LCD modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79

Trip modes (trip computer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80• Trip Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

• Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

• Digital speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

• One time driving information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

• Turn by turn mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

• ASCC/LDWS mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

• A/V mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

• Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

• User settings mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86

• Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

• Indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105

Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109• Operation of the rear parking assist system. . . . . . 4-109

• Non-operational conditions of

rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110

• Rear parking assist system precautions . . . . . . . . . 4-111

• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112

Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113

360° camera monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

• Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

• High beam operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117

• Turn signals and lane change signals. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118

• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119

• Check headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119

• Headlight leveling device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120

• AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) . . . . . . . . 4-120

4

Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121• Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121

• Front windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123

• Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . 4-124

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125• Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

• Room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126

• Luggage lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128• Headlight (headlamp) escort function. . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

• Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

• Pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129

Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

• 3rd row air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136

• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137

• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139

• Checking the amount of air conditioner

refrigerant and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . 4-139

Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-143

• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144

• 3rd row air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149

• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150

• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152

• Checking the amount of air conditioner

refrigerant and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . 4-153

Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-154• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154

• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155

• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156

Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158

Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159

• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159

• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160

• Luggage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160

Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161

• Bottle holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162

• Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162

• Seat cooler (air ventilation seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163

• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164

• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164

4

• AC inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165

• USB charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167

• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168

• Floor mat anchor (s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168

• Side curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169

• Luggage net holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169

Exterior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171• Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171

Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172

• Steering wheel remote controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173

• AUX, USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174

• How vehicle audio works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175

• Using the USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179

• Using iPod® device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180

4

4 5


Record your key numberThe key code num-ber is stamped onthe key code tagattached to the keyset. Should you

lose your keys, this number willenable an authorized Kia dealer toduplicate the keys easily. Removethe key code tag and store it in a safeplace. Also, record the key codenumber and keep it in a safeplace.(not in the vehicle)

Key operations

• Used to start the engine.• Used to lock and unlock the doors.• Used to lock and unlock the glove

box.• To unfold the key, press the release

button then the key will unfold auto-matically. To fold the key, fold thekey manually while pressing therelease button.

FOLDING KEY

CAUTIONDo not fold the key withoutpressing the release button.This may damage the key.

WARNING - Aftermarketkey

Use only Kia original parts forthe ignition key in your vehicle.If an aftermarket key is used,the ignition switch may notreturn to ON after START. If thishappens, the starter will contin-ue to operate causing damageto the starter motor and possi-ble fire due to excessive currentin the wiring.

OUM045429MX


64

Door Lock (1)

1. Close all doors, engine hood andliftgate.

2. Press the lock button(1).3. All doors and liftgate will lock. The

hazard warning lights will blinkonce.

4. If the lock button is pressed oncemore within 4 seconds, the hazardwarning lights will blink and thehorn will sound once.

5. Make sure that doors are locked bychecking the door lock button insideor pulling the outside door handle.

Door Unlock (2) 1. Press the unlock button(2).2. The driver's door will unlock. The

hazard warning lights will blink twotimes.

3. Press the unlock button(2) twicewithin 4 seconds and all doors andliftgate will unlock. The hazardwarning lights will blink two times.

✽✽ NOTICEYou can activate or deactivate theTwo Turn Unlock function. Refer to"User settings" in this chapter.

WARNING - Ignition key(smart key)

Never leave the keys in yourvehicle with unsupervised chil-dren. Leaving children unat-tended in a vehicle with a man-ual ignition key or a smart keyis dangerous. Children copyadults and they could place thekey in the ignition switch orpress the start button. The keywould enable children to oper-ate power windows or othercontrols, or even make the vehi-cle move, which could result inserious bodily injury or death.

OXMA043317

4 7


Liftgate unlock (3)The liftgate is unlocked if the buttonis pressed for more than 1 second.Also, once the liftgate is opened andthen closed, the liftgate will be lockedautomatically.• For Power Liftgate Only:The Power Liftgate will open if thebutton is pressed for more than 1second. Also, once the liftgate isopened and then closed, the liftgatewill be locked again automatically.

If the power liftgate is switched ‘Off’using the button in the overhead con-sole, the liftgate unlock button willoperate to unlock the liftgate asdescribed above.

For detailed information refer to the"Power liftgate" in this chapter.

Panic (4)The horn sounds and hazard warn-ing lights flash for about 27 secondsif this button is pressed for more than0.5 second. To stop the horn andlights, press any button on the trans-mitter.

Transmitter precautions• The transmitter will not work if any

of following occur:- The ignition key is in the ignition

switch.- You exceed the operating dis-

tance limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).- The battery in the transmitter is

weak.- Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.- The weather is extremely cold.- The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio sub-station or an airport which caninterfere with normal operation ofthe transmitter.


84

• When the transmitter does not workcorrectly, open and close the doorwith the ignition key. If you have aproblem with the transmitter, con-tact an authorized Kia dealer.

• If the transmitter is in close proxim-ity to your mobile phone, the signalcould be blocked by your mobilephones normal operational signals.This is especially important whenthe phone is active such as makingand receiving calls, text messag-ing, and/or sending/receivingemails. Avoid placing the transmit-ter and your mobile phone in thesame pants or jacket pocket andalways try to maintain an adequatedistance between the two devices.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the keyless entry system is inoper-ative due to exposure to water or liq-uids, it will not be covered by yourmanufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

Battery replacement

The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithiumbattery which will normally last forseveral years. When replacement isnecessary, use the following proce-dure.1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and

gently pry open the transmittercenter cover.

2. Replace the battery with a newbattery (CR2032). When replacingthe battery, make sure the batteryis positioned correctly.

3. Install the battery in the reverseorder of removal.

OYDDCO2005

CAUTIONKeep the transmitter away fromwater or any liquid as it canbecome damaged and not func-tion properly.

4 9


For replacement transmitters, see anauthorized Kia dealer for transmitterreprogramming.• The transmitter is designed to give

you years of trouble-free use, how-ever it can malfunction if exposed tomoisture or static electricity. If youare unsure how to use your trans-mitter or replace the battery, contactan authorized Kia dealer.

• Using the wrong battery can causethe transmitter to malfunction. Besure to use the correct battery.

• To avoid damaging the transmitter,don't drop it, get it wet, or expose itto heat or sunlight.

• An inappropriately dis-posed battery can beharmful to the environmentand may cause harm of tohuman health. Dispose ofthe battery according toyour local law(s) or regula-tion.

Immobilizer system Your vehicle is equipped with anelectronic engine immobilizer systemto reduce the risk of unauthorizedvehicle use.Your immobilizer system is com-prised of a small transponder in theignition key and electronic devicesinside the vehicle.With the immobilizer system, when-ever you insert your ignition key intothe ignition switch and turn it to ON,the system verifies if the ignition keyis valid.If the key is determined to be valid,the engine will start.If the key is determined to be invalid,the engine will not start.

CAUTION - Transmitterdamage

Do not drop, wet or expose thekeyless entry system transmit-ter to heat or sunlight.

IC WARNINGThis device complies withIndustry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) thisdevice may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference, includ-ing interference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.


104

To activate the immobilizer system:Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-tion. The immobilizer system acti-vates automatically. Without a validignition key for your vehicle, theengine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizersystem:Insert the ignition key into the keycylinder and turn it to the ON position.In order to prevent theft of your vehi-cle, do not leave spare keys anywherein your vehicle.Your Immobilizer pass-word is a customer unique passwordand should be kept confidential. Donot leave this number anywhere inyour vehicle.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen starting the engine, do not usethe key with other immobilizer keysaround. Otherwise the engine maynot start or may stop soon after itstarts. Keep each key separate inorder to avoid a starting malfunction.

Do not put metal accessories nearthe ignition switch.Metal accessories may interrupt thetransponder signal and may preventthe engine from being started.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you need additional keys or loseyour keys, contact an authorizedKia dealer.

CAUTION - Immobilizerdamage

Do not expose your immobilizersystem to moisture, static elec-tricity and rough handling. Thismay damage your immobilizer.

CAUTION - Immobilizeralterations

Do not change, alter or adjustthe immobilizer system becauseit could cause the immobilizersystem to malfunction.

4 11


This device complies withIndustry Canada licence-exemptRSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:(1) This device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) This device must accept any

interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

✽✽ NOTICEChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operatethe equipment. If the keyless entrysystem is inoperative due to changesor modifications not approved bythe party responsible for compli-ance, it will not be covered by yourmanufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

Limp home (override) procedureWhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON position, if the immobilizerindicator ( ) goes off after blink-ing 5 times, your transponderequipped in the ignition key is out oforder. You cannot start the enginewithout the limp home procedure. Tostart the engine, you have to inputyour password by using the ignitionswitch. Your password is only avail-able from an authorized Kia dealer-ship. Contact an authorized dealerfor more information.The following procedure is how toinput your password of “2345” as anexample.1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position. The immobilizer indicator( ) will blink 5 times and go offindicating the beginning of the limphome procedure.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACCposition.

3. To enter the first digit (in thisexample “2”), turn the ignitionswitch to the ON and ACC positiontwice. Perform the same proce-dure for the next digits between 3seconds and 10 seconds (forexample, for “3”, turn the ignitionON and ACC 3 times).

4. If all of the digits have been inputsuccessfully, you have to start theengine within 30 seconds. If youattempt to start the engine after 30seconds, the engine will not startand you will have to input yourpassword again.

After performing the limp home pro-cedure, you have to see an author-ized Kia dealer immediately toinspect and repair your ignition keyor immobilizer system.


124

Record your key numberThe key code numberis stamped on the barcode tag attached tothe key set. Shouldyou lose your keys,

this number will enable an author-ized Kia dealer to duplicate the keyseasily. Remove the bar code tag andstore it in a safe place. Also, recordthe code number and keep it in asafe and handy place, but not in thevehicle.

Smart key function

To remove the mechanical key, pressand hold the release button(1) andremove the mechanical key (2).To reinstall the mechanical key, putthe key into the hole and push it untila click sound is heard.

With a smart key, you can lock orunlock a door (and Liftgate) and startthe engine.Refer to the following for more details.

SMART KEY

OUM045428MX

WARNING - Ignition key(smart key)

Never leave the keys in yourvehicle with unsupervised chil-dren. Leaving children unat-tended in a vehicle with a man-ual ignition key or a smart keyis dangerous. Children copyadults and they could place thekey in the ignition switch orpress the start button. The keywould enable children to oper-ate power windows or othercontrols, or even make the vehi-cle move, which could result inserious bodily injury or death.

4 13


Door Lock Using the door handle button

- Carry the smart key.- Close all doors, engine hood and

liftgate.- Press the button of the outside door

handle.- The hazard warning lights will blink

and the chime will sound once.- Make sure that doors are locked by

pulling the outside door handle.

✽✽ NOTICE• The button will only operate when

the smart key is within 0.7~1m(28~40in.) from the outside doorhandle.

• Even though you press the outsidedoor handle button, the doors willnot lock and the chime will soundfor 3 seconds if any of followingoccur:- The smart key is in the vehicle.- The engine start/stop button is

in ACC or ON position.- Any door except the liftgate is

open.

Using the button on the smart key

- Close all doors, engine hood andliftgate.

- Press the lock button(1).- The hazard warning lights will blink

and the chime will sound once.- Make sure that doors are locked by

pulling the outside door handle.

OYDDCO2004

OUM044001


144

UnlockingUsing the door handle button

1. Carry the smart key.2. Press the button of the driver's

outside door handle.3. The driver’s door will unlock. The

hazard warning lights will blink andthe chime will sound two times.

4. Press the button twice within 4seconds and all doors and the lift-gate will unlock and the hazardwarning lights will blink and thechime will sound two times.

✽✽ NOTICE• The button will only operate when

the smart key is within 0.7~1m(28~40in.) from the outside doorhandle.

• When the smart key is recognized inthe area of 0.7~1m (28~40in.) fromthe front outside door handle, otherpeople can also open the doors.

• After unlocking the driver’s dooror all doors, the door(s) will lockautomatically unless the door isopened.


1. Press the unlock button(2) of thesmart key.

2. The driver’s door will unlock. Thehazard warning lights will blink andthe chime will sound two times.

3. Press the unlock button(2) twicewithin 4 seconds and all doors andthe liftgate will unlock. The hazardwarning lights will blink and thechime will sound two times.

✽✽ NOTICEAfter pressing the button, the doorswill lock automatically unless anydoor is opened within 30 seconds.

✽✽ NOTICEYou can activate or deactivate theTwo Turn Unlock function. Refer to"User settings" in this chapter.

Liftgate unlockingUsing the liftgate handle button

1. Carry the smart key.2. Press the liftgate handle button.3. When all doors are locked, the

hazard warning lights will blink twotimes.Once the liftgate is opened andthen closed, the liftgate will lockautomatically.

✽✽ NOTICEThe button will only operate whenthe smart key is within 0.7~1m(28~40in.) from the liftgate handle.

4 15



1. Press the liftgate unlock button (3)for more than 1 second.

2. When all doors are locked, thehazard warning lights will blink twotimes.

• For Power Liftgate Only:The Power Liftgate will open if thebutton is pressed for more than 1second. Also, once the liftgate isopened and then closed, the liftgatewill be locked again automatically.

For detailed information refer to the"Power liftgate" in this chapter.

Panic1. Press the panic button (4) for more

than 1 second.2. The horn sounds and hazard

warning light flash for about 27seconds.

✽✽ NOTICETo stop the horn and lights, pressany button on the smart key.

Start-upYou can start the engine withoutinserting the key. For detailed infor-mation refer to the “Engine start/stopbutton” in chapter 5.


164

Loss of the smart keyA maximum of 2 smart keys can beregistered to a single vehicle.If you happen to lose your smart key,you will not be able to start theengine. You should immediately takethe vehicle and remaining key to yourauthorized Kia dealer(tow the vehi-cle, if necessary) to protect it frompotential theft.

Smart key precautions• The smart key will not work if any

of the following occur:- The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio sta-tion or an airport which can inter-fere with normal operation of thesmart key.

- The smart key is near a mobiletwo way radio system or a cellu-lar phone.

- Another vehicle’s smart key isbeing operated close to yourvehicle.

• When the smart key does not workcorrectly, open and close the doorwith the mechanical key and contactan authorized Kia dealer.

• If the smart key is in close proximityto your cell phone or smart phone,the signal from the smart key couldbe blocked by normal operation ofyour cell phone or smart phone.This is especially important whenthe phone is active such as makinga call, receiving calls, text messag-ing, and/or sending/receivingemails. Avoid placing the smart keyand your cell phone or smart phonein the same pants or jacket pocketand maintain adequate distancebetween the two devices.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the keyless entry system is inoper-ative due to exposure to water or liq-uids, it will not be covered by yourmanufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

CAUTION - TransmitterKeep the transmitter away fromwater or any liquid as it canbecome damaged and not func-tion properly.

4 17


Battery replacement

A smart key battery should last forseveral years, but if the smart key isnot working properly, try replacingthe battery with a new one. If you areunsure how to use your smart key orreplace the battery, contact anauthorized Kia dealer.1. Remove the mechanical key.2. Pry open the rear cover.

3. Replace the battery with a newbattery (CR2032). When replacingthe battery, make sure the batteryis in the correct position.

4. Install the battery in the reverseorder of removal.

• The smart key is designed to giveyou years of trouble-free use, how-ever it can malfunction if exposedto moisture or static electricity. Ifyou are unsure how to use orreplace the battery, contact anauthorized Kia dealer.

• Using the wrong battery can causethe smart key to malfunction. Besure to use the correct battery.

• To avoid damaging the smart key,don't drop it, get it wet, or expose itto heat or sunlight.

• An inappropriately dis-posed battery can be harm-ful to the environment andhuman health. Dispose thebattery according to yourlocal law(s) or regulation.

CAUTION - Smart keydamage

Do not drop, get wet or exposethe smart key to heat or sun-light, or it will be damaged.

OUM045427MX

IC WARNINGThis device complies withIndustry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) thisdevice may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference, includ-ing interference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.


184

Smart key immobilizer systemYour vehicle is equipped with anelectronic engine immobilizer systemto reduce the risk of unauthorizedvehicle use.Your immobilizer system is com-prised of a small transponder in thesmart key and electronic devicesinside the vehicle.With the immobilizer system, when-ever you turn the engine start/stopbutton to the ON position by pressingthe button while carrying the smartkey, it verifies if the smart key is validor not.If the key is determined to be valid,the engine will start.If the key is determined to be invalid,the engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizersystem:Turn the engine start/stop button tothe ON position by pressing the but-ton while carrying the smart key.In order to prevent theft of your vehi-cle, do not leave spare keys any-where in your vehicle.

To activate the immobilizer system:Turn the engine start/stop button tothe OFF position. The immobilizersystem activates automatically.Without a valid smart key for yourvehicle, the engine will not start.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen starting the engine, do not usethe key with other immobilizer keysaround. Otherwise the engine maynot start or may stop soon after itstarts. Keep each key separate inorder to avoid a starting malfunction.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you need additional keys or loseyour keys, contact an authorizedKia dealer.




✽✽ NOTICEChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operatethe equipment. If the keyless entrysystem is inoperative due to changesor modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsiblefor compliance, it will not be cov-ered by your manufacturer’s vehiclewarranty.

4 19


This system is designed to provideprotection from unauthorized entryinto the vehicle. This system is oper-ated in three stages: the first is the"Armed" stage, the second is the"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third isthe "Disarmed" stage. If triggered,the system provides an audiblealarm with blinking of the hazardwarning lights.

Armed stagePark the vehicle and stop the engine.Arm the system as described below.1. Remove the ignition key from the

ignition switch and exit the vehicle.2. Make sure that all doors (and lift-

gate) and engine hood are closedand latched.

3. Lock the doors using the transmit-ter of the keyless entry system (orsmart key) or ignition key.

After completion of the steps above,the hazard warning lights will blink(for smart key, the chime alsosounds) once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

If any door (or liftgate) or enginehood remains open, the hazardwarning lights and the chime will notoperate and the theft-alarm will notarm. If all doors (and liftgate) andengine hood are closed after the lockbutton is pressed, the hazard warn-ing lights blink once.The system can also be armed bylocking the doors with the key fromthe front doors; however, the hazardwarning lights will not blink using thismethod.

✽✽ NOTICEThe theft-alarm system can be deac-tivated by an authorized Kia dealer.If you want this feature, consult anauthorized Kia dealer.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

Armedstage

Theft-alarmstage

Disarmedstage


204

Do not arm the system until allpassengers have left the vehicle. Ifthe system is armed while a pas-senger(s) remains in the vehicle,the alarm may be activated whenthe remaining passenger(s) leavethe vehicle. If any door (or liftgate)or engine hood is opened within30 seconds after the systementers the armed stage, the sys-tem is disarmed to prevent anunnecessary alarm.

Theft-alarm stageThe alarm will be activated if any ofthe following occurs while the systemis armed.• A front or rear door is opened with-

out using the ignition key or trans-mitter (or smart key).

• The liftgate is opened without usingthe transmitter (or smart key).

• The engine hood is opened.The horn will sound and the hazardwarning lights will blink continuouslyfor approximately 27 seconds, andrepeat the horn 3 times unless thesystem is disarmed. To turn off thesystem, unlock the doors with the igni-tion key or transmitter (or smart key).

Disarmed stageThe system will be disarmed when• The doors (and liftgate) are

unlocked with the transmitter (orsmart key) or the ignition key.

After depressing the unlock button,the hazard warning lights will blinkand the chime will sound twice (insmart key) to indicate that the sys-tem is disarmed.After depressing the unlock button, ifany door (or liftgate) is not openedwithin 30 seconds, the system will berearmed.

4 21


✽✽ NOTICE• Avoid trying to start the engine

while the alarm is activated. Thevehicle starting motor is disabledduring the theft-alarm stage.- If the system is not disarmed with

the transmitter, insert the keyinto the ignition switch, turn theignition switch to the ON positionand wait for 30 seconds. Then thesystem will be disarmed.

- If the system is not disarmed withthe smart key, press the enginestart/stop button with smart key.The side with the lock buttonshould contact the enginestart/stop button directly.

• If you lose your keys, consult yourauthorized Kia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEMalfunctions caused by improperalterations, adjustments or modifi-cations to the theft-alarm system arenot covered by your vehicle manu-facturer warranty.

CAUTION - Adjustingalarm system

Do not change, alter or adjustthe theft-alarm system becauseit could cause the theft-alarmsystem to malfunction andshould only be serviced by anauthorized Kia dealer.


224

DOOR LOCKS Operating door locks fromoutside the vehicle

• Turn the key counterclockwise tolock and clockwise to unlock.

• If you lock the driver’s door with akey, all vehicle doors will lock auto-matically.

• From the driver’s door, turn the keyto the right once to unlock the doorand once more within 4 seconds tounlock all doors.

• Doors can also be locked andunlocked with the transmitter.

• Once the doors are unlocked, theymay be opened by pulling the doorhandle.

• When closing the door, push thedoor by hand. Make sure the doorsare closed securely.

✽✽ NOTICE• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may notwork properly due to freezing con-ditions.

• If the door is locked/unlockedmultiple times in rapid successionwith either the vehicle key or doorlock switch, the system may stopoperating temporarily in order toprotect the circuit and preventdamage to system components.

• To lock a door without the key, pushthe inside door lock button (1) or cen-tral door lock switch (2) to the “Lock”position when the ignition switch isOFF position and close the door (3).

• If you lock the door with the centraldoor lock switch (2), all vehicledoors will lock automatically.

✽✽ NOTICEAlways remove the ignition key,engage the parking brake, close allwindows and lock all doors whenleaving your vehicle unattended.

OUM044002

UnlockLock Unlock

■ Type A ■ Type B

Lock

OUM044003

4 23


Operating door locks frominside the vehicleWith the door lock button

• To unlock a door, push the doorlock button (1) to the “Unlock” posi-tion.The red mark (2) on the buttonwill be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lockbutton (1) to the “Lock” position. Ifthe door is locked properly, the redmark (2) on the door lock buttonwill not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle(3) outward.

• If the inner door handle of the dri-ver’s (or front passenger’s) door ispulled when the door lock button isin the lock position, the button willunlock and the door will open. (ifequipped)

• Front doors cannot be locked if theignition key is in the ignition switchand any front door is opened.

If a power door lock ever fails to func-tion while you are in the vehicle, tryone or more of the following tech-niques to exit:• Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic andmanual) while simultaneouslypulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks andhandles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use thekey to unlock the door from out-side.

• Move to the cargo area and openthe liftgate.OUM044004


244

With central door lock switch

Operate by pressing the central doorlock switch.• When pressing the front portion (1)

of the switch, all vehicle doors willlock.

• When pressing the rear portion (2)of the switch, all vehicle doors willunlock.

• If the key is in the ignition switchand any front door is opened, thedoors will not lock even though thefront portion (1) of the central doorlock switch is pressed.

Impact sensing door unlock systemIn the event of air bag deploymentresulting from a vehicle impact, alldoors will automatically unlock.

✽✽ NOTICEYou can select some auto doorlock/unlock features in “User Settings”For more information, refer to“User Settings” in this chapter.OUM044005

Driver’s door

OUM034082L

Passenger’s door

WARNING - DoorsThe doors should always befully closed and locked while thevehicle is in motion to preventaccidental opening of the door.

WARNING - Unattendedchildren/animals

Never leave children or animalsunattended in your vehicle. Anenclosed vehicle can becomeextremely hot, causing death orsevere injury to unattendedchildren or animals who cannotescape the vehicle

4 25


Child-protector rear door lock

The child safety lock is provided tohelp prevent children from acciden-tally opening the rear doors frominside the vehicle. The rear doorsafety locks should be used whenev-er children are in the vehicle.1. Open the rear door.2. Turn the child safety lock (1) locat-

ed on the rear edge of the door tothe lock ( ) position. When thechild safety lock is in the lock posi-tion, the rear door will not openeven when the inner door handleis pulled.

3. Close the rear door.To open the rear door, pull the out-side door handle.Even though the doors may beunlocked, the rear door will not openby pulling the inner door handle untilthe rear door child safety lock isunlocked.

OUM044006

WARNING - Rear doorlocks

Use the rear door safety lockswhenever children are in thevehicle. If a child accidentlyopens the rear doors while thevehicle is moving, they may fallout.


264

Opening the liftgate

• The liftgate is locked or unlockedwhen all doors are locked orunlocked with the key, transmitter(or smart key) or central door lockswitch.

• If unlocked, the liftgate can beopened by pressing the handleswitch and then pulling the handleup.

• Only the liftgate is unlocked if theliftgate unlock button on the smartkey is pressed (if equipped). Oncethe liftgate is opened and thenclosed, the liftgate is locked auto-matically.

The liftgate swings upward. Makesure no objects or people are nearthe rear of the vehicle when openingthe liftgate.

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates, door lockand door mechanisms may not workproperly due to freezing conditions.

Closing the liftgate

To close the liftgate, lower and pushdown the liftgate firmly. Make surethat the liftgate is securely latched.Make sure your hands, feet and otherparts of your body are safely out ofthe way before closing the liftgate.

LIFTGATE (for manual liftgate)

CAUTION - Liftgate liftMake certain that you close theliftgate before driving your vehi-cle. Possible damage may occurto the liftgate lift cylinders andattached hardware if the liftgateis not closed prior to driving.

OUMA044007 OUMA045008MX

4 27


Emergency liftgate safetyrelease

Your vehicle is equipped with anemergency liftgate safety releaselever located on the bottom of the lift-gate. When someone is inadvertent-ly locked in the cargo area, the lift-gate can be opened by pushing therelease lever and pushing open theliftgate.

WARNING - Rear cargoarea

Occupants should never ride inthe rear cargo area where norestraints are available.Occupants should always beproperly restrained.

WARNING - Exhaustfumes

Driving with the liftgate open isnot advisable. Dangerousexhaust fumes can enter thepassenger compartment. If youmust drive with the liftgateopened, keep the air vents andall windows open so that addi-tional outside air can enter.

WARNING• No one should be allowed to

occupy the cargo area of thevehicle at any time. The cargoarea is a very dangerous loca-tion in the event of a crash.

• Use the release lever foremergencies only. Use withextreme caution, especiallywhile the vehicle is in motion.

OUMA044009


284

POWER LIFTGATE(1) Power liftgate open / close button(2) Power liftgate handle switch (3) Power liftgate close button

✽✽ NOTICEIf IGN is ON, the power liftgateoperates when : • Automatic shift lever is in P (Park).• Manual shift lever is in N (Neutral).

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates, power lift-gate may not work properly due tofreezing conditions.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not attach heavy objects to thepower liftgate when you operate thepower liftgate. Additional weight onliftgate could cause damage to thesystem.

WARNING - Unattendedchildren/pets

Never leave children or animalsunattended in your vehicle.Children or animals might oper-ate the power liftgate in such away that could result in injury tothemselves or others or dam-age to the vehicle.

OUMA044010

OUMA044011

OUM044012L

4 29


Opening the liftgate

The power liftgate will open automat-ically by doing one of the following:• Press and hold the liftgate unlock

button on the transmitter or smartkey until power liftgate operates.

• While power liftgate operating, youcan stop it if you shortly press theunlock button on the transmitter orsmart key.

CAUTIONDo not close or open the powerliftgate manually during auto-matic operation. This may causedamage to the power liftgate orto the vehicle.If it is necessary to close oropen the power liftgate manual-ly when the battery is dis-charged or disconnected, makesure the liftgate is not in opera-tion. Switch the power liftgate tothe off position. Do not applyexcessive force.

OUM044300L

WARNING

Make sure that there are no peo-ple or objects in the path of thepower liftgate (or smart powerliftgate) prior to use. Seriousinjury, damage to the vehicle ordamage to surrounding objectsmay result if contact with thepower liftgate (or smart powerliftgate) occurs.

OUM044014


304

• Press the power liftgate open/closebutton for approximately one sec-ond.

• For emergency stop while powerliftgate operating, press the powerliftgate open/close button shortly.

• Press the liftgate handle switchcarrying the smart key with you.

Closing the liftgate

• Press the power liftgate close but-ton for approximately one secondwhen the liftgate is opened.The liftgate will close and lockautomatically.

OUMA044010 OUMA044011 OUMA044010

OUM044300L

4 31


• For emergency stop while powerliftgate operating, press the powerliftgate open/close button shortly.

Power liftgate non-opening condi-tionsThe power liftgate will not open auto-matically, when the vehicle is movingmore than 3km/h (2mph) or the auto-matic shift lever is not in P(Park)position. The power liftgate will notopen automatically, when the auto-matic shift lever is not in P(Park) posi-tion or the manual shift lever is not inN(Neutral) position.

✽✽ NOTICEThe chime will sound continuously ifyou drive over 3km/h (2mph) with theliftgate opened. Stop your vehicle at asafe place as soon as possible to checkif your liftgate is opened.

✽✽ NOTICE• The power liftgate can be operated

when the engine is not running.However the power liftgate opera-tion consumes large amounts ofvehicle electric power. To preventthe battery from being discharged,do not operate it excessively.

• To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not leave the powerliftgate in the open position for along time.

• Do not modify or repair any partof the power liftgate by yourself.This must be done by an author-ized Kia dealer.

• When jacking up the vehicle tochange a tire or repair the vehicle,do not operate the power liftgate.This could cause the power liftgateto operate improperly.

(Continued)

CAUTIONDo not operate the power lift-gate more than 5 times continu-ously.It may damage the power lift-gate system. If you operate thepower liftgate more than 5 timescontinuously, the chime willsound 3 times and the powerliftgate will not operate. At thistime, stop operating the liftgateand leave it for more than 1minute.


324

(Continued)• In cold and wet climates, the

power liftgate may not work prop-erly due to freezing conditions.

• It is recommended to wait untilthe power liftgate is fully closedbefore starting the vehicle. Thepower liftgate may not close fullyif the vehicle is started duringautomatic closing.

Automatic reversal

During power opening and closing ifthe power liftgate is blocked by anobject or part of the body, the powerliftgate will detect the resistance.• If the resistance is detected while

opening the liftgate, it will stop andmove in the opposite direction.

• If the resistance is detected whileclosing the liftgate, it will stop andmove in the opposite direction.

However, if the resistance is weaksuch as from an object that is thin orsoft, or the liftgate is near the latchedposition, the automatic stop andreversal may not detect the resist-ance.If the automatic reversal featureoperates continuously more thantwice during opening or closing oper-ation, the power liftgate may stop atthat position. At this time, close theliftgate manually and operate the lift-gate automatically again.

WARNINGNever place any object or partof your body in the path of thepower liftgate as it is operating.Doing so could result in person-al injury.

OUMA044013

CAUTIONNever operate the power liftgate with any heavy objectsattached (e.g. bicycles) as itcould become damaged.

4 33


How to reset the power liftgateIf the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, or if the related fuse hasbeen replaced or disconnected, for thepower liftgate to operate normally,reset the power liftgate as follows:1. Put the automatic shift lever in P

(Park) or the manual shift lever inN (Neutral).

2. While pressing the liftgate closebutton, press the liftgate handleswitch for more than 3 seconds.(the chime will sound)

3. Close the liftgate manually.

If the power liftgate does not workproperly after the above procedure,have the system checked by anauthorized Kia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the power liftgate does not operatenormally, first check the followingcondition before using the powerliftgate.Make sure the automatic shift leveris in P (Park) or the manual shiftlever is in N (Neutral).

Power liftgate opening heightuser setting

The driver may set the height of afully opened liftgate by following thebelow instruction.1. Position the liftgate manually to

the height you prefer.2. Press the liftgate close button for

more than 3 seconds.3. You will hear the system beep twice

indicating height has been set up.

The liftgate will open to the heightthe driver has set up.

OUM044012L


344

Smart Power Liftgate(if equipped)

On a vehicle equipped with a smartkey, the liftgate can be opened usingthe Smart Power Liftgate system.

How to use the Smart PowerLiftgate The liftgate can be opened with no-touch activation satisfying all theconditions below.• After 15 seconds when all doors

are closed and locked• Positioned in the detecting area for

more than 3 seconds.

✽✽ NOTICE• The Smart Power Liftgate does

not operate when:- The smart key is detected within

15 seconds after the doors areclosed and locked, and is contin-uously detected.

- The smart key is detected within15 seconds after the doors areclosed and locked, and within 1.5m (60 inches) from the front doorhandles. (for vehicles equippedwith Welcome Light)

- A door is not locked or closed.- The smart key is in the vehicle.

1. SettingTo activate the Smart Power Liftgate,go to User Settings Mode and selectSmart Power Liftgate on the LCDdisplay.

For more information, refer to the"LCD Display" section in thischapter.

OUMA044015

4 35


2. Detect and AlertIf you are positioned in the detectingarea (50 ~100 cm (20~40 inches)behind the vehicle) carrying a smartkey, the hazard warning lights willblink and chime will sound for about3 seconds to alert you the smart keyhas been detected and the liftgatewill open.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not approach the detecting area ifyou do not want the liftgate to open. Ifyou have unintentionally entered thedetecting area and the hazard warninglights and chime starts to operate,leave the detecting area with the smartkey. The liftgate will stay closed.

3. Automatic openingThe hazard warning lights will blinkand chime will sound 2 times andthen the liftgate will open.

OUM044016 OUMA044017


364

Make sure you close the liftgate beforedriving your vehicle.Make sure there are no people orobjects around the liftgate beforeopening or closing the liftgate. Makesure objects in the liftgate do notcome out when opening the liftgateon a slope. It may cause seriousinjury. Make sure to deactivate theSmart Power Liftgate when washingyour vehicle. Otherwise, the liftgatemay open inadvertently. The keyshould be kept out of reach of chil-dren. Children may inadvertentlyopen the Smart Power Liftgate whileplaying around the rear area of thevehicle.

How to deactivate the SmartPower Liftgate function using thesmart key

1. Door lock2. Door unlock3. Liftgate open4. PanicIf you press any button of the smartkey during the Detect and Alertstage, the Smart Power Liftgate func-tion will be deactivated.Make sure to be aware of how todeactivate the Smart Power Liftgatefunction for emergency situations.

CAUTION- Liftgate lift

Make certain that you close theliftgate before driving your vehi-cle. Possible damage may occurto the liftgate lift cylinders andattached hardware if the liftgateis not closed prior to driving.

OXM043001

4 37


✽✽ NOTICE• If you press the door unlock but-

ton (2), the Smart Power Liftgatefunction will be deactivated tem-porarily. But, if you do not openany door for 30 seconds, the smartPower liftgate function will beactivated again.

• If you press the liftgate open but-ton (3) for more than 1 second, theliftgate opens.

• If you press the door lock button(1) or liftgate open button (3)when the Smart Power Liftgatefunction is not in the Detect andAlert stage, the smart Power lift-gate function will not be deactivat-ed.

• In case you have deactivated theSmart Power Liftgate function bypressing the smart key button andopened a door, the smart Powerliftgate function can be activatedagain by closing and locking alldoors.

Detecting area

• The Smart Power Liftgate operateswith a welcome alert if the smartkey is detected within 50~100 cm(20~40 inches) from the liftgate.

• The alert stops once the smart keyis positioned outside the detectingarea during the Detect and Alertstage.

✽✽ NOTICE• The Smart Power Liftgate function

will not work if any of the followingoccurs:- The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio sta-tion or an airport which caninterfere with normal operationof the transmitter.

- The smart key is near a mobiletwo way radio system or a cellu-lar phone.

- Another vehicle’s smart key isbeing operated close to yourvehicle.

• The detecting range may decreaseor increase when :- One side of the tire is raised to

replace a tire or to inspect thevehicle.

- The vehicle is parked on a slopeor unpaved road, etc.

OUM044019


384

Emergency liftgate safetyrelease

Your vehicle is equipped with anemergency liftgate safety releaselever located on the bottom of the lift-gate. When someone is inadvertent-ly locked in the cargo area, the lift-gate can be opened by pushing therelease lever and pushing open theliftgate.

WARNING• No one should be allowed to

occupy the cargo area of thevehicle at any time. The cargoarea is a very dangerous loca-tion in the event of a crash.

• Use the release lever foremergencies only. Use withextreme caution, especiallywhile the vehicle is in motion.

OUMA044009

4 39


(1) Driver’s door power windowswitch

(2) Front passenger’s door powerwindow switch

(3) Rear door (left) power windowswitch

(4) Rear door (right) power windowswitch

(5) Window opening and closing(6) Automatic power window

up/down* (Driver's andPassenger's window)

(7) Power window and rear sunroof*lock switch

* if equipped

In cold and wet climates, power win-dows may not work properly due tofreezing conditions.

WINDOWS

OUMA044020


404

Power windowsThe ignition switch must be in the ONposition for power windows to operate.Each door has a power windowswitch that controls the door's win-dow. The driver has a power windowlock button which can block the oper-ation of passenger windows. Thepower windows can be operated forapproximately 30 seconds after theignition key is removed or turned tothe ACC or LOCK (or OFF) position.However, if the front doors areopened, the power windows cannotbe operated even within the 30 sec-ond period.

✽✽ NOTICEWhile driving with the rear windowsdown or with the sunroof (ifequipped) in an open (or partiallyopen) position, your vehicle maydemonstrate a wind buffeting orpulsation noise. This noise is a nor-mal occurrence and can be reducedor eliminated by taking the follow-ing actions. If the noise occurs withone or both of the rear windowsdown, partially lower both frontwindows approximately one inch. Ifyou experience the noise with thesunroof open, slightly reduce thesize of the sunroof opening.

Window opening and closing

The driver’s door has a master powerwindow switch that controls all thewindows in the vehicle.To open or close a window, pressdown or pull up the front portion ofthe corresponding switch to the firstdetent position (5).

OYP044035K

4 41


Auto up/down window (if equipped)

Pressing or pulling up the power win-dow switch momentarily to the seconddetent position (6) completely lowersor raises the window even when theswitch is released. To stop the windowat the desired position while the win-dow is in operation, pull up or pressdown and release the switch.If the power window does not operatenormally, the automatic power win-dow system must be reset as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ONposition.

2. Close the driver's and passenger'swindow and continue pulling upthe driver’s power window switchfor at least 1 second after the win-dow is completely closed.

Automatic reversal(for Auto up/down window)

If the upward movement of the win-dow is blocked by an object or part ofthe body, the window will detect theresistance and will stop upwardmovement. The window will thenlower approximately 30 cm (11.8 in.)to allow the object to be cleared.The distance may vary based on thesize or position of the window. If thewindow detects the resistance whilethe power window switch is pulled upcontinuously, the window will stopupward movement then lowerapproximately 2.5 cm. (1 in).

OYP044033K

OUN026013


424

And if the power window switch ispulled up continuously again within 5seconds after the window is loweredby the automatic window reversalfeature, the automatic window rever-sal will not operate.The automatic reverse feature for thedriver’s window is only active whenthe “auto up” feature is used by fullypulling up the switch. The automaticreverse feature will not operate if thewindow is raised using the halfwayposition on the power window switch.Always check for obstructions beforeraising any window to avoid injuriesor vehicle damage. If an object lessthan 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter iscaught between the window glassand the upper window channel, theautomatic reverse window may notdetect the resistance and will notstop and reverse direction.

Power window lock button

• The driver can disable the powerwindow switches on the passengerdoors by pressing the power win-dow lock button located on the dri-ver’s door to the LOCK position(pressed).

• When the power window lockswitch is pressed :- The driver's master control can

operate all the power windows.- The front passenger's control can

operate the front passenger'spower window.

- The rear passenger's control can-not operate the rear passenger'spower window.

Always double check to make sureall arms, hands, head and otherobstructions are safely out of the waybefore closing a window.

OUM044021

CAUTION - Opening /clos-ing Window

To prevent possible damage tothe power window system, donot open or close two windowsor more at the same time. Thiswill also ensure the longevity ofthe fuse.

WARNING - Power win-dows

Do not allow children to playwith the power windows. Keepthe power window lock switch(on the driver's door) in theLOCK (pressed) position.

4 43


Opening the hood

1. Pull the release lever to unlatchthe hood. The hood should popopen slightly.

Open the hood after turning off theengine on a flat surface, shifting theshift lever to the P (Park) positionand setting the parking brake.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raisethe hood slightly, pull the second-ary latch (1) inside of the hoodcenter and lift the hood (2).

3. Raise the hood. It will completelyrise by itself after it has beenraised about halfway.

HOOD

OUM044022

OUM044023


444

Closing the hood1. Before closing the hood, check the

following:• All filler caps in the engine com-

partment must be correctlyinstalled.

• Gloves, rags or any other com-bustible material must beremoved from the engine com-partment.

2. Lower the hood halfway and pushdown to securely lock in place.

WARNING - Unsecuredengine hood

Always double check to be surethat the hood is firmly latchedbefore driving away. If it is notlatched, the hood could fly openwhile the vehicle is being driv-en, causing a total loss of visi-bility, which might result in anaccident.

WARNING - Fire riskDo not leave gloves, rags or anyother combustible material in theengine compartment. Doing somay cause a heat-induced fire.

WARNING - Hoodobstruction

Before closing the hood, ensurethat all obstructions areremoved from the hood open-ing. Closing the hood with anobstruction present in the hoodopening may result in severepersonal injury.

4 45


Opening the fuel filler lid

The fuel filler lid must be openedfrom inside the vehicle by pressingthe fuel filler lid opener button.If the fuel filler lid does not openbecause ice has formed around it,tap lightly or push on the lid to breakthe ice and release the lid. Do not pryon the lid. If necessary, spray aroundthe lid with an approved de-icer fluid(do not use radiator anti-freeze) ormove the vehicle to a warm placeand allow the ice to melt.

1. Stop the engine.2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the

fuel filler lid opener button.3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1).4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel

filler cap (2) counterclockwise.5. Refuel as needed.

Closing the fuel filler lid1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise

until it “clicks” once. This indicatesthat the cap is securely tightened.

2. Close the fuel filler lid and push itin lightly making sure that it issecurely closed.

✽✽ NOTICEThere may be an intermittent noisenear the refueling hole while theengine is idling if the fuel cap is notclosed securely. This occurs normal-ly with the OBD system.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen refueling on unlevel ground,the fuel gauge may not point to the Fposition.It is not a malfunction. If you moveyour vehicle to a level ground, the fuelgauge will move to the full position.

FUEL FILLER LID

OUM044025

OUMA044024


464

Always check that the fuel cap isinstalled securely to prevent fuelspillage in the event of an accident.

✽✽ NOTICETighten the cap until it clicks once,otherwise the fuel cap open warningindicator light will illuminate

WARNING - Fire/explo-sion risk

Read and follow all warningsposted at the gas station facili-ty. Failure to follow all warningsmay result in severe personalinjury, severe burns or deathdue to fire or explosion.

WARNING - Static electricity

• Before touching the fuel noz-zle, you should eliminatepotentially dangerous staticelectricity discharge by touch-ing another metal part of thevehicle, a safe distance awayfrom the fuel filler neck, noz-zle, or other gas source.

• Do not get back into a vehicleonce you have begun refuelingsince you can generate staticelectricity by touching, rubbingor sliding against any item orfabric (polyester, satin, nylon,etc.) capable of producing stat-ic electricity. Static electricitydischarge can ignite fuelvapors resulting in rapid burn-ing. If you must reenter thevehicle, you should once againeliminate potentially danger-ous static electricity dischargeby touching a metal part of thevehicle, away from the fuel fillerneck, nozzle or other gasolinesource.

WARNING - RefuelingAlways remove the fuel capcarefully and slowly. If the capis venting fuel or if you hear ahissing sound, wait until thecondition stops before com-pletely removing the cap. Ifpressurized fuel sprays out, itcan cover your clothes or skinand subject you to the risk offire and burns.

4 47


Make sure to refuel your vehicleaccording to the “Fuel requirements”suggested in chapter 1.If the fuel filler cap requires replace-ment, use only a genuine Kia cap orthe equivalent specified for your vehi-cle. An incorrect fuel filler cap canresult in a serious malfunction of thefuel system or emission control sys-tem.

WARNING - Cell phonefires

Do not use cellular phoneswhile refueling. Electric currentand/or electronic interferencefrom cellular phones can poten-tially ignite fuel vapors causinga fire.

WARNING - SmokingDO NOT use matches or a lighterand DO NOT SMOKE or leave a litcigarette in your vehicle while ata gas station especially duringrefueling. Automotive fuel ishighly flammable and can, whenignited, result in fire.

WARNING - Refueling &Vehicle fires

When refueling, always shut theengine off. Sparks produced byelectrical components relatedto the engine can ignite fuelvapors causing a fire. Oncerefueling is complete, check tomake sure the filler cap andfiller door are securely closed,before starting the engine.

CAUTION - Exterior paintDo not spill fuel on the exteriorsurfaces of the vehicle. Anytype of fuel spilled on paintedsurfaces may damage the paint.

WARNING - Portable fuelcontainer

When using an approved portablefuel container, be sure to placethe container on the ground priorto refueling. Static electricity dis-charge from the container canignite fuel vapors causing a fire.Once refueling has begun, con-tact with the vehicle should bemaintained until the filling is com-plete. Use only approved portableplastic fuel containers designedto carry and store gasoline.


484

Emergency fuel filler lid release

If the fuel filler lid does not openusing the remote fuel filler lidrelease, you can open it manually.Remove the panel in the cargo area.Pull the handle out slightly.

CAUTIONDo not pull the handle exces-sively, otherwise the luggagearea trim or release handle maybe damaged.

OUM044026

4 49


If your vehicle is equipped with asunroof, you can slide or tilt yoursunroof with the sunroof control leverlocated on the overhead console.The sunroof can be operated forapproximately 30 seconds after theignition key is removed or turned tothe ACC or LOCK (or OFF) position.However, if the front door is opened,the sunroof cannot be operated evenwithin the 30 second period.

In cold and wet climates, the sunroofmay not work properly due to freez-ing conditions.After the vehicle is washed or in arainstorm, be sure to wipe off anywater that is on the sunroof beforeoperating it.

The sunroof cannot slide when it is inthe tilt position nor can it be tiltedwhile in an open or slide position.

PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTION - Sunroof control lever

Do not continue to press the sun-roof control lever after the sun-roof is fully opened, closed, ortilted. Damage to the motor orsystem components could occur.

CAUTION - Sunroof motordamage

To prevent damage to the sun-roof, periodically remove anydirt that may accumulate on theguide rail.

OUM044027

WARNING - Roof cargoDo not operate the sunroofwhile using the roof rack totransport cargo.This may causethe cargo to come loose anddistract the driver.


504

Sunroof open warning (if equipped)

If the driver removes the ignition key(smart key: turns off the engine)when the sunroof is not fully closed,the warning chime will sound for afew seconds and a message willappear on the LCD display or warn-ing indicator will illuminate.Close the sunroof securely whenleaving your vehicle.

WARNING • Never adjust the sunroof or

sunshade while driving. Thiscould result in loss of controland an accident that maycause death, serious injury, orproperty damage.

• Do not allow children to oper-ate the sunroof.

CAUTIONDo not extend any luggage outside the sunroof while driving.

OUM044134

CAUTIONMake sure the sunroof is fullyclosed when leaving your vehi-cle. If the sunroof is opened, rainor snow may leak through thesunroof and wet the interior.

4 51


Sunshade

To open the sunshadePull the sunroof control lever back-ward to the 1st detent position.

To close the sunshade when thesunroof glass is closedPush the sunroof control lever for-ward or pull it down to the 1st detentposition.To stop the sliding at any point, pressthe sunshade control switch momen-tarily.

✽✽ NOTICEWrinkles formed on the sunshade asmaterial characteristic are normal.

Sliding the sunroof

When the sunshade is closedPull the sunroof control lever back-ward to the 2nd detent position, boththe sunshade and sunroof glass willslide all the way open. To stop thesunroof movement at any point, pullor push the sunroof control glasslever momentarily.

OUM044028

CAUTION - Automaticsunroof shade

• Do not pull or push the sun-shade by hand as such actionmay damage the sunshade orcause it to malfunction.

• Close the sunroof when driv-ing in dusty environments.Dust may cause a malfunctionof the vehicle system.

OUM044029


524

When the sunshade is openedPull the sunroof glass control leverbackward to the 1st or 2nd detentposition, the sunroof glass will beopened.To stop the sunroof glass movementat any point, pull or push the sunroofcontrol lever momentarily.

Automatic reversal

If an object or part of the body isdetected while the sunroof is closingautomatically, it will reverse the direc-tion, and then stop.The auto reverse function does notwork if a tiny obstacle is between thesliding glass and the sunroof sash.You should always check that all pas-sengers and objects are away fromthe sunroof before closing it.

OXM049029

WARNING - SunroofOperation

When closing the sunroof, makesure there are no body parts inthe movement range of the slid-ing roof. Parts of the body couldbecome trapped or crushed.

WARNING - SunroofDo not extend the face, neck,arms or body outside the sun-roof while driving.

4 53


Tilting the sunroof

When the sunshade is closedPush the sunroof control lever upward,the sunshade will slide halfway openthen the sunroof glass will tilt.To stop the sunroof movement at anypoint, pull or push the sunroof controllever momentarily.

When the sunshade is openedPush the sunroof control leverupward, the sunroof glass will tilt.To stop the sunroof movement at anypoint, pull or push the sunroof controllever momentarily.

Closing the sunroofTo close the sunroof glass withthe sunshade Push the sunroof control lever for-ward or downward to the 2nd detentposition. The sunroof glass and sun-shade will close automatically.To stop the sunroof movement at anypoint, pull or push the sunroof controllever momentarily.

To close the sunroof glass onlyPush the sunroof control lever for-ward or downward to the 1st detentposition. The sunroof glass will closeautomatically.To stop the sunroof movement at anypoint, pull or push the sunroof controllever momentarily.

OUM044030CAUTION - Sunroof motordamage

If you try to open the sunroofwhen the temperature is belowfreezing or when the sunroof iscovered with snow or ice, theglass or the motor could bedamaged.

CAUTION• To avoid damage to the sun-

roof periodically remove anydirt that may accumulate onthe guide rail.

• If you drive with the sunroofopened right after a vehiclewash or rain, water may getinside the vehicle and causedamage to the interior.


544

Resetting the sunroofWhenever the vehicle battery is dis-connected or discharged, you mustreset your sunroof system as follows:


2. Close the sunshade and sunroofcompletely if opened.

3. Release the sunroof control lever.4. Push the sunroof control lever for-

ward in the direction of close forabout (5 ~10 seconds) until the sun-roof operates as follows: SUN-SHADE OPENS → GLASS TILTSUP → SOUND OF MOTOR’S‘CLICK’ and then release the button.[Do not release the button on move-ment. (initialization of reset will fail)]

5. Push the sunroof control lever for-ward in the direction of close forabout (1 ~2 seconds), until the sun-roof operates as follows: GLASSCLOSE → GLASS OPEN →GLASS/SUNSHADE CLOSE andthen release the button. [Do notrelease the button on movement.(initialization failed)]

When this is complete, the sunroofsystem has been reset and onetouch open and close should berestored.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you do not reset the sunroof, itmay not work properly.

4 55


Electric power steering (EPS)The power steering uses a motor toassist you in steering the vehicle. Ifthe engine is off or if the power steer-ing system becomes inoperative, thevehicle may still be steered, but it willrequire increased steering effort.The motor driven power steering iscontrolled by a power steering con-trol unit which senses the steeringwheel torque and vehicle speed tocommand the motor.The steering becomes heavier asthe vehicle’s speed increases andbecomes lighter as the vehicle’sspeed decreases for optimum steer-ing control.Should you notice any change in theeffort required to steer during normalvehicle operation, have the powersteering checked by an authorizedKia dealer.

• If the Electric Power SteeringSystem does not operate normally,the warning light will illuminate onthe instrument cluster.The steeringwheel may require increasedsteering effort. Take your vehicle toan authorized Kia dealer and havethe vehicle checked as soon aspossible.

• When you operate the steeringwheel in low temperature, noisemay occur. If temperature rises, thenoise will likely disappear. This is anormal condition.

• When the vehicle is stationary, andthe steering wheel is turned all theway to the left or right continuous-ly, the steering wheel becomesharder to turn. The power assist islimited to protect the motor fromoverheating.As time passes, the steering wheelwill return to its normal condition.

✽✽ NOTICEThe following symptoms may occurduring normal vehicle operation:• The EPS warning light does not

illuminate.• The steering gets heavy immedi-

ately after turning the ignitionswitch on. This happens as the sys-tem performs the EPS systemdiagnostics. When the diagnosticsare completed, the steering wheelwill return to its normal condition.

• A click noise may be heard fromthe EPS relay after the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON orLOCK (OFF) position.

• A motor noise may be heard whenthe vehicle is at a stop or at a lowdriving speed.

• If the Electric Power SteeringSystem does not operate normally,the warning light will illuminate onthe instrument cluster. The steer-ing wheel may become difficult tocontrol or operate abnormally.Take your vehicle to an authorizedKia dealer and have the vehiclechecked as soon as possible.

(Continued)

STEERING WHEEL


564

(Continued)• When you operate the steering

wheel in low temperature, abnor-mal noise may occur. If tempera-ture rises, the noise will likely dis-appear. This is a normal condition.

• When the charging system warninglight comes on due to the low volt-age (When the alternator or bat-tery) does not operate normally ormalfunctions), the steering wheelmay require increased steeringeffort.

Tilt and telescopic steering Tilt and telescopic steering allowsyou to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive.You can also raise itto give your legs more room whenyou exit and enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be posi-tioned so that it is comfortable foryou to drive, while permitting you tosee the instrument panel warninglights and gauges.

To change the steering wheel angle,pull down the lock-release lever (1),adjust the steering wheel to thedesired angle (2) and height (3, ifequipped) then pull up the lock-release lever to lock (4) the steeringwheel in place. Be sure to adjust thesteering wheel to the desired posi-tion before driving.

✽✽ NOTICEAfter adjustment, sometimes thelock release lever may not lock thesteering wheel. It is not a malfunc-tion. This occurs when two gears arenot engaged correctly. In this case,adjust the steering wheel again andthen lock the steering wheel.

OUMA044031

WARNING - Steeringwheel adjustment

Never adjust the angle andheight of the steering wheelwhile driving. You may losesteering control.

4 57


Heated steering wheel (if equipped)

With the ignition switch in the ONposition, pressing the heated steer-ing wheel button warms the steeringwheel. The indicator on the buttonwill illuminate.To turn the heated steering wheel off,press the button once again. Theindicator on the button will turn off.

✽✽ NOTICEThe heated steering wheel will turnoff automatically approximately 30minutes after the heated steeringwheel is turned on.

CAUTION• Do not install any type of grip

cover for the steering wheel, itmay impair the function of theheated steering wheel system.

• When cleaning the heatedsteering wheel, do not use anorganic solvent such as paintthinner, benzene, alcohol andgasoline. Doing so may dam-age the surface of the steeringwheel.

• If the surface of steeringwheel is damaged by sharpobject, damage to the heatedsteering wheel componentscould occur.

WARNINGIf the steering wheel becomestoo warm, turn the system off.The heated steering wheel maycause burns even at low tem-peratures, especially if used forlong periods of time.

OUMA046032


584

Horn

To sound the horn, press the hornsymbols on your steering wheel.Check the horn regularly to be sure itoperates properly.

✽✽ NOTICETo sound the horn, press the areaindicated by the horn symbol onyour steering wheel (see illustra-tion). The horn will operate onlywhen this area is pressed.

OUMA044033

4 59


MIRRORSInside rearview mirrorAdjust the rearview mirror so that thecenter view through the rear windowis seen. Make this adjustment beforeyou start driving.Do not place objects in the rear seator cargo area which would interferewith your vision through the rear win-dow.

Day/night rearview mirror (if equipped)

Make this adjustment before youstart driving and while the day/nightlever is in the day position.Pull the day/night lever toward you toreduce the glare from the headlightsof the vehicles behind you duringnight driving.Remember that you lose somerearview clarity in the night position.

WARNING - Mirror adjust-ment

Do not adjust the rearview mir-ror while the vehicle is moving.This could result in loss of con-trol.

WARNINGDo not modify the inside mirrorand don’t install a wide mirror. Itcould result in injury, during anaccident or deployment of theair bag.

OAM049023

Day

Night


604

Electric chromatic mirror (ECM) (if equipped)The electric rearview mirror automat-ically controls the glare from theheadlights of the vehicles behind youin nighttime or low light driving condi-tions.The sensor mounted in the mir-ror senses the light level around thevehicle, and automatically controlsthe headlight glare from the vehiclesbehind you.When the engine is running, theglare is automatically controlled bythe sensor mounted in the rearviewmirror.Whenever the shift lever is shiftedinto reverse (R), the mirror will auto-matically go to the brightest setting inorder to improve the drivers viewbehind the vehicle.

To operate the electric rearview mirror:

• The mirror defaults to the ON posi-tion whenever the ignition switch isturned on.

• Press the ON/OFF button (1) toturn the automatic dimming func-tion off. The mirror indicator lightwill turn off.Press the ON/OFF button (1) toturn the automatic dimming func-tion on. The mirror indicator lightwill illuminate.

CAUTION - Cleaning mirror

When cleaning the mirror, use apaper towel or similar materialdampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleanerdirectly on the mirror. It maycause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.

OUMA044407

Indicator Sensor

4 61


Electric chromatic mirror (ECM)with compass (if equipped)

1. Feature Control Button2. Status Indicator LED3. Rear Light Sensor4. Compass Display Window

Automatic-Dimming Night VisionSafety™ (NVS®) Mirror

The NVS® Mirror in your vehicle isthe most advanced way to reduceannoying glare in the rearview mirrorduring any driving situation. For moreinformation regarding NVS® mirrorsand other applications, please referto the Gentex website:www.gentex.com

✽✽ NOTICEThe NVS® Mirror automaticallyreduces glare during driving condi-tions based upon light levels moni-tored in front of the vehicle andfrom the rear of the vehicle. Theselight sensors are visible throughopenings in the front and rear of themirror case. Any object that wouldobstruct either light sensor willdegrade the automatic dimmingcontrol feature.

Automatic-dimming functionYour mirror will automatically dimupon detecting glare from the vehi-cles traveling behind you. The auto-dimming function can be controlledby pushing the ON/OFF Button:

1. Pressing the button turns the auto-dimming function OFF which isindicated by the green StatusIndicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing the button again turnsthe auto-dimming function ONwhich is indicated by the greenStatus Indicator LED turning on.

✽✽ NOTICEThe mirror defaults to the ON posi-tion each time the vehicle is started.

OUMA044407


624

Z-Nav™ Compass Display

The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle isalso equipped with a Z-Nav™Compass that shows the vehicleCompass heading in the DisplayWindow using the 8 basic cardinalheadings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).

Compass functionThe Compass can be turned ON andOFF and will remember the last statewhen the ignition is cycled. To turnthe display feature ON/OFF:1. Press and release the button to

turn the display feature OFF.2. Press and release the button

again to turn the display back ON.Additional options can be set withpress and hold sequences of thebutton and are detailed in this sec-tion.

There is a difference between mag-netic north and true north. The com-pass in the mirror can compensatefor this difference when it knows theMagnetic Zone in which it is operat-ing. This is set either by the dealer orby the user. The operating ZoneNumbers for North America areshown in the figure on the followingsection.

4 63


To adjust the Zone setting:1. Determine the desired Zone

Number based upon your currentlocation on the Zone Map.

2. Press and hold the button for morethan 3 but less than 6 seconds,the current Zone Number willappear on the display.

3. Pressing and holding the buttonagain will cause the numbers toincrement (Note: they will repeat…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasingthe button when the desired ZoneNumber appears on the displaywill set the new Zone.

4. Within about 5 seconds the com-pass will start displaying a com-pass heading again.

There are some conditions that cancause changes to the vehicle mag-nets, such as installing a ski rack ora CB antenna. Body repair work onthe vehicle can also cause changesto the vehicle's magnetic field. Inthese situations, the compass willneed to be re-calibrated to quicklycorrect for these changes. To re-cali-brate the compass:

B520C05NF


644

1. Press and hold the button for morethan 6 seconds. When the com-pass memory is cleared a "C" willappear in the display.

2. To calibrate the compass, drivethe vehicle in 2 complete circles atless than 8 km/h (5 mph).

Electrochromic mirror withHomeLink system (if equipped)

To operate the electric rearview mirror

Press the I button (1) to turn theautomatic- dimming function on. Themirror indicator light will illuminate.Press the O button (2) to turn theautomatic- dimming function off. Themirror indicator light will turn off.

HomeLink® Wireless Control System

Your new mirror comes with an integrated HomeLink UniversalTransceiver, which allows you to pro-gram the mirror to activate yourgarage door(s), estate gate, homelighting, etc. The mirror actuallylearns the codes from your variousexisting transmitters.

OHD046025N

OHD046305N

Glare detection sensorIndicator light

Homelink buttons

4 65


Retain the original transmitter forfuture programming procedures (i.e.,new vehicle purchase). It is also sug-gested that upon the sale of the vehi-cle, the programmed HomeLink but-tons be erased for security purposes(follow step 1 in the “Programming”portion of this text).

ProgrammingYour vehicle may require the ignitionswitch to be turned to the ACC posi-tion for programming and/or opera-tion of HomeLink. It is also recom-mended that a new battery bereplaced in the hand-held transmitterof the device being programmed toHomeLink for quicker training andaccurate transmission of the radio-frequency.Follow these steps to train yourHomeLink mirror: 1. When programming the buttons for

the first time, press and hold theleft and center buttons ( , )simultaneously until the indicatorlight begins to flash after approxi-mately 20 seconds. (This proce-dure erases the factory-set defaultcodes. Do not perform this stepwhen programming the additionalHomeLink buttons.)

OHD046306N

Flashing


664

✽✽ NOTICEFor non rolling code garage dooropeners, follow steps 2 - 3. For rolling code garage door open-ers, follow steps 2 - 6. For Canadian Programming, pleasefollow the Canadian Programmingsection.For help with determining whetheryour garage door opener is non-rolling code or rolling code,please refer to the garage door open-ers owner’s manual or contactHomeLink customer service at 1-800-355-3515.

2. Press and hold the button on theHomeLink system you wish totrain and the button on the trans-mitter while the transmitter isapproximately 2-8 cm (1 to 3 inch-es) away from the mirror. Do notrelease the buttons until step 3has been completed.

3. The HomeLink indicator light willflash, first slowly and then rapidly.When the indicator light flashesrapidly, both buttons may bereleased. (The rapid flashing lightindicates successful programmingof the new frequency signal.)

✽✽ NOTICESome gate and garage door openersmay require you to replace step #3with the “cycling” procedure notedin the “Canadian Programming”section of this document.

OHD046307N

Flashing

2-8 cm

Transmitter

4 67


Rolling code programmingTo train a garage door opener (orother rolling code equipped devices)with the rolling code feature, followthese instructions after completingthe “Programming” portion of thistext. (A second person may make thefollowing training procedures quicker& easier.)4. Locate the “learn” or “smart” but-

ton on the device’s motor headunit. Exact location and color ofthe button may vary by productbrand. If there is difficulty locatingthe “learn” or “smart” button, refer-ence the device’s owner’s manualor contact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.

5. Press and release the “learn” or“smart” button on the device’smotor head unit. You have 30 sec-onds to complete step number 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmlypress and release the pro-grammed HomeLink button up tothree times. The rolling codeequipped device should now rec-ognize the HomeLink signal andactivate when the HomeLink but-ton is pressed. The remaining twobuttons may now be programmedif this has not previously beendone. Refer to the “Programming”portion of this text.

Operating HomeLink To operate, simply press the programmed HomeLink button.Activation will now occur for thetrained product (garage door, securi-ty system, entry door lock, estategate, or home or office lighting). Forconvenience, the hand-held trans-mitter of the device may also be usedat any time. The HomeLink WirelessControls System (once programmed)or the original hand-held transmittermay be used to activate the device(e.g. garage door, entry door lock,etc.). In the event that there are stillprogramming difficulties, contactHomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or onthe internet at www.homelink.com.


684

Erasing programmed HomeLinkbuttons

To erase the three programmed but-tons (individual buttons cannot beerased):• Press and hold the left and center

buttons simultaneously, until theindicator light begins to flash(approximately 20 seconds).Release both buttons. Do not holdfor longer than 30 seconds.

HomeLink is now in the train (orlearning) mode and can be pro-grammed at any time.

Reprogramming a singleHomeLink buttonTo program a device to HomeLinkusing a HomeLink button previouslytrained, follow these steps:1. Press and hold the desired

HomeLink button. Do NOT releaseuntil step 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins toflash slowly (after 20 seconds),position the hand-held transmitter2-8 cm (1 to 3 inches) away fromthe HomeLink surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-heldtransmitter button (or press and“cycle” - as described in “CanadianProgramming”).

4. The HomeLink indicator light willflash, first slowly and then rapidly.When the indicator light begins toflash rapidly, release both buttons.

The previous device has now beenerased and the new device can beactivated by pushing the HomeLinkbutton that has just been pro-grammed. This procedure will notaffect any other programmedHomeLink buttons.

Canadian ProgrammingGarage & gate openersDuring programming, your hand-heldtransmitter may automatically stoptransmitting. Continue to press andhold the HomeLink button (notesteps 2 through 4 in the“Programming” portion of this text)while you press and re-press(“cycle”) your handheld transmitterevery two seconds until the frequen-cy signal has been learned. The indi-cator light will flash slowly and thenrapidly after several seconds uponsuccessful training.OHD046306N

Flashing

4 69


AccessoriesIf you would like additional informa-tion on the HomeLink WirelessControl System, HomeLink compati-ble products, or to purchase otheraccessories such as the HomeLink®

Lighting Package, please contactHomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or onthe internet at www.homelink.com.

FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3




The transceiver has been tested andcomplies with FCC and IndustryCanada rules. Changes or modifica-tions not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliancecould void the user's authority tooperate the device.

Outside rearview mirror Be sure to adjust the mirror anglesbefore driving.Your vehicle is equipped with bothleft-hand and right-hand outsiderearview mirrors. The mirrors can beadjusted remotely with the remoteswitch. The mirror heads can be fold-ed back to prevent damage during anautomatic vehicle wash or whenpassing through a narrow street.


704

The right outside rearview mirror isconvex. Objects seen in the mirrorare closer than they appear.Use your interior rearview mirror ordirect observation to determine theactual distance of following vehicleswhen changing lanes.

If the mirror is jammed with ice, donot adjust the mirror by force. Use anapproved spray de-icer (not radiatorantifreeze) to release the frozenmechanism or move the vehicle to awarm place and allow the ice to melt.

Adjusting outside rearview mirror

Adjusting the rearview mirrors:Press either the L (driver’s side) or R(passenger’s side) button (1) toselect the rearview mirror you wouldlike to adjust when the ignition switchis ACC or ON position.Use the mirror adjustment control (2)to position the selected mirror up,down, left or right.After adjustment, press the L or Rbutton (1) again to prevent inadver-tent adjustment.

WARNING - Mirror adjustment

Do not adjust or fold the outsiderearview mirrors while the vehi-cle is moving. This could resultin loss of control.

CAUTION - Rearview mirror

Do not scrape ice off the mirrorface; this may damage the sur-face of the glass. If ice shouldrestrict the movement of the mir-ror, do not force the mirror foradjustment. To remove ice, use adeicer spray, or a sponge or softcloth with very warm water.

OUMA044034

4 71


Reverse parking aid function (if equipped)

While the vehicle is moving rear-ward, the outside rearview mirror(s)will move downward to aid reverseparking. According to the position ofthe outside rearview mirror switch(1), the outside rearview mirror(s) willoperate as follows:

L/R : When the remote control outsiderearview mirror switch is select-ed to the L (left) or R (right) posi-tion, both outside rearview mir-rors will move downward.

Neutral : When the remote controloutside rearview mirrorswitch is placed in the mid-dle, the outside rearviewmirrors will not operatewhile the vehicle is movingrearward.

The outside rearview mirrors will auto-matically revert to their original posi-tions under the following conditions:1. The ignition switch is in the OFF

position.2. Shift lever is moved to any position

except R (Reverse).3. Remote control outside rearview

mirror switch is placed in the middle.

CAUTION - Outside mirror• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximumadjusting angles, but themotor continues to operatewhile the switch is pressed.Do not press the switch longerthan necessary, the motormay be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust theoutside rearview mirror byhand. Doing so may damagethe parts.

OUMA044035


724

Folding the outside rearview mirror

Electric type

The outside rearview mirror can befolded or unfolded by pressing theswitch when the ignition switch isACC or ON position as below.Left (1) : The mirror will unfold.Right (2) : The mirror will fold.

Center (AUTO, 3) :The mirror will fold or unfold auto-matically as follows:• The mirror will fold or unfold when

the door is locked or unlocked bythe folding key or smart key.

• The mirror will fold or unfold whenthe door is locked or unlocked by thebutton on the outside door handle.

• The mirror will unfold when youapproach the vehicle (all doorsclosed and locked) with a smartkey in possession. Manual type

To fold the outside rearview mirror,grasp the housing of the mirror andthen fold it toward the rear of thevehicle.

OUM044036

CAUTION - Electric typeoutside rearview mirror

The electric type outside rearviewmirror operates even though theengine start/stop button is in theOFF position. However, to preventunnecessary battery discharge,do not adjust the mirrors longerthan necessary while the engineis not running.In case it is an electric type out-side rearview mirror, don’t fold itby hand. It could cause motorfailure.

OUM044289L

4 73


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer

2. Speedometer

3. Engine coolant temperature gauge

4. Fuel gauge

5. LCD display

6. Warning and indicator lights

OUMA044100C/OUMA044101C

■■ Type A

❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differfrom the illustration.For more details, refer to the "Gauges" inthis chapter.

■■ Type B


744

Instrument Cluster ControlAdjusting Instrument ClusterIllumination

The brightness of the instrumentpanel illumination is changed bypressing the illumination control button("+" or "-") when the ignition switch orEngine Start/Stop button is ON, or thetale lights are turned on.

• If you hold the illumination controlbutton ("+" or "-"), the brightnesswill be changed continuously.

• If the brightness reaches to themaximum or minimum level, analarm will sound.

LCD Display Control

The LCD display modes can bechanged by using the control buttonson the steering wheel.

(1) : MODE button for changingthe LCD modes

(2) ▲ / ▼ : MOVE move scroll switchto select the items

(3) OK : SET/RESET button for setthe items or reset the items(Push scroll wheel switch :for Type B)

OUMA044209

OUM044265L

OUMA044037

■ Type A

■ Type B

4 75


GaugesSpeedometer

The speedometer indicates thespeed of the vehicle and is calibratedin kilometers per hour (km/h) and/ormiles per hour (mph).

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates theapproximate number of engine revo-lutions per minute (rpm).Use the tachometer to select the cor-rect shift points and to prevent lug-ging and/or over-revving the engine.

OYP044103N

CAUTION - Red zoneDo not operate the engine with-in the tachometer's RED ZONE.This may cause severe enginedamage.

OUM044103L

OUM044102L

■ Type A

■ Type B


764

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge

This gauge indicates the tempera-ture of the engine coolant when theignition switch or Engine Start/Stopbutton is ON.

If the gauge pointer moves beyondthe normal range area toward the “H”position, it indicates overheating thatmay damage the engine.Do not continue driving with an over-heated engine. If your vehicle over-heats, refer to “If the EngineOverheats” in chapter 6.

Fuel Gauge

This gauge indicates the approxi-mate amount of fuel remaining in thefuel tank.

✽✽ NOTICE• The fuel tank capacity is given in

chapter 8.• The fuel gauge is supplemented by

a low fuel warning light, whichwill illuminate when the fuel tankis nearly empty.

• On inclines or curves, the fuelgauge pointer may fluctuate or thelow fuel warning light may comeon earlier than usual due to themovement of fuel in the tank.

WARNING - Hot radiatorNever remove the radiator capwhen the engine is hot. Theengine coolant is under pres-sure and could cause severeburns. Wait until the engine iscool before adding coolant tothe reservoir.

OUM044105


OUM044106


4 77


✽✽ NOTICEFuel display may not be accurate ifyou are filling in sloping places.

Odometer

The odometer Indicates the total dis-tance that the vehicle has been driv-en and should be used to determinewhen periodic maintenance shouldbe performed.- Odometer range : 0 ~ 1,599,999

kilometers or 999,999 miles.

Outside Temperature Gauge

This gauge indicates the current out-side air temperatures by 1°C (1°F).- Temperature range : -40°C ~ 60°C

(-40°F ~ 140°F)The outside temperature on the dis-play may not change immediatelylike a general thermometer to pre-vent the driver from being inattentive.

WARNING - Fuel gaugeStop and obtain additional fuelas soon as possible after thewarning light comes on or whenthe gauge indicator comesclose to the E level. Running outof fuel can expose vehicle occu-pants to danger.

CAUTION - Low fuelAvoid driving with an extremelylow fuel level. Running out offuel could cause the engine tomisfire damaging the catalyticconverter.

OYP044113K

■ Type A

OUM044114

■ Type BOYP044114K

■ Type A

OUM044115

■ Type B


784

To change the temperature unit (from°C to °F or from °F to °C)The temperature unit can bechanged by using the "UserSettings" mode of the LCD display.

❈ For more details, refer to “LCDDisplay” in this chapter.

Transaxle Shift IndicatorAutomatic Transaxle Shift Indicator

This indicator displays which auto-matic transaxle shift lever is selected.• Park : P• Reverse : R• Neutral : N• Drive : D• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Icy Road Warning Indicator

This warning light is to warn the driv-er the road may be icy.When the following conditions occur,the warning light (including OutsideTemperature Gauge) blinks 10 timesand then illuminates, and also warn-ing chime sounds 3 times.- The temperature on the Outside

Temperature Gauge is belowapproximately 4°C (40°F).

If the icy road warning light appearswhile driving, you should drive moreattentively and safely refraining fromover-speeding, rapid acceleration,sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.

OUM04411


OUMA044430


4 79


LCD DISPLAY

❈ For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.

LCD Modes

Modes Symbol Explanation

Trip ComputerThis mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.

Turn By Turn(if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the navigation.

ASCC/LDWS(if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the Advanced Smart Cruise Control system (ASCC)and Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS).For more details, refer to "Advanced Smart Cruise Control system (ASCC)" or "Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)" in chapter 5.

A/V (if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the A/V system.

Information

This mode informs of service interval (km or days).

This mode informs of warning messages related to washer fluid or malfunction of Blind Spot Detection system (BSD) and so on.

When any door is not closed securely, this symbol is illuminated.

User Settings In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps and so on.


804

The trip computer is a microcomput-er-controlled driver information sys-tem that displays information relatedto driving.

✽✽ NOTICESome driving information stored inthe trip computer (for exampleAverage Vehicle Speed) resets if thebattery is disconnected.

Trip Modes Fuel Economy

Range (1)

• The range is the estimated dis-tance the vehicle can be drivenwith the remaining fuel.- Distance range : 1 ~ 9,999 km or

1 ~ 9,999 mi.• If the estimated distance is below

1km (1mi.), the trip computer willdisplay “---” as range.

• If the vehicle is not on level groundor the battery power has beeninterrupted, the range function maynot operate correctly.

TRIP MODES (TRIP COMPUTER)

Digital speedometer

To change the trip mode, scroll theTRIP scroll switch (▲/▼) in the tripcomputer mode.

• Tripmeter [A]• Average Vehicle Speed [A]• Elapsed Time [A]

TRIP A

• Tripmeter [B]• Average Vehicle Speed [B]• Elapsed Time [B]

TRIP B

• Range• Average Fuel Economy• Instant Fuel Economy

FUEL ECONOMY

OYP044147C

4 81


• The range may differ from the actu-al driving distance as it is an esti-mate of the available driving dis-tance.

• The trip computer may not registeradditional fuel if less than 6 liters(1.6 gallons) of fuel are added tothe vehicle.

• The fuel economy and range mayvary significantly based on drivingconditions, driving habits, and con-dition of the vehicle.

Average Fuel Economy (2)

• The average fuel economy is calcu-lated by the total driving distanceand fuel consumption since the lastaverage fuel economy reset.- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9

MPG or L/100km• The average fuel economy can be

reset both manually and automati-cally.

Manual resetTo reset average fuel economy manu-ally, press the OK button (reset) onthe steering wheel for more than 1second when the average fuel econ-omy is displayed.

Automatic resetTo make the average fuel economybe reset automatically whenever refu-eling, select the “Auto Reset” mode inUser Setting menu of the LCD display(Refer to “LCD Display”).

Under “Auto Reset” mode, the aver-age fuel economy will be cleared tozero (---) when the vehicle speedexceeds 1 km/h after refueling morethan 6 liters (1.6 gallons).

✽✽ NOTICEThe average fuel economy is not dis-played for more accurate calculationif the vehicle does not drive morethan 10 seconds or 50 meters (0.03miles) since the ignition switch orEngine Start/Stop button is turnedto ON.

Instant Fuel Economy (3)

• This mode displays the instant fueleconomy during the last few sec-onds when the vehicle speed ismore than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).- Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 50 MPG

or 0 ~ 30 L/100km


824

Trip A/B

Tripmeter (1)

• The tripmeter is the total driving dis-tance since the last tripmeter reset.- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 km

or mi.To reset the tripmeter, press the OKbutton (reset) on the steering wheelfor more than 1 second when thetripmeter is displayed.

Average Vehicle Speed (2)

• The average vehicle speed is cal-culated by the total driving dis-tance and driving time since thelast average vehicle speed reset.- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 km/h or MPH

To reset the average vehicle speed,press the OK button (reset) on thesteering wheel for more than 1 sec-ond when the average vehicle speedis displayed.

✽✽ NOTICE• The average vehicle speed is not dis-

played if the driving distance is lessthan 50 meters (0.03 miles) or thedriving time is less than 10 secondssince the ignition switch or EngineStart/Stop button is turned to ON.

• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,the average vehicle speed keepsgoing while the engine is running.

Timer (3)

• The elapsed time is the total driv-ing time since the last elapsed timereset.- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59

To reset elapsed time, press the OKbutton (reset) on the steering wheelfor more than 1 second when theelapsed time is displayed.

✽✽ NOTICEEven if the vehicle is not in motion,the elapsed time keeps going whilethe engine is running.

OUMA044408C

4 83


Digital speedometer

This mode displays the currentspeed of the vehicle.

One time driving informationmode

This display shows trip distance (1),average fuel economy (2) and theestimated distance that the vehiclecan be driven with the remaining fuel(3).This information is displayed for afew seconds when you turn off theengine and then goes off automati-cally. The information provided is cal-culated according to each trip.

If the estimated distance is below1km, (1mi.) the range (3) will displayas "---" and a refuel message willappear (4).

OUMA044423C

OYP044193C


844

Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped)

This mode displays the state of thenavigation.

ASCC/LDWS Mode (if equipped)

This mode displays the state of theAdvanced Smart Cruise Control(ASCC) and Lane DepartureWarning System (LDWS).

For more information, refer to"Advanced Smart Cruise Control(ASCC)" and "Lane DepartureWarning System (LDWS)" in chapter5.

A/V Mode (if equipped)

This mode displays the state of theA/V system.

OUM054126L

OYP044273NOUMA057232

4 85


Service ModeService Interval

Service interval

It calculates and displays when youneed a scheduled maintenanceservice (km or days).If the remaining km or time reaches1,500 km (900 mi.) or 30 days.Service interval message is dis-played for several seconds each timeyou set the ignition switch or EngineStart/Stop Button to the ON position.

Service required

If you do not have your vehicle serv-iced according to the preset serviceinterval.“Service required” message is dis-played for several seconds each timeyou set the ignition switch or EngineStart/Stop Button to the ON position.

To reset the service interval to thekm and days you preset before:Press the OK button (reset) for morethan 1 second.

Service interval OFF

If the service interval is not set"Service interval OFF” message isdisplayed on the LCD display.If you want to activate Service inter-val function, set the service intervalin the User setting mode.For more details, refer to “User set-ting mode" in this chapter.

OYP044314C

OYP044119C OYP044122N


864

✽✽ NOTICE If any of the following conditionsoccur, the km and days may beincorrect.- The battery cable is disconnected.- The fuse switch is turned off.- The battery is discharged.

Master Warning Mode

• This warning light informs the driv-er of the following situations- Low washer fluid- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-

function (if equipped)- Lane Departure warning system

(LDWS) malfunction (if equipped)- Autonomous Emergency Braking

(AEB) malfunction (if equipped)- Advanced smart cruise control

system (ASCC) malfunction (ifequipped)

- Service reminder (if equipped)- Lamp malfunction and so on.

The Master Warning Light illumi-nates when more than one of theabove warning situations occur. Atthis time, the LCD Modes Icon willchange from ( ) to ( ).If the warning situation is solved, themaster warning light will be turned offand the LCD Modes Icon will bechanged back to its previous icon ( ).(ex : refill the washer fluid)

User Settings ModeDescription

In this mode, you can change settingof the doors, lights, and so on.

OYP044161N

4 87


Driving AssistSmart Cruise Control Response (if equipped)

Choose the sensitivity of the smartcruise control.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (if equipped)

If this item is checked, rear crosstraffic alert function will be activated.

Autonomous Emergency Braking(AEB) (if equipped)

If this item is checked, Autonomousemergency braking function will beactivated.

Forward Collision Warning (if equipped)

If this item is checked, forward collisionwarning function will be activated.

Door / LiftgateAutomatically lock

• Disable:The auto door lock operation willbe deactivated.

• Enable on speed:All doors will be automaticallylocked when the vehicle speedexceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).

• Enable on shift:All doors will be automaticallylocked if the automatic transaxleshift lever is shifted from the P(Park) position to the R (Reverse),N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.

Automatically unlock

• Disable:The auto door unlock operation willbe canceled.

• On Key out:All doors will be automaticallyunlocked when the ignition key isremoved from ignition switch orEngine Start/Stop Button is set tothe OFF position.

• On shift to P:All doors will be automaticallyunlocked if the automatic transaxleshift lever is shifted to the P (Park)position.


884

Two Press Unlock

• Off:The two press unlock function willbe deactivated.Therefore, all doorswill unlock if the door is unlocked.

• On:The driver’s door will unlock if thedoor is unlocked. When the door isunlocked again within 4 seconds,all doors will unlock.

Horn Feedback

• Off:The Horn feedback operation willbe deactivated.

• On:After locking the door by pressingthe lock button on the transmitter, ifyou press the lock button againwithin 4 seconds, the warningsound will operate once to indicatethat all doors are locked.

Power liftgate (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the power lift-gate function will be activated.

Smart Power liftgate (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the smartpower liftgate function will be activat-ed.

LightsOne touch turn signal

If this item is checked, the lanechange signals will blink 3, 5 or 7times when the turn signal lever ismoved slightly.• On : You can set the one touch turn

sginal function.• Off : The One touch turn signal

function will be deactivated.

Head Lamp Delay (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the headlampdelay function will be activated.

Welcome Light (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the welcomelight function of the pocket lamp willbe activated.

4 89


SoundPark assist system vol. (if equipped)

Adjust the Park Assist System vol-ume. (Level 1~3).

Blind spot detection Sound (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the blind spotdetection sound function will be acti-vated.

Welcome sound(if equipped)

If this item is checked, the welcomesound function will be activated.

Seat / SteeringSeat easy access (if equipped)

If this item is checked, the driver’sseat will automatically move forwardor rearward for the driver to enter orexit the vehicle comfortably.

Steering Position

If this item is checked, the warningfunction regarding the steering wheelalignment will be activated.

Service intervalOn this mode, you can activate theservice interval function with mileage(mi. or km) and period (months).• Off : The service interval function

will be deactivated.• On : You can set the service inter-

val (km and months).


904

Other featuresFuel economy auto reset

• Off :The average fuel economy will notreset automatically whenever refuel-ing.• On (Auto Reset) :The average fuel economy will resetautomatically when refueling.For more details, refer to “Tripmodes" in this chapter.

Wiper/Light Display (if equipped)

If this item checked, LCD displayshows a selected wiper/light modewhenever you changed its mode.

Sub-Scale (for Type B cluster)

If this item checked, Sub-scalespeedometer will be displayed in thecluster.

Fuel Economy Unit

Choose the fuel economy unit.

Temperature Unit

Convert the temperature unit from °Cto °F or from °F to °C.

Language

Choose the language you preferwithin the LCD.

Warning MessagesShift to P position (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminates ifyou try to turn off the engine withoutthe shift lever in P (Park) position.

• At this time, the Engine Start/StopButton turns to the ACC position (Ifyou press the Engine Start/StopButton once more, it will turn to theON position).

OYP044131N

4 91


Low Key Battery (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif the battery of the smart key isdischarged when the EngineStart/Stop Button changes to theOFF position.

Press start button while turnsteering (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif the steering wheel does notunlock normally when the EngineStart/Stop Button is pressed.

• It means that you should press theEngine Start/Stop Button while turn-ing the steering wheel right and left.

Press brake pedal to start engine (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif the Engine Start/Stop Buttonchanges to the ACC position twiceby pressing the button repeatedlywithout depressing the brake pedal.

• It means that you should depressthe brake pedal to start the engine.

OYP044125N OYP044271N OYP044133N


924

Key not in vehicle (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif the smart key is not in the vehiclewhen you press the EngineStart/Stop Button.

• It means that you should alwayshave the smart key with you.

Key not detected (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif the smart key is not detectedwhen you press the EngineStart/Stop Button.

Press start button again (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif you can not operate the EngineStart/Stop Button when there is aproblem with the Engine Start/StopButton system.

• It means that you could start theengine by pressing the EngineStart/ Stop Button once more.

• If the warning illuminates eachtime you press the EngineStart/Stop Button, have your vehi-cle inspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

OYP044121N OYP044123N OYP044127N

4 93


Press start button with key (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif you press the Engine Start/StopButton while the warning message“Key not detected” is illuminating.

• At this time, the immobilizer indica-tor light blinks.

Check fuse BRAKE SWITCH (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif the brake switch fuse is discon-nected.

• It means that you should replacethe fuse with a new one. If that isnot possible, you can start theengine by pressing the EngineStart/Stop Button for 10 seconds inthe ACC position.

Shift to P or N to start engine (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminatesif you try to start the engine withthe shift lever not in the P (Park) orN (Neutral) position.

✽✽ NOTICEYou can start the engine with theshift lever in the N (Neutral) position.But, for your safety, we recommendthat you start the engine with theshift lever in the P (Park) position.

OYP044129N OYP044137N OYP044145N


944

Door / Hood / liftgate Open

• It means that any door, hood, orliftgate is open.

Sunroof Open (if equipped)

• The warning message illuminatesif you turn off the engine and thenopen the driver's door when thesunroof is open.

Align steering wheel (if equipped)

• This warning message illuminatesif you start the engine when thesteering wheel is turned to morethan 90 degrees to the left or right.

• It means that you should turn thesteering wheel and make the angleof the steering wheel be less than30 degrees.

OUM044133 OUM044134 OYP044141N

4 95


Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)

• This warning message illuminateson the service reminder mode ifthe washer fluid level in the reser-voir is nearly empty.

• It means that you should refill thewasher fluid.

Turn on FUSE SWITCH

• This warning message illuminatesif the fuse switch on the fuse box isOFF.

• It means that you should turn thefuse switch on.

For more details, refer to “Fuses” inchapter 7.

Low Fuel

This warning message illuminates ifthe fuel tank is nearly empty.- When the low fuel level warning

light is illuminated.- When the trip computer displays

"--- km (or mile)" as range.Add fuel as soon as possible.

OYP044139N OYP044135N OYP044276N


964

Check high beam assist system(if equipped)

This warning message illuminates ifthere is a malfunction (burned-outbulb or circuit malfunction) with theheadlamp. In this case, have yourvehicle inspected by an authorizedKia dealer.

Check headlight

This warning message illuminates ifthere is a malfunction (burned-outbulb except LED lamp or circuit mal-function) with the headlamp. In thiscase, have your vehicle inspected byan authorized Kia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen replacing the bulb, use thesame wattage bulb. For more information, refer to“BULB WATTAGE” in chapter 8.

Check AEB system (if equipped)

• This warning message illuminatesif there is a malfunction with theAutonomous Emergency Braking(AEB) system. In this case, haveyour vehicle be inspected by anauthorized Kia dealer.

For more details, refer to"Autonomous Emergency Braking(AEB) system" in chapter 5.

OYP044180N

OUM044271L OUMA057225

4 97


Warning lights

✽✽ NOTICE - Warning lightsMake sure that all warning lightsare OFF after starting the engine. Ifany light is still ON, this indicates asituation that needs attention.

Air bag Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch orEngine Start/Stop Button to the ONposition.- It illuminates for approximately 6

seconds and then goes off.• When there is a malfunction with

the SRS.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

Seat Belt Warning Light

This warning light informs the driverthat the seat belt is not fastened.For more details, refer to the “SeatBelts” in chapter 3.

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS


984

Parking Brake & BrakeFluid Warning Light



seconds- It remains on if the parking brake

is applied.• When the parking brake is applied.• When the brake fluid level in the

reservoir is low.- If the warning light illuminates

with the parking brake released, itindicates the brake fluid level inreservoir is low.

If the brake fluid level in the reservoiris low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safelocation and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check thebrake fluid level immediately and addfluid as required (For more details,refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 7).Then check all brake componentsfor fluid leaks. If any leaks in thebrake system are still found, thewarning light remains on, or thebrakes do not operate properly, donot drive the vehicle.In this case, have your vehicletowed to an authorized Kia dealerand inspected.

Dual-diagonal braking system

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. Thismeans you still have braking on twowheels even if one of the dual sys-tems should fail.With only one of the dual systemsworking, more than normal pedaltravel and greater pedal pressure arerequired to stop the vehicle.Also, the vehicle will not stop in asshort a distance with only a portionof the brake system working.If the brakes fail while you are driv-ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-al engine braking and stop the vehi-cle as soon as it is safe to do so.

4 99


Driving the vehicle with a warninglight ON is dangerous. If the ParkingBrake & Brake Fluid Warning Lightilluminates when the parking brakereleased, it indicates that the brakefluid level is low.In this case, have your vehicle inspect-ed by an authorized Kia dealer.

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light




the ABS (The normal braking sys-tem will still be operational withoutthe assistance of the anti-lockbrake system).In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

ElectronicBrake forceDistribution(EBD) SystemWarning LightThese two warning lights illuminate atthe same time while driving:

• When the ABS and regular brakesystem may not work normally.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.


1004

✽✽ NOTICE - Electronic Brakeforce Distribution(EBD) SystemWarning Light

When the ABS Warning Light is onor both ABS and Parking Brake &Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,the speedometer, odometer, or trip-meter may not work. Also, the EPSWarning Light may illuminate andthe steering effort may increase ordecrease.In this case, have your vehicle inspect-ed by an authorized Kia dealer assoon as possible.

Electronic PowerSteering (EPS) WarningLight


• Once you set the ignition switch orEngine Start/Stop Button to the ONposition.- It remains on until the engine is

started.• When there is a malfunction with

the EPS.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

WARNING - ElectronicBrake force Distribution(EBD) System Warning Light

When both ABS and ParkingBrake & Brake Fluid WarningLights are on, the brake systemwill not work normally and youmay experience an unexpectedand dangerous situation duringsudden braking therebyincreasing the risk of a crash.In this case, avoid high speeddriving and abrupt braking.Have your vehicle inspected byan authorized Kia dealer assoon as possible therebyincreasing the risk of a crashand injury.

4 101


Malfunction IndicatorLamp (MIL)




the emission control system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

Charging SystemWarning Light




either the alternator or electricalcharging system.

If there is a malfunction with eitherthe alternator or electrical chargingsystem:


2. Turn the engine off and check thealternator drive belt for loosenessor breakage.If the belt is adjusted properly,there may be a problem in theelectrical charging system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION - CatalyticConverter Damage

If the Malfunction IndicatorLamp (MIL) illuminates, poten-tial catalytic converter damageis possible which could result inloss of engine power.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION - MalfunctionIndicatorLamp (MIL)

Driving with the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (MIL) on maycause damage to the emissioncontrol systems which couldaffect drivability and/or fueleconomy.


1024

Engine Oil PressureWarning Light



started.• When the engine oil pressure is low.

If the engine oil pressure is low:


2. Turn the engine off and check theengine oil level (For more details,refer to “Engine Oil” in section 7). Ifthe level is low, add oil as required.If the warning light remains onafter adding oil or if oil is not avail-able, have your vehicle inspectedby an authorized Kia dealer assoon as possible.

If the warning light stays on while theengine is running, it indicates thatthere may be serious engine dam-age or malfunction. In this case,1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is

safe to do so.2. Turn off the engine and check the

oil level. If the oil level is low, fill theengine oil to the proper level.

3. Start the engine again. If the warn-ing light stays on after the engineis started, turn the engine offimmediately. In this case, haveyour vehicle inspected by anauthorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION - Engine damage

If the engine is not stoppedimmediately after the engine oilpressure warning light is illumi-nated and stays on while theengine is running, seriousengine damage may result.

4 103


Low Fuel Level WarningLight


When the fuel tank is nearly empty.

If the fuel tank is nearly empty:

Add fuel as soon as possible.

Electronic Parking Brake(EPB) Warning Light(if equipped)




the EPB.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

✽✽ NOTICE - Electronic ParkingBrake (EPB)Warning Light

The Electronic Parking Brake(EPB) Warning Light may illumi-nate when the Electronic Stabilitycontrol (ESC) Indicator Light comeson to indicate that the ESC is notworking properly (This does notindicate malfunction of the EPB).

Master Warning light (if equipped)

• This warning light informs the driv-er of the following situations- Low washer fluid (if equipped)- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-

function (if equipped)- Lane Departure warning system

(LDWS) malfunction (if equipped)- Autonomous Emergency Braking

(AEB) malfunction (if equipped)- Advanced smart cruise control

system (ASCC) malfunction (if equipped)

- High beam assist system (HBA)malfunction (if equipped)

- Service required- Lamp malfunction and so on.

CAUTION - Low FuelLevel

Driving with the Low Fuel Levelwarning light on or with the fuellevel below “0 or E” can causethe engine to misfire and dam-age the catalytic converter (ifequipped).

EPB


1044

The Master Warning Light illumi-nates when more than one of theabove warning situations occur. Atthis time, the LCD Modes Icon willchange from ( ) to ( ).If the warning situation is solved, themaster warning light will be turned offand the LCD Modes Icon will bechanged back to its previous icon ( ).(ex : refill the washer fluid)

All Wheel Drive (AWD)Warning Light (if equipped)




the AWD system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

Autonomous EmergencyBraking (AEB) Warninglight (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When there is a malfunction withthe AEB.

In this case, have the vehicle inspect-ed by an authorized Kia dealer.

Adaptive Front LightingSystem (AFLS) WarningLight (if equipped)


• Once you set the Engine Start/StopButton to the ON position.- It illuminates for approximately 3


the AFLS.

If there is a malfunction with the AFLS:


2. Turn the engine off and restart theengine. If the warning light remainson, have your vehicle inspected byan authorized Kia dealer.

AFLS

4 105


Indicator LightsElectronic StabilityControl (ESC) IndicatorLightThis indicator light illuminates:



the ESC system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

This indicator light blinks:

While the ESC is operating.

For more details, refer to “ElectronicStability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) OFFIndicator Light



seconds and then goes off.• When you deactivate the ESC sys-

tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-ton.

For more details, refer to “ElectronicStability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.

Immobilizer IndicatorLight (Without Smart Key)


• When the vehicle detects theimmobilizer in your key properlywhile the ignition switch is ON.- At this time, you can start the

engine.- The indicator light goes off after

starting the engine.


• When there is a malfunction withthe immobilizer system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.


1064

Immobilizer IndicatorLight (With Smart Key)

This indicator light illuminates for upto 30 seconds:

• When the vehicle detects thesmart key in the vehicle properlywhile the Engine Start/Stop Buttonis ACC or ON.- At this time, you can start the

engine.- The indicator light goes off after

starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks for a fewseconds:

• When the smart key is not in thevehicle.- At this time, you can not start the

engine.

This indicator light illuminates for 2seconds and goes off:

• When the vehicle can not detectthe smart key which is in the vehi-cle while the Engine Start/StopButton is ON.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.


• When the battery of the smart keyis weak.- At this time, you can not start the

engine. However, you can startthe engine if you press the EngineStart/Stop Button with the smartkey. (For more details, refer to“Starting the Engine” in section 5).

• When there is a malfunction withthe immobilizer system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

Turn Signal IndicatorLight


• When you turn the turn signal lighton.

If any of the following occurs, theremay be a malfunction with the turnsignal system. In this case, have yourvehicle inspected by an authorizedKia dealer.

- The indicator light does not blinkbut illuminates.

- The indicator light blinks morerapidly.

- The indicator light does not illumi-nate at all.

4 107


High Beam IndicatorLight


• When the headlights are on and inthe high beam position

• When the turn signal lever is pulledinto the Flash-to-Pass position.

High beam assist indica-tor (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates :

• When the high-Beam is on with thelight switch in the AUTO light posi-tion.

• If your vehicle detects oncoming orpreceding vehicles, the High beamassist system will switch the highbeam to low beam automatically.

For more details, refer to "High beamassist" in this chapter.

Light ON Indicator Light


• When the tail lights or headlightsare on.

Front Fog IndicatorLight (if equipped)


• When the front fog lights are on.

Washer Fluid WarningLight (if equipped)


• When the washer fluid level in thereservoir is nearly empty.In this case, you should refill thewasher fluid.

Cruise Indicator Light (if equipped)


• When the cruise control system isenabled.

For more details, refer to “CruiseControl System” in chapter 5.

CRUISE


1084

Cruise SET IndicatorLight (if equipped)


• When the cruise control speed is set.

For more details, refer to “CruiseControl System” in chapter 5.

AUTO HOLD IndicatorLight (if equipped)


• [White] When you activate the autohold system by pressing the AUTOHOLD button.

• [Green] When you stop the vehiclecompletely by depressing thebrake pedal with the auto hold sys-tem activated.

• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-tion with the auto hold system.In this case, have your vehicleinspected by an authorized Kiadealer.

❈ For more details, refer to “AutoHold” in chapter 5.

All Wheel Drive (AWD)LOCK Indicator Light (if equipped)



seconds and then goes off.• When you select AWD Lock mode

by pressing the AWD LOCK button.- The AWD LOCK mode is to

increase the drive power whendriving on wet pavement, snowcovered roads and/or off-road.

SET AUTOHOLD

CAUTION - AWD LockMode

Do not use AWD LOCK mode ondry paved roads or highway, itcan cause noise, vibration ordamage of AWD related parts.

4 109


The rear parking assist systemassists the driver during backwardmovement of the vehicle by chiming ifany object is sensed within a distanceof 120 cm (47 in.) behind the vehicle.This system is a supplemental systemand it is not intended to nor does itreplace the need for extreme care andattention of the driver. The sensingrange and objects detectable by theback sensors are limited. Wheneverbacking-up, pay as much attention towhat is behind you as you would in avehicle without a rear parking assistsystem.

Operation of the rear parkingassist systemOperating condition• This system will activate when the

indicator on the rear parking assistOFF button is not illuminated. Ifyou desire to deactivate the rearparking assist system, press therear parking assist OFF buttonagain. (The indicator on the buttonwill illuminate.) To turn the systemon, press the button again. (Theindicator on the button will go off.)If the vehicle is moving at a speedover 5 km/h (3 mph), the systemmay not be activated correctly.

REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Rear parkingassist system

Never rely solely on the rearparking assist system. Alwaysperform a visual inspection tomake sure the vehicle is clear ofall obstructions before movingthe vehicle in any direction. Stopimmediately if you are aware ofa child anywhere near your vehi-cle. Some objects may not bedetected by the sensors, due tothe object's size or material.

OUMA044046Sensors


1104

• This system will activate whenbacking up with the ignition switchON.If the vehicle is moving at a speedover 5 km/h (3 mph), the systemmay not be activated correctly.

• The sensing distance while theback-up warning system is in oper-ation is approximately 120 cm (47in.) at the rear bumper center area,60 cm (23.5 in.) at the rear bumperboth side area.

• When more than two objects aresensed at the same time, the clos-est one will be recognized first.

Types of warning sound• When an object is 120 cm to 61 cm

(47 in. to 24 in.) from the rearbumper: Buzzer beeps intermit-tently.

• When an object is 60 cm to 31 cm(24 in. to 12 in.) from the rearbumper: Buzzer beeps more fre-quently.

• When an object is within 30 cm (12in.) of the rear bumper:Buzzer sounds continuously.

Non-operational conditions ofrear parking assist systemThe rear parking assist systemmay not operate properly when:1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It

will operate normally when themoisture has been cleared.)

2. The sensor is covered with foreignmatter, such as snow or water, orthe sensor cover is blocked. (It willoperate normally when the materi-al is removed or the sensor is nolonger blocked.)

3. Driving on uneven road surfaces(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps,gradient).

4. Objects generating excessivenoise (vehicle horns, loud motor-cycle engines, or truck air brakes)are within range of the sensor.

5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.6. Wireless transmitters or mobile

phones are within range of thesensor.

7. The sensor is covered with snow.8. Trailer towing

4 111


The detecting range may decreasewhen:1. The sensor is covered with foreign

matter such as snow or water.(The sensing range will return tonormal when removed.)

2. Outside air temperature isextremely hot or cold.

The following objects may not berecognized by the sensor:1. Sharp or slim objects such as

ropes, chains or small poles.2. Objects which tend to absorb the

sensor frequency such as clothes,spongy material or snow.

3. Undetectable objects smaller than1 m (40 in.) in height and narrowerthan 14 cm (6 in.) in diameter.

Rear parking assist systemprecautions• The rear parking assist system

may not sound consistentlydepending on the speed andshapes of the objects detected.

• The rear parking assist system maymalfunction if the vehicle bumperheight or sensor installation hasbeen modified or damaged. Anynon-factory installed equipment oraccessories may also interfere withthe sensor performance.

• The sensor may not recognizeobjects less than 40 cm (15 in.)from the sensor, or it may sense anincorrect distance. Use caution.

• When the sensor is frozen or cov-ered with snow, dirt, or water, thesensor may be inoperative until thematerial is removed using a softcloth.

• Do not push, scratch or strike thesensor. Sensor damage couldoccur.

✽✽ NOTICEThis system can only sense objectswithin the range and location of thesensors. It cannot detect objects inother areas where sensors are notinstalled. Also, small or slim objects,such as poles or objects locatedbetween sensors may not be detectedby the sensors.Always visually check behind thevehicle when backing up.Be sure to inform any drivers of thevehicle that may be unfamiliar withthe system regarding the systemscapabilities and limitations.


1124

Self-diagnosisIf you don’t hear an audible warningsound or if the buzzer sounds inter-mittently when shifting the gear to theR (Reverse) position, this may indi-cate a malfunction in the rear parkingassist system. If this occurs, haveyour vehicle checked by an author-ized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

✽✽ NOTICEYour new vehicle warranty does notcover any accidents or damage tothe vehicle or injuries to its occu-pants due to a rear parking assistsystem malfunction. Always drivesafely and cautiously.

4 113


The rearview camera will activatewith the ignition switch ON and theshift lever in the R (Reverse) position.

This system is a supplemental sys-tem that shows behind the vehiclethrough the rearview display mirrorwhile backing up unless equippedwith a navigation system, then willdisplay on the screen.The rearview camera may be turnedoff by pressing the ON/OFF buttonwhen the rearview camera is activated.To turn the camera on again, pressthe ON/OFF button again when theignition switch is on and the shiftlever in R (Reverse). Also, the cam-era will turn on automatically when-ever the ignition switch is turned offand on again.• This system is a supplementary

function only. It is the responsibilityof the driver to always check theinside/outside rearview mirrors andthe area behind the vehicle beforeand while backing up becausethere is a dead zone that can't beseen by the camera.

• Always keep the camera lensclean. If lens is covered with for-eign matter, the camera may notoperate normally.

❈ If your vehicle is equipped withAVN(Audio, Video and Navigation)system, rearview display will showbehind the vehicle through theAVN monitor while backing-up.Refer to a separately suppliedmanual for detailed information.

REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Backing &using camera

Never rely solely on the rear viewcamera when backing. You mustalways use methods of viewingthe area behind you includinglooking over both shoulders aswell as continuously checking allthree rear view mirrors. Due tothe difficulty of ensuring that thearea behind you remains clear,always back slowly and stopimmediately if you even suspectthat a person, and especially achild, might be behind you.

OUMA044049

OUMA046050


1144

The 360° camera monitoring systemis not a substitute for proper and safeparking procedures. The 360° cam-era monitoring system may notdetect every object surrounding thevehicle. Always drive safely and usecaution when parking.The 360° camera monitoring systemcan assist in parking by allowing thedriver to see around the vehicle.Push the button into the [ON] posi-tion to operate the system.To cancel the system, push the but-ton again.

Operating conditions- When the Engine Start/Stop

Button is ON position- When the transaxle is on D, N or R- When the vehicle speed is not over

20km/h (12.4 mph)• When the vehicle speed is over

20km/h (12.4mph), the 360° cameramonitoring system is turned off. Ifthe vehicle speed is not over 20km/h(12.4mph) after turning off the 360°camera monitoring system by overspeed, the 360° camera monitoringsystem is not turned on. To operateagain, push the button.

• When the vehicle moves back-wards, regardless of On/Off of but-ton and vehicle speed, the 360°camera monitoring system is oper-ated.

• When the liftgate and driver/pas-senger door are opened and theoutside mirror is folded, the warn-ing is illuminated in 360° cameramonitoring system.

• If the 360° camera monitoring sys-tem is not operating normally, thesystem should be checked by anauthorized Kia dealer.

• When the vehicle moves over10km/h forward after moving back-ward, the 360° camera monitoringsystem screen will be turned off.

360° CAMERA MONITORING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OUMA057230

WARNINGThis system is a supplementaryfunction only. It is the responsi-bility of the driver to alwayscheck the area around the vehi-cle before and while moving.

4 115


Battery saver function• The purpose of this feature is to

prevent the battery from being dis-charged if the lights are left in theON position. The system automati-cally shuts off the parking lights 30seconds after the ignition key isremoved and the driver’s door isopened and closed.

• With this feature, the parking lightswill turn off automatically if the driverparks on the side of the road at nightand opens the driver’s side door.If necessary, to keep the parkinglights on when the ignition key isremoved, perform the following:1) Open the driver-side door.2) Turn the parking lights OFF and

ON again using the light switchon the steering column.

Daytime running lightThe Daytime Running Lights (DRL)can make it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, and it is especiallyhelpful after dawn and before sunset.The DRL system will turn the dedi-cated lamp OFF when:1. The headlight or fog lamp switch is

ON.2. The engine is OFF.

Lighting control

The light switch has a Headlight anda Parking light position.To operate the lights, turn the knob atthe end of the control lever to one ofthe following positions:(1) OFF position(2) Auto light position (if equipped)(3) Parking & Tail light(4) Headlight position

LIGHTING

OUM044055


1164

Parking & Tail light ( )

When the light switch is in the park-ing light position, the tail, license andinstrument panel lights will turn ON.

Headlight position ( )

When the light switch is in the head-light position, the head, tail, licenselights will turn ON.

✽✽ NOTICEThe ignition switch must be in the ONposition to turn on the headlights.

Auto light position (if equipped)

It will operate when the ignition is in"ON" or the engine is running.Select the light switch to "AUTO",and the light will turn on or offdepending on the ambient lightdetected by the sensor (1).

OUMA046054 OUMA046057OUMA046056

4 117


High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlamp,push the lever away from you. Thelever will return to its original position.The high beam indicator will lightwhen the headlight high beams areswitched on.To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not leave the lightson for a prolonged time while theengine is not running.

To flash the headlights, pull the levertowards you. It will return to the nor-mal (low beam) position whenreleased. The headlight switch doesnot need to be on to use this flashingfeature.

WARNING - High beamsDo not use high beam whenthere are other vehicles. Usinghigh beam could obstruct theother driver’s vision.

OUM044059

OUM044058


1184

Turn signals and lane changesignals

The ignition switch must be on for theturn signals to function. To turn onthe turn signals, move the lever up ordown (A). The green arrow indicatorson the instrument panel indicatewhich turn signal is operating. Theywill self-cancel after a turn is com-pleted. If the indicator continues toflash after a turn, manually return thelever to the OFF position.

To signal a lane change, move theturn signal lever slightly and hold it inposition (B). The lever will return tothe OFF position when released.If an indicator stays on and does notflash or if it flashes abnormally, one ofthe turn signal bulbs may be burnedout and will require replacement.

One touch turn signalWhen changing lanes, move the lanechange switch to the direction youwant briefly. The lane change switchwill move back to the original positionbut the turn signal will flash threetimes. This function assists the driverwhen changing lanes without press-ing down on the lane change signal.Depending on the vehicle, the drivermay select or deselect the one touchturn signal function. For more details,please refer to "vehicle settings" inchapter 4.

✽✽ NOTICEIf an indicator flash is abnormallyquick or slow, a bulb may be burnedout or have a poor electrical connec-tion in the circuit.

OUM044060

4 119


Front fog light (if equipped)

Fog lights are used to provideimproved visibility when visibility ispoor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. Thefog lights will turn on when the fog lightswitch (1) is turned to the on positionafter the headlight is turned on.To turn off the fog lights, turn the foglight switch (1) to the OFF position.When in operation, the fog lightsconsume large amounts of vehicleelectrical power. Only use the foglights when visibility is poor.

Check headlight

This warning message illuminates ifthere is a malfunction (burned-outbulb except LED lamp or circuit mal-function) with the headlamp. In thiscase, have your vehicle inspected byan authorized Kia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen replacing the bulb, use thesame wattage bulb. For more information, refer to“BULB WATTAGE” in chapter 8.

OUM044061 OUMA044425


1204

Headlight leveling device (if equipped)Automatic typeTo ensure the proper headlight beamis used under various conditions, theheadlight beam levels are automati-cally adjusted depending on thenumber of passengers, the weight inthe trunk, and other driving condi-tions.

✽✽ NOTICEIf it does not work properly eventhough your car is inclined backwardaccording to passenger's posture, orthe headlight beam is irradiated tothe high or low position, have the sys-tem be inspected by an authorizedKia dealer.Do not attempt to inspect or replacethe wiring yourself.

AFLS (Adaptive Front LightingSystem) (if equipped)

Adaptive front lighting system usesthe steering angle and vehiclespeed, to keep your field of visionwide by swiveling and leveling theheadlamp.Change the switch to the AUTO posi-tion when the engine is running. Theadaptive front lighting system willoperate when the headlamp is ON.To turn off the AFLS, change theswitch to other positions. After turn-ing the AFLS off, headlamp swivelingno longer occurs, but leveling oper-ates continuously.

If the AFLS malfunction indicatorcomes on, the AFLS is not workingproperly. Drive to the nearest safelocation and restart the engine. If theindicator continuously remains on,have system be checked by anauthorized Kia dealer.

OUMA046057

4 121


A : Wiper speed control (front)· MIST – Single wipe· OFF – Off· INT – Intermittent wipe · LO – Low wiper speed· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent control wipe timeadjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes (front)*

D : Rear wiper/washer control*· HI – Continuous wipe· LO – Intermittent wipe*· OFF – Off

E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)*

* if equipped

Windshield wipers Operates as follows when the igni-tion switch is turned ON.MIST : For a single wiping cycle,

move the lever to this (MIST)position and release it. Thewipers will operate continu-ously if the lever is held in thisposition.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation INT : Wiper operates intermittently at

the same wiping intervals. Usethis mode in light rain or mist.To vary the speed setting, turnthe speed control knob.

LO : Normal wiper speed HI : Fast wiper speed

✽✽ NOTICEIf there is heavy accumulation ofsnow or ice on the windshield, defrostthe windshield for about 10 minutes,or until the snow and/or ice isremoved before using the windshieldwipers to ensure proper operation.

WIPERS AND WASHERSWindshield wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer

OUMA044063/OUMA046340


1224

Auto control (if equipped)

The rain sensor located on the upperend of the windshield glass sensesthe amount of rainfall and controlsthe wiping cycle for the proper inter-val. The more it rains, the faster thewiper operates. When the rain stops,the wipers stop.

To vary the speed setting, turn thespeed control knob (1).If the wiper switch is set in AUTOmode when the ignition switch is ON,the wiper will operate once to per-form a self-check of the system. Setthe wiper to OFF position when thewiper is not in use.

OUMA044224

Rain sensor

CAUTION• When washing the vehicle, set

the wiper switch in the OFFposition to stop the auto wiperoperation.

• The wiper may operate and bedamaged if the switch is set inthe AUTO mode while washingthe vehicle.

• Do not remove the sensorcover located on the upperend of the passenger sidewindshield glass. Damage tosystem parts could occur andmay not be covered by yourvehicle warranty.

(Continued)

CAUTIONWhen the ignition switch is ONand the windshield wiper switchis placed in the AUTO mode, usecaution in the following situa-tions to avoid any injury to thehands or other parts of thebody:• Do not touch the upper end of

the windshield glass facingthe rain sensor.

• Do not wipe the upper end ofthe windshield glass with adamp or wet cloth.

• Do not put pressure on thewindshield glass.

4 123


Front windshield washers

In the OFF position, pull the levergently toward you to spray washerfluid on the windshield and to run thewipers 1-3 cycles.Use this function when the wind-shield is dirty.The spray and wiper operation willcontinue until you release the lever.If the washer does not work, checkthe washer fluid level. If the fluid levelis not sufficient, you will need to addappropriate non-abrasive windshieldwasher fluid to the washer reservoir.

The reservoir filler neck is located inthe front of the engine compartmenton the passenger side.

OUMA044068

CAUTION - Washer pumpTo prevent possible damage tothe washer pump, do not oper-ate the washer when the fluidreservoir is empty.

WARNING - Obscuredvisibility

Do not use the washer in freez-ing temperatures without firstwarming the windshield withthe defrosters; the washer solu-tion could freeze on the wind-shield and obscure your vision.

(Continued)• When starting the vehicle in

winter, set the wiper switch inthe OFF position. Otherwise,wipers may operate and icemay damage the windshieldwiper blades. Always removeall snow and ice and defrostthe windshield properly priorto operating the windshieldwipers.

• When tinting the windshield,be careful of any fluid gettinginto the sensor located in thetop center of the front wind-shield. It may damage therelated parts.


1244

Rear window wiper and wash-er switch

The rear window wiper and washerswitch is located at the end of thewiper and washer switch lever. Turnthe switch to the desired position tooperate the rear wiper and washer.HI : Continuous wipeLO : Intermittent wipeOFF : OFF

Push the lever away from you tospray rear washer fluid and to run therear wipers 1~3 cycles. The sprayand wiper operation will continueuntil you release the lever.

OUMA044067

OUMA044069

CAUTION - Wipers &windshields

• To prevent possible damageto the wipers or windshield,do not operate the wiperswhen the windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, orother solvents on or near them.

• To prevent damage to thewiper arms and other compo-nents, do not attempt to movethe wipers manually.

4 125


Do not use the interior lights forextended periods when the engine isnot running.It may cause battery discharge.

Automatic turn off function (if equipped)The interior lights automatically turnoff approximately 20 minutes afterthe ignition switch is turned off, if thelights are in the ON position.If your vehicle is equipped with thetheft alarm system, the interior lightsautomatically turn off approximately3 seconds after the system entersarmed stage.

Room lamp

• : The light stays on at all times.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

WARNING - InteriorLights

Do not use the interior lightswhen driving in the dark.Accidents could happenbecause the view may beobscured by interior lights.

OUM044071

OUM044072

■ Type B

■ Type A


1264

Map lamp

• Press the lens (A) to turn the maplamp on.To turn the map lamp off, press thelens (A) again.

• (1) :

- The map lamp and room lampcome on when a door is opened.The lamps go out after approxi-mately 30 seconds.

- The map lamp and room lampcome on for approximately 30 sec-onds when doors are unlockedwith a transmitter or smart key aslong as the doors are not opened.

- The map lamp and room lamp willstay on for approximately 20 min-utes if a door is opened with theignition switch in the ACC orLOCK/OFF position.

- The map lamp and room lamp willstay on continuously if the door isopened with the ignition switch inthe ON position.

- The map lamp and room lamp willgo out immediately if the ignitionswitch is changed to the ON posi-tion or all doors are locked.

- To turn off the DOOR mode, pressthe DOOR button (1) once again(not pressed).

✽✽ NOTICEThe DOOR mode and ROOM modecan not be selected at the same time.

• (2):The map lamp stays on at all times.

• (3):The map lamp of driver’s side stayson at all times.

• (4):The map lamp of passenger’s sidestays on at all times.

OUM046070

OUM044070

■ Type B

■ Type A

4 127


Luggage lamp (if equipped)

• : The light comes on when theliftgate is opened.

• : The light stays off at all times.• : The light stays on at all

times.

Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)

Opening the lid of the vanity mirrorwill automatically turn on the mirrorlight.

* The actual sunvisor lamp in the vehi-cle may differ from the illustration.

Glove box lamp

The glove box lamp comes on whenthe glove box is opened.To prevent unnecessary chargingsystem drain, close the glove boxsecurely after using the glove box.

OUM044074 OUMA044432 OUM044073

CAUTION - Vanity mirrorlamp

If you use the vanity mirror lamp,turn off the lamp before return-ing the sunvisor to its originalposition, otherwise it couldresult in battery discharge andpossible sunvisor damage.


1284

WELCOME SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)Headlight (Headlamp) escortfunctionThe headlights (and/or taillights)remain on for approximately 5 min-utes after the ignition key is removedor turned to the ACC or LOCK posi-tion. However, if the driver’s door isopened and closed, the headlightsare turned off after 15 seconds.The headlights can be turned off bypressing the lock button on the trans-mitter or smart key twice or turningoff the light switch from the headlightor Auto light position.

Interior light When the interior light switch is in theDOOR position and all doors (and lift-gate) are locked and closed, theroom lamp will come on for 30 sec-onds if any of the below is performed.• Without smart key system

- When the door unlock button ispressed on the transmitter.

• With the smart key system- When the door unlock button is

pressed on the smart key.- When the button of the outside

door handle is pressed.

At this time, if you press the door lockbutton, the lamps will turn off imme-diately.

Pocket lamp (if equipped)When all doors are locked andclosed, the pocket lamp will come onfor 15 seconds if any of the below isperformed.• With the smart key system

- When the door unlock button ispressed on the smart key.

- When the button of the outsidedoor handle is pressed.

At this time, if you press the door lockbutton, the lamps will turn off imme-diately.

4 129


If you want to defrost and defog thefront windshield, refer to “Windshielddefrosting and defogging” in this sec-tion.

Rear window defroster

The defroster heats the window toremove frost, fog and thin ice fromthe rear window, while the engine isrunning.

To activate the rear windowdefroster, press the rear windowdefroster button located in the centerfacia switch panel. The indicator onthe rear window defroster button illu-minates when the defroster is ON.If there is heavy accumulation ofsnow on the rear window, brush it offbefore operating the rear defroster.The rear window defroster automati-cally turns off after approximately 20minutes or when the ignition switch isturned off. To turn off the defroster,press the rear window defroster buttonagain.

Outside rearview mirror defroster (if equipped)If your vehicle is equipped with theoutside rearview mirror defrosters,they will operate at the same time youturn on the rear window defroster.

Wiper de-icer (if equipped)If your vehicle is equipped with thewiper deicer, it will operate at thesame time you turn on the rear win-dow defroster.

DEFROSTER

CAUTION - ConductorsTo prevent damage to the con-ductors bonded to the insidesurface of the rear window,never use sharp instruments orwindow cleaners containingabrasives to clean the window.

OUM044145


1304

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OUMA044147/OUMA044146/OUM044177

1. Fan speed control knob

2. Front windshield defroster button

3. Rear window defroster button

4. Air conditioning button

5. MAX A/C (Max air conditioning) button

6. Mode selection button

7. Air intake control button

8. Temperature control knob

9. 3rd row seat Air conditioning ON/OFFbutton*

10. 3rd row seat Air conditioning Fanspeed control knob*

* If equipped

✽✽ NOTICEOperating the blower when the ignition

switch is in the ACC position could cause

the battery to discharge. Only operate

the blower when the ignition switch is in

the ON position with the engine running.

■■ Type A

■■ Type B

■■ Type C

4 131


Heating and air conditioning1. Start the engine.2. Set the mode to the desired posi-

tion.For improving the effectiveness ofheating and cooling;- Heating:- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to thedesired position.

4. Set the air intake control to theoutside (fresh) air position (ifequipped).

5. Set the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turnthe air conditioning system (ifequipped) on.

OUM044149L


1324

Mode selection

The mode selection button controlsthe direction of the air flow throughthe ventilation system.Air can be directed to the floor, dash-board outlets, or windshield. Fivesymbols are used to represent MAXA/C, Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.The MAX A/C mode is used to coolthe inside of the vehicle faster.

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upperbody and face. Additionally, eachoutlet can be controlled to direct theair discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)

Air flow is directed towards the faceand the floor.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E, F)

Most of the air flow is directed to thefloor, with a small amount of the airbeing directed to the windshield andside window defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E, F)

Most of the air flow is directed to thefloor and the windshield with a smallamount directed to the side windowdefrosters.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to thewindshield with a small amount of airdirected to the side windowdefrosters.

OUM044148

4 133


MAX A/C selection

To select the MAX A/C, turn the fanspeed control knob to the right thenpress the MAX A/C button.Air flow is directed toward the upperbody and face.In this mode, the air conditioning andthe recirculated air position will beselected automatically.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened orclosed separately using the thumb-wheel (if equipped).Also, you can adjust the direction ofair delivery from these vents usingthe vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature control knob allowsyou to control the temperature of theair flowing from the ventilation system.To change the air temperature in thepassenger compartment, turn theknob to the right position for warm andhot air or left position for cooler air.

OUM044233L OUM044152

OUM044151


1344

Air intake control

The air intake control is used toselect the outside (fresh) air positionor recirculated air position.To change the air intake control posi-tion, press the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated airposition selected, airfrom the passengercompartment will bedrawn through the heat-ing system and heatedor cooled according tothe function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh)air position selected, airenters the vehicle fromoutside and is heated orcooled according to thefunction selected.

✽✽ NOTICEProlonged operation of the heater inthe recirculated air position (withoutair conditioning selected) may causefogging of the windshield and side win-dows and the air within the passengercompartment may become stale. Inaddition, prolonged use of the air con-ditioning with the recirculated airposition selected will result in exces-sively dry air in the passenger com-partment.

Sunroof inside air recirculation(if equipped)If the sunroof opens while the heateror Air Conditioning system is operat-ing, the outside (fresh) air will beselected automatically for ventilatingthe car. Then, if you select the recir-culated air position, the outside(fresh) air will be selected automati-cally after 3 minutes.If you close the sunroof, the intakemode will be changed to the previousselected mode.

OUM044153L

OUM044153■ Type B

■ Type A

WARNING - Reduced visibilty

Continued use of the climatecontrol system in the recirculat-ed air position may allowhumidity to increase inside thevehicle which may fog the glassand obscure visibility.

4 135


Fan speed control

The ignition switch must be in the ONposition for fan operation.The fan speed control knob allowsyou to control the fan speed of the airflowing from the ventilation system.To change the fan speed, turn theknob to the right for higher speed orleft for lower speed.

To turn off the blowers

To turn off the blowers, turn the fanspeed control knob to the "0" position.

WARNING - Recirculatedair

Continuous use of the climatecontrol system in the recirculat-ed air position can causedrowsiness or sleepiness, andloss of vehicle control. Set theair intake control to the outside(fresh) air position as much aspossible while driving.

OUM044154 OUMA044341

WARNING - Sleepingwith AC on

Do not sleep in a vehicle withthe air conditioning or heatingsystem on as this may causeserious harm or death due to adrop in the oxygen level and/orbody temperature.


1364

Air conditioning

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning system on (indicatorlight will illuminate). Press the buttonagain to turn the air conditioning sys-tem off.

3rd row air conditioning (if equipped)

To turn on the third row air condition-ing control system 1.You can operate the third row air

conditioning system from the firstrow control panel. Changing the frontrow’s fan speed by turning the con-trol knob will automatically changethe third row’s fan speed as well.When the front row air conditioninghas been turned off and you wantto stop the A/C in the third row,press the third row air conditioningselect button one more time. Then,the third row’s A/C will also turn off.

2.The third row A/C system can beseparately controlled by the controlbuttons in the third row. When theA/C is ON or OFF, the third row A/Ccontrol button in the front row willturn ON or OFF, informing the frontpassengers of the situation.

3.The fan speed of the third row airconditioning can also be separate-ly controlled by turning the fanspeed control knob.

OUM044155

OUM044156

4 137


System operationVentilation1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the



desired speed.5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system (ifequipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set themode to the or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumesfrom entering the vehicle throughthe ventilation system, temporarilyset the air intake control to therecirculated air position. Be sure toreturn the control to the fresh airposition when the irritation haspassed to keep fresh air in thevehicle. This will help keep the driv-er alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling systemis drawn in through the grilles justahead of the windshield. Careshould be taken that these are notblocked by leaves, snow, ice orother obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-shield, set the air intake control tothe fresh air position and fan speedto the desired position, turn on theair conditioning system, and adjustthe temperature control to desiredtemperature.

Air conditioningKia Air Conditioning Systems arefilled with refrigerant*.1. Start the engine. Push the air con-

ditioning button.2. Set the mode to the position.3. Set the air intake control to the

outside air or recirculated air posi-tion.

4. Adjust the fan speed control andtemperature control to maintainmaximum comfort.

• The refrigerant system should onlybe serviced by trained and certifiedtechnicians to insure proper andsafe operation.

• The refrigerant system should beserviced in a well-ventilated place.

• The air conditioning evaporator(cooling coil) shall never be repairedor replaced with one removed froma used or salvaged vehicle and newreplacement MAC evaporators shallbe certified (and labeled) as meet-ing SAE Standard J2842.


1384

✽✽ NOTICEWhen opening the windows inhumid weather air conditioning maycreate water droplets inside thevehicle. Since excessive waterdroplets may cause damage to elec-trical equipment, air conditioningshould only be used with the win-dows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked indirect sunlight during hot weather,open the windows for a short timeto let the hot air inside the vehicleescape.

• To help reduce moisture on theinside surface of the windows onrainy or humid days, decrease thehumidity inside the vehicle by oper-ating the air conditioning system.

• During air conditioning systemoperation, you may occasionallynotice a slight change in enginespeed as the air conditioning com-pressor cycles. This is a normalsystem operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning systemevery month only for a few minutesto ensure maximum system per-formance.

• When using the air conditioningsystem, you may notice clear waterdripping (or even puddling) on theground under the passenger sideof the vehicle. This is a normal sys-tem operation characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning sys-tem in the recirculated air positionprovides maximum cooling, how-ever, continual operation in thismode may cause the air inside thevehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you mayoccasionally notice a misty air flowbecause of rapid cooling andhumid air intake. This is a normalsystem operation characteristic.

CAUTION - Excessive ACWhen using the air conditioningsystem, monitor the tempera-ture gauge closely while drivingup hills or in heavy traffic whenoutside temperatures are high.Air conditioning system opera-tion may cause engine over-heating. Continue to use theblower fan but turn the air con-ditioning system off if the tem-perature gauge indicates engineoverheating.

4 139


Climate control air filter (if equipped)

The climate control air filter installedbehind the glove box filters the dustor other pollutants that come into thevehicle from the outside through theheating and air conditioning system.If dust or other pollutants accumulatein the filter over a period of time, theair flow from the air vents maydecrease, resulting in moisture accu-mulation on the inside of the wind-shield even when the outside (fresh)air position is selected. If this hap-pens, we recommend that the cli-mate control air filter be replaced byan authorized Kia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICE• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.If the vehicle is being driven insevere conditions such as dusty orrough roads, more frequent cli-mate control air filter inspectionsand changes are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenlydecreases, we recommend that thesystem should be checked at anauthorized Kia dealer.

Checking the amount of airconditioner refrigerant andcompressor lubricantWhen the amount of refrigerant islow, the performance of the air con-ditioning is reduced. Overfilling alsohas a negative influence on the airconditioning system.Therefore, if abnormal operation isfound, have the system inspected byan authorized Kia dealer.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculatedair

Climate controlair filter

Blower

Evaporatorcore

Heater core


1404

WARNINGThe oil and refrigerant in yourvehicle's air conditioning sys-tem is under very high pres-sure. If proper service proce-dures are not followed an explo-sion may result. To reduce therisk of serious injury or death,the air conditioning system inyour vehicle should only beserviced by trained and certi-fied technicians.

CAUTION - AC RepairIt is important that the correcttype and amount of oil and refrig-erant is used, otherwise damageto the vehicle may occur. To pre-vent damage, the air conditioningsystem in your vehicle shouldonly be serviced by trained andcertified technicians.

4 141


AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OUMA044157/OUMA044158

1. Driver`s temperature control knob


3. Blower OFF button



6. Fan speed control button



9. Passenger`s temperature control knob

10. SYNC button

11. A/C display

12. 3rd row air conditioning ON/OFF button*

* if equipped

✽✽ NOTICEOperating the blower when the ignition

switch is in the ACC position could cause

the battery to discharge. Only operate

the blower when the ignition switch is in

the ON position with the engine running.

■■ Front climate control (Type B)

■■ Front climate control (Type A)


1424

OUMA046234/OUMA046235/OUM044177

1. Driver`s temperature control knob


3. Blower OFF button



6. Fan speed control button



9. Passenger`s temperature control knob

10. SYNC button

11. Climate button

12. 3rd row air conditioning ON/OFF button*

13. 3rd row air conditioning fan speed controlknob*

* if equipped

■■ Front climate control (Type C)

■■ Front climate control (Type D)

■■ 3rd row air conditioning control

4 143


Automatic heating and air con-ditioning

1. Press the AUTO button. Themodes, fan speeds, air intake andair-conditioning will be controlledautomatically by setting the tem-perature.

2. Turn the temperature control knobto the desired temperature.

✽✽ NOTICE• To turn the automatic operation

off, select any button or switch ofthe following:- Mode selection button- Air conditioning button- Front windshield defroster button

(Press the button one more timeto deselect the front windshielddefroster function. The ‘AUTO’sign will illuminate on the infor-mation display once again.)

- Air intake control button- Fan speed control switchThe selected function will be con-trolled manually while other func-tions operate automatically.

• For your convenience and toimprove the effectiveness of theclimate control, use the AUTObutton and set the temperature to23°C (73°F).

OUMA044159

■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side

OUMA044162


1444

✽✽ NOTICENever place anything over the sensorlocated on the instrument panel toensure better control of the heatingand cooling system.

Manual heating and air condi-tioningThe heating and cooling system canbe controlled manually by pressingbuttons or turning knob(s) other thanthe AUTO button. In this case, thesystem works sequentially accordingto the order of buttons or knob(s)selected.1. Start the engine.2. Set the mode to the desired posi-

tion.For improving the effectiveness ofheating and cooling;- Heating:- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to thedesired position.

4. Set the air intake control to theoutside (fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turnthe air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order toconvert to full automatic control ofthe system.

Mode selection

The mode selection button controlsthe direction of the air flow throughthe ventilation system.The air flow outlet port is convertedas follows:

Refer to the illustration in the“Manual climate control system”.

OUM044075

OUM044160

4 145


Face-Level

Air flow is directed toward the upperbody and face. Additionally, eachoutlet can be controlled to direct theair discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level

Air flow is directed towards the faceand the floor.

Floor-Level

Most of the air flow is directed to thefloor, with a small amount of the airbeing directed to the windshield andside window defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level

Most of the air flow is directed to thefloor and the windshield with a smallamount directed to the side windowdefrosters.

Defrost-Level

Most of the air flow is directed to thewindshield with a small amount of airdirected to the side window defrosters.

OUM044161


1464

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened orclosed separately using the thumb-wheel (if equipped).Also, you can adjust the direction ofair delivery from these vents usingthe vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature will increase to themaximum (HI) by turning the knob tothe extreme right.The temperature will decrease to theminimum (Lo) by turning the knob tothe extreme left.When turning the knob, the tempera-ture will increase or decrease by0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowesttemperature setting, the air condi-tioning will operate continuously.

Adjusting the driver and passengerside temperature equally

• Press the “SYNC” button to adjustthe driver and passenger side tem-perature equally.The passenger side temperaturewill be set to the same temperatureas the driver side temperature.

• Turn the driver side temperaturecontrol knob. The driver and pas-senger side temperature will beadjusted equally.

• When the third row’s seat heaterbutton is turned ON, the third row’sclimate and fan speed setting willautomatically follow the first rowsettings.

OUM044151

■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side

OUMA044163

OUMA044162

4 147


Adjusting the driver and passengerside temperature individually

• Press the “SYNC” button again toadjust the driver and passengerside temperature individually. Theillumination of button turns off.

• Operate the driver side tempera-ture control knob to adjust the driv-er side temperature.

• Operate the passenger side tem-perature control knob to adjust thepassenger side temperature.

Temperature conversion

You can switch the temperaturemode from Centigrade to Fahrenheitas follows:While pressing the OFF button,press the AUTO button for 3 secondsor more.The display will change fromCentigrade to Fahrenheit, or fromFahrenheit to Centigrade.If the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, the temperature modedisplay will reset to Fahrenheit.

Air intake control

This is used to select the outside(fresh) air position or recirculated airposition.To change the air intake control posi-tion, push the control button.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh)air position selected, airenters the vehicle fromoutside and is heated orcooled according to thefunction selected.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated airposition selected, airfrom the passengercompartment will bedrawn through the heat-ing system and heatedor cooled according tothe function selected.

■ Type B, D

■ Type A, C

OUMA044164

OUMA044165

■ Type A, C

■ Type B, D


1484

✽✽ NOTICEProlonged operation of the heater inthe recirculated air position (with-out air conditioning selected) maycause fogging of the windshield andside windows and the air within thepassenger compartment maybecome stale.In addition, prolonged use of the airconditioning with the recirculatedair position selected will result inexcessively dry air in the passengercompartment.

Sunroof inside air recirculation(if equipped)If the sunroof opens while the heateror Air Conditioning system is operat-ing, the outside (fresh) air will beselected automatically for ventilatingthe car. Then, if you select the recir-culated air position, the outside(fresh) air will be selected automati-cally after 3 minutes.If you close the sunroof, the intakemode will be changed to the previousselected mode.

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set to thedesired speed by operating the fanspeed control button.To change the fan speed, press ( )the button for higher speed, or push ( ) the button for lower speed. Toturn the fan speed control off, pressthe front blower OFF button.

Air conditioning

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning system on (indicatorlight will illuminate).Press the button again to turn the airconditioning system off.

OUMA044168

OUM044166L

OUM044191L

4 149


OFF mode

Press the front blower OFF button toturn off the front air climate controlsystem. However, you can still oper-ate the mode and air intake buttonsas long as the ignition switch is in theON position.

Climate information screen selection (if equipped)

Press the climate information screenselection button to display climateinformation on the screen.

3rd row air conditioning (if equipped)

To turn on the third row air condition-ing control system

OUMA044169

OUM044211L OUM044156


1504

1.You can operate the third row airconditioning system from the firstrow control panel. Changing the frontrow’s fan speed by pressing the con-trol button will automatically changethe third row’s fan speed as well.When the front row air conditioninghas been turned off and you wantto stop the A/C in the third row,press the third row air conditioningselect button one more time. Then,the third row’s A/C will also turn off.

2.The third row A/C system can beseparately controlled by the controlbuttons in the third row. When theA/C is ON or OFF, the third row A/Ccontrol button in the front row willturn ON or OFF, informing the frontpassengers of the situation.

3.The fan speed of the third row airconditioning can also be separate-ly controlled by turning the fanspeed control knob.

System operationVentilation1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the



desired speed.

Heating1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the



desired speed.5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system (ifequipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set themode to the or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumesfrom entering the vehicle throughthe ventilation system, temporarilyset the air intake control to therecirculated air position. Be sure toreturn the control to the fresh airposition when the irritation haspassed to keep fresh air in thevehicle. This will help keep the driv-er alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling systemis drawn in through the grilles justahead of the windshield. Careshould be taken that these are notblocked by leaves, snow, ice orother obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-shield, set the air intake control tothe fresh air position and fan speedto the desired position, turn on theair conditioning system, and adjustthe temperature control to desiredtemperature.

4 151


Air conditioning (if equipped) All Kia Air Conditioning Systems arefilled with R-134a refrigerant.1. Start the engine. Press the air con-

ditioning button.2. Set the mode to the position.3. Set the air intake control to the out-

side air or recirculated air position.4. Adjust the fan speed control and

temperature control to maintainmaximum comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired,set the temperature control to theextreme left position, set the modecontrol to the MAX A/C position,then set the fan speed control tothe highest speed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked indirect sunlight during hot weather,open the windows for a short timeto let the hot air inside the vehicleescape.

• To help reduce moisture inside ofthe windows on rainy or humiddays, decrease the humidity insidethe vehicle by operating the airconditioning system.

• During air conditioning systemoperation, you may occasionallynotice a slight change in enginespeed as the air conditioning com-pressor cycles. This is a normalsystem operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning systemevery month only for a few minutesto ensure maximum system per-formance.

CAUTION - Excessive A/C• When using the air condition-

ing system, monitor the tem-perature gauge closely whiledriving up hills or in heavytraffic when outside tempera-tures are high. Air condition-ing system operation maycause engine overheating.Continue to use the blower fanbut turn the air conditioningsystem off if the temperaturegauge indicates engine over-heating.

• When opening the windows inhumid weather air condition-ing may create water dropletsinside the vehicle. Sinceexcessive water droplets maycause damage to electricalequipment, air conditioningshould only be used with thewindows closed.


1524

• When using the air conditioningsystem, you may notice clear waterdripping (or even puddling) on theground under the passenger sideof the vehicle. This is a normal sys-tem operation characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning sys-tem in the recirculated air positionprovides maximum cooling, how-ever, continual operation in thismode may cause the air inside thevehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you mayoccasionally notice a misty air flowbecause of rapid cooling andhumid air intake. This is a normalsystem operation characteristic.

Climate control air filter (if equipped)

The climate control air filter installedbehind the glove box filters the dust orother pollutants that come into thevehicle from the outside through theheating and air conditioning system. Ifdust or other pollutants accumulate inthe filter over a period of time, the airflow from the air vents may decrease,resulting in moisture accumulation onthe inside of the windshield evenwhen the outside (fresh) air position isselected. If this happens, have the cli-mate control air filter replaced by anauthorized Kia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICE• Replace the filter every 24,000 km

(15,000 miles) or once a year.If the vehicle is being driven insevere conditions such as dusty orrough roads, more frequent airconditioner filter inspections andchanges are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenlydecreases, the system should bechecked at an authorized Kiadealer.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculatedair

Climate controlair filter

Blower

Evaporatorcore

Heater core

4 153


Checking the amount of airconditioner refrigerant andcompressor lubricantWhen the amount of refrigerant islow, the performance of the air con-ditioning is reduced. Overfilling alsohas a negative impact on the air con-ditioning system.Therefore, if abnormal operation isfound, have the system inspected byan authorized Kia dealer.

WARNINGThe oil and refrigerant in yourvehicle's air conditioning sys-tem is under very high pres-sure. If proper service proce-dures are not followed an explo-sion may result. To reduce therisk of serious injury or death,the air conditioning system inyour vehicle should only beserviced by trained and certi-fied technicians.

CAUTIONIt is important that the correcttype and amount of oil and refrig-erant is used, otherwise damageto the vehicle may occur. To pre-vent damage, the air conditioningsystem in your vehicle shouldonly be serviced by trained andcertified technicians.


1544

• For maximum defrosting, set thetemperature control to the extremeright/hot position and the fan speedcontrol to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desiredwhile defrosting or defogging, setthe mode to the floor-defrost posi-tion.

• Before driving, clear all snow andice from the windshield, rear win-dow, outside rear view mirrors, andall side windows.

• Clear all snow and ice from thehood and air inlet in the cowl grill toimprove heater and defroster effi-ciency and to reduce the probabili-ty of fogging up the inside of thewindshield.

Manual climate control systemTo defog inside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the desiredposition.

2. Select desired temperature.3. Select the or position.4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-

ditioning will be selected automat-ically.

If the air conditioning and/or outside(fresh) air position are not selectedautomatically, press the correspon-ding button manually.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

WARNING - Windshieldheating

Do not use the or posi-tion during cooling operation inextremely humid weather. Thedifference between the temper-ature of the outside air and thewindshield could cause theouter surface of the windshieldto fog up, causing loss of visi-bility. In this case, set the modeselection to the positionand fan speed control to thelower speed. OUMA044170

4 155


To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highestposition.

2. Set the temperature to theextreme hot position.

3. Select the position.4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-

ditioning will be selected automat-ically.

If the air conditioning is not selectedautomatically press the correspon-ding button manually.

Automatic climate control systemTo defog inside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the desiredposition.

2. Select desired temperature.3. Press the defroster button ( ).4. The outside (fresh) air position will

be selected automatically and theair conditioning will turn onaccording to the detected ambienttemperature.

If the air conditioning and outside(fresh) air position are not selectedautomatically, adjust the correspon-ding button manually. If the posi-tion is selected, lower fan speed isadjusted to a higher fan speed.

OUMA044172

OUMA044171


1564

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highestposition.

2. Set the temperature to theextreme hot (HI) position.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).4. The outside (fresh) air position will

be selected automatically and theair conditioning will turn onaccording to the detected ambienttemperature.

Defogging logicTo reduce the possibility of foggingup the inside of the windshield, theair intake or air conditioning is con-trolled automatically according tocertain conditions such as or position. To cancel or return to thedefogging logic, do the following.

Manual climate control system


2. Turn the fan speed control knob tothe OFF (0) position.

3. Turn the mode selection knob tothe defrost position ( ).

4. Push the air intake control button( ) at least 5 times within 3 sec-onds.

If the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, it resets to the defoglogic status.

OUMA044173 OUMA044403

4 157


Automatic climate control system


2. Select the defroster position press-ing the defroster button ( ).

3. While pressing the air conditioningbutton (A/C), press the air intakecontrol button at least 5 times with-in 3 seconds.

The recirculation indicator blinks 3times with 0.5 second of interval. Itindicates that the defogging logic iscanceled or returned to the pro-grammed status.

If the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, it resets to the defoglogic status.

Auto defogging system (if equipped)

Auto defogging reduces the probabil-ity of fogging up the inside of thewindshield by automatically sensingthe moisture of inside the windshield.The auto defogging system operateswhen the heater or air conditioning ison.

OUMA044404

OUMA044405


1584

This indicator illuminateswhen the auto defoggingsystem senses the mois-ture on the inside of thewindshield and operates.

If more moisture is in the vehicle,higher steps operate as follow. Forexample if auto defogging does notdefog inside the windshield at step 1Outside air position, it tries to defogagain at step 2 Blowing air towardthe windshield.

Step 1 : Outside air positionStep 2 : Blowing air toward the wind-

shieldStep 3 : Increasing air flow toward

the windshieldStep 4 : Operating the air conditioningStep 5 : Maximizing the air condi-

tioning

To cancel or reset the Auto DefoggingSystem

Press the front windshield defrosterbutton for 3 seconds when the igni-tion switch is in the ON position.When the Auto Defogging System iscanceled, ADS OFF symbol will blink3 times and the ADS OFF will be dis-played on the climate control infor-mation screen.When the Auto Defogging System isreset, ADS OFF symbol will blink 6times without a signal.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the A/C off or recirculated airposition is manually selected whilethe auto defogging system is on, theauto defogging indicator will blink 3times to give notice that manualoperation is canceled.

Do not remove the sensor coverlocated on the upper end of the pas-senger side windshield glass.Damage to the system parts couldoccur and may not be covered byyour vehicle warranty.

When the ignition switch is in the ONposition, the clean air function turnson automatically.Also, the clean air function turns offautomatically, when the ignitionswitch turns to the OFF position.

CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED)

OUM044174L

4 159


STORAGE COMPARTMENTS These compartments can be used tostore small items required by thedriver or passengers.

• To avoid possible theft, do notleave valuables in the storagecompartment.

• Always keep the storage compart-ment covers closed while driving.Do not attempt to place so manyitems in the storage compartmentthat the storage compartmentcover can not close securely.

Center console storage

To open the center console storage,pull up the lever.

Glove box

The glove box can be locked andunlocked with a master key. (ifequipped)To open the glove box, push the but-ton (1) and the glove box will auto-matically open. Close the glove boxafter use.

WARNING - Flammablematerials

Do not store, propane cylindersor other flammable/explosivematerials in the vehicle. Theseitems may catch fire and/orexplode if the vehicle isexposed to hot temperatures forextended periods.

OUM044077OUM044076

✽✽ NOTICEIf the temperature control knob is inthe warm or hot position, warm orhot air will flow into the glove box.

Sunglass holder

To open the sunglass holder, pressthe cover and the holder will slowlyopen. Place your sunglasses with thelenses facing out.To close the sunglass holder push it up.

Luggage box

You can place a first aid kit, a reflec-tor triangle, tools, etc. in the box foreasy access.Grasp the handle on the edge of thecover and lift it.


1604

OUM044079

OUM044181

■ Type A

■ Type B (if equipped)

WARNING To reduce the risk of injury in anaccident or sudden stop, alwayskeep the glove box door closedwhile driving.

OUM044078

WARNING - Sunglassholder

Do not keep objects except sun-glasses inside the sunglassholder. Heavier objects can bethrown from the holder in theevent of a sudden stop or anaccident, possibly injuring thepassengers.

4 161


Cup holderINTERIOR FEATURES

WARNING - Hot liquidsDo not place uncovered cupswith hot liquid in the cup holderwhile the vehicle is in motion. Ifthe hot liquid spills, you mayburn yourself. Such a burn tothe driver could lead to loss ofcontrol of the vehicle.

OUM044240L OUM044242L

OUM044241L

■ Center (if equipped)

Cups or small beverage cans may be placed in the cup holders.

OUMA054211

■ FrontType A

■ FrontType B

■ Rear (if equipped)

CAUTIONWhen cleaning spilled liquids,do not dry the cup holder athigh temperature. This maydamage the cup holder.


1624

Bottle holder

Bottles may be placed in the holder.

✽✽ NOTICEOnly bottles should be placed in theholder labeled "Bottles Only."

Seat warmer (if equipped)

The seat warmer is provided to warmthe front seats during cold weather.With the ignition switch in the ONposition, push either of the switchesto warm the driver's seat or the frontpassenger's seat.

During mild weather or under condi-tions where the operation of the seatwarmer is not needed, keep theswitches in the "OFF" position.• Each time you press the switch,

the temperature setting of the seatwill change as follows :

• The seat warmer defaults to theOFF position whenever the ignitionswitch is turned on.

✽✽ NOTICEWith the seat warmer switch in theON position, the heating system inthe seat turns off or on automatical-ly depending on the seat tempera-ture.

OUM044243L

OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )

→

OUMA047175

OUM044096

■ Front seat

■ Rear seat

4 163


Seat cooler (Air ventilation seat)(if equipped)

The temperature setting of the seatchanges according to the switchposition.• If you want to cool your seat cush-

ion, press the switch (blue color).• Each time you press the button,

the airflow will change as follows:

• The seat warmer (with air ventila-tion) defaults to the OFF positionwhenever the ignition switch isturned on.

OUMA047176

OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )

→

WARNING - Seat heaterburns

The seat warmer may causeburns, even at low tempera-tures, if used over a long periodof time. Never allow passengerswho may not be able to takecare of themselves to beexposed to the risk of seatheater burns. These include:1. Infants, children, elderly or

disabled persons, or hospitaloutpatients

2. Persons with sensitive skinor those that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals4. Intoxicated individuals5. Individuals taking medication

that can cause drowsiness orsleepiness (sleeping pills,cold tablets, etc.)

CAUTION - Seat damage• When cleaning the seats, do

not use an organic solventsuch as paint thinner, ben-zene, alcohol and gasoline.Doing so may damage the airventilation seat.

• Do not place heavy or sharpobjects on the seat. Thosethings may damage the airventilation seat.

• Be careful not to spill liquidsuch as water or beverages onthe seat. If you spill some liquid,wipe the seat with a dry towel.Before using the air ventilationseat, dry the seat completely.


1644

Sunvisor

Use the sunvisor to shield direct lightthrough the front or side windows.To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.To use the sunvisor for the side win-dow, pull it downward, unsnap it fromthe bracket (1) and swing it to theside (2).Adjust the sunvisor extension for-ward or backward (3).To use the vanity mirror, pull down thevisor and slide the mirror cover (4).The ticket holder (5) is provided forholding a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)

* The actual sunvisor lamp in the vehi-cle may differ from the illustration.

Power outlet

The power outlet is designed to pro-vide power for mobile telephones orother devices designed to operatewith vehicle electrical systems. Thedevices should draw less than 10amps with the engine running.

CAUTION - Vanity mirrorlamp

If you use the vanity mirror lamp,turn off the lamp before return-ing the sunvisor to its originalposition, otherwise it couldresult in battery discharge andpossible sunvisor damage.

OUM044084

OUM044085L

■ Front

■ 2nd row (if equipped)OHG040168

4 165


• Use the power outlet only when theengine is running and remove theaccessory plug after use. Using theaccessory plug for prolonged peri-ods of time with the engine off couldcause the battery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric accessorieswhich are less than 10A in electriccapacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or heaterto the lowest operating level whenusing the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.• Some electronic devices can cause

electronic interference whenplugged into a vehicle’s power out-let. These devices may causeexcessive audio static and malfunc-tions in other electronic systems ordevices used in your vehicle.

• Push the plug in as far as it will go.If good contact is not made, theplug may overheat and the fusemay open.

• Plug in battery equipped electri-cal/electronic devices with reversecurrent protection. The currentfrom the battery may flow into thevehicle’s electrical/electronic sys-tem and cause system malfunc-tion.

AC inverter (if equipped)

The AC inverter supplies 115V/150Welectric power to operate electricaccessories or equipment.

WARNING - Electric shockDo not put a finger or a foreignelement (pen, etc.) into a poweroutlet and do not touch with awet hand. You may get an elec-tric shock.

OUMA044179

OUMA046098


1664

If you wish to use the AC inverter,press the AC inverter button whilethe engine is running. The light onthe AC inverter button will illuminate.If you press the AC inverter buttonagain, the AC inverter will be deacti-vated and the light on the AC invert-er button will turn off.

✽✽ NOTICEAfter pressing the AC inverter but-ton ON, the indicator lamp illumina-tion will be delayed, while the sys-tem conducts a self-check.

✽✽ NOTICE• Rated voltage : AC 115V• Maximum electric power : 150W• In order to avoid an electrical sys-

tem failure, electric shock, etc., besure to read owner's manualbefore use.

• Be sure to close the cover exceptfor when in use.

• To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not use the AC inverterwhile the engine is not running.

• When not using the AC inverter,make sure to turn off the AC inverter(the indicator on the button does notilluminate) and close the AC invertercover.

• After using an electric accessory orequipment, pull the plug out. Leavingthe accessory or equipment pluggedin for a long time may cause batterydischarge.

• Do not use an electric accessory orequipment the power consumption ofwhich is greater than 150W (115V).

• When the AC inverter input voltage isless than 11.3V, the LED light willblink and automatically turn off thepower.AC inverter will operate as normalwhen the voltage is increased.

• When the AC inverter input voltageis less than 10.7V, the LED lightand power will turn off. The ACinverter will operate as normalwhen the voltage is increased afterpressing AC inverter button again.

OUMA046410

4 167


• While the power consumption ofsome electrical devices/appliancesmay be within the AC inverter’selectric power range, it may mal-function in below cases.

- If the device/appliance requireshigh electric power for initial startup

- If the device/appliance processesprecise/very accurate data

- If the device/appliance requiresvery stable supply of electricity

USB charger (if equipped)

The USB charger is designed torecharge batteries of small size elec-trical devices using a USB cable. Theelectrical devices can be rechargedwhen the Engine Start/Stop button isin ACC/ON/START position.

The battery charging state may bemonitored on the electrical device.Disconnect the USB cable from theUSB port after use.• Some devices are not supported

for fast charging but will becharged with normal speed.

• Use the USB charger when theengine is running to prevent bat-tery discharge.

• Only devices that fit the USB portcan be used.

• The USB charger can be used onlyfor battery charging purposes.

• Battery chargers cannot becharged.

CAUTION - Electric acces-sory devices

• Do not use broken electricaccessories which may dam-age the AC inverter and elec-trical systems of the vehicle.

• Do not use two or more electricaccessories at the same time. Itmay cause damage to the elec-trical systems of the vehicle.

OUMA044406

OUM044178L

■ Front

■ Rear


1684

Clothes hanger (if equipped)

❈ This actual feature may differ from the illus-tration.

To use the hanger, pull down theupper portion of hanger.

Floor mat anchor (s) (if equipped)

When using a floor mat on the frontfloor carpet, make sure it attaches tothe floor mat anchor(s) in your vehi-cle. This keeps the floor mat fromsliding forward.

OUM044086

CAUTION - Hangingclothing

Do not hang heavy clothes, sincethose may damage the hook.

OXM043309

WARNING

Do not hang other objects suchas hangers or hard objectsexcept clothes. Also, do not putheavy, sharp or breakableobjects in the clothe pockets. Inan accident or when the curtainair bag is inflated, it may causevehicle damage or personalinjury.

OPS046500

4 169


The following must be observedwhen installing ANY floor mat to thevehicle.• Ensure that the floor mats are

securely attached to the vehicle'sfloor mat anchor(s) before drivingthe vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floor mat that can-not be firmly attached to the vehi-cle's floor mat anchors.

• Do not stack floor mats on top ofone another (e.g. all-weather rub-ber mat on top of a carpeted floormat). Only a single floor mat shouldbe installed in each position.

IMPORTANT – Your vehicle wasmanufactured with driver's side floormat anchors that are designed tosecurely hold the floor mat in place.To avoid any interference with pedaloperation, Kia recommends that onlythe Kia floor mat designed for use inyour vehicle be installed.

Side curtain (if equipped)

To use the side curtain:1. Lift the curtain by the handle (1).2. Hang the curtain on the hooks on

both sides of the handle.To avoid injury or damage to the sidecurtain and door moldings, lowerside curtain by the handle all the wayback to the stowed position. Do notrelease handle after disengagingfrom the hooks on the door.

Luggage net holder (if equipped)

To keep items from shifting in thecargo area, you can use the holderslocated in the cargo area to attachthe luggage net.If necessary, we recommend thatyou contact an authorized Kia dealer.

OUM044087OUM044088

OUM044089

■ Type A

■ Type B


1704

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the vehi-cle, care should be taken whencarrying fragile or bulky objectsin the luggage compartment.

WARNING - Luggage netTo avoid eye injury, DO NOToverstretch the luggage net.ALWAYS keep your face andbody out of the luggage net’srecoil path. DO NOT use the lug-gage net when the strap has vis-ible signs of wear or damage.

4 171


EXTERIOR FEATURESRoof rack (if equipped)

If the vehicle has a roof rack, you canload cargo on top of your vehicle.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the vehicle is equipped with a sun-roof, be sure not to position cargoonto the roof rack in such a way thatit could interfere with sunroof oper-ation.

• The following specification is themaximum weight that can beloaded onto the roof rack.Distribute the load as evenly aspossible on the roof rack andsecure the load firmly.

Loading cargo or luggage inexcess of the specified weight limiton the roof rack may damage yourvehicle.

• Always drive slowly and turn cornerscarefully when carrying items on theroof rack. Severe wind updrafts,caused by passing vehicles or natu-ral causes, can cause suddenupward pressure on items loaded onthe roof rack. This is especially truewhen carrying large, flat items suchas wood panels or mattresses. Thiscould cause the items to fall off theroof rack and cause damage to yourvehicle or others around you.

• To prevent damage or loss of cargowhile driving, check frequentlybefore or while driving to makesure the items on the roof rack aresecurely fastened.

OUM044095

CAUTION - Loading RoofRack

• When carrying large objectson the roof rack, make surethey do not exceed the overallroof length or width.

• When you are carrying cargoon the roof rack, do not operatethe sunroof (if equipped).

WARNING - Driving withroof load

Always drive slow and turn cor-ners carefully when carryingitems on the roof rack.The vehi-cle center of gravity will behigher when items are loadedonto the roof rack.

ROOF 100 kg (220 lbs.)RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED


1724

If you install aftermarket HID headlamps, your vehicle’s audio and elec-tronic devices may malfunction.

Antenna

Pole antenna Your vehicle uses a roof antenna toreceive AM or/and FM broadcast sig-nals.This antenna pole is removable. Toremove the roof antenna pole, turn itcounterclockwise. To install the roofantenna pole, turn it clockwise.

Shark fin antenna The shark fin antenna will receive theAM, FM broadcast signals andtransmit data.

• When reinstalling your roof anten-na, it is important that it is fullytightened and adjusted to theupright position to ensure properreception.

• When cargo is loaded on the roofrack, do not place the cargo nearthe antenna pole to ensure properreception.

AUDIO SYSTEM

CAUTION - AntennaBefore entering a place with alow height clearance or a carwash, remove the antenna poleby rotating it counterclockwise.If not, the antenna may be dam-aged.

OUM044339L/OANNMM2901

■ Pole Type ■ Shark fin type

4 173


Steering wheel remote controller

(1) VOLUMEUsed to control volume.

(2) SEEKWhen pressed shortly (under 0.8seconds).- FM, AM mode : Searches broad-

cast frequencies saved to presets.- CD, USB, iPod®, My Music,

Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyAudio mode : Changes the track, file.

When pressed and held (over 0.8seconds).- FM, AM mode : Automatically

searches broadcast frequenciesand channels.

- CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode :Rewinds or fast forwards the trackor file.

(3) MUTEMutes audio volume.

(4) MODEEach time this key is pressed, themode is changed in order of FM1,FM2, AM, CD, USB (iPod), AUX, MyMusic, BT Audio.If the media is not connected or adisc is not inserted, correspondingmodes will be disabled.Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-onds) to turn the audio system on/off.When power is off, press the key toturn power back on.

(5) (if equipped)When pressed shortly.- When pressed in the phone screen,

displays call history screen.- When pressed in the dial screen,

makes a call.- When pressed in the incoming call

screen, answers the call.- When pressed while another

incoming call is waiting, switches towaiting call (Call Waiting).

When pressed and held (over 0.8 sec-onds).- When pressed in the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology Handsfreewait mode, redials the last call.

- When pressed during a Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology Handsfreecall, switches call back to mobilephone (Private).

- When pressed while calling on themobile phone, switches call back toBluetooth® Wireless TechnologyHandsfree (Operates only whenBluetooth® Wireless TechnologyHandsfree is connected).

OUMA046409


1744

(6) (if equipped)Ends phone call.

(7) (if equipped)When pressed shortly.- Starts voice recognition.- When selected during a voice

prompt, stops the prompt and con-verts to voice command waitingstate.

When pressed and held (over 0.8 sec-onds).- Ends voice recognition.❈ The Bluetooth® word mark and

logos are registered trademarksowned by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. andany use of such marks by Kia isunder license. Other trademarksand trade names are those of theirrespective owners. A compatibleBluetooth® enabled cell phone isrequired to use Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology.

AUX, USB port

If your vehicle has an AUX and/orUSB(universal serial bus) port, youcan use the AUX port to connectaudio devices and the USB port toplug in a USB device or iPod®.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen using a portable audio deviceconnected to the power outlet, noisemay occur during playback. If thishappens, use the power source of theportable audio device.

* iPod® is a Registered trademark ofApple Inc. iPod® mobile digitaldevice sold separately. Connectivitymay require use of the Kia acces-sory cable.

OUM044044L

WARNING - Distracteddriving

Driving while distracted canresult in a loss of vehicle con-trol that may lead to an acci-dent, severe personal injury,and death. The driver’s primaryresponsibility is in the safe andlegal operation of a vehicle, anduse of any handheld devices,other equipment, or vehicle sys-tems which take the driver’seyes, attention and focus awayfrom the safe operation of avehicle or which are not permis-sible by law should never beused during operation of thevehicle.

4 175


How vehicle audio works

AM and FM radio signals are broad-cast from transmitter towers locatedaround your city. They are intercept-ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-cle. This signal is then processed bythe radio and sent to your vehiclespeakers.However, in some cases the signalcoming to your vehicle may not bestrong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such asthe distance from the radio station,closeness of other strong radio sta-tions or the presence of buildings,bridges or other large obstructions inthe area.

AM broadcasts can be received atgreater distances than FM broad-casts. This is because AM radiowaves are transmitted at low fre-quencies. These long distance,lowfrequency radio waves can follow thecurvature of the earth rather thantravelling straight. In addition, theycurve around obstructions resultingin better signal coverage.

JBM002

AM reception

JBM001

FM reception


1764

FM broadcasts are transmitted athigh frequencies and do not bend tofollow the earth's surface. Becauseof this, FM broadcasts generallybegin to fade within short distancesfrom the station. Also, FM signals areeasily affected by buildings, moun-tains, and obstructions. This canlead to undesirable or unpleasant lis-tening conditions which might leadyou to believe a problem exists withyour radio. The following conditionsare normal and do not indicate radiotrouble:

• Fading - As your vehicle movesaway from the radio station, thesignal will weaken and sound willbegin to fade. When this occurs,we suggest that you select anotherstronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals orlarge obstructions between thetransmitter and your radio can dis-turb the signal causing static orfluttering noises to occur. Reducingthe treble level may lessen thiseffect until the disturbance clears.

• Station Swapping - As an FM sig-nal weakens, another more power-ful signal near the same frequencymay begin to play. This is becauseyour radio is designed to lock ontothe clearest signal. If this occurs,select another station with astronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radiosignals being received from sever-al directions can cause distortionor fluttering. This can be caused bya direct and reflected signal fromthe same station, or by signalsfrom two stations with close fre-quencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the conditionhas passed.

JBM003

FM radio station

JBM005JBM004

4 177


Using a cellular phone or a two-way radioWhen a cellular phone is used insidethe vehicle, noise may be producedfrom the audio system. This does notmean that something is wrong withthe audio equipment. In such a case,try to operate mobile devices as farfrom the audio equipment as possi-ble.

When using a communication sys-tem such as a cellular phone or aradio set inside the vehicle, a sepa-rate external antenna must be fitted.When a cellular phone or a radio setis used with an internal antennaalone, it may interfere with the vehi-cle's electrical system and adverselyaffect safe operation of the vehicle.

WARNING - Cell phoneuse

Do not use a cellular phonewhile driving. Stop at a safelocation to use a cellular phone.

WARNING - DriverDistraction

• Do not stare at the screenwhile driving. Staring at thescreen for prolonged periodsof time could lead to trafficaccidents.

• Using the phone while drivingmay lead to a lack of attentionof traffic conditions andincrease the likelihood ofaccidents. Use the phone fea-ture after parking the vehicle.

WARNING - Audio SystemDo not disassemble, assemble,or modify the audio system.Such acts could result in fire orelectric shock.

WARNING - AntennaDo not touch the antenna dur-ing thunder or lightening assuch acts may lead to lightninginduced electric shock.

CAUTIONRefrain from use if the screen isblank or no sound can be heardas these signs may indicateproduct malfunction.


1784

• Adjust the volume to levels thatallow the driver to hear soundsfrom outside of the vehicle. Drivingin a state where external soundscannot be heard may lead to acci-dents.

• Pay attention to the volume settingwhen turning the device on. A sud-den output of extreme volumeupon turning the device on couldlead to hearing impairment. (Adjustthe volume to a suitable levelsbefore turning off the device.)

• Turn on the car ignition beforeusing the audio system. Do notoperate the audio system for longperiods of time with the ignitionturned off; such operations may leadto battery discharge.

• In case of product malfunction,please contact your place of pur-chase or After Service center.

• Placing the audio system within anelectromagnetic environment mayresult in noise interference.

CAUTION• Do not subject the device to

severe shock or impact. Directpressure onto the front side ofthe monitor may cause damageto the LCD or touch screen.

• When cleaning the device,make sure to turn off theaudio system and use a dryand smooth cloth. Never usetough materials, chemicalcloths, or solvents (alcohol,benzene, thinners, etc.) assuch materials may damagethe device panel or causecolor/quality deterioration

• Do not place beverages closeto the audio system. Spillingbeverages may lead to systemmalfunction.

• Prevent caustic solutions suchas perfume and cosmetic oilfrom contacting the dashboardbecause they may cause dam-age or discoloration.

4 179


USING THE USB DEVICE• To use an external USB device,

make sure the device is not con-nected when starting up the vehi-cle. Connect the device after start-ing up.

• If you start the engine when theUSB device is connected, it maydamage the USB device. (USBflashdrives are very sensitive toelectric shock.)

• If the engine is started up or turnedoff while the external USB device isconnected, the external USBdevice may not work.

• The System may not play unau-thenticated MP3 or WMA files.1) It can only play MP3 files with

the compression rate between8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music fileswith the compression ratebetween 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.

• Take precautions for static electrici-ty when connecting or disconnect-ing the external USB device.

(Continued)

(Continued)• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not

recognizable.• Depending on the condition of the

external USB device, the connect-ed external USB device can beunrecognizable.

• When the formatted byte/sectorsetting of External USB device isnot either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,then the device will not be recog-nized.

• Use only a USB device formattedto FAT 12/16/32.

• USB devices without USB I/Fauthentication may not be recog-nizable.

• Make sure the USB connection ter-minal does not come in contactwith the human body or otherobjects.

• If you repeatedly connect or dis-connect the USB device in a shortperiod of time, it may break thedevice.

(Continued)

(Continued)• You may hear a strange noise

when connecting or disconnectinga USB device.

• If you disconnect the external USBdevice during playback in USBmode, the external USB devicecan be damaged or may malfunc-tion. Therefore, disconnect theexternal USB device when theaudio is turned off or in anothermode. (e.g, Radio)

• Depending on the type and capac-ity of the external USB device orthe type of the files stored in thedevice, there is a difference in thetime for recognition the device.

• Do not use the USB device for pur-poses other than playing musicfiles.

• Playing videos through the USB isnot supported.

• Use of USB accessories such asrechargers or heaters using USBI/F may lower performance orcause trouble.

(Continued)


1804

(Continued)• If you use devices such as a USB

hub purchased separately, thevehicle’s audio system may notrecognize the USB device. In thatcase, connect the USB devicedirectly to the multimedia terminalof the vehicle.

• If the USB device is divided by log-ical drives, only the music files onthe highest-priority drive are recog-nized by car audio.

• Devices such as MP3 Player/Cellular phone/Digital camera canbe unrecognizable by standardUSB I/F can be unrecognizable.

• Charging through the USB may notbe supported in some mobiledevices.

• USB HDD or USB types liable toconnection failures due to vehiclevibrations are not supported. (i-sticktype)

• Some non-standard USB devices(METAL COVER TYPE USB) canbe unrecognizable.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Some USB flash memory readers

(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) orexternal-HDD type devices can beunrecognizable.

• Music files protected by DRM (DIGI-TAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) arenot recognizable.

• The data in the USB memory maybe lost while using this audio.Always back up important data ona personal storage device.

• Please avoid usingUSB memory productswhich can be used askey chains or cellularphone accessories as they couldcause damage to the USB jack.Please make certain only to useplug type connector products.

USING iPod® DEVICEiPhone® is a registered trademark ofApple inc.• Some iPod® models may not sup-

port communication protocol andfiles may not play properly.Supported iPod® models:- iPhone® 3GS/4 or latest model- iPod® touch 1st~4th generation- iPod® nano 1st~6th generation- iPod® classic

• The order of search or playback ofsongs in the iPod® can be differentfrom the order searched in theaudio system.

• If the iPod® is disabled due to itsown malfunction, reset the iPod®.(Reset: Refer to iPod® manual)

• An iPod® may not operate normallyon low battery.

(Continued)

4 181


(Continued)• Some iPod® devices, such as the

iPhone®, can be connectedthrough the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology interface. The devicemust have audio Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology capability(such as for stereo headphoneBluetooth® Wireless Technology ).The device can play, but it will notbe controlled by the audio system.

• To use iPod® features within theaudio mode, use the cable provid-ed upon purchasing an iPod®

device.• Skipping or improper operation

may occur depending on the char-acteristics of your iPod®/iPhone®

device.• If your iPhone® is connected to

both the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology and USB, only iPod®

mode will be supported duringBluetooth® Audio Streaming.To useBluetooth® Audio Streaming, dis-connect iPod® cable with iPhone®.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When connecting iPod® with the

iPod® Power Cable, insert the con-nector to the multimedia socketcompletely. If not inserted complete-ly, communications between iPod®

and audio may be interrupted.• When adjusting the sound effects

of the iPod® and the audio system,the sound effects of both deviceswill overlap and might reduce ordistort the quality of the sound.

• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizerfunction of an iPod® when adjust-ing the audio system’s volume, andturn off the equalizer of the audiosystem when using the equalizer ofan iPod®.

• When not using iPod® with caraudio, detach the iPod® cable fromiPod®. Otherwise, iPod® may remainin accessory mode, and may notwork properly.

Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology(if equipped)

Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyThe Bluetooth® word mark and logosare registered trademarks owned byBluetooth® SIG, lnc. and any use ofsuch marks by Kia is under license.A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone isrequired to use Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology.

WARNINGDriving while distracted canresult in a loss of vehicle controlthat may lead to an accident,severe personal injury, anddeath. The driver’s primaryresponsibility is in the safe andlegal operation of a vehicle, anduse of any handheld devices,other equipment, or vehicle sys-tems which take the driver’seyes, attention and focus awayfrom the safe operation of a vehi-cle or which are not permissibleby law should never be usedduring operation of the vehicle.


1824

Before Using the Bluetooth®

Wireless TechnologyHandsfree

What is Bluetooth® ?• Bluetooth® refers to a short-dis-

tance wireless networking technolo-gy which uses a 2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHzfrequency to connect variousdevices within a certain distance.

• Supported within PCs, externaldevices, Bluetooth® phones, PDAs,various electronic devices, and auto-motive environments, Bluetooth®

allows data to be transmitted at highspeeds without having to use a con-nector cable.

• Bluetooth® Handsfree refers to adevice which allows the user toconveniently make phone calls withBluetooth® mobile phones throughthe audio system.

• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not besupported in some mobile phones.Tolearn more about mobile device com-patibility, visit http://www.kia.com/us/en/content/owners/bluetooth.

Precautions for Safe Driving

• Bluetooth® Handsfree is a featurethat enables drivers to practicesafe driving. Connecting the headunit with a Bluetooth® phone allowsthe user to conveniently make andreceive calls and use contacts.Before using Bluetooth®, carefullyread the contents of this user’smanual.

• Excessive use or operations whiledriving may lead to negligent drivingpractices and result in accidents.Refrain from excessive operationswhile driving.

• Viewing the screen for prolongedperiods of time is dangerous andmay lead to accidents. When driv-ing, view the screen only for shortperiods of time.

When connecting a Bluetooth®

Phone

• Before connecting the head unitwith the mobile phone, check tosee that the mobile phone sup-ports Bluetooth® features.

• Even if the phone supports Bluetooth®,the phone will not be found duringdevice searches if the phone hasbeen set to hidden state or theBluetooth® power is turned off.Disable the hidden state or turn onthe Bluetooth® power prior tosearching/connecting with the Headunit.

• If you do not want an automatic con-nection with your Bluetooth® device,turn off the Bluetooth® feature with-in your mobile phone.

• The Handsfree call volume andquality may differ depending on themobile phone.

4 183


• Park the vehicle when connectingthe head unit with the mobilephone.

• Bluetooth® connection may becomeintermittently disconnected in somemobile phones. Follow these stepsto try again.1.Within the mobile phone, turn

the Bluetooth® function off/onand try again.

2.Turn the mobile phone powerOff/On and try again.

3.Completely remove the mobilephone battery (if possible),reboot, and then try again.

4.Reboot the audio system and tryagain.

5.Delete all paired devices, pairand try again.

Voice Recognition(if equipped)

• When using the voice recognitionfeature, only commands listedwithin the user's manual are sup-ported.

• Be aware that during the operationof the voice recognition system,pressing any key other than the

key terminate voice recogni-tion mode.

• For optimal voice recognition per-formance, position your headbelow the microphone above thedriver’s seat and maintain properposition when speaking voice com-mands.

• Within the following situations,voice recognition may not functionproperly due to external sound.

- When the windows and sunroofare open

- When the blower AC/heater is setto high

- When entering and passing throughtunnels

(Continued)

(Continued)- When driving on rugged anduneven roads

- During severe rain (heavy rains,windstorms)

• Phone related voice commands canbe used only when a Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology device is con-nected.

• When making calls by stating aname, the corresponding contactmust be downloaded and storedwithin the audio system.

• After downloading the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology phone book,it takes some time to convert thephone book data into voice infor-mation. During this time, voicerecognition may not properly oper-ate.

• Pronounce the voice commandsnaturally and clearly as if in a nor-mal conversation.


1844

Standard Audio System

4 185


SYSTEM CONTROLLERSAND FUNCTIONS

Audio Head Unit

(1) (EJECT)Ejects the disc.

(2) Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM mode.Each time the key is pressed, themode is changed in order of FM1 ➟

FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2 ➟ SAT3.❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up

screen will be displayed when[Mode Pop up] is turned .When the pop up screen is dis-played, use the TUNE knob orkeys ~ to select thedesired mode.

(3) Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX,My Music, BT Audio mode.Each time the key is pressed, themode is changed in order of CD,USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BTAudio.❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop

up screen will be displayed when[Mode Pop up] is turned .When the pop up screen is dis-played, use the TUNE knob orkeys ~ to select thedesired mode.

(4) Operates Phone Screen❈ When a phone is not connected,

the connection screen is dis-played.

(5) POWER/VOL knobPower : Turns power On/Off by

pressing the knobVolume : Sets volume by turning

the knob left/right

(6) , Radio Mode : Automatically search-es for broadcast frequencies.CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds): Moves to next or previous song(file)

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-onds): Rewinds or fast-forwards thecurrent song.

BT Audio mode : Moves to next orprevious song(file)❈ The Play/Pause feature may oper-

ate differently depending on themobile phone.

TRACKSEEK

PHONE

51

On

MEDIA

61

On

RADIO


1864

(7) It sets the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟Screen Off❈ Audio operation is maintained and

only the screen will be turned Off.In the screen Off state, press anykey to turn the screen On again.

(8) Radio Mode- Shortly press the key : Previews

each broadcast for 5 secondseach.

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8seconds): Previews the broadcastssaved in Preset ~ for 5seconds each.

❈ Press the key again tocontinue listening to the currentfrequency.

❈ SAT Radio does not support thePreset scan feature.

CD, USB, My Music mode- Shortly press the key (under 0.8

seconds): Previews each song(file) for 10 seconds each.

❈ Press the key again tocontinue listening to the currentsong (file).

(9) Moves to the Display, Sound, Clock,Phone, System setting modes.

(10) Displays menus for the current mode.❈ iPod® List : Move to parent category

(11) TUNE knobRadio mode : Changes frequency byturning the knob left/right.CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode:Searches songs (files) by turning theknob left/right.❈ When the desired song is dis-

played, press the knob to play thesong.

Moves focus in all selection menusand selects menus.

(12) , Radio Mode- SiriusXM RADIO : Category SearchMP3 CD, USB mode : Folder Search

(13) ~ (Preset)Radio Mode: Saves frequencies(channels) or receives saved fre-quencies (channels)CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode- : Repeat- : RandomIn the Radio, Media, Setup, andMenu pop up screen, the numbermenu is selected.

2 RDM

1 RPT

61

FOLDERCAT

MENU

SETUPCLOCK

SCAN

SCAN

61

SCAN

DISP

4 187


SETUP

Display Settings

Press the key Select[Display] through TUNE knob or

key Select menu through TUNE knob

Mode Pop up[Mode Pop up] Changes /selection mode• During On state, press the

or key to display the modechange pop up screen.

Media DisplayWhen playing an MP3 file, select thedesired display info from ‘Folder/File’or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.

MEDIARADIO

OffOn

1 RPT

SETUPCLOCK


1884

SOUND SETTINGS

Press the key Select [Sound]through TUNE knob or keySelect menu through TUNE knob

ToneThis menu allows you to set theBass, Middle, Treble.

Select [Tone] Select menu throughTUNE knob Turn TUNE knob

left/right to set

• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects thesound tone.

• Default : Restores default settings.❈ Return : While adjusting values,

pressing the TUNE knob willrestore the parent menu.

PositionThis menu allows you to set theFader, Balance.

Select [Position] Select menuthrough TUNE knob Turn TUNE knob left/right to set

• Fader, Balance : Selects the soundfader and balance.

• Default : Restores default settings.❈ Return : While adjusting values,

pressing the TUNE knob willrestore the parent menu.

Speed Dependent Volume ControlThis feature is used to automaticallycontrol the volume level according tothe speed of the vehicle.Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set[Off/On] of TUNE knob

Voice Recognition VolumeAdjusts voice recognition volume.Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Setvolume of TUNE knob

2 RDM

SETUPCLOCK

4 189


CLOCK SETTINGS

Press the key Select [Clock]through TUNE knob or keySelect menu through TUNE knob

Clock SettingsThis menu is used to set the time.Select [Clock Settings] Set through

TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

❈ Adjust the number currently infocus to set the [hour] and pressthe tune knob to set the [minute]and [AM/PM].

Calendar SettingsThis menu is used to set the date.Select [Calendar Settings] Set through

TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

❈ Adjust the number currently infocus to make the settings andpress the tune knob to move tothe next setting.

Time FormatThis function is used to set the 12/24hour time format of the audio sys-tem.Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr /24Hr through TUNE knob.

Clock Display when Power is OFFSelect [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off)] Set

/ through TUNE knob• : Displays time/date on screen• : Turn off.Off

On

OffOn

3

SETUPCLOCK

WARNING - Clock SettingDistraction

Do not adjust the clock whiledriving. You may lose yoursteering control and causesevere personal injury or acci-dents.


1904

SYSTEM SETTINGS

Press the key Select[System] Select menu through

TUNE knob

Memory InformationDisplays currently used memory andtotal system memory.Select [Memory Information] OKThe currently used memory is dis-played on the left side while the totalsystem memory is displayed on theright side.

Prompt FeedbackThis feature is used to change voicecommand feedback between Normaland Expert modes.Select [Prompt Feedback] Setthrough TUNE knob• On : This mode is for beginner

users and provides detailedinstructions during voice commandoperation.

• Off : This mode is for expert usersand omits some information duringvoice command operation. (Whenusing Expert mode, guidanceinstructions can be heard throughthe [Help] or [Menu] commands.

LanguageThis menu is used to set the displayand voice recognition language.Select [Language]Set through TUNE knob

❈ The system will reboot after thelanguage is changed.

❈ Language support by region- English, Francais, Espanol

SETUPCLOCK

4 191


RADIO : FM, AM or SiriusXM

SEEKPress the , key• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Automatically searchesfor the next station.

• Pressing and holding the key (over0.8 seconds): While holding the key,frequency changes without stop-ping. When the key is released,automatically searches for the nextfrequency from that point.

Preset SEEKPress the ~ key• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Plays the frequencysaved in the corresponding key.

• Pressing and holding the key (over0.8 seconds): Pressing and holdingthe desired key from ~ will save the currently playingbroadcast to the selected key andsound a BEEP.

SCANPress the key• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): The broadcast frequencyincreases and previews eachbroadcast for 5 seconds each. Afterscanning all frequencies, returnsand plays the current broadcast fre-quency.

• Pressing and holding the key (over0.8 seconds): Previews the broad-casts saved in Preset ~ for 5 seconds each.

Selecting through manualsearchTurn the TUNE knob left/right toadjust the frequency.

61

SCAN

61

61

TRACKSEEK


1924

MENUWithin key are the A.Store(Auto Store) and Info functions.

A.StorePress the key Set [A.Store]through TUNE knob or key.Saves broadcasts with superiorreception to ~ keys. If nofrequencies are received, then themost recently received frequency willbe broadcast.

61

1 RPT

MENU

MENU

4 193


SiriusXM® Satellite Radioinformation

Satellite Radio channels:Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a 3-month trial subscription to the SiriusSelect package. You’ll get over 140channels, including commercial-freemusic, plus all your favorite sports,exclusive talk, entertainment, and aselection of premium programming. Formore information and a complete list ofSiriusXM channels, visit siriusxm.comin the United States, siriusxm.ca inCanada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio reception factors:To receive the satellite signal, yourvehicle has been equipped with asatellite radio antenna located on theroof of your vehicle. The vehicle roofprovides the best location for an unob-structed, open view of the sky, arequirement of a satellite radio sys-tem. Like AM/FM, there are severalfactors that can affect satellite radioreception performance:• Antenna obstructions: For optimal

reception performance, keep theantenna clear of snow and ice build-

up and keep luggage and othermaterial as far away from the anten-na as possible.

• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build-ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway over-passes, parking garages, densetree foliage and thunderstorms caninterfere with your reception.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio serv-ice:SiriusXM is a subscription-basedsatellite radio service that broadcastsmusic, sports, news and entertain-ment programming to radio receivers,which are available for installation inmotor vehicles or factory installed, aswell as for the home, portable andwireless devices, and through anInternet connection on a personalcomputer.Vehicles that are equipped with a fac-tory installed SiriusXM Satellite Radiosystem include:• Hardware and an introductory trial

subscription term, which begins onthe date of sale or lease of the vehi-cle.

• For a small upgrade fee, access toSiriusXM music channels, and otherselect channels over the Internetusing any computer connected tothe Internet (U.S. customers only).

For information on extended sub-scription terms, contact SiriusXM at1-888-539-7474.

NOTE:SiriusXM services require a sub-scription sold separately, or as apackage, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. Ifyou decide to continue serviceafter your trial, the subscriptionplan you choose will automatical-ly renew thereafter and you will becharged according to your chosenpayment method at then-currentrates. Fees and taxes apply. Tocancel you must call SiriusXM at1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXMCustomer Agreement for com-plete terms at www.siriusxm.com.SiriusXM U.S. satellite and dataservices are available only in the48 contiguous USA, DC and PR(with coverage limitations).SiriusXM satellite service is alsoavailable in Canada; see www.sir-iusxm. ca. All fees and program-ming subject to change. Sirius,XM and all related marks andlogos are trademarks of Sirius XMRadio Inc.


1944

SiriusXM RADIO

Using SiriusXM Satellite RadioYour Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3-month trial subscription to SiriusXMso you have access to over 140channels of music, information, andentertainment programming.

ActivationIn order to extend or reactivate yourSirius Select subscription, you willneed to contact SiriusXM CustomerCare at 1-800-643-2112. Have your12-digit RID (Radio IdentificationNumber) / ESN (Electronic SerialNumber) ready. To retrieve the RID /ESN, turn on the radio, press the

key, and tune to channelzero.

Please note that the vehicle will needto be turned on, in Sirius mode, andhave an unobstructed view of the skyin order for the radio to receive theactivation signal.

SEEKPress the key , • Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Select previous or nextchannel.

• Pressing and holding the key (over0.8 seconds): Continuously moveto previous or next channel.

❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,channels are changed within thecurrent category.

SCANPress the key• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Previews each broad-cast for 5 seconds each

❈ Press the key again tocontinue listening to the currentfrequency

❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,channels are changed within thecurrent category.

CategoryPress the , key Setthrough the TUNE knob• The display will indicate the catego-

ry menus, highlight the categorythat the current channel belongs to.

• In the Category List Mode, pressthe , key to navi-gate category list.

• Press the tune knob to select thelowest channel in the highlightedcategory.

❈ If channel is selected by selectingcategory, then the “CATEGORY”icon is displayed at the top of thescreen.

FOLDERCAT

FOLDERCAT

SCAN

SCANRADIO

TRACKSEEKRADIO

RADIO

4 195


PresetPress the key ~ • Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Plays the frequencysaved in the corresponding key.

• Pressing and holding the key (over0.8 seconds): Pressing and holdingthe desired key from ~ will save the current broadcast tothe selected key and sound aBEEP.

✽✽ Troubleshooting1. Antenna Error

If this message is displayed, theantenna or antenna cable is bro-ken or unplugged. Please consultwith your Kia dealership.

2. No SignalIf this message is displayed, itmeans that the antenna is coveredand that the SiriusXM SatelliteRadio signal is not available.Ensure the antenna is uncoveredand has a clear view of the sky.

Tune• Rotate TUNE knob : Changes

the channel number or scrolls cat-egory list.

• Press TUNE knob : Selects themenu.

MenuSelect category menu through the

TUNE knob Press the key Select [ Info] through the

TUNE knob or key

Info (Information)Displays the Artist/Song info of thecurrent song.

1 RPT

MENU

61

61RADIO


1964

BASIC METHOD OF USE :Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /iPod® / My Music

Press the key to change themode in order of CD ➟ USB(iPod®) ➟AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.The folder/file name is displayed onthe screen.

<Audio CD>

<MP3 CD>

<USB>

<My Music>

❈ The CD is automatically playedwhen a CD is inserted.

❈ The USB music is automaticallyplayed when a USB is connected.

RepeatWhile song (file) is playing(RPT) keyAudio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, MyMusic mode: RPT on screen• To repeat one song (press the key)

: Repeats the current song.MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT onscreen• To repeat folder (pressing twice):

repeats all files within the currentfolder.

❈ Press the key again to turnoff repeat.

RandomWhile song (file) is playing(RDM) keyAudio CD, My Music mode: RDM onscreen• Random (press the key) : Plays all

songs in random order.

2 RDM

1 RPT

1 RPT

MEDIA

4 197


MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM onscreen• Folder Random (press the key) :

Plays all files within the current fold-er in random order.

iPod® mode: ALL RDM on screen• All Random (press the key) : Plays

all files in random order.MP3 CD, USB : ALL RDM on screen• All Random (pressing twice): Plays

all files in random order.❈ Press the key again to turn

off repeat.

Changing Song/FileWhile song (file) is playingkey• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the

current song from the beginning.❈ If the key is pressed again

within 2 seconds, the previoussong is played.

• Pressing and holding the key (over0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.

While song (file) is playing key• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the

next song.• Pressing and holding the key (over

0.8 seconds): Fast forwards thesong.

ScanWhile song (file) is playingkey• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all

songs from the next song for 10seconds each.

❈ Press the key again to turnoff.

❈ The SCAN function is not support-ed in iPod® mode.

Folder Search : MP3 CD, USBModeWhile file is playing (FolderUp) key• Searches the next folder.While file is playing (FolderDown) key• Searches the parent folder.❈ If a folder is selected by pressing

the TUNE knob, the first filewithin the selected folder will beplayed.

❈ In iPod® mode, moves to theParent Folder.

Searching Songs (File)• Turning TUNE knob : Searches

for songs (files)• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays

selected song (file).

FOLDER

CAT

SCAN

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

TRACK

2 RDM


1984

MENU : Audio CDPress the Audio CD mode key to set the Repeat, Random,Information features.

RepeatPress the key Set [ RPT]through the TUNE knob or key to repeat the current song.❈ Press RPT again to turn off.

RandomPress the key Set [ RDM]through the TUNE knob or key to randomly play songs withinthe current CD.❈ Press RDM again to turn off.

InformationPress the key Set [ Info]through the TUNE knob or key to display information of the cur-rent song.❈ Press the key to turn off

info display.

MENU : MP3 CD / USBPress the MP3 CD/USB mode

key to set the Repeat, FolderRandom, Folder Repeat, AllRandom, Information, and Copy fea-tures.

RepeatPress the key Set [ RPT]through the TUNE knob or key to repeat the current song.❈ Press RPT again to turn off.

1 RPT

MENU

MENU

MENU

3MENU

2 RDM

MENU

1 RPT

MENU

MENU

4 199


Folder RandomPress the key Set [ F.RDM]through the TUNE knob or key to randomly play songs within thecurrent folder.❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.

Folder RepeatPress the key Set [ F.RPT]through the TUNE knob or key to repeat songs within the cur-rent folder.❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.

All RandomPress the key Set [ A.RDM]through the TUNE knob or keyto randomly play all songs within theCD/USB.❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.

InformationPress the key Set [ Info]through the TUNE knob or key to display information of the cur-rent song.❈ Press the key to turn off

info display.

CopyPress the key Set [ Copy]through the TUNE knob or key.This is used to copy the current songinto My Music. You can play thecopied Music in My Music mode.❈ If another key is pressed while

copying is in progress, a pop upasking you whether to cancelcopying is displayed.

❈ If another media is connected orinserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX)while copying is in progress, copy-ing is canceled.

❈ Music will not be played whilecopying is in progress.

6

MENU

MENU

5MENU

4MENU

3MENU

2 RDM

MENU


2004

MENU : iPod®

In iPod® mode, press the keyto set the Repeat, Random, Informationand Search features.

RepeatPress the key Set [ RPT]through the TUNE knob or key to repeat the current song.❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

RandomPress the key Set [ RDM]through the TUNE knob or key.Plays all songs within the currentlyplaying category in random order.❈ Press RDM again to turn off.

InformationPress the key Set [ Info]through the TUNE knob or key.Displays information of the currentsong.❈ Press the key to turn off

info display.

SearchPress the key Set [ Search]through the TUNE knob or key.Displays iPod® category list.❈ Searching iPod® category is

key pressed, move to par-ent category.MENU

4MENU

MENU

3MENU

2 RDM

MENU

1 RPT

MENU

MENU

4 201


MENU : My Music Mode

In My Music mode, press the key to set the Repeat, Random,Information, Delete, Delete All, andDelete Selection features.

RepeatPress the key Set [ RPT]through the TUNE knob or key.Repeats the currently playing song.❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

RandomPress the key Set [ RDM]through the TUNE knob or key.Plays all songs in random order.❈ Press RDM again to turn random off.

InformationPress the key Set [ Info]through the TUNE knob or key.Displays information of the currentsong.❈ Press the key to turn off

info display.

DeletePress the key Set [ Delete]through the TUNE knob or key.Deletes currently playing fileIn the play screen, pressing deletewill delete the currently playing song.Deletes file from list

➀ Select the file you wish to deleteby using the TUNE knob.

➁ Press the key and selectthe delete menu to delete theselected file.

Delete AllPress the key Set [ Del.All]through the TUNE knob or key.Deletes all songs of My Music.

Delete SelectionPress the key Set [ Del.Sel]through the TUNE knob or key.Songs within My Music are selectedand deleted.➀ Select the songs you wish to

delete from the list.

6MENU

5MENU

MENU

4MENU

MENU

3MENU

2 RDM

MENU

1 RPT

MENU

MENU


2024

➁ After selecting, press keyand select the delete menu.

My Music• Even if memory is available, a

maximum of 6,000 songs can bestored.

• The same song can be copied upto 1,000 times.

• Memory info can be checked in theSystem menu of Setup.

AUXAUX is used to play external MEDIAcurrently connected with the AUXterminal.AUX mode will automatically startwhen an external device is connect-ed with the AUX terminal.If an external device is connected,you can also press the key tochange to AUX mode.

❈ AUX mode cannot be startedunless there is an external deviceconnected to the AUX terminal.

AUXFully insert the AUX cable into theAUX terminal for use.

MEDIA

MENU

4 203


Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologyAUDIO

What is Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology?Bluetooth® Wireless Technologyallows devices to be connected in ashort distance, including hands-freedevices, stereo headsets, wirelessremote controllers, etc. For moreinformation, visit the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology website atwww.Bluetooth.com

Before using Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology audio features• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio

may not be supported depending onthe compatibility of your Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology mobile phone.• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology audio, you must firstpair and connect the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology mobile phone.

• The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are registered trademarksowned by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. andany use of such marks by Kia isunder license. Other trademarksand trade names are those of theirrespective owners. A Bluetooth®

enabled cell phone is required touse Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technologyaudio can be used only when the[Audio Streaming] of Phone isturned .On

WARNINGDriving while distracted canresult in a loss of vehicle controlthat may lead to an accident,severe personal injury, anddeath. The driver’s primaryresponsibility is in the safe andlegal operation of a vehicle, anduse of any handheld devices,other equipment, or vehicle sys-tems which take the driver’seyes, attention and focus awayfrom the safe operation of a vehi-cle or which are not permissibleby law should never be used dur-ing operation of the vehicle.


2044

Starting Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Audio• Press the key to change the

mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟ AUX➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.

• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology audio will startplaying.

❈ Audio may not automatically startplaying in some mobile phones.

Using the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology audio features• Play / StopPress the TUNE knob to play andpause the current song.

❈The title / artist info may not be sup-ported in some mobile phones.When it is not supported, no title orartist will be displayed.

• Previous / Next songPress or to play previ-ous or next song.❈ The previous song / next song /

play / pause functions may not besupported in some mobilephones.

TRACKSEEK

MEDIA

4 205


PHONE

Before using the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone features• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology phone, you must firstpair and connect the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology mobile phone.• If the mobile phone is not paired or

connected, it is not possible toenter Phone mode. Once a phoneis paired or connected, the guid-ance screen will be displayed.

• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-tion (IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology phone will beautomatically connected. Even ifyou are outside, the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology phone will beautomatically connected once youare in the vicinity of the vehicle. Ifyou do not want automaticBluetooth® Wireless Technologyphone connection, set theBluetooth® Wireless Technologypower to OFF

Making a call using theSteering-wheel mount controls

❈ The actual features in the vehiclemay differ from the illustration.

(1) key : Mutes the microphoneduring a call when wheelpressed.

(2) , key /scroll wheel : Raises orlowers speaker volume.

(3) key : Activates voice recogni-tion.

(4) key : Places and transferscalls.

(5) key : Ends calls or cancelsfunctions.

• Check call history and making calls- Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds)

the key on the steeringremote controller.

- The call history list will be dis-played on the screen.

- Press the key again to con-nect a call to the selected number.

• Redialing the most recently callednumber

- Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds)the key on the steeringremote controller.

- The most recently called number isredialed.

❈ If call history does not exist, ascreen asking whether to down-load call history is displayed. (Thedownload feature may not be sup-ported in some mobile phones)

-+


2064

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

Pairing a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Device

What is Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Pairing?Pairing refers to the process of syn-chronizing your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone or device with thecar audio system for connection.Pairing is necessary to connect anduse the Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology feature.The Bluetooth® word mark and logosare registered trademarks owned byBluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use ofsuch marks by Kia is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone isrequired to use Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology.


4 207


Pairing key / key onthe Steering Remote Controller

When No Devices have been Paired1. Press the key or the

key on the steering remote con-troller. The following screen is dis-played.

2. Select [OK] button to enter thePair Phone screen.

1) Vehicle Name : Name of device asshown when searching from yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice

2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair thedevice

3. From your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device (i.e. MobilePhone), search and select yourcar audio system.

[Non SSP supported device](SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)4. After a few moments, a screen is

displayed where the passkey isentered. Enter the passkey “0000”to pair your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device with the caraudio system.

[SSP supported device]4. After a few moments, a screen is

displayed 6 digits passkey.Check the passkey on yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice and confirm.

5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-lowing screen is displayed.

PHONE

PHONE


2084

Some phones (i.e., iPhone®, Android TM

and Blackberry® phones) may offeran option to allow acceptance of allfuture Bluetooth® connectionrequests by default." and "Visithttp://www.kia.com/us/en/content/owners/bluetooth for additional infor-mation on pairing your Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone, and to view aphone compatibility list.

• If Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevices are paired but none arecurrently connected, pressing the

key or the key on thesteering wheel displays the follow-ing screen. Select [Pair] button topair a new device or select[Connect] to connect a previouslypaired device.

PHONE

4 209


Pairing through [PHONE]Setup

Press the key Select[Phone] Select [Pair Phone] Select TUNE knob

1. The following steps are the sameas those described in the section"When No Devices have beenPaired" on the previous page.

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technologyfeatures supported within the vehi-cle are as follows. Some featuresmay not be supported dependingon your Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device.- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree

calls- Operations during a call (Switch

to Private, Switch to call waiting,MIC on/off)

- Downloading Call History- Downloading Mobile Contacts- Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice auto connection- Bluetooth® Audio Streaming

• Up to five Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology devices can be pairedto the Car Handsfree system.

• Only one Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device can be con-nected at a time.

• Other devices cannot be pairedwhile a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device is connected.

• Only Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Handsfree andBluetooth® audio related featuresare supported.

• Bluetooth® related operations arepossible only within devices thatsupport Handsfree or audio fea-tures, such as a Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology mobile phoneor a Bluetooth® audio device.

• If a connected Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device becomes dis-connected due to being out ofcommunication range, turning thedevice OFF, or a Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology communica-tion error, correspondingBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevices are automaticallysearched and reconnected.

• If the system becomes unstabledue to communication errorsbetween the car Handsfree and theBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice, reset the device by turningoff and back on again. Upon reset-ting Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device, the system willbe restored.

SETUPCLOCK


2104

• After pairing is complete, a con-tacts download request is sentonce to the mobile phone. Somemobile phones may require confir-mation upon receiving a downloadrequest, ensure your mobile phoneaccepts the connection. Refer toyour phones user’s manual foradditional information regardingphone pairing and connections.

Connecting a Device

Press the key Select[Phone] Select [Phone List]

1) Connected Phone : Device that iscurrently connected

2) Paired Phone : Device that ispaired but not connected

From the paired phone list, select thedevice you want to connect andselect [Connect].

SETUPCLOCK

4 211


Changing Priority

What is Priority?It is possible to pair up to fiveBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevices with the car audio system.The "Change Priority" feature is usedto set the connection priority ofpaired phones.


From the paired phone list, selectthe phone you want to switch to thehighest priority, then select [ChangePriority] button from the Menu. Theselected device will be changed tothe highest priority.

• Priority icon will be displayed whenthe selected phone is set as a pri-ority phone.

SETUPCLOCK


2124

Disconnecting a Device


From the paired phone list, select thecurrently connected device andselect [Disconnect] button.

Deleting a Device


From the paired phone list, select thedevice you want to delete and select[Delete] button.

• When deleting the currently con-nected device, the device will auto-matically be disconnected to pro-ceed with the deleting process.

• If a paired Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device is deleted, thedevice’s call history and contactsdata will also be deleted.

• To re-use a deleted device, youmust pair the device again.

SETUPCLOCK

SETUPCLOCK

4 213


USING Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology

Phone Menu Screen

Phone MenusWith a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device connected, pressthe key to display the Phonemenu screen.

1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently usedcontacts can be saved for easyaccess.

2) Call History : Displays the call his-tory list screen

3) Contacts : Displays the Contactslist screen

4) Setup : Displays Phone relatedsettings.

• If you select the [Call History] but-ton but there is no call history data,a prompt is displayed which asksto download call history data.

• If you select the [Contacts] buttonbut there is no contacts datastored, a prompt is displayed whichasks to download contacts data.

• This feature may not be supportedin some mobile phones. For moreinformation on download support,refer to your mobile phone user’smanual.

Answering Calls

Answering a CallAnswering a call with a Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology device connect-ed will display the following screen.To accept the call, press key onthe steering wheel while the call isincoming.

1) Caller : Displays the other party’sname when the incoming caller issaved within your contacts

2) Incoming Number : Displays theincoming number

SETUPCLOCK


2144

✽✽ NOTICE• When an incoming call pop-up is

displayed, most Audio and SETUPmode features are disabled. Onlythe call volume will operate.

• The telephone number may not beproperly displayed in some mobilephones.

Favorites

Press the key Select[Favorites]

1) Saved favorite contact : Connectscall upon selection

2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-tacts can be saved as favorite.

• To save Favorite, contacts shouldbe downloaded.

• Contact saved in Favorites will notbe automatically updated if thecontact has been updated in thephone. To update Favorites, deletethe Favorite and create a newFavorite.

Call History

Press the key Select [CallHistory]

A list of incoming, outgoing andmissed calls is displayed.• Call history may not be saved in the call

history list in some mobile phones.• Calls received with hidden caller ID will

not be saved in the call history list.• Calling through the call history is not

possible when there is no call historystored or a Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology phone is not connected.

• Up to 50 received, dialed and missedcalls are stored in Call History.

• Time of received/dialed calls and calltime information are not stored in CallHistory.

PHONE PHONE

4 215


Contacts

Press the key Select[Contacts]

The list of saved phone book entriesis displayed.

NOTE:Find a contact in alphabeticalorder, press the key.

• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in yourBluetooth® Wireless Technologyphone can be downloaded into thecar contacts. Contacts that havebeen downloaded to the car cannotbe edited or deleted on the phone.

• Mobile phone contacts are man-aged separately for each pairedBluetooth® Wireless Technologydevice (max 5 devices x 1,000 con-tacts each). Previously down-loaded data is maintained even ifthe Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology device has been dis-connected. (However, the contactsand call history saved to the phonewill be deleted if a paired phone isdeleted.)

• It is possible to download contactsduring Bluetooth® streaming audio.

• When downloading contacts, theicon will be displayed within thestatus bar.

• It is not possible to begin down-loading a contact list when the con-tact download feature has beenturned off within the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology device. Inaddition, some devices mayrequire device authorization uponattempting to download contacts. Ifdownloading does not normallyoccur, check the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology device set-tings or the screen state.

• The contacts download featuremay not be supported in somemobile phones. For more informa-tion of supported Bluetooth®

devices and function support, referto your phone’s user manual.

MENU

PHONE


2164

Bluetooth® Wireless TechnologySetting

The Bluetooth® word mark and logosare registered trademarks owned byBluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use ofsuch marks by Kia is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone isrequired to use Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology

Pairing a New DevicePress the key Select[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

Bluetooth® Wireless Technologydevices can be paired with the audiosystem.For more information, refer to the“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec-tion within Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology.

Viewing Paired Phone ListPress the key Select[Phone] Select [Phone List]

This feature is used to view mobilephones that have been paired withthe audio system. Upon selecting apaired phone, the setup menu is dis-played.For more information, refer to the“Setting Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology Connection” sectionwithin Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology.

SETUPCLOCK

SETUPCLOCK


4 217


1) Connect/Disconnect Phone :Connect/ disconnects currentlyselected phone

2) Change Priority : Sets currentlyselected phone to highest connec-tion priority

3) Delete : Deletes the currentlyselected phone

4) Return : Moves to the previousscreen

• To learn more about whether yourmobile phone supports contactdownloads, refer to your mobilephone user’s manual.

• The contacts for only the connect-ed phone can be downloaded

Downloading ContactsPress the key Select[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]

As the contacts are downloadedfrom the mobile phone, a downloadprogress bar is displayed.

• Upon downloading phone con-tacts, the previous correspondingdata is deleted.

• This feature may not be supportedin some mobile phones.

• Voice Recognition may not operatewhile contacts are being down-loaded.

Outgoing VolumePress the key Select[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]

Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-going volume level.

• While on a call, the volume can bechanged by using the ,

key.TRACKSEEK

SETUPCLOCK

SETUPCLOCK


2184

Turning Bluetooth System OffPress the key Select[Phone] Select [Bluetooth SystemOff]Once Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology is turned off, Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology related featureswill not be supported within the audiosystem.

• To turn Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology back on, go to

[Phone] and select “Yes”.SETUPCLOCK

SETUPCLOCK

4 219


VOICE RECOGNITION

Using Voice Recognition

Starting Voice RecognitionShortly press the key on thesteering wheel. Say a command

If prompt feedback is in [ON], thenthe system will say “Please say acommand after the beep (BEEP)”• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]

mode, then the system will onlysay “(BEEP)”

• To change Prompt Feedback[On]/[Off], go to [System]

[Prompt Feedback]• For proper recognition, say the

command after the voice instruc-tion and beep tone.

Contact List Best Practices1) Use full names vs. short or single

syllable names (“John Smith” vs.“Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.“Home”)

2) Avoid using special characters orhyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)

3) Avoid using acronyms (“In CaseEmergency” vs. “ICE”)

4) Spell words completely, no abbre-viations (“Doctor Goodman” vs.“Dr. Goodman”)

SETUPCLOCK


2204

Skipping Prompt MessagesWhile prompt message is being stat-ed Shortly press the key on thesteering remote controllerThe prompt message is immediatelyended and the beep tone will sound.After the “beep”, say the voice com-mand.

Re-starting Voice RecognitionWhile system waits for a commandShortly press the key on thesteering remote controllerThe command wait state is immedi-ately ended and the beep tone willsound. After the “beep”, say the voicecommand.

ENDING VOICERECOGNITION

While Voice Recognition is operatingPress and hold the key on the

steering remote controller

• While using voice command,pressing any steering wheel con-trol or a different key will end voicecommand.

• When the system is waiting for avoice command, say “cancel” or“end” to end voice command.

• When the system is waiting for avoice command, press and holdthe key on the steering wheelto end voice command.

Voice Recognition and PhoneContact Tips:The Kia Voice Recognition Systemmay have difficulty understandingsome accents or uncommon names.When using Voice Recognition to placea call, speak in a moderate tone, withclear pronunciation.To maximize the use of Voice Recognition,consider these guidelines when storingcontacts:• Use full names vs. short or single

syllable names (“John Smith” vs.“Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.“Home”)

• Avoid using special characters orhyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)

• Avoid using acronyms (“In CaseEmergency” vs. “ICE”)

• Spell words completely, no abbre-viations (“Doctor Goodman” vs.“Dr. Goodman”)

4 221


Illustration on using voice commands

• Starting voice command.Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

• Skipping Voice RecognitionShortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

• Ending voice command.Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

while guidance message is being stated

More Help

Contacts

Cancel

More Help

Please say a command afterthe beep (BEEP)

Please say a...

Please say the contact name you want to call.

Beep~

More HelpHere are some examples of mode commands.You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'MyMusic', or 'iPod'.Additionally, there are phone commands like"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".You can find more detailed commands in the user'smanual.Please say a command after the beep.

More HelpHere are some examples of mode commands.You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'MyMusic', or 'iPod'.Additionally, there are phone commands like"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".You can find more detailed commands in the user'smanual.Please say a command after the beep.

Please say a command afterthe beep (BEEP)

(BEEP)


2224

Voice Command List• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be

available during certain operations)

Command FunctionMore Help Provides guidance on commands that can be

used anywhere in the system.

Help Provides guidance on commands that can beused within the current mode.

Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in ContactsEx) Call “John Smith”

Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as"Mobile" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile

Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as"Office" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office

Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as"Home" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home

Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as"Other" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other

Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-mands. After saying this command, say“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”DialNumber” execute corresponding functions.

Favorites Displays the Favorite screen.

Call History Displays the Call History screen.

Command FunctionContacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying

this command, say the name of a contactsaved in the Contacts to automatically con-nect the call.

Dial Number Displays the Dial number screen. After sayingthis command, you can say the number thatyou want to call.

Redial Connects the last dialed call number.

Tutorial Provides guidance on how to use voice recognition and Bluetooth® connections

• When listening to the radio, displays the nextradio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟SAT1➟

SAT2➟SAT3➟FM1)

Radio • When listening to a different mode, displaysthe most recently played radio screen.

• When currently listening to the FM radio,maintains the current state.

• When listening to a different mode, displaysthe most recently played FM screen.

FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.

FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.

AM Displays the AM screen.

on Mobile

in Office

at Home

on Other

4 223


Command FunctionFM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast

saved in FM Preset 1~6.

AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.

FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the correspondingfrequency.

AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the correspondingfrequency.

SIRIUS (Satellite) • When listening to the SiriusXM®, maintainsthe current state.

• When listening to a different mode, displaysthe most recently played SiriusXM® screen.

SIRIUS (Satellite) Displays the selected SiriusXM® screen.

SIRIUS Channel Plays the selected SiriusXM® channel.

Media Moves to the most recently played mediascreen.

CD Plays the music saved in the CD.

USB Plays USB music.

iPod® Plays iPod® music.

Command FunctionMy Music Plays the music saved in My Music.

AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.

Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®

device.

Mute Mutes the sound.

Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.

0~223

1~3


2244

• FM/AM radio Commands: Commands available dur-ing FM, AM radio operation.

• Satellite radio Commands: Commands that can beused while listening to Satellite Radio.

Command FunctionPreset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.

Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the currentbroadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current pre-set and plays for 10 seconds each.

Command FunctionChannel 0~223 Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.

Scan Scans receivable channels from the currentbroadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.

Information Displays the information of the current broad-cast.

4 225


• Audio CD Commands: Commands available duringAudio CD operation.

• MP3 CD / USB Commands: Commands availableduring USB and MP3 CD operation.

Command FunctionRandom Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.

Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-tial order.

Repeat Repeats the current track.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-tial order.

Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.

Command FunctionRandom Randomly plays the files within the current

folder.

Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequentialorder.

Repeat Repeats the current file.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequentialorder.

Information Displays the information screen of the currentfile.

Next Folder Plays the first file in the next folder.

Previous Folder Plays the first file in the previous folder.


2264

• iPod® Commands: Commands available during iPod®

operation.• My Music Commands: Commands available during

My Music operation.

Command FunctionRandom Randomly plays the songs within the current

category.

Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-tial order.

Repeat Repeats the current song.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-tial order.

Command FunctionRandom Randomly plays all saved files.

Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequentialorder.

Repeat Repeats the current file.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequentialorder.

Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass anadditional confirmation process.

4 227


Command FunctionPlay Plays the currently paused song.

Pause Pauses the current song.

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands:Commands available during Bluetooth® WirelessTechnology audio streaming from mobile phone oper-ation Command Operation

iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. iPod®

mobile digital device sold separately. TheBluetooth® word mark and logos are registeredtrademarks owned by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and anyuse of such marks by Kia is under license.SiriusXM services require a subscription sold sep-arately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. Ifyou decide to continue service after your trial, thesubscription plan you choose will automaticallyrenew thereafter and you will be charged accordingto your chosen payment method at then-currentrates. Fees and taxes apply.To cancel you must callSiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXMCustomer Agreement for complete terms atwww.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and dataservices are available only in the 48 contiguousUSA, DC and PR (with coverage limitations).SiriusXM satellite service is also available inCanada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and pro-gramming subject to change. Sirius, XM and allrelated marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Android™ is a trademark of Google,Inc. BlackBerry is a registered trademark ofResearch In Motion Limited (RIM). All other marks,channel names and logos are the property of theirrespective owners. All rights reserved.


2284

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

IC

This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference; and

(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.

L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible

d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.


Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4• Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

• Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Key positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6• Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

• Ignition switch position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9• Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . 5-9

• ENGINE START/STOP button position. . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

• Starting the engine with a smart key. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

All wheel drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20• Tight corner brake effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

• All wheel drive (AWD) transfer mode selection. . . . 5-22

• For safe all wheel drive operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

• Parking brake – Foot type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

• Electronic parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

• AUTO HOLD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB)/Forward Collision Warning (FCW) . . . . . . . . . . 5-50• System setting and activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

• AEB warning message and system control . . . . . . . . 5-52

• Brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

• Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle

in front (front radar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

• System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

• Limitation of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

• Recognizing pedestrians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61• To set cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

• To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

• To decrease the cruising speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

• To temporarily accelerate with the cruise

control on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

• To cancel cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

• To resume cruising speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

• To turn cruise control off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

Advanced smart cruise control system (ASCC). . 5-65• Speed setting (ASCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66

• Vehicle to vehicle distance setting (ASCC) . . . . . . . . 5-70

• To adjust the sensitivity of advanced smart

cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74

5

• To convert to cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

• Limitations of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . 5-81• Drive mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81

Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84• BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /

LCA (Lane Change Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

• RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

• Non-operating condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90

Lane departure warning system (LDWS) . . . . . . 5-92• Warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

• The LDWS does not operate when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96

Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98

• Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98

• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99

• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100

• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100

• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101

• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101

• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102

• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103• Snowy or icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103

• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant . . . . . . . . . 5-104

• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . 5-104

• Check spark plugs and ignition system. . . . . . . . . . 5-104

• To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

• Use approved window washer anti-freeze in

system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

• Don't let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105

• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . 5-105

• Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106• Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

• Safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

• Trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

• Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108

• Maintenance when trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111

• If you do decide to pull a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112

Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114• Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114

• Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118

Vehicle weight glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120• Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

• Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

• Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

• GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

5

5 3


Be sure the exhaust systemdoes not leak.The exhaust system should bechecked whenever the vehicle israised to change the oil or for anyother purpose. If you hear a changein the sound of the exhaust or if youdrive over something that strikes theunderneath side of the vehicle, havethe exhaust system checked as soonas possible by an authorized Kiadealer.

WARNING - Engineexhaust

Do not inhale exhaust fumes orleave your engine running in aenclosed area for a prolongedtime. Exhaust fumes containcarbon monoxide, a colorless,odorless gas that can causeunconsciousness and death byasphyxiation.

WARNING - Open liftgateDo not drive with the liftgateopen. Poisonous exhaust gasescan enter the passenger com-partment. If you must drive withthe liftgate open proceed as fol-lows:1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at

"Fresh", the air flow control at"Floor" or "Face" and the fanat the highest speed.


45

Before entering vehicle• Be sure that all windows, outside

mirror(s), and outside lights areclean.

• Check the condition of the tires.• Check under the vehicle for any

sign of leaks.• Be sure there are no obstacles

behind you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspectionsFluid levels, such as engine oil,engine coolant, brake fluid, andwasher fluid should be checked on aregular basis, at the exact intervaldepending on the fluid. Furtherdetails are provided in chapter 7,“Maintenance”.

Before starting • Close and lock all doors.• Position the seat so that all con-

trols are easily reached.• Buckle your seat belt.• Adjust the inside and outside

rearview mirrors.• Be sure that all lights work.• Check all gauges.• Check the operation of warning

lights when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position.

• Release the parking brake andmake sure the brake warning lightgoes out.

For safe operation, be sure you arefamiliar with your vehicle and itsequipment.

BEFORE DRIVING

WARNING - Distracteddriving

Focus on the road while driving.The driver's primary responsi-bility is in the safe and legaloperation of the vehicle. Use ofany handled devices, otherequipment or vehicle systemsthat distract the drive shouldnot be used during vehicleoperation.

5 5


WARNING - Check sur-roundings

Always check the surroundingareas near your vehicle for peo-ple, especially children, beforeputting a vehicle into D (Drive)or R (Reverse).

WARNING - Fire riskWhen you intend to park or stopthe vehicle with the engine on,be careful not to depress theaccelerator pedal for a longperiod of time. It may overheatthe engine or exhaust systemand cause fire.

WARNING - Looseobjects

Securely store items in yourvehicle. When you make a sud-den stop or turn the steeringwheel rapidly, loose objectsmay drop on the floor and itcould interfere with the opera-tion of the foot pedals, possiblycausing an accident.

WARNING - Driving whileintoxicated

Do not drive while intoxicated.Drinking and driving is danger-ous. Even a small amount ofalcohol will affect your reflexes,perceptions and judgment.Driving while under the influ-ence of drugs is as dangerousas or more dangerous than driv-ing drunk.


65

Illuminated ignition switch

Whenever a front door is opened, theignition switch will illuminate for yourconvenience, provided the ignitionswitch is not in the ON position. Thelight will go off immediately when theignition switch is turned on. It willalso go off after about 30 secondswhen the door is closed.

Ignition switch positionLOCK

The steering wheel locks to protectagainst theft (if equipped). The igni-tion key can be removed only in theLOCK position.

ACC (Accessory)The steering wheel is unlocked andelectrical accessories are operative.If difficulty is experienced turning theignition switch to the ACC position,turn the key while turning the steer-ing wheel right and left to release thetension.

KEY POSITIONS (IF EQUIPPED)

OUM054001

OYP054029K

5 7


ONThe warning lights can be checkedbefore the engine is started. This isthe normal running position after theengine is started.Do not leave the ignition switch ON ifthe engine is not running to preventbattery discharge.

STARTTurn the ignition switch to the STARTposition to start the engine. Theengine will crank until you releasethe key; then it returns to the ONposition. The brake warning light canbe checked in this position.

The anti-theft steering column lock (ifequipped) is not a substitute for theparking brake. Before leaving the dri-ver’s seat, always make sure the shiftlever is engaged in P (Park) for auto-matic transaxle, set the parkingbrake fully and shut the engine off.Unexpected and sudden vehiclemovement may occur if these pre-cautions are not taken.

Starting the engine

1.Make sure the parking brake isapplied.

2.Place the transaxle shift lever in P(Park). Depress the brake pedalfully.You can also start the engine whenthe shift lever is in the N (Neutral)position.

WARNING - Ignitionswitch

Never turn the ignition switch toLOCK or ACC while the vehicleis moving. This would result inloss of directional control andbraking function, which couldcause an accident.

WARNING - Properfootwear

Always wear appropriate shoeswhen operating your vehicle.Unsuitable shoes (high heels,ski boots, sandals, etc.) mayinterfere with your ability to usethe brake and accelerator pedal.


85

3.Turn the ignition switch to STARTand hold it there until the enginestarts (a maximum of 10 seconds),then release the key.It should be started withoutdepressing the accelerator.

4.Do not wait for the engine to warmup while the vehicle remains sta-tionary.Start driving at moderate enginespeeds. (Steep accelerating anddecelerating should be avoided.)

If the engine stalls while you are inmotion, do not attempt to move theshift lever to the P (Park) position. Iftraffic and road conditions permit,you may put the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position while the vehicle isstill moving and turn the ignitionswitch to the START position in anattempt to restart the engine.

CAUTION - StarterDo not engage the starter formore than 10 seconds. If theengine stalls or fails to start,wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-engaging the starter. Improperuse of the starter may damageit.

WARNING - Steeringwheel

Never reach for any controlsthrough the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is in motion.The presence of your hand orarm in this area could cause aloss of vehicle control.

5 9


Illuminated ENGINESTART/STOP button

Whenever the front door is opened,the ENGINE START/STOP buttonwill illuminate for your convenience.The light will go off after about 30seconds when the door is closed.When all entrances are closed, if youlock the vehicle by using the trans-mitter or the smart key, the light willgo off immediately.

ENGINE START/STOP buttonpositionOFF

To turn off the engine (START/RUNposition) or vehicle power (ON posi-tion), press the ENGINESTART/STOP button with the shiftlever in the P (Park) position. Whenyou press the ENGINESTART/STOP button without the shiftlever in the P (Park) position, theENGINE START/STOP button willnot change to the OFF position but tothe ACC position.

In an emergency situation while thevehicle is in motion, you are able toturn the engine off and to the ACCposition by pressing the ENGINESTART/STOP button for more than 2seconds or 3 times successivelywithin 3 seconds. If the vehicle is stillmoving, you can restart the enginewithout depressing the brake pedalby pressing the ENGINESTART/STOP button with the shiftlever in the N (Neutral) position.

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)

OUM054004

Not illuminated


105

ACC(Accessory)

Press the ENGINE START/STOPbutton while it is in the OFF positionwithout depressing the brake pedal.If the ENGINE START/STOP buttonis in the ACC position for more than1 hour, the button is turned off auto-matically to prevent battery dis-charge.

ON

Press the ENGINE START/STOPbutton while it is in the ACC positionwithout depressing the brake pedal.The warning lights can be checkedbefore the engine is started. Do notleave the ENGINE START/STOPbutton in the ON position for a longtime. The battery may discharge,because the engine is not running.

START/RUN

To start the engine, depress thebrake pedal and press the ENGINESTART/ STOP button with the shiftlever in the P (Park) or the N(Neutral) position. For your safety,start the engine with the shift lever inthe P (Park) position.If you press the ENGINESTART/STOP button withoutdepressing the brake pedal for auto-matic transaxle vehicles, the enginewill not start and the ENGINESTART/STOP button changes as fol-low:OFF ➔ ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF or ACC

Amber Redish orange Not illuminated

5 11


✽✽ NOTICEIf you leave the ENGINE START/STOP button in the ACC or ONposition for a long time, the batterywill discharge.

Starting the engine with asmart key1.Carry the smart key or leave it

inside the vehicle.2.Make sure the parking brake is

firmly applied3.Place the transaxle shift lever in P

(Park). Depress the brake pedalfully.You can also start the engine whenthe shift lever is in the N (Neutral)position.

4.Press the ENGINE START/STOPbutton while depressing the brakepedal.It should be started withoutdepressing the accelerator.

5.Do not wait for the engine to warmup while the vehicle remains sta-tionary.Start driving at moderate enginespeeds. (Steep accelerating anddecelerating should be avoided.)

• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-cle, if it is far away from you, theengine may not start.

• When the ENGINE START/STOPbutton is in the ACC position orabove, if any door is opened, thesystem checks for the smart key. Ifthe smart key is not in the vehicle,a message "key is not in the vehi-cle" will appear on the LCD display.And if all doors are closed, thechime will sound for 5 seconds.The indicator or warning will turnoff while the vehicle is moving.Always have the smart key withyou.

WARNING - Startingvehicle

Never press the ENGINESTART/STOP button while thevehicle is in motion except in anemergency. This would result inloss of directional control andbraking function, which couldcause an accident.


125

• If the battery is weak or the smartkey does not work correctly, youcan start the engine by pressingthe engine start/stop button withthe smart key.The side with the lock buttonshould contact the enginestart/stop button directly.When you press the enginestart/stop button directly with thesmart key, the smart key shouldcontact the button at a right angle.

• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,you can't start the engine normally.Replace the fuse with a new one. Ifit is not possible, you can start theengine by pressing the ENGINESTART/STOP button for 10 sec-onds while it is in the ACC posi-tion. The engine can start withoutdepressing the brake pedal. But foryour safety always depress thebrake pedal before starting theengine.

Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button for more than 10 sec-onds except when the stop lamp fuseis blown.

WARNING - Unintendedvehicle movement

Never leave the smart key in thevehicle with children or vehicleoccupants who are unfamiliarwith the vehicle operation.Pushing the ENGINESTART/STOP button while thesmart key is in the vehicle mayresult in unintended engineactivation and/or unintendedvehicle movement.

OUM054005

5 13


Automatic transaxle operationThe automatic transaxle has 6 for-ward speeds and one reverse speed.The individual speeds are selectedautomatically, depending on theposition of the shift lever.

✽✽ NOTICEThe first few shifts on a new vehicle,if the battery has been disconnected,may be somewhat abrupt. This is anormal condition, and the shiftingsequence will adjust after shifts arecycled a few times by the TCM(Transaxle Control Module) orPCM (Powertrain Control Module).

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

OUMA054007

++++ ((((UUUUPPPP))))

---- ((((DDDDOOOOWWWWNNNN))))

The shift lever can be shifted freely.

Press the lock release button when shifting.

Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.(If the shift lock system is not equipped, it is not necessary to depress the brake pedal.However, it is recommended to depress the brake pedal to avoid inadvertent movementof the vehicle.)


145

CAUTION - ShiftingAlways come to a complete stopbefore shifting into or out of R(Reverse); you may damage thetransaxle if you shift into R(Reverse) while the vehicle is inmotion, except when “Rockingthe vehicle” explained in thissection.

For smooth operation, depress thebrake pedal and the lock release but-ton when shifting from N (Neutral) toa forward or reverse gear.

When stopped on an incline, do nothold the vehicle with the enginepower. Use the service brake or theparking brake.

Transaxle rangesThe indicator in the instrument clus-ter displays the shift lever positionwhen the ignition switch is in the ONposition.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stopbefore shifting into P (Park). Thisposition locks the transaxle and pre-vents the drive wheels from rotating.Shifting into P (Park) while the vehi-cle is in motion will cause the drivewheels to lock which will cause youto lose control of the vehicle.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehiclebackward.

WARNING - LeavingVehicle

Before leaving the driver’s seat,always make sure the shift leveris in the P (Park) position; thenset the parking brake fully andshut the engine off. Do not usethe P position in place of theparking brake. Always makesure the shift lever is latched inthe P position and set the park-ing brake fully. Unexpected andsudden vehicle movement canoccur if these precautions arenot followed.

CAUTION - TransaxleTo avoid damage to yourtransaxle, do not accelerate theengine in R (Reverse) or any for-ward gear position with thebrakes on.The transaxle may bedamaged if you shift into P(Park) while the vehicle is inmotion.

5 15


N (Neutral)

The wheels and transaxle are notengaged. The vehicle will roll freelyeven on the slightest incline unlessthe parking brake or service brakesare applied.

- Parking in N (Neutral) gearFollow below steps when parkingand you want the vehicle to movewhen pushed.1. After parking your vehicle, depress

the brake pedal and move thetransaxle shift lever to [P] with theignition button in [ON] or while theengine is running.

2. If the parking brake is appliedrelease the parking brake.- For EPB (Electronic Parking

Brake) equipped vehicles, pushthe brake pedal with the ignitionbutton in [ON] or while the engineis running to reapply the parkingbrake. If [AUTO HOLD] function isused while driving (If [AUTOHOLD] indicator is on in the clus-ter), press [AUTO HOLD] switchand [AUTO HOLD] functionshould be turn off.

3. While pressing the brake pedal,turn the ignition button [OFF].- For smart key equipped vehicles,

the ignition switch can be movedto [OFF] only when the shift leveris in [P].

4. Change the gear shift lever to [N](Neutral) while pressing the brakepedal and pressing down a tool (e.g.flathead screw-driver) into the[SHIFT LOCK RELEASE] accesshole at the same time. Then, thevehicle will move when externalforce is applied.

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward drivingposition. The transaxle will automati-cally shift through a 6-gearsequence, providing the best fueleconomy and power.

For extra power when passing anothervehicle or climbing grades, depressthe accelerator fully, at which time thetransaxle will automatically downshiftto the next lower gear.

CAUTION• With the exception of parking

in neutral gear, always park thevehicle in [P] (Park) for safetyand apply the parking brake.

• Before parking in [N] (Neutral)gear, first make sure the park-ing ground is level and flat. Donot park in [N] gear on anyslopes or gradients.If parked and left in [N], thevehicle may move and causeserious damage or injury.

(Continued)

(Continued)• After the ignition switch has

been turned off, the electronicparking brake cannot be dis-engaged.

• For EPB (Electronic ParkingBrake) equipped vehicles with[AUTO HOLD] function usedwhile driving, if the ignition but-ton has been turned [OFF], theelectronic parking brake will beengaged automatically.Therefore, [AUTO HOLD] func-tion should be turned off beforethe ignition button is turned off.


165

Manual mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary orin motion, manual mode is selectedby pushing the shift lever from the D(Drive) position into the manual gate.To return to D (Drive) range opera-tion, push the shift lever back into themain gate.

In manual mode, moving the shiftlever backwards and forwards willallow you to make gearshifts rapidly.In contrast to a manual transaxle, themanual mode allows gearshifts withthe accelerator pedal depressed.Up (+) : Push the lever forward once

to shift up one gear.Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards

once to shift down onegear.

• In manual mode, the driver mustexecute upshifts in accordancewith road conditions, taking care tokeep the engine speed below thered zone.

• In manual mode, only the 6 forwardgears can be selected. To reverseor park the vehicle, move the shiftlever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park)position as required.

• In manual mode, downshifts aremade automatically when the vehi-cle slows down. When the vehiclestops, 1st gear is automaticallyselected.

• In manual mode, when the enginerpm approaches the red zone shiftpoints are varied to upshift auto-matically.

OUMA054009

Manualmode

++++ ((((UUUUPPPP))))

---- ((((DDDDOOOOWWWWNNNN))))

5 17


• To maintain the required levels ofvehicle performance and safety,the system may not execute cer-tain gearshifts when the shift leveris operated.

• When driving on a slippery road,push the shift lever forward into the+(up) position. This causes thetransaxle to shift into the 2nd gearwhich is better for smooth drivingon a slippery road. Push the shiftlever to the -(down) side to shiftback to the 1st gear.

Paddle shifter (if equipped)

The paddle shifter is available whenthe shift lever is in the D position orthe manual mode.

With the shift lever in the D position

The paddle shifter will operate whenthe vehicle speed is more than10km/h (6.2mph).Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter onceto shift up or down one gear and thesystem changes from automaticmode to manual mode.When the vehicle speed is lower than10km/h (6.2mph), if you depress theaccelerator pedal for more than 5seconds or if you shift the shift leverfrom D (Drive) to manual mode andshift it from manual mode to D (Drive)again, the system changes frommanual mode to automatic mode.

With the shift lever in the manual mode

Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter onceto shift up or down one gear.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you pull the [+] and [-] paddleshifters at the same time, you cannotshift the gear.

OUM056200L


185

Shift lock systemFor your safety, the automatictransaxle has a shift lock systemwhich prevents shifting the transaxlefrom P (Park) into R (Reverse)unless the brake pedal is depressed.To shift the transaxle from P (Park)into R (Reverse):1.Depress and hold the brake pedal.2.Start the engine or turn the ignition

switch to the ON position.3.Move the shift lever.If the brake pedal is repeatedlydepressed and released with the shiftlever in the P (Park) position, a chat-tering noise near the shift lever maybe heard. It is a normal condition.

Shift-lock override

If the shift lever cannot be movedfrom the P (Park) position into R(Reverse) position with the brakepedal depressed, continue depress-ing the brake, then do the following:1.Carefully remove the cap covering

the shift-lock access hole (1).2.Insert a screwdriver into the

access hole and press down onthe screwdriver.

3.Move the shift lever.4.Have your vehicle inspected by an

authorized Kia dealer immediately.

WARNING - Shifting frompark

Always fully depress the brakepedal before and while shiftingout of the P (Park) position intoanother position to avoid inad-vertent motion of the vehiclewhich could injure persons inor around the vehicle.

OUMA054039

5 19


Ignition key interlock system The ignition key cannot be removedunless the shift lever is in the P(Park) position. Even if the ignitionswitch is in the LOCK position, thekey also cannot be removed.If your vehicle is equipped withENGINE START/STOP button, thebutton will not change to the OFFposition unless the shift lever is in theP (Park) position.

Good driving practices• Never move the gear shift lever

from P (Park) to any other positionwith the accelerator pedaldepressed.

• Never move the gear shift lever intoP (Park) when the vehicle is inmotion.

• Slow down before shifting to alower gear. Otherwise, the lowergear may not be engaged.

• Always use the parking brake. Donot depend on placing thetransaxle in P (Park) to keep thevehicle from moving.

• Optimum vehicle performance andeconomy is obtained by smoothlydepressing and releasing theaccelerator pedal.

Moving up a steep grade from astanding startTo move up a steep grade from astanding start, depress the brakepedal, shift the shift lever to D(Drive). Select the appropriate geardepending on load weight and steep-ness of the grade, and release theparking brake. Depress the accelera-tor gradually while releasing theservice brakes.When accelerating from a stop ona steep hill, the vehicle may have atendency to roll backwards.Shifting the shift lever into 2(Second Gear) will help preventthe vehicle from rolling back-wards.


205

Engine power can be delivered to allfront and rear wheels for maximumtraction. AWD is useful when extratraction is required, such as, whendriving on slippery, muddy, wet, orsnow-covered roads.

These vehicles are not designed forchallenging off-road use. Occasionaloff-road use such as establishedunpaved roads and trails are OK. It isalways important when traveling off-highway that the driver carefullyreduces the speed to a level thatdoes not exceed the safe operatingspeed for those conditions. In gener-al, off-road conditions provide lesstraction and braking effectivenessthan normal road conditions.The driver must be especially alert toavoid driving on slopes which tilt thevehicle to either side.

These factors must be carefully con-sidered when driving off-road.Keeping the vehicle in contact withthe driving surface and under controlin these conditions is always the dri-ver's responsibility for the safety ofhim/herself and his or her passen-gers.

* AWD : All Wheel DriveFWD : Front Wheel Drive

ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (IF EQUIPPED)

OUMA054049

OUMA054010

■ Type A

■ Type B

5 21


If the AWD system warning light ( ) illuminates, this indicates thatthere is a malfunction in the AWDsystem.If this occurs, have your vehiclechecked by an authorized Kia dealeras soon as possible.

Tight corner brake effectTight corner brake effect is a uniquecharacteristic of all wheel drive vehi-cles caused by the difference in tirerotation of the four wheels and thezero-degree alignment of the frontwheels and suspension.Sharp turns at low speeds should becarried out with caution.

WARNING - Off roaddriving

Do not attempt to operate yourvehicle under extreme or chal-lenging off road driving condi-tions. Although this vehicle hasoff-road capabilities, it was notdesigned to be driven off road.


225

• This mode is used for climbing or descending sharp grades,off-road driving, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc., tomaximize traction.

• This mode automatically begins to deactivate at speedsabove 30 km/h (19 mph) and is shifted to AWD AUTO modeat speeds above 40 km/h (25 mph). If the vehicle deceleratesto speeds below approximate 40 km/h (25 mph), however,the transfer mode is shifted into AWD LOCK mode again.

AWD AUTO

(AWD LOCK isdeactivated)

(Indicator light isnot illuminated)

All Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection

Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light Description

• When driving in AWD AUTO mode, the vehicle operates sim-ilar to conventional FWD vehicles under normal operatingconditions. However, if the system determines that there is aneed for the AWD mode, the engine’s driving power is dis-tributed to all four wheels automatically without driver inter-vention.

• When driving on normal roads and pavement, the vehiclemoves similar to conventional FWD vehicles.

AWD LOCK

(Indicator light isilluminated)

When the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated, a shock may be felt as the drive power is delivered entirely to the frontwheels. This shock is not a mechanical failure.

CAUTION - Normal road conditionsDo not drive on normal roads for prolonged periods of time with your vehicle locked in the AWD mode.Driving on normal road with AWD LOCK Mode (especially, when cornering) may cause mechanical noise orvibration which may damage your power train.

5 23


For safe all wheel drive opera-tion • Do not try to drive in deep standing

water or mud since such conditionscan stall your engine and clog yourexhaust pipes. Do not drive downsteep hills since it requires extremeskill to maintain control of the vehi-cle.

• When you are driving up or downhills; drive as straight as possible.Use extreme caution going up ordown steep hills, the grade, terrainand water/mud conditions maycause the vehicle to flip.

HILL1 HILL2

WARNING - HillsProceed with extreme cautionwhen driving down steep hills.A slight change in the wheelangle can destabilize the vehi-cle. This can cause your vehicleto suddenly roll without warn-ing and without time for you toregain control of your vehicle.


245

• You must consciously take theeffort to learn how to corner in aAWD vehicle. Do not rely on yourexperience in conventional FWDvehicles in choosing a safe corner-ing speed in AWD mode. Forstarters, you must drive more slow-ly in AWD.

• Drive carefully off-road becauseyour vehicle may be damaged byrocks or roots of trees. Becomefamiliar with the off-road conditionswhere you are going to drivebefore you begin driving.

• Always hold the steering wheelfirmly when you are driving off-road.

• Make sure all passengers arewearing seat belts.

• If you need to drive in the water,stop your vehicle, set your transferto the AWD LOCK mode and driveat less than 8 km/h (5 mph).

WARNING - Steeringwheel

Do not grab the inside of thesteering wheel when you aredriving off-road. You may hurtyour arm by a sudden steeringmaneuver or from steeringwheel rebound due to impactwith objects on the ground.

WARNING - Wind dangerDrive slowly in heavy winds.The vehicle's higher center ofgravity decreases your steeringcontrol capacity.OUMA054053

WARNING - AWDReduce speed when you turncorners. The center of gravity ofAWD vehicles is higher thanthat of conventional FWD vehi-cles, making them more likely toroll over when you turn cornerstoo fast.

5 25


✽✽ NOTICE• Shorten your scheduled mainte-

nance interval if you drive in off-road conditions such as sand, mudor water (see “Maintenance undersevere usage conditions” in section7). Always wash your vehicle thor-oughly after off-road use, especial-ly cleaning the bottom of the vehi-cle.

• A full time all wheel drive vehiclecannot be towed by an ordinarytow truck. Make sure that thevehicle is placed on a flat bedtruck for moving.

CAUTION - Mud or snowDo not run the engine continu-ously at high RPMs to free thevehicle from snow or mud. Doingso could damage the AWD sys-tem in your vehicle.

WARNING - AWD drivingDo not attempt quick steeringmaneuvers or sharp turns inAWD mode. Such maneuversincrease the risk of rolloveraccidents. Rollover accidentsare extremely violent andunpredictable.

WARNING - Drivingthroughwater

Drive slowly. If you are drivingtoo fast in water, the water canget into the engine compartmentand wet the ignition system,causing your vehicle to sudden-ly stop. If this happens and yourvehicle is in a tilted position,your vehicle may roll over.


265

Do not use a tire and wheel packagewith a different size and type fromthe one originally installed on yourvehicle. It can affect the safety andperformance of your vehicle, whichcould lead to steering failure orrollover causing serious injury.When replacing the tires, be sure toequip all four tires with the tire andwheel of the same size, type, tread,brand and load-carrying capacity. Ifyou equip your vehicle with anytire/wheel combination not recom-mended by Kia for off-road driving,ou should not use thesetires for highway driving.

• Full-time AWD vehicles must betested on a special four wheelchassis dynamometer.

• A full-time AWD vehicle should notbe tested on a FWD roll tester. If aFWD roll tester must be used, per-form the following:

1. Check the tire pressures recom-mended for your vehicle.

2. Place the front wheels on the rolltester for a speedometer test asshown in the illustration.

3. Release the parking brake.4. Place the rear wheels on the tem-

porary free roller as shown in theillustration.

WARNING - Jackedvehicle

While the full-time AWD vehicleis being raised on a jack, neverstart the engine or cause thetires to rotate.There is the danger that rotatingtires touching the ground couldcause the vehicle to go off thejack and to jump forward.

OUM054011Roll tester (speedometer)

Temporary free roller

5 27


Power brakesYour vehicle has power-assistedbrakes that adjust automaticallythrough normal usage.In the event that the power-assistedbrakes lose power because of astalled engine or some other reason,you can still stop your vehicle byapplying greater force to the brakepedal than you normally would. Thestopping distance, however, will belonger.When the engine is not running, thereserve brake power is partiallydepleted each time the brake pedalis applied. Do not pump the brakepedal when the power assist hasbeen interrupted.Pump the brake pedal only whennecessary to maintain steering con-trol on slippery surfaces.

Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’sability to safely slow down; the vehi-cle may also pull to one side whenthe brakes are applied. Applying thebrakes lightly will indicate whetherthey have been affected in this way.Always test your brakes in this fash-ion after driving through deep water.To dry the brakes, apply them lightlywhile maintaining a safe forwardspeed until brake performancereturns to normal.

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING - Steep hillbraking

Avoid continuous application ofthe brakes when descending along or steep hill by shifting to alower gear. Continuous brakeapplication will cause the brakesto overheat and could result in atemporary loss of braking per-formance.

CAUTION - Brake PedalDo not drive with your foot rest-ing on the brake pedal. This willcreate abnormally high braketemperatures which can causeexcessive brake lining and padwear.


285

In the event of brake failure If service brakes fail to operate whilethe vehicle is in motion, you canmake an emergency stop with theparking brake. The stopping dis-tance, however, will be much greaterthan normal.

Disc brakes wear indicatorWhen your brake pads are worn andnew pads are required, you will heara high-pitched warning sound fromyour front brakes or rear brakes. Youmay hear this sound come and go orit may occur whenever you depressthe brake pedal.Please remember that some drivingconditions or climates may cause abrake squeal when you first apply (orlightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-mal and does not indicate a problemwith your brakes.Always replace the front or rearbrake pads as pairs.

WARNING - Parkingbrake

Applying the parking brakewhile the vehicle is moving atnormal speeds can cause asudden loss of control of thevehicle. If you must use theparking brake to stop the vehi-cle, use great caution in apply-ing the brake.

WARNING - Brake wearDo not ignore high pitched wearsounds from your brakes. If youignore this audible warning, youwill eventually lose braking per-formance, which could lead to aserious accident.

CAUTION - Replace brakepads

Do not continue to drive withworn brake pads. Continuing todrive with worn brake pads candamage the braking system andresult in costly brake repairs.

5 29


Parking brake – Foot typeApplying the parking brake

To engage the parking brake, firstapply the foot brake and thendepress the parking brake pedaldown as far as possible.

Releasing the parking brake

To release the parking brake,depress the parking brake pedal asecond time while applying the footbrake. The pedal will automaticallyextend to the fully released position.

OYP054009K

OYP054010K

CAUTION - Parking brakeDriving with the parking brakeapplied will cause excessivebrake pad (or lining) and brakerotor wear.

WARNING - Parking brakeuse

All vehicles should always havethe parking brake fully engagedwhen parking to avoid inadver-tent movement of the vehiclewhich can injure occupants orpedestrians.


305

Check the brake warning light byturning the ignition switch ON (do notstart the engine). This light will beilluminated when the parking brake isapplied with the ignition switch in theSTART or ON position.Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off.If the brake warning light remains onafter the parking brake is releasedwhile the engine is running, theremay be a malfunction in the brakesystem. Immediate attention is nec-essary.

If at all possible, cease driving thevehicle immediately. If that is not pos-sible, use extreme caution whileoperating the vehicle and only con-tinue to drive the vehicle until youcan reach a safe location or repairshop.

Electronic parking brake (EPB) (if equipped)Applying the parking brake

To apply the EPB (electronic parkingbrake):

1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Pull up the EPB switch.Make sure the warning light comeson.

W-75

OUMA054013

5 31


Also, the EPB is applied automatical-ly if the Auto Hold button is on whenthe engine is turned off. However, ifyou press the EPB switch after theengine is turned off, the EPB will notbe Applied.

✽✽ NOTICEOn a steep incline or when pulling atrailer, if the vehicle does not remainat a standstill, do as follows:1. Apply the EPB.2. Pull up the EPB switch for more

than 3 seconds.

Do not operate the parking brake/EPB while the vehicle is movingexcept in an emergency situation.

✽✽ NOTICEA click or electric brake motorwhine sound may be heard whileoperating or releasing the EPB, butthese conditions are normal andindicate that the EPB is functioningproperly.

Releasing the parking brake

To release the EPB (electronic parkingbrake), press the EPB switch in thefollowing condition:

• Have the ignition switch or enginestart/stop button in the ON posi-tion.

• Depress the brake pedal.Make sure the brake warning lightgoes off.

OUMA054014


325

To release EPB (electronic parkingbrake) automatically:

• Shift lever in P (Park)With the engine running depressthe brake pedal and shift out of P(Park) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Shift lever in N (Neutral)With the engine running depressthe brake pedal and shift out of N(Neutral) to R (Reverse) or D(Drive).

• Automatic transaxle vehicle1. Start the engine.2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.3. Close the driver's door, engine

hood and trunk.4. Depress the accelerator pedal

while the shift lever is in R(Rear), D (Drive) or Sportsmode.

Make sure the brake warning lightgoes off.

✽✽ NOTICE• For your safety, you can engage

the EPB even though the ignitionswitch or engine stop/start buttonis in the OFF position, but youcannot release it.

• For your safety, depress the brakepedal and release the parkingbrake manually with the EPBswitch when you drive downhill orwhen backing up the vehicle.

Do not follow the above procedurewhen driving on a flat level ground.The vehicle may suddenly move for-ward.

CAUTION• If the parking brake warning

light is still on even thoughthe EPB has been released,have the system checked byan authorized Kia dealer.

• Do not drive your vehicle withthe EPB applied. It may causeexcessive brake pad andbrake rotor wear.

5 33


EPB (electronic parking brake) maybe automatically applied when:

• The EPB is overheated• Requested by other systems

✽✽ NOTICEIf the driver turns the engine off bymistake while Auto Hold is operat-ing, EPB will be automaticallyapplied. (Vehicles equipped withAuto Hold)

System warning

• If you try to drive off depressing theaccelerator pedal with the EPBapplied, but the EPB doesn'trelease automatically, a warningwill sound and a message willappear.

• If the driver's seat belt is not fas-tened and the engine hood, driver'sdoor or trunk is opened, a warningwill sound and a message willappear.

• If there is a problem with the vehi-cle, a warning may sound and amessage may appear.

If the above situation occurs, depressthe brake pedal and release EPB bypressing the EPB switch.

OUM054104L

WARNING - ParkingBrake Use

All vehicles should always havethe parking brake fully engagedwhen parked to avoid inadver-tent movement of the car whichcan injure occupants or pedes-trians.


345

• A click or electric brake motorwhine sound may be heard whileoperating or releasing the EPB, butthese conditions are normal andindicate that the EPB is functioningproperly.

• When leaving your keys with aparking lot attendant or valet, makesure to inform him/her how to oper-ate the EPB.

• The EPB may malfunction if youdrive with the EPB applied.

• When you automatically releaseEPB by depressing the acceleratorpedal, depress it slowly.

System warning

When the conversion from Auto Holdto EPB is not working properly awarning will sound and a messagewill appear.

✽✽ NOTICEDepress the brake pedal when theabove message appears for the AutoHold and EPB may not activate.

OUM054100L

OUM054101L

■ Type A

■ Type B

5 35


System warning

If the EPB is applied while Auto Holdis activated because of ESC(Electronic Stability Control) signal, awarning will sound and a messagewill appear.

EPB malfunction indicator (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates if theengine start/stop button is changedto the ON position and goes off inapproximately 3 seconds if the sys-tem is operation normally.If the EPB malfunction indicatorremains on, comes on while driving,or does not come on when the igni-tion switch or the engine start/stopbutton is changed to the ON position,this indicates that the EPB may havemalfunctioned.

If this occurs, have your vehiclechecked by an authorized Kia dealeras soon as possible.The EPB malfunction indicator mayilluminate when the ESC indicatorcomes on to indicate that the ESC isnot working properly, but it does notindicate a malfunction of the EPB.

OUM054106


OUM054102L

OUM054103L

■ Type A

■ Type B


365

• The EPB warning light may illumi-nate if the EPB switch operatesabnormally. Shut the engine offand turn it on again after a few min-utes. The warning light will go offand the EPB switch will operatenormally. However, if the EPBwarning light is still on, have thesystem checked by an authorizedKia dealer.

• If the parking brake warning lightdoes not illuminate or blinks eventhough the EPB switch was pulledup, the EPB is not applied.

• If the parking brake warning lightblinks when the EPB warning lightis on, press the switch, then pull itup. Once more press it back to itsoriginal position and pull it back up.If the EPB warning does not go off,have the system checked by anauthorized Kia dealer.

Emergency brakingIf there is a problem with the brakepedal while driving, emergency brak-ing is possible by pulling up andholding the EPB switch. Braking ispossible only while you are holdingthe EPB switch.

✽✽ NOTICEDuring emergency braking by theEPB, the parking brake warninglight will illuminate to indicate thatthe system is operating.

If you notice a continuous noise orburning smell when the EPB is usedfor emergency braking, have yourvehicle checked by an authorized Kiadealer.

When the EPB (electronic parkingbrake) is not releasedIf the EPB does not release normal-ly, take your vehicle to an authorizedKia dealer by loading the vehicle ona flatbed tow truck and have the sys-tem checked.

WARNINGDo not operate the electronicparking brake while the vehicleis moving except in an emer-gency situation. Applying theelectronic parking brake whilethe vehicle is moving at normalspeeds can cause a suddenloss of control of the vehicle. Ifyou must use the electronicparking brake to stop the vehi-cle, use great caution in apply-ing the brake.

5 37


AUTO HOLD (if equipped)The Auto Hold maintains the vehiclein a standstill even though the brakepedal is not depressed after the driv-er brings the vehicle to a completestop by depressing the brake pedal.

1.Depress the brake pedal, start theengine and then press the AutoHold button. The white AUTOHOLD indicator will come on indi-cating the system is in standby.Before the Auto Hold will engage,the driver's door, engine hood andtrunk must be closed and the dri-ver's seat belt must be fastened.

2.When coming to a complete stopby depressing the brake pedal, theAUTO HOLD indicator changesfrom white to green indicating theAUTO HOLD is engaged and EPBis applied. The vehicle will remainat a standstill even if you releasethe brake pedal.

3.If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will bereleased.

OUMA054016

WWWWhhhhiiii tttteeee

OUM054017

WWWWhhhhiiii tttteeee

GGGGrrrreeeeeeeennnn


385

4.If you press the accelerator pedalwith the shift lever in R (Reverse),D (Drive) or sports mode, the AutoHold will be released automaticallyand the vehicle will start to move.The indicator changes from greento white indicating the Auto Hold isin standby and the EPB isreleased.

When driving off from Auto Hold bydepressing the accelerator pedal,always check the surrounding areanear your vehicle.Slowly depress the accelerator pedalfor a smooth launch.

Cancel

To cancel the Auto Hold operation,press the Auto Hold switch. TheAUTO HOLD indicator will go out.To cancel the Auto Hold operationwhen the vehicle is at a standstill,press the Auto Hold switch whiledepressing the brake pedal.

✽✽ NOTICE• The following are conditions when

the Auto Hold will not engage(Auto Hold light will not turngreen and the Auto Hold systemremains in stand by):- The driver's seat belt is unfas-

tened and driver's door is opened- The engine hood is opened- The trunk is opened- The shift lever is in P (Park)- The EPB is applied

• For your safety, the Auto Holdautomatically switches to EPBunder any of the following condi-tions (Auto Hold light remainswhite and the EPB automaticallyapplies):- The driver's seat belt is unfas-

tened and driver's door is opened- The engine hood is opened- The trunk is opened- The vehicle is in a standstill for

more than 10 minutes- The vehicle is standing on a steep

slope- The vehicle moved several times

(Continued)

OUMA054018

LLLLiiiigggghhhhtttt ooooffff ffff

5 39


(Continued)In these cases, the brake warninglight comes on, the AUTO HOLDindicator changes from green towhite, and a warning sounds and amessage will appear to inform youthat EPB has been automaticallyengaged. Before driving off again,press foot brake pedal, check thesurrounding area near your vehi-cle and release parking brakemanually with the EPB switch.

• If the AUTO HOLD indicatorlights up yellow, the Auto Hold isnot working properly. Take yourvehicle to an authorized Kia deal-er and have the system checked.

If there is a malfunction with the dri-ver’s door, engine hood or trunk opendetection system, the Auto Hold maynot work properly.Take your vehicle to an authorized Kiadealer and have the system checked.

✽✽ NOTICEA click or electric brake motorwhine sound may be heard whileoperating or releasing the EPB, butthese conditions are normal andindicate that the EPB is functioningproperly.

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of an acci-dent, do not activate Auto Holdwhile driving downhill, backingup or parking your vehicle.


405

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-dents due to improper or dangerousdriving maneuvers. Even thoughvehicle control is improved duringemergency braking, always maintaina safe distance between you andobjects ahead. Vehicle speedsshould always be reduced duringextreme road conditions. The vehicleshould be driven at reduced speedsin the following circumstances:• When driving on rough, gravel or

snow-covered roads.• When driving on roads where the

road surface is pitted or has differ-ent surface heights.

Driving in these conditions increasethe stopping distance for your vehi-cle.

The ABS continuously senses thespeed of the wheels. If the wheelsare going to lock, the ABS systemrepeatedly modulates the hydraulicbrake pressure to the wheels.When you apply your brakes underconditions which may lock thewheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-responding sensation in the brakepedal. This is normal and it meansyour ABS is active.In order to obtain the maximum ben-efit from your ABS in an emergencysituation, do not attempt to modulateyour brake pressure and do not try topump your brakes. Press your brakepedal as hard as possible or as hardas the situation allows the ABS tocontrol the force being delivered tothe brakes.

✽✽ NOTICEA click sound may be heard in theengine compartment when the vehi-cle begins to move after the engine isstarted. These conditions are normaland indicate that the anti-lock brakesystem is functioning properly.

5 41


• Even with the anti-lock brake sys-tem, your vehicle still requires suf-ficient stopping distance. Alwaysmaintain a safe distance from thevehicle in front of you.

• Always slow down when cornering.The anti-lock brake system cannotprevent accidents resulting fromexcessive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,operation of the anti-lock brakesystem may result in a longer stop-ping distance than for vehiclesequipped with a conventionalbrake system.

The ABS warning light will stay on forapproximately 3 seconds after theignition switch is ON. During thattime, the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off ifeverything is normal. If the light stayson, you may have a problem withyour ABS. Contact an authorized Kiadealer as soon as possible.

• When you drive on a road havingpoor traction, such as an icy road,and have operated your brakescontinuously, the ABS will be activecontinuously and the ABS warninglight may illuminate. Pull your vehi-cle over to a safe place and stopthe engine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABSwarning light goes off, then yourABS system is normal. Otherwise,you may have a problem with theABS. Contact an authorized Kiadealer as soon as possible.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen you jump start your vehiclebecause of a drained battery, theengine may not run as smoothly andthe ABS warning light may turn onat the same time. This happensbecause of low battery voltage. Itdoes not mean your ABS has mal-functioned.• Do not pump your brakes!• Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

W-78


425

Electronic stability control(ESC)

The Electronic Stability control(ESC) system is designed to stabi-lize the vehicle during corneringmaneuvers. ESC checks where youare steering and where the vehicle isactually going. ESC applies thebrakes on individual wheels andintervenes with the engine manage-ment system to stabilize the vehicle.

Electronic stability control (ESC) willnot prevent accidents. Excessivespeed in turns, abrupt maneuversand hydroplaning on wet surfacescan still result in serious accidents.Only a safe and attentive driver canprevent accidents by avoidingmaneuvers that cause the vehicle tolose traction. Even with ESCinstalled, always follow all the normalprecautions for driving - includingdriving at safe speeds for the condi-tions.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system is an electronic systemdesigned to help the driver maintainvehicle control under adverse condi-tions. It is not a substitute for safe driv-ing practices. Factors including speed,road conditions and driver steeringinput can all affect whether ESC will beeffective in preventing a loss of control.It is still your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.When you apply your brakes underconditions which may lock the wheels,you may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from thebrakes, or feel a corresponding sensa-tion in the brake pedal. This is normaland it means your ESC is active.

✽✽ NOTICEA click sound may be heard in theengine compartment when the vehi-cle begins to move after the engine isstarted. These conditions are normaland indicate that the ElectronicStability Control System is function-ing properly.

OUMA054019

5 43


ESC operationESC ON condition

• When the ignition is turnedON, ESC and ESC OFFindicator lights illuminate forapproximately 3 seconds,then ESC is turned on.

• Press the ESC OFF but-ton for at least half a sec-ond after turning the igni-tion ON to turn ESC off.(ESC OFF indicator willilluminate). To turn theESC on, press the ESCOFF button (ESC OFFindicator light will go off).

• When starting the engine,you may hear a slight tick-ing sound. This is the ESCperforming an automaticsystem self-check and doesnot indicate a problem.

When operating

When the ESC is in opera-tion, the ESC indicator lightblinks.• When the Electronic

Stability Control is operat-ing properly, you can feel aslight pulsation in the vehi-cle. This is only the effectof brake control and indi-cates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of themud or driving on a slip-pery road, pressing theaccelerator pedal may notcause the engine rpm(revolutions per minute) toincrease.

ESC operation offESC OFF state

This car has 2 kinds of ESCoff states.If the engine stops whenESC is off, ESC remains off.Upon restarting the engine,the ESC will automaticallyturn on again.

-


445

• ESC off state 1To cancel ESC operation, press theESC OFF button (ESC OFF )shortly (ESC OFF indicator light(ESC OFF ) illuminates). At thisstate, the engine control functiondoes not operate. It means the trac-tion control function does not oper-ate. Brake control function only oper-ates.

• ESC off state 2To cancel ESC operation, press theESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) formore than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indi-cator light (ESC OFF ) illuminatesand ESC OFF warning chime willsound. At this state, the engine con-trol function and brake control func-tion do not operate. It means the carstability control function does notoperate any more.

Indicator light

When ignition switch is turned to ON,the indicator light illuminates, thengoes off if the ESC system is operat-ing normally.The ESC indicator light blinks when-ever ESC is operating or illuminateswhen ESC fails to operate.The ESC OFF indicator light comeson when the ESC is turned off withthe button.

OUM054165L

OUM054161L

■ Type A

■ Type BOUM054162L

OUM054163L

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ ESC indicator light

■ ESC OFF indicator light

5 45


ESC OFF usageWhen driving

• ESC should be turned on for dailydriving whenever possible.

• To turn ESC off while driving, pressthe ESC OFF button while drivingon a flat road surface.

✽✽ NOTICE• When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, ensure that theESC is turned off (ESC OFF lightilluminated). If the ESC is left on,it may prevent the vehicle speedfrom increasing, and result in falsediagnosis.

• Turning the ESC off does notaffect ABS or brake system opera-tion.

WARNING - OperatingESC

Never press the ESC OFF but-ton while ESC is operating (ESCindicator light blinks).If ESC is turned off while ESC isoperating, the vehicle may slipout of control.

WARNING - Electronic sta-bility control

Drive carefully even thoughyour vehicle has ElectronicStability Control. It can onlyassist you in maintaining con-trol under certain circum-stances.


465

Vehicle stability management(VSM) (if equipped)This system provides furtherenhancements to vehicle stabilityand steering responses when a vehi-cle is driving on a slippery road or avehicle detects changes in coeffi-cient of friction between right wheelsand left wheels when braking.

VSM operationWhen the VSM is in operation, ESCindicator light ( ) blinks.When the vehicle stability manage-ment is operating properly, you canfeel a slight pulsation in the vehicleand/or abnormal steering responses(EPS). This is only the effect of brakeand EPS control and indicates noth-ing unusual.

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on bank road such as gra-dient or incline

• Driving in reverse• ESC OFF indicator light ( )

remains on the instrument cluster• EPS indicator light remains on the

instrument cluster

VSM operation offIf you press the ESC OFF button toturn off the ESC, the VSM will alsocancel and the ESC OFF indicatorlight ( ) illuminates.To turn on the VSM, press the buttonagain. The ESC OFF indicator lightgoes out.

WARNING - Tire/Wheel size

When replacing tires andwheels, make sure they are thesame size as the original tiresand wheels installed. Drivingwith varying tire or wheel sizesmay diminish any supplementalsafety benefits of the VSM sys-tem.

5 47


Malfunction indicatorThe VSM can be deactivated even ifyou don’t cancel the VSM operationby pressing the ESC OFF button. Itindicates that a malfunction hasbeen detected somewhere in theElectric Power Steering system orVSM system. If the ESC indicatorlight ( ) or EPS warning lightremains on, take your vehicle to anauthorized Kia dealer and have thesystem checked.

✽✽ NOTICE• The VSM is designed to function

above approximately 22 km/h (13mph) on curves.

• The VSM is designed to functionabove approximately 10 km/h (6mph) when a vehicle is braking ona split-mu road. The split-mu roadis made of surfaces which have dif-ferent friction forces.

• The Vehicle Stability Managementsystem is not a substitute for safedriving practices but a supplemen-tary function only. It is the respon-sibility of the driver to always checkthe speed and the distance to thevehicle ahead. Always hold thesteering wheel firmly while driving.

• Your vehicle is designed to activateaccording to the driver’s intention,even with installed VSM. Alwaysfollow all the normal precautionsfor driving at safe speeds for theconditions – including driving inclement weather and on a slipperyroad.

Hill-start assist control (HAC)A vehicle has the tendency to rollback on a steep hill when it starts togo after stopping. The Hill-startAssist Control (HAC) prevents thevehicle from rolling back by applyingthe brakes automatically for about 2seconds. The brakes are releasedwhen the accelerator pedal isdepressed or after about 2 seconds.The HAC is activated only for about 2seconds, so when the vehicle isstarting off always depress the accel-erator pedal.

WARNING - MaintainingBrake Pressure on Incline

HAC does not replace the needto apply brakes while stoppedon an incline. While stopped,make sure you maintain brakepressure sufficient to preventyour vehicle from rolling back-ward and causing an accident.Don’t release the brake pedaluntil you are ready to accelerateforward.


485

Good braking practices• Check to be sure the parking brake

is not engaged and the parkingbrake indicator light is out beforedriving away.

• Driving through water may get thebrakes wet. They can also get wetwhen the vehicle is washed. Wetbrakes can be dangerous! Yourvehicle will not stop as quickly if thebrakes are wet. Wet brakes maycause the vehicle to pull to oneside.To dry the brakes, apply the brakeslightly until the braking actionreturns to normal, taking care tokeep the vehicle under control atall times. If the braking action doesnot return to normal, stop as soonas it is safe to do so and call anauthorized Kia dealer for assis-tance.

• Don't coast down hills with thevehicle out of gear.This is extreme-ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle ingear at all times, use the brakes toslow down, then shift to a lowergear so that engine braking willhelp you maintain a safe speed.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.Resting your foot on the brakepedal while driving can be danger-ous because the brakes mightoverheat and lose their effective-ness. It also increases the wear ofthe brake components.

• If a tire goes flat while you are driv-ing, apply the brakes gently andkeep the vehicle pointed straightahead while you slow down. Whenyou are moving slowly enough for itto be safe to do so, pull off the roadand stop in a safe place.

• If your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic transaxle, don't let yourvehicle creep forward. To avoidcreeping forward, keep your footfirmly on the brake pedal when thevehicle is stopped.

• Be cautious when parking on a hill.Firmly engage the parking brakeand place the shift lever in P (auto-matic transaxle). If your vehicle isfacing downhill, turn the frontwheels into the curb to help keepthe vehicle from rolling. If your vehi-cle is facing uphill, turn the frontwheels away from the curb to helpkeep the vehicle from rolling. Ifthere is no curb or if it is requiredby other conditions to keep thevehicle from rolling, block thewheels.

5 49


• Under some conditions your park-ing brake can freeze in theengaged position. This is most like-ly to happen when there is anaccumulation of snow or icearound or near the rear brakes or ifthe brakes are wet. If there is a riskthat the parking brake may freeze,apply it only temporarily while youput the shift lever in P (automatictransaxle) and block the rearwheels so the vehicle cannot roll.Then release the parking brake.

• Do not hold the vehicle on theupgrade with the acceleratorpedal.This can cause the transaxleto overheat. Always use the brakepedal or parking brake.


505

The AEB system is to reduce or toavoid accident risk. It recognizes thedistance from the vehicle ahead orthe pedestrian through the sensors(i.e. radar and camera), and, if nec-essary, warns the driver of accidentrisk with the warning message or thewarning alarms.

✽✽ NOTICETake the following precautions whenusing the Autonomous EmergencyBraking (AEB):• This system is only a supplemental

system and it is not intended to,nor does it replace the need forextreme care and attention of thedriver. The sensing range andobjects detectable by the sensorsare limited. Pay attention to theroad conditions at all times.

• NEVER drive too fast in accor-dance with the road conditions orwhile cornering.

• Always drive cautiously to preventunexpected and sudden situationsfrom occurring. AEB does not stopthe vehicle completely and doesnot avoid collisions.

System setting and activationSystem setting

The driver can activate the AEB byplacing the ignition switch to the ONposition and by selecting 'UserSettings', 'Driving Assist', and 'AssistBraking System'. The AEB deacti-vates, when the driver cancels thesystem setting.

WARNING - Autonomous Emergency

Braking (AEB) Limitations The AEB system is a supple-mental system and is not a sub-stitute for safe driving prac-tices. It is the responsibility ofthe driver to always check thespeed and distance to the vehi-cle ahead to ensure it is safetyto use the AEB system.

AUTONOMOUS EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB)/ FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)(IF EQUIPPED)

OUM057220L

5 51


The warning light illumi-nates on the LCD display,when you cancel the AEBsystem. The driver can

monitor the AEB ON/OFF status onthe LCD display. When the warninglight remains ON with the AEB acti-vated, we recommend you to havethe system checked by an authorizedKia dealer.

The driver can select the initial warn-ing activation time in the UserSettings in the instrument clusterLCD display. The options for the ini-tial Forward Collision Warninginclude the following:

• EARLY - When this condition isselected, the initialForward Collision Warningis activated earlier thannormal. This setting maxi-mizes the amount of dis-tance between the vehicleor pedestrian ahead beforethe initial warning occurs.

• NORMAL - When this condition isselected, the initialForward CollisionWarning is activated nor-mally. This setting allowsfor a nominal amount ofdistance between thevehicle or pedestrianahead before the initialwarning occurs.

• LATE - When this condition isselected, the initial ForwardCollision Warning is activat-ed later than normal. Thissetting reduces the amountof distance between thevehicle or pedestrian aheadbefore the initial warningoccurs.

OUM057229L

OUMA057231


525

Prerequisite for activationThe AEB will activate when the AEBis selected on the LCD display, andwhen the following prerequisites aresatisfied:- The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is activated.- The driving speed is over 6 mph.

(The AEB only works within a cer-tain range of vehicle speeds)

- When the AEB recognizes a vehi-cle or the pedestrian in front. (TheAEB may not recognize everyobstacle or provide warnings andbraking in every situation, so donot rely on the AEB to stop thevehicle in instances where the driv-er sees an obstacle and has theability to apply the brakes)

• The AEB automatically activateswhen you turn the vehicle on.The driver can deactivate the AEBby canceling it the system setting onthe LCD display.

• Even when the AutonomousEmergency Braking (AEB) may beset to "Use AEB" setting, if theTraction Control System (TCS) orElectronic Stability Control (ESC)features are deselected, AEB func-tion will be turned off automatically.In this case, the AEB feature can-not be turned on manually as well.

AEB warning message andsystem controlWarning text may appear or warningsound may sound when the vehicle infront brakes suddenly or the distancewith the vehicle in front is short. Also,the brake system will control thebrakes depending on the collisionpossibility.Depending on the vehicle conditionand traffic conditions in front of thevehicle, some warning features mayactivate or not activate at all.

WARNINGSet or cancel AEB with control-ling switches on steering wheelafter stopping the vehicle in thesafe place for your safety.Do not attempt to set or cancelthe AEB while your vehicle ismoving.

5 53


Forward Warning (1st warning)

The warning message appears on theLCD display and a warning chimesounds.

Collision Warning (2nd warning)

• The warning message appears onthe LCD display and a warningchime sounds.

• The AEB applies partial brakes toreduce the impact from a collision.

Emergency braking (3rd warning)

• The warning message appears onthe LCD display and a warningchime sounds.

• The AEB applies partial brakes torelease shock from the collision.The AEB applies maximum brakesjust before the collision.

OUMA057221 OUMA057222 OUMA057223


545

Brake operation• In an urgent situation, the braking

system enters into the ready statusfor prompt reaction against the dri-ver’s depressing the brake pedal.

• The AEB provides additional brak-ing power for optimum braking per-formance, when the driverdepresses the brake pedal.

• The braking control is automatical-ly deactivated, when the driversharply depresses the brake pedal,or when the driver abruptly turnsthe steering wheel.

• The braking control is automatical-ly canceled, when risk factors dis-appear.

The driver should always exercisecaution when operating the vehicle,even though there is no warningmessage or warning alarm.

✽✽ NOTICEThe AEB operates in accordancewith the risk levels, such as the dis-tance from the vehicle/passer-by infront, the speed of the vehicle/pass-er-by in front, and the driver's vehi-cle operation. Do not drive danger-ously in order to activate to system.

Sensor to detect the distancefrom the vehicle in front (front radar)

The sensor cannot maintain properdistance from the vehicle in frontwhen the sensor lens is obscured byforeign substances, such as snowand rain, which will adversely affectperformance. It may even temporarilycancel the AEB. Always keep the sen-sor clean.

WARNING The AEB cannot avoid all colli-sions. The AEB might not com-pletely stop the vehicle beforecollision, due to ambient weath-er and road conditions. Thedriver has the responsibility todrive safely and control thevehicle.

OUM054054L

5 55


Warning message and warninglight

When the sensor is covered or thesensor lens is obscured by foreignsubstances, such as snow or rain,the AEB operation may temporarilystop. In this case, a warning mes-sage will appear to notify the driver.

This is not a malfunction with theAEB. To operate the AEB again,remove the foreign substances.

✽✽ NOTICE• Do not install any accessories, such

as a license plate bracket orbumper sticker near the sensorarea. Do not replace the bumperby yourself. Doing so may adverse-ly affect the sensing performance.

• Always keep the sensor/bumperarea clean.

• Use only a soft cloth to wash thevehicle. Also, do not spray highlypressurized water on the sensorinstalled on the bumper.

• Be careful not to apply unneces-sary force on the frontal sensorarea. When the sensor moves outof the correct position due toexternal force, the system may notoperate correctly even without thewarning light or message. In thiscase, we recommend you to havethe vehicle inspected by anauthorized Kia dealer.

• Use only the genuine Kia sensorcover. Do not paint the sensorcover.

System malfunction

• When the AEB is not working prop-erly, the AEB warning light ( ) willilluminate and the warning mes-sage will appear for a few seconds.After the message disappears, themaster warning light ( ) will illu-minate. In this case, we recommendyou to have the vehicle inspected byan authorized Kia dealer.

OUMA057224

OUMA057233

OUMA057225


565

• The AEB warning message mayappear along with the illuminationof the ESC warning light.

• The AEB may unnecessarily pro-duce warning messages and warn-ing alarms. Due to the sensing lim-itation, the AEB may not producewarning messages or warningalarm at all.

• When there is a malfunction withthe AEB, the braking control doesnot operate upon detecting a colli-sion risk even with other brakingsystems normally operating.

• The AEB only operates when itidentifies a vehicle/pedestrian infront of the vehicle while drivingforward. It does not operate whenthe vehicle is driving in reverse.

• The AEB can not recognize cross-traffic or parked vehicles present-ing a side-profile.

Limitation of the systemThe AEB assists the driver in reduc-ing a specific risk, it does not takeresponsibility away from the driver tocontrol the vehicle in a safe manner.The AEB monitors the driving situa-tions through the radar and the cam-era sensor. For any vehicle activityoccurring outside the sensor range,the AEB may not function. The drivershould exercise caution in the follow-ing situations, as the AEB operationmay be limited:

WARNING The AEB is only a supplementalsystem for the driver’s conven-ience.The driver still maintainsresponsibility to control thevehicle. Do not solely dependon the AEB system. Rather,maintain a safe braking dis-tance, and, if necessary,depress the brake pedal tolower the driving speed.

5 57


Recognizing vehicles- The radar or the camera is

obscured by foreign substances.- It heavily rains or snows.- There is electromagnetic interfer-

ence.- Something in the path of travel

deflects the radar waves.- The vehicle in front has a narrow

body. (i.e. motorcycles and bicycles)- The driver’s view is degraded by

driving towards sunlight, reflectedlight, or darkness.

- The camera cannot see the fullprofile of the vehicle in front.

- The vehicle in front has an unusu-al shape, such as a heavily-loadedtruck or a trailer.

- When the vehicle is running onuneven surface or changinggrades.

The vehicle in front does not turnON the rear lights, does not haverear lights, has asymmetric rearlights, or has rear lights out of angle.

- The outside brightness changessuddenly, such as when enter-ing/exiting the a tunnel.

- The vehicle driving is unstable.- The radar/camera sensor recogni-

tion is limited.

- Driving on a curveThe AEB performance decreaseswhile driving on a curve. The AEBmay not recognize the vehicle in fronteven in the same lane. It may unnec-essarily produce the warning mes-sage and the warning alarm, or itmay not produce the warning mes-sage and the warning alarm at all.While driving on a curve, exercisecaution, and, if necessary, depressthe brake pedal.

OUM054040L


585

While driving on a curve, the AEBmay recognize the vehicle in front inthe next lane. Exercise caution, and, ifnecessary, depress the brake pedal.Or, depress the accelerator pedal tomaintain the driving speed. Always,take a look around the vehicle foryour safety.

- Driving on a slopeThe AEB performance decreaseswhile driving upward or downward ona slope, not recognizing the vehiclein front in the same lane. It mayunnecessarily produce the warningmessage and the warning alarm, or itmay not produce the warning mes-sage and the warning alarm at all.When the AEB suddenly recognizesthe vehicle in front while passingover a slope, you may experiencesharp deceleration.Always keep your eyes forward whiledriving upward or downward on aslope, and, if necessary, depress thebrake pedal.

- Changing lanes Even though the vehicle in the nextlane enters into your lane, it may notbe recognized by the AEB, until itenters the AEB sensing range.Especially when the vehicle in thenext lane abruptly enters into yourlane, it is more likely not be recog-nized. Always be attentive to drivingconditions.

OUM054041L OUM054042L OUM054043L

5 59


When a vehicle in front of youchanges lanes suddenly to avoid astopped vehicle up ahead, your AEBmay not recognize the stopped vehi-cle ahead. Always be attentive todriving conditions.

- Recognizing the vehicle When the vehicle in front has heavyloading extended rearward, or whenthe vehicle in front has higher groundclearance, the AEB may not recog-nize the nearest hazard

Recognizing pedestrians- The pedestrian is not fully captured

by the camera sensor, or thepedestrian does not walk in theupright position.

- The pedestrian moves very fast.- The pedestrian abruptly appears in

front.- The pedestrian wears clothes sim-

ilar in color to the background.- Conditions outside are too bright or

too dark.- The vehicle drives at night or in the

darkness.- There is an item similar in shape to

a person standing.- The pedestrian is small.- The pedestrian is using a mobility

assistance device, such as awheelchair or scooter.

- The pedestrian blends in with theirsurroundings.

- Sensor recognition is limited byrain, snow, fog, etc.

- There is a group of pedestrians.

OUM054046L OUM054048L


605

✽✽ NOTICEThe system may temporarily canceldue to the strong electric waves.

• Pay great caution to the vehicle infront, when it has heavy loadingextended rearward, or when it hashigher ground clearance.

• The sensor only detects pedestri-an, not carts, bicycles, motorcy-cles, luggage bags, or strollers.

WARNING - Testing theAEB

The AEB does not operate incertain situations. Thus, nevertest-operate the AEB against aperson or an object. It maycause a severe injury or evendeath.

WARNING - AEB andTowing

Cancel the AEB in the UserSettings on the LCD display,before towing another vehicle.While towing, the brake applica-tion may adversely affect yourvehicle safety.

5 61


The cruise control system allows youto program the vehicle to maintain aconstant speed without depressingthe accelerator pedal.This system is designed to functionabove approximately 30 km/h (20mph).If the cruise control is left on,(CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment cluster illuminated) the cruisecontrol can be switched on acciden-tally. Keep the cruise control systemoff (CRUISE indicator light OFF)when the cruise control is not in use,to avoid inadvertently setting aspeed.

Use the cruise control system onlywhen traveling on open highways ingood weather.Do not use the cruise control whendriving in heavy or varying traffic, oron slippery (rainy, icy or snow-cov-ered) or winding roads or over 6%up-hill or down-hill roads.

✽✽ NOTICE• During normal cruise control

operation, when the SET switch isactivated or reactivated afterapplying the brakes, the cruisecontrol will energize after approx-imately 3 seconds. This delay isnormal.

• To activate cruise control, depressthe brake pedal at least once afterturning the ignition switch to theON position or starting the engine.This is to check if the brake switchwhich is important part to cancelcruise control is in normal condi-tion.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

WARNING - Misuse ofCruise Control

Do not use cruise control if thetraffic situation does not allowyou to drive safely at a constantspeed and with sufficient dis-tance to the vehicle in front.

OUMA054021


625

To set cruise control speed:

1.Press the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel to turn the systemon.The CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster will illuminate.

2.Accelerate to the desired speed,which must be more than 30 km/h(20 mph).

3.Move the lever down (to SET-), andrelease it at the desired speed. TheSET indicator light in the instru-ment cluster will illuminate.Release the accelerator at thesame time. The desired speed willautomatically be maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle mayslow down or speed up slightly whilegoing downhill.

To increase cruise control setspeed:

Follow either of these procedures:• Move the lever up (to RES+) and

hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.Release the lever at the speed youwant.

• Move the lever up (to RES+) andrelease it immediately. The cruisingspeed will increase by 2 km/h (1.0mph) each time the lever is operat-ed in this manner.

OUMA054022

OUMA054023

OUMA054024

5 63


To decrease the cruisingspeed:

Follow either of these procedures:• Move the lever down (to SET-) and

hold it. Your vehicle will graduallyslow down. Release the lever at thespeed you want to maintain.

• Move the lever down (to SET-) andrelease it immediately. The cruisingspeed will decrease by 2 km/h (1.0mph) each time the lever is operat-ed in this manner.

To temporarily accelerate withthe cruise control on:If you want to speed up temporarilywhen the cruise control is on,depress the accelerator pedal.Increased speed will not interferewith the cruise control operation orchange the set speed.To return to the set speed, take yourfoot off the accelerator.

To cancel cruise control, doone of the following:

• Depress the brake pedal.• Shift into N (Neutral) with an auto-

matic transaxle.• Press the CANCEL switch.• Decrease the vehicle speed lower

than the memory speed by 20km/h (12 mph).

• Decrease the vehicle speed to lessthan approximately 25 km/h (15mph).

OUMA054025OUMA054023


645

Each of these actions will cancelcruise control operation (the SETindicator light in the instrument clus-ter will go off), but it will not turn thesystem off. If you wish to resumecruise control operation, move thelever up (to RES+). You will return toyour previously preset speed.

To resume cruising speed atmore than approximately 30km/h (20 mph):

If any method other than theCRUISE ON-OFF switch was usedto cancel cruising speed and the sys-tem is still activated, the most recentset speed will automatically resumewhen you move the lever up.It will not resume, however, if thevehicle speed has dropped belowapproximately 30 km/h (20 mph).

To turn cruise control off, doone of the following:

• Press the CRUISE button (theCRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster will go off).

• Turn the ignition off.Both of these actions will cancel thecruise control operation. If you wantto resume the cruise control opera-tion, repeat the steps provided in “Toset cruise control speed” on the pre-vious page.

OUMA054024

OUMA054022

5 65


ADVANCED SMART CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (ASCC) (IF EQUIPPED)

➀ Cruise indicator➁ Set speed➂ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

The ASCC allows you to program thevehicle to maintain a set speed solong as it is not limited by traffic.When traffic is encountered the vehi-cle will slow down to maintain a setdistance behind traffic withoutdepressing the accelerator or brakepedal.

WARNING - AdvancedSmart Cruise ControlInadvertent Activation

If the advanced smart cruisecontrol is left on (CRUISE indi-cator in the instrument clusterilluminated), it can be activatedinadvertently. Keep theadvanced smart cruise controlsystem off (CRUISE indicatorturn off) when the advancedsmart cruise control is not inuse to avoid setting a speedwhich the driver is not aware of.

WARNING - AdvancedSmart Cruise ControlLimitations

• The advanced smart cruisecontrol is a supplemental sys-tem and is not a substitute forsafe driving practices. It is theresponsibility of the driver toalways check the speed anddistance to the vehicle ahead.

(Continued)

OUM056156

(Continued)• Do not use the advanced smart

cruise control when it may notbe safe to keep the car at a con-stant speed, for instance, driv-ing in heavy or varying traffic,or on slippery (rainy, icy orsnow-covered) or windingroads or over 6% up-hill ordown-hill roads.

• The advanced smart cruisecontrol system cannot recog-nize a stopped vehicle, pedes-trians or an oncoming vehicle.Always look ahead cautiouslyto prevent unexpected andsudden situations from occur-ring.

• Use the advanced smart cruisecontrol system only when trav-eling on open highways ingood weather conditions.

• Limited visibility (rain, snow,smog, etc)

• Cruise function should not beused when the vehicle is beingtowed to prevent any damage.


665

Speed setting (ASCC)To set cruise control speed:

1.Press the CRUISE button, to turnthe system on. The CRUISE indi-cator in the instrument cluster willilluminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed.• 30 km/h (20 mph) ~ 180 km/h

(110 mph) : when there is novehicle in front

• 0 km/h (0 mph) ~ 180 km/h (110mph) : when there is a vehicle infront

3. Move the lever down (to SET-),and release it at the desiredspeed. The set speed and vehicleto vehicle distance on the LDCscreen will illuminate.

4.Release the accelerator pedal. Thedesired speed will automatically bemaintained.

If there is a vehicle in front of you, thespeed may decrease to maintain thedistance to the vehicle ahead.On a steep grade, the vehicle mayslow down or speed up slightly whilegoing uphill or downhill.

To increase cruise control setspeed:

Follow either of these procedures:• Move the lever up (to RES+), and

hold it. Your vehicle set speed willincrease by 10 km/h (5 mph).Release the lever at the speed youwant.

• Move the lever up (to RES+), andrelease it immediately. The cruisingspeed will increase by 1.0 km/h (1mph) each time you move the leverup (to RES+) in this manner.

• ASCC will operate to a maximumsetting of 180 km/h (110 mph).However all local speed limit lawsmust be followed.

OUMA054200

OUMA054201

OUMA054202

5 67


To decrease the cruise controlset speed:

Follow either of these procedures:• Move the lever down (to SET-), and

hold it. Your vehicle set speed willdecrease by 10 km/h (5 mph).Release the lever at the speed youwant.

• Move the lever down (to SET-), andrelease it immediately. The cruisingspeed will decrease by 1.0 km/h (1mph) each time you move the leverdown (to SET-) in this manner.

• You can set the cruise control to anyspeed above 30 km/h (20 mph).

To temporarily accelerate with thecruise control on:If you want to speed up temporarilywhen the cruise control is on,depress the accelerator pedal.Increased speed will not interferewith cruise control operation orchange the set speed.To return to the set speed, take yourfoot off the accelerator.If you move the lever down (to SET-)at increased speed, the cruisingspeed will be set again.

✽✽ NOTICEBe careful when accelerating tem-porarily, because the speed is notregulated automatically at this timeeven if there is a vehicle in front ofyou.

ASCC will be temporarily can-celed when:

Cancelled manually

• The brake pedal is depressed.• Press the CANCEL button.

The CRUISE indicator is illuminatedcontinuously.

OUMA054201 OYP054134N


685

Cancelled automatically

• The driver's door is opened.• The shift lever is shifted to N

(Neutral), R (Reverse) orP(Parking).

• The EPB (electronic parking brake)is applied.

• The vehicle speed is over 190km/h (120 mph)

• The ESC, ABS or TCS is operating.• The ESC is turned off.• The AEB is activated.• The sensor is obscured by foreign

matter such as mud or snow.• When the vehicle is stopped for

over 5 minutes.• The driver starts driving by pushing

the lever up (RES +) or down (SET -) or depressing the acceler-ator pedal approximately 3 sec-onds after the vehicle is stopped bythe Advanced Smart CruiseControl System with no other vehi-cle ahead or a vehicle stopped faraway in front.

• The engine speed is over 7000RPM.

• The ASCC system has malfunc-tioned.

• The accelerator pedal is continu-ously depressed for more than 5minutes.

Each of these actions will cancelthe ASCC operation. (The setspeed and vehicle-to-vehicle dis-tance on the LCD display will gooff.)If the ASCC is cancelled automati-cally, the ASCC will not resumeeven though the RES+ or SET-lever is moved. Also, the EPB(electronic parking brake) will beapplied when the vehicle isstopped.

If the ASCC is cancelled by a reasonnot mentioned, have the systemchecked by an authorized Kia dealer.

If the system is automatically can-celled, the warning chime will soundand a message will appear for a fewseconds.You must adjust the vehicle speed bydepressing the accelerator or brakepedal according to the road conditionahead and driving condition.Always check the road conditions.Do not rely on the warning chime.

OUM054164L

5 69


To resume cruise control setspeed:

If any method other than theCRUISE button was used to cancelcruising speed and the system is stillactivated, the cruising speed willautomatically resume when youmove the lever up/down (to RES+ orSET-).If you move the lever up (to RES+),the speed will resume to the recentlyset speed. It will not resume if thevehicle speed has dropped belowapproximately 30 km/h (20 mph).

To turn cruise control off:

Press the CRUISE button. (theCRUISE indicator in the instrumentcluster will go off).

WARNING - Cruise control reactivation

To reduce the risk of an acci-dent, always check the roadconditions when reactivatingthe advanced smart cruise con-trol using the RES+ lever toensure the road conditions per-mit safe use of the cruise con-trol.

OUMA054202

OUMA054200


705

Vehicle to vehicle distancesetting (ASCC)To set vehicle to vehicle distance:

This function allows you to programthe vehicle to maintain relative dis-tance to the vehicle ahead withoutdepressing the accelerator pedal orbrake pedal.

The vehicle to vehicle distance willautomatically activate when theASCC is on.Select the appropriate distanceaccording to road conditions andvehicle speed.

Each time the button is pressed, thevehicle to vehicle distance changesas follows:

For example, if you drive at 90 km/h(56 mph), the distance is maintainedas follows;

Distance 4 - approximately 52.5 m(172 feet)

Distance 3 - approximately 40 m(130 feet)

Distance 2 - approximately 32.5 m(106 feet)

Distance 1 - approximately 25 m (82feet)

✽✽ NOTICEThe 'Distance 4' is always set whenthe system is used for the first timeafter starting the engine.

OUMA054210

Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2

Distance 1

5 71


• The vehicle will maintain the setspeed, when the lane ahead isclear.

• The vehicle will slow down orspeed up within selected speed tomaintain the selected distance,when there is a vehicle ahead ofyou in the lane. (A vehicle willappear in front of your vehicle inthe LCD display only when there isan actual vehicle in front of you)

• If the vehicle ahead speeds up,your vehicle will travel at a steadycruising speed after accelerating tothe selected speed.

OYP056137C

Distance 4

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 1


725

• The warning chime sounds andLCD display blinks if it is hard tomaintain the selected distance tothe vehicle ahead.

• If the warning chime sounds,actively adjust the vehicle speed bydepressing the brake pedalaccording to the road conditionahead and driving condition.

• Even if the warning chime is notactivated, always pay attention tothe driving conditions to preventdangerous situations from occur-ring.

If the vehicle ahead (vehicle speed:less than 30 km/h (20 mph)) movesto the next lane, the warning chimewill sound and a message willappear.If a vehicle enters into your lanemoving less than the designatedspeed, you can adjust your vehiclespeed by depressing the brakepedal.

In traffic situation

In traffic, your vehicle will stop if thevehicle ahead of you stops. Also, ifthe vehicle ahead of you starts mov-ing, your vehicle will start as well.However, if the vehicle stops formore than 3 seconds, you mustdepress the accelerator pedal ormove up/down the lever (to RES+ orSET-) to start driving.

OUMA057169

OUM054168L

5 73


Radar to detect distance to thevehicle ahead

The sensor detects distance to thevehicle ahead.If the sensor is covered with dirt orother foreign matter, the vehicle tovehicle distance control may notoperate correctly.Always keep the sensor clean.

Radar check message

If the radar or cover is dirty orobscured with foreign matter such assnow, this message will appear. Inthis case, the system may not func-tion temporarily, but it does not indi-cate a malfunction of the AdvancedSmart Cruise Control System. Cleanthe radar or cover by using a softcloth.

ASCC (Advanced Smart CruiseControl) malfunction message

The message will appear when thevehicle to vehicle distance controlsystem is not functioning normally.Take your vehicle to an authorizedKia dealer and have the systemchecked.

OUM054054L

OUMA057226

OUM054187L


745

• Always keep the sensor andbumper clean.

• Use only a genuine Kia sensorcover for your vehicle.

• Do not install accessories aroundthe sensor and do not replace thebumper by yourself. It may interferewith the sensor performance.

• Impact damage to the sensor orsensor area may cause the sensorto move slightly off position andresult in the ASCC not operatingcorrectly. If this occurs, have yourvehicle checked by an authorizedKia dealer as soon as possible.

To adjust the sensitivity ofAdvanced Smart CruiseControl

The sensitivity of vehicle speedwhen following the front vehicle tomaintain the set distance can beadjusted. Go to the User SettingsMode (Driving Assist) and selectSCC (Smart Cruise Control). Youmay select one of the three stagesyou prefer.• Slow:

Vehicle speed following the frontvehicle to maintain the set distanceis slower than normal speed.

• Normal:Vehicle speed following the frontvehicle to maintain the set distanceis normal

• Fast:Vehicle speed following the frontvehicle to maintain the set distanceis faster than normal speed.

✽✽ NOTICEThe system remembers the lastselected mode.

CAUTION - SensorDamage

To prevent sensor cover dam-age from occurring, wash thecar with a soft cloth.

OUM054157L

5 75


To convert to cruise controlmode:

The driver may choose to only usethe cruise control mode (speed con-trol function) by doing as follows:

1.Turn the ASCC on (the cruise indi-cator light will be on but the systemwill not be activated).

2.Push the distance to distanceswitch for more than 2 seconds.

3.Choose between "Smart cruisecontrol (SCC) mode" and "Cruisecontrol (CC) mode".

When using the cruise control mode,you must manually assess the dis-tance to other vehicles as the systemwill not automatically brake to slowdown for other vehicles.

Limitations of the system

The ASCC may have limits to its abil-ity to detect distance to the vehicleahead due to road and traffic condi-tions.

OUM054167L

OUM054166L

OUM054040L


765

On curves• On curves, the ASCC may not

detect a moving vehicle in yourlane, and then your vehicle couldaccelerate to the set speed. Also,the vehicle speed will rapidly slowdown when the vehicle ahead isrecognized suddenly.

• Select the appropriate set speedon curves and adjust your vehiclespeed by depressing the accelera-tor or brake pedal according to theroad condition ahead and drivingcondition.

• Your vehicle speed can be reduceddue to a vehicle in the adjacentlane. Adjust your vehicle speed bydepressing the brake pedalaccording to the road conditionahead and driving condition. Applythe accelerator pedal and selectthe appropriate set speed. Checkto be sure that the road conditionspermit safe operation of the ASCC.

On inclines

• During uphill or downhill driving,the ASCC may not detect a movingvehicle in your lane, and causeyour vehicle to accelerate to theset speed. Also, the vehicle speedwill rapidly slow down when thevehicle ahead is recognized sud-denly.

• Select the appropriate set speedon inclines and adjust your vehiclespeed by depressing the accelera-tor or brake pedal according to theroad condition ahead and drivingcondition.

OUM054041L

OUM054042L

5 77


Lane changing

• A vehicle which moves into yourlane from an adjacent lane cannotbe recognized by the sensor until itis in the sensor's detection range.

• The sensor may not detect imme-diately when a vehicle cuts in sud-denly. Always pay attention to thetraffic, road and driving conditions.

• If a vehicle which moves into yourlane is slower than your vehicle,your speed may decrease to main-tain the distance to the vehicleahead.

• If a vehicle which moves into yourlane is faster than your vehicle,your vehicle will accelerate to theselected speed.

• Your vehicle may accelerate whena vehicle ahead of you disappears.

• When you are warned that thevehicle ahead of you is not detect-ed, drive with caution.

OUM054043L

OUM054044L


785

Vehicle recognition

Some vehicles ahead in your lanecannot be recognized by the sensoras follows:- Narrow vehicles such as motorcy-

cles or bicycles- Vehicles offset to one side- Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-

decelerating vehicles - Stopped vehicles- Vehicles with small rear profile such

as trailers with no loads

A vehicle ahead cannot be recog-nized correctly by the sensor if any offollowing occurs:- When the vehicle is pointing

upwards due to overloading in thetrunk

- While making turns by steering- When driving to one side of the lane- When driving on narrow lanes or on

curvesAdjust your vehicle speed bydepressing the brake pedal accord-ing to the road condition ahead anddriving condition.

• When vehicles are at a standstilland the vehicle in front of youchanges to the next lane, be care-ful when your vehicle starts tomove because it may not recog-nize the stopped vehicle in front ofyou.

OUM054045L

OUM054046L

5 79


• Always look out for pedestrianswhen your vehicle is maintaining adistance with the vehicle ahead.

• Always be cautious for vehicleswith higher height or vehicles car-rying loads that sticks out to theback of the vehicle.

OUM054047L OUM054048L

WARNING - Safe Use ofASCC

The ASCC can provide you withan additional level of safety andfatigue reduction. However youmust maintain careful observa-tion of the roadway in front ofand around you and maintaincontrol of your vehicle andspacing around other vehiclesas you normally would. Forexample, this will require you toapply the brakes as neededwhen coming upon a slowermoving vehicle, or when a vehi-cle from another lane cuts infront of you.


805

- After an engine start, please stopfor several seconds. If system ini-tialization is not completed, theASCC does not normally operate.

- After an engine start, if any objectsare not detected or the sensorcover is obscured with foreign sub-stances, there is a possibility thatthe ASCC system may not work.

- Below conditions may cause mal-function: over baggage loading in atrunk, suspension remodeling, tirereplacement with unauthorizedtires or tires with different worn-outand pressure levels.

This device complies withIndustry Canada licence-exemptRSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the followingthree conditions:(1) This device may not cause inter-



(3) Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to oper-ate the device.

WARNING - Inclines &Towing

Do not use ASCC on steepinclines or when towing anothervehicle or trailer since suchextreme loading can interferewith your vehicle's ability tomaintain the selected speed.

5 81


DRIVE mode

The drive mode may be selectedaccording to the driver’s preferenceor road condition.

The mode changes whenever theDRIVE MODE button is pressed.

❈ When normal mode is selected, itis not displayed on the cluster.

ECO mode (Active ECO)Active ECO helps improvefuel efficiency by control-ling certain engine andtransaxle system operat-ing parameters. Fuel effi-ciency depends on thedriver's driving habit androad condition.• When the DRIVE MODE

button is pressed andthe ECO mode is select-ed, the ECO indicator(green) will illuminate toshow that the ActiveECO is operating.

• When the Active ECO isactivated, it does notturn off even though theengine is restartedagain. To turn off thesystem, press theDRIVE MODE buttonagain.

DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OUMA054036

■ Type A

■ Type B

OUMA054037

NORMAL

SPORT ECO

ECO


825

When Active ECO is activated:• The acceleration may slightly be

reduced even though you depressthe accelerator fully.

• The air conditioner performancemay be limited

• The shift pattern of the automatictransaxle may change.

• The engine noise may get louder.

The above situations are normalconditions when the Active EcoSystem is activated to improve fuelefficiency.

Limitation of Active ECO opera-tion:If the following conditions occur whileActive ECO is operating, the systemoperation is limited even thoughthere is no change in the ECO indi-cator.• When the coolant temperature is

low:The system will be limited untilengine performance becomes nor-mal.

• When driving up a hill:The system will be limited to gainpower when driving uphill becausethe engine torque is restricted.

• When using manual mode:The system will be limited accord-ing to the shift location.

• When the accelerator pedal isdeeply depressed for a few sec-onds:The system will be limited, judgingthat the driver wants to speed up.

SPORT modeSPORT mode focuses ondynamic driving by auto-matically adjusting thesteering wheel, engineand transaxle system.• When the DRIVE MODE

button is pressed andthe SPORT mode isselected, the SPORTindicator (yellow) will illu-minate.

• When the SPORT modeis activated, and theengine start/stop buttonis turned off and on it willchange to NORMALmode. To turn on theSPORT mode pressDRIVE MODE buttonagain.

SPORT

5 83


• If the system is activat-ed:- While holding vehicle

speed, it maintains thegear and RPM for sometime even though theaccelerator pedal is notdepressed.

- Up-shifting is delayed.

✽✽ NOTICEIn Sport drive mode, the fuel effi-ciency may decrease.


845

The Blind Spot Detection System(BSD) uses a radar sensor to alertthe driver.It senses the rear side territory of thevehicle and provides and indicationto the driver.

(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)The warning range depends onyour vehicle speed. However, ifyour vehicle is about 10 km/h (6mph) faster than the other vehi-cle, the system will not warn you.

(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist)When a vehicle approaches youat high speed, the system willwarn you.

(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)When your vehicle moves rear-ward, and the sensor detects anapproaching vehicle in the left orright side, the system will warnyou.

BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - BSDLimitations

• The Blind Spot DetectionSystem (BSD) is a supplemen-tal system. Do not solely relyon the system and always payattention to drive safely.

• The Blind Spot DetectionSystem may not detect everyobject alongside the vehicleand is not a substitute forproper and safe lane chang-ing procedures. Always drivesafely and use caution whenchanging lanes.OUM054176L

5 85


BSD (Blind Spot Detection) / LCA (Lane Change Assist)Operating conditions

The indicator on the switch will illumi-nate when the Blind Spot DetectionSystem (BSD) switch is pressed withthe Engine Start/Stop Button ON.If vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h (18.6 mph), the system will activate.If you press the switch again, theswitch indicator and system will beturned off.If the ignition switch is turned OFFand ON the system returns to theprevious state.

When the system is not used turn thesystem off by turning off the switch.When the system is turned on thewarning light will illuminate for 3 sec-onds on the outside rearview mirror.

Warning typeThe system will activate when:1.The system is on.2.Vehicle speed is above 30 km/h

(18.6 mph).3.Other vehicles are detected in the

rear side.

WARNINGThe Blind Spot DetectionSystem with Lane ChangeAssist and Rear Cross TrafficAlert is not a substitute forproper and safe lane changingprocedures. Always drive safelyand use caution when changinglanes. The Blind Spot DetectionSystem may not detect everyobject alongside the vehicle.

OUMA054027


865

If a vehicle is detected within theboundary of the system, a warninglight will illuminate on the outsiderearview mirror.If the detected vehicle is not indetecting range, the warning will turnoff according to driving conditions.

The second stage alarm will activatewhen:1.The first stage alert is on2.The turn signal is on to change a

lane

When the second stage alert is acti-vated, a warning light will blink on theoutside rearview mirror and an alarmwill sound.If you move the turn signal switch tothe original position, the secondstage alert will be deactivated.

- The second stage alarm may bedeactivated.

• To activate the alarm:Go to the User Settings Mode →Sound and select "BSD" on theLCD display.

• To deactivate the alarm:Go to the User Settings Mode →Sound and deselect "BSD" on theLCD display.

✽✽ NOTICEThe alarm function helps alert thedriver. Deactivate this function onlywhen it is necessary.

OUM054029

2nd stage

OUM054028

1st stage

5 87


Detecting sensor

The sensors are located inside of therear bumper.Always keep the rear bumper cleanfor the system to work properly.

Warning message

The message will appear to notifythe driver if there are foreign sub-stances on the rear bumper or it ishot near the rear bumper. The lighton the switch and the system willturn off automatically.

Remove the foreign substance onthe rear bumper.After the foreign substance isremoved, if you drive for approxi-mately 10 minutes, the system willwork normally.If the system does not work normallyeven though the foreign substance isremoved, take your vehicle to anauthorized Kia dealer and have thesystem checked.

OUM054030

OUMA057228

■ Type A

■ Type B

OUMA057227


885

If the system does not work properly,a warning message will appear andthe light on the switch will turn off.The system will turn off automatical-ly.

Have your vehicle inspected by anauthorized Kia dealer.

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

When your vehicle moves backwardsfrom a parking position, the sensordetects approaching vehicles to theleft or right side direction and givesinformation to the driver.

Operating conditions

• Select RCTA (Rear Cross TrafficAlert) in "User Settings" under"Driving Assist" on the instrumentcluster. The system will turn on andstandby to activate.

• Select RCTA again, to turn the sys-tem off.

• If the vehicle is turned off and onagain, the RCTA system will returnto the state right before the vehiclewas turned off. Always turn theRCTA system off when not in use.

OUM054178L

OYP054026K OUM054124L

5 89


• The system operates when thevehicle speed is below 10 km/h(6.2 mph) with the shift lever in R(Reverse).

• The RCTA (Rear Cross TrafficAlert) detecting range is 0.5m ~20m based on the side direction. Ifthe approaching vehicle speed is 4 km/h (2.5 mph) ~ 36 km/h (22mph) within sensing range, it isdetected. However, the systemsensing range is different based onconditions. Always pay attention toyour surroundings.

Warning type

• If the vehicle detected by sensorsapproaches your vehicle, the warn-ing chime will sound and the warn-ing light will blink on the outsiderearview mirror.

• If the detected vehicle is out of thesensing range of your vehicle,move the vehicle away from thedetected object slowly; the warningwill be cancelled.

• The system may not operate prop-erly due to other factors or circum-stances. Always pay attention toyour surroundings.

❈ If your vehicle's left or right sidebumper is blinded by barrier orvehicles, the system sensing abili-ty may be deteriorated.

OYP054027K

WARNINGThe Blind Spot DetectionSystem with Lane ChangeAssist and Rear Cross TrafficAlert is not a substitute forproper and safe lane changingprocedures. Always drive safelyand use caution when changinglanes. The Blind Spot DetectionSystem may not detect everyobject alongside the vehicle.


905

✽✽ NOTICE• The system may not work proper-

ly if the bumper has been replacedor if a repair work has been donenear the sensor.

• The detection area differs accord-ing to the roads width. If the roadis narrow the system may detectother vehicles in the next lane.

• On the contrary, if the road is verywide the system may not detectother vehicles.

• The system may turn off due tostrong electromagnetic waves.

Non-operating conditionDriver's AttentionThe driver must be cautious in thebelow situations for the system maynot assist the driver and may notwork properly.

- Curved roads, tollgates, etc.- The sensor cover is obscured by

rain, snow, mud, etc- The rear bumper near the sensor is

covered or hidden with a foreignmatter such as a sticker, bumperguard, bicycle stand etc.

- The rear bumper is damaged or thesensor is out of place.

- The height of the vehicle has signif-icantly changed such as when thetrunk is loaded with heavy objects,abnormal tire pressure etc.

- Due to bad weather such as heavyrain or snow.

- A fixed object is near such as aguardrail, etc.

- A substantial amount of metallicobjects such as a constructionarea.

- A large vehicle is nearby such as abus or truck.

- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.- A flat trailer is near.- If the vehicle starts at the same

time as the vehicle next to it andhas accelerated.

- When the other vehicle passes byat a high rate of speed.

- When changing lanes.- When going down or up a steep,

uneven road.- When the other vehicle drives at

the rear very nearby or drives veryclose.

- When a trailer or carrier is installed.

5 91


- When the temperature of the rearbumper is very high or low.

- When parking structure covers thesensor.

- When reversing from a parkingspace with pillars or metal struc-tures.

- When you are reversing and if thedetected vehicle is simultaneouslyreversing.

- If there are small objects like shop-ping carts and baby carriages.

- If there is a vehicle with decreasedride height (lowered).

- When the vehicle is close to anoth-er vehicle.

- When driving through a narrowroad with many plants.

- When driving on wet surface.

Outside rearview mirror may notalert the driver when:- The outside rearview mirror hous-

ing is obscured by mud, snow, etc.- The window is obscured by mud,

snow, etc.- The windows are overly tinted.





925

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED)This system detects the lane with asensor at the front windshield andnotifies you if it detects that yourvehicle leaves the lane.

• The LDWS does not make thevehicle change lanes. It is the dri-ver's responsibility to always checkthe road conditions.

• If the sensor cannot detect the laneor if the vehicle speed does notexceed 64 km/h (40 mph), theLDWS will not be able to notify youif the vehicle leaves the lane.

• If your vehicle has window tint orother types of coating on the frontwindshield, the LDWS may notwork properly.

• Prevent damage to the LDWS sen-sor from water or any liquid.

• Do not remove the LDWS partsand avoid damaging the sensor byavoiding a strong impacts.

• Do not put objects that reflect lighton the dash board.

• The operation of the LDWS can beaffected by several factors (includ-ing environmental conditions). It isthe responsibility of the driver topay attention to the roadway and tomaintain the vehicle in it's lane atall times.

WARNING - LDWS AlertThe LDWS is only intended toprovide you with informationregarding your vehicle's posi-tion on the roadway. Uponreceiving an LDWS alert, youmust take the necessary stepsto maintain control of your vehi-cle. The LDWS does not provideany steering inputs into thevehicle for you. It can be dan-gerous to make a large suddensteering input in response to analert, since that could result inloss of control.

OUM054032

OUM054149

OUMA054031

5 93


To operate the LDWS, press the but-ton with the engine start/stop buttonin the ON position. The indicator illu-minates on the cluster. To cancel theLDWS, press the button again.

If the system detects that your vehi-cle is leaving the lane when theLDWS is operating and vehiclespeed exceeds 64 km/h (40 mph),the warning operates as follows:

1.Visual warningIf you leave the lane, the lane youleave on the LCD display blinks yel-low.

2.Auditory warningIf you leave the lane, the warningsound operates.

OUM054126L

OUM054127L

■ When the sensor detects the lane line

■ When the sensor doesn’t detect the lane lineOUM054133L

OUM054128L

OUM054129L

■ Left lane departure warning

■ Right lane departure warning


945

The color of symbol will changedepend on the condition of LDWSsystem.- White color : It means the sensor

does not detect thelane line.

- Green color : It means the sensordetects the lane line.

Warning indicator

When the LDWS is not working prop-erly, the warning light will illuminateand the warning message will comeon for a few second. After the mes-sage disappears, the master warninglight will illuminate.

Take your vehicle to an authorizedKia dealer and have the systemchecked.

The LDWS does not operatewhen:• The driver turns on the turn signal

or the hazard warning flasher tochange lane.

• Driving on the lane line.

✽✽ NOTICETo change lanes, operate the turnsignal switch then change the lane.

WARNING - LDWSLimitations

The Lane Departure WarningSystem is a supplemental sys-tem. Do not solely rely on thesystem but always pay attentionand drive safely.

OUM054158L

OUM054132

OUM054133L

5 95


The LDWS may not warn youeven if the vehicle leaves thelane, or may warn you even ifthe vehicle does not leave thelane when;• The lane is not visible due to snow,

rain, stain, a puddle or other envi-ronmental conditions.

• The brightness of the outsidechanges suddenly such as tunnelenter/exit.

• The headlights are off at night or ina tunnel.

• The color of the lane marking fromthe road is difficult to distinguish.

• Driving on a steep grade or acurve.

• Light such as street light, sunlightor oncoming vehicle light reflectsfrom water on the road.

• The lens or windshield is obscuredby mud, snow, etc.

• The sensor cannot detect the lanebecause of fog, heavy rain orheavy snow.

• The inside rear view mirror housingoverheats from being in direct sun-light.

• The lane is very wide or narrow.• The lane line is damaged or indis-

tinct.• The windshield is fogged by humid

air in the vehicle.• The shadow is on the lane line by a

median strip.• The sensor cannot distinguish the

lane from the road due to thedust/dirt.

• There is a mark similar to a laneline.

• There is a boundary structure.• The distance from vehicle ahead is

very short or the vehicle aheaddrives hiding the lane line.

• The vehicle vibrates heavily due toroad conditions.

• The lane number increases ordecreases or the lane lines arecrossing.

• Putting something on the dash-board.

• Driving with the sun in front of you.

• Driving in areas under construc-tion.

• The lane line is more than two ineither side (Left/Right)





965

Your vehicle's fuel economy dependsmainly on your style of driving, whereyou drive and when you drive.Each of these factors affects howmany miles (kilometers) you can getfrom a gallon (liter) of fuel.To operateyour vehicle as economically as pos-sible, use the following driving sug-gestions to help save money in bothfuel and repairs:• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a

moderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shiftsand maintain a steady cruisingspeed. Don't race between stop-lights. Try to adjust your speed tothe traffic so you don't have tochange speeds unnecessarily.Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-sible. Always maintain a safe dis-tance from other vehicles so youcan avoid unnecessary braking.This also reduces brake wear.

• Drive at a moderate speed. Thefaster you drive, the more fuel yourvehicle uses. Driving at a moderatespeed, especially on the highway,is one of the most effective ways toreduce fuel consumption.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Thiscan increase fuel consumption andalso increase wear on these com-ponents. In addition, driving withyour foot resting on the brake pedalmay cause the brakes to overheat,which reduces their effectivenessand may lead to more serious con-sequences.

• Take care of your tires. Keep theminflated to the recommended pres-sure. Incorrect inflation, either toomuch or too little, results in unnec-essary tire wear. Check the tirepressures at least once a month.

• Be sure that the wheels arealigned correctly. Improper align-ment can result from hitting curbsor driving too fast over irregularsurfaces. Poor alignment causesfaster tire wear and may also resultin other problems as well asgreater fuel consumption.

• Keep your vehicle in good condi-tion. For better fuel economy andreduced maintenance costs, main-tain your vehicle in accordancewith the maintenance schedule insection 7. If you drive your vehiclein severe conditions, more frequentmaintenance is required (see sec-tion 7 for details).

• Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi-mum service, your vehicle shouldbe kept clean and free of corrosivematerials. It is especially importantthat mud, dirt, ice, etc. not beallowed to accumulate on theunderside of the vehicle. This extraweight can result in increased fuelconsumption and also contribute tocorrosion.

• Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-sary weight in your vehicle. Weightreduces fuel economy.

• Don't let the engine idle longerthan necessary. If you are waiting(and not in traffic), turn off yourengine and restart only whenyou're ready to go.

ECONOMICAL OPERATION

5 97


• Remember, your vehicle does notrequire extended warm-up. Afterthe engine has started, allow theengine to run for 10 to 20 secondsprior to placing the vehicle in gear.In very cold weather, however, giveyour engine a slightly longer warm-up period.

• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.Lugging is driving too slowly in avery high gear resulting in enginebucking. If this happens, shift to alower gear. Over-revving is racingthe engine beyond its safe limit.This can be avoided by shifting atthe recommended speed.

• Use your air conditioning sparingly.The air conditioning system isoperated by engine power so yourfuel economy is reduced when youuse it.

• Open windows at high speeds canreduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is less in crosswindsand headwinds. To help offsetsome of this loss, slow down whendriving in these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operatingcondition is important both for econ-omy and safety. Therefore, have anauthorized Kia dealer performscheduled inspections and mainte-nance.

WARNING - Engine offduring motion

Never turn the engine off tocoast down hills or anytime thevehicle is in motion. The powersteering and power brakes willnot function properly withoutthe engine running. In addition,turning off the ignition whiledriving could engage the steer-ing wheel lock resulting in lossof vehicle steering. Keep theengine on and downshift to anappropriate gear for enginebraking effect.


985

Hazardous driving conditions When hazardous driving conditionsare encountered such as water,snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-ards, follow these suggestions:• Drive cautiously and allow extra

distance for braking.• Avoid sudden braking or steering.• When braking with non-ABS

brakes pump the brake pedal witha light up-and-down motion untilthe vehicle is stopped.

Do not pump the brake pedal on avehicle equipped with ABS.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,use second gear. Accelerate slow-ly to avoid spinning the drivewheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, or other non-slip material under the drivewheels to provide traction whenstalled in ice, snow, or mud.

Reducing the risk of a rolloverThis multi-purpose passenger vehi-cle is defined as a Sports UtilityVehicle (SUV). SUV’s have higherground clearance and a narrowertrack to make them capable of per-forming in a wide variety of off-roadapplications. Specific design charac-teristics give them a higher center ofgravity than ordinary vehicles. Anadvantage of the higher groundclearance is a better view of theroad, which allows you to anticipateproblems. They are not designed forcornering at the same speeds asconventional passenger vehicles,any more than low-slung sports vehi-cles are designed to perform satis-factorily in off-road conditions. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higherrollover rate than other types of vehi-cles. Due to this risk, driver and pas-sengers are strongly recommendedto buckle their seat belts. In arollover crash, an unbelted person ismore likely to die than a personwearing a seat belt. There are stepsthat a driver can make to reduce therisk of a rollover.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

WARNING - DownshiftingDo not downshift with an auto-matic transaxle while driving onslippery surfaces. The suddenchange in tire speed couldcause the tires to skid andresult in an accident.

5 99


If at all possible, avoid sharp turns orabrupt maneuvers, do not load yourroof rack with heavy cargo, andnever modify your vehicle in any way.

Rocking the vehicleIf it is necessary to rock the vehicleto free it from snow, sand, or mud,first turn the steering wheel right andleft to clear the area around yourfront wheels. Then, shift back andforth between R (Reverse) and anyforward gear in vehicles equippedwith an automatic transaxle. Do notrace the engine, and spin the wheelsas little as possible. If you are stillstuck after a few tries, have the vehi-cle pulled out by a tow vehicle toavoid engine overheating and possi-ble damage to the transaxle.

The ESC system should be turnedOFF prior to rocking the vehicle.

CAUTION - Vehicle rockingProlonged rocking may causeengine overheating, transaxledamage or failure, and tire dam-age.

CAUTION - Spinning tiresDo not spin the wheels, espe-cially at speeds more than 56km/h (35 mph). Spinning thewheels at high speeds when thevehicle is stationary couldcause a tire to overheat whichcould result in tire damage thatmay injure bystanders.WARNING - Sudden

Vehicle MovementDo not attempt to rock the vehi-cle if people or objects are near-by. The vehicle may suddenlymove forward or backwards as itbecomes unstuck.


1005

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing incorners, especially when roads arewet. Ideally, corners should alwaysbe taken under gentle acceleration. Ifyou follow these suggestions, tirewear will be held to a minimum.

Driving at night

Because night driving presents morehazards than driving in the daylight,here are some important tips toremember:• Slow down and keep more dis-

tance between you and other vehi-cles, as it may be more difficult tosee at night, especially in areaswhere there may not be any streetlights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce theglare from other driver's head-lights.

• Keep your headlights clean andproperly aimed. (On vehicles notequipped with the automatic head-light aiming feature.) Dirty orimproperly aimed headlights willmake it much more difficult to seeat night.

• Avoid staring directly at the head-lights of oncoming vehicles. Youcould be temporarily blinded, and itwill take several seconds for youreyes to readjust to the darkness.

OUM054140OUM054141L

5 101


Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make drivingdangerous, especially if you’re notprepared for the slick pavement.Here are a few things to considerwhen driving in the rain:

• A heavy rainfall will make it harderto see and will increase the dis-tance needed to stop your vehicle,so slow down.

• Keep your windshield wipingequipment in good shape. Replaceyour windshield wiper blades whenthey show signs of streaking ormissing areas on the windshield.

• If your tires are not in good condi-tion, making a quick stop on wetpavement can cause a skid andpossibly lead to an accident. Besure your tires are in good shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make iteasier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large pud-dles can affect your brakes. If youmust go through puddles, try todrive through them slowly.

• If you believe you may have gottenyour brakes wet, apply them lightlywhile driving until normal brakingoperation returns.

Driving in flooded areas Avoid driving through flooded areasunless you are sure the water is nohigher than the bottom of the wheelhub. Drive through any water slowly.Allow adequate stopping distancebecause brake performance may beaffected.After driving through water, dry thebrakes by gently applying them sev-eral times while the vehicle is movingslowly.

OUM054139L


1025

Driving off-road Drive carefully off-road because yourvehicle may be damaged by rocks orroots of trees. Become familiar withthe off-road conditions where youare going to drive before you begindriving.

Highway drivingTiresAdjust the tire inflation pressures tospecification. Low tire inflation pres-sures will result in overheating andpossible failure of the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tireswhich may result in reduced tractionor tire failure.Never exceed the maximum tireinflation pressure shown on the tires.

Fuel, engine coolant and engineoilHigh speed travel consumes morefuel than urban motoring. Do not for-get to check both the engine coolantand engine oil.

Drive beltA loose or damaged drive belt mayresult in overheating of the engine.

WARNING - Under/overinflated tires

Always check the tires for properinflation before driving.Underinflated or overinflatedtires can cause poor handling,loss of vehicle control, and sud-den tire failure leading to acci-dents, injuries, and even death.For proper tire pressures, refer to“Tires and wheels” in section 8.

WARNING - Tire treadAlways check the tire treadbefore driving your vehicle.Worn-out tires can result in lossof vehicle control. Worn-out tiresshould be replaced as soon aspossible. For further informationand tread limits, refer to "Tiresand wheels" in section 7.

5 103


Severe weather conditions in thewinter result in greater wear andother problems. To minimize theproblems of winter driving, youshould follow these suggestions:

Snowy or icy conditionsTo drive your vehicle in deep snow, itmay be necessary to use snow tireson your tires. If snow tires are need-ed, it is necessary to select tiresequivalent in size and type of theoriginal equipment tires. Failure to doso may adversely affect the safetyand handling of your vehicle.Furthermore, speeding, rapid accel-eration, sudden brake applications,and sharp turns are potentially veryhazardous practices.During deceleration, use enginebraking to the fullest extent. Suddenbrake applications on snowy or icyroads may cause skids to occur. Youneed to keep sufficient distancebetween the vehicle in operation infront of your vehicle. Also, apply thebrake gently.

Snow tiresIf you mount snow tires on your vehi-cle, make sure they are radial tires ofthe same size and load range as theoriginal tires. Mount snow tires on allfour wheels to balance your vehicle’shandling in all weather conditions.Keep in mind that the traction provid-ed by snow tires on dry roads maynot be as high as your vehicle's orig-inal equipment tires.You should drivecautiously even when the roads areclear. Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.Do not install studded tires withoutfirst checking local, state and munic-ipal regulations for possible restric-tions against their use.

WINTER DRIVING


1045

Use high quality ethylene gly-col coolantYour vehicle is delivered with highquality ethylene glycol coolant in thecooling system. It is the only type ofcoolant that should be used becauseit helps prevent corrosion in the cool-ing system, lubricates the waterpump and prevents freezing. Be sureto replace or replenish your coolantin accordance with the maintenanceschedule in section 7. Before winter,have your coolant tested to assurethat its freezing point is sufficient forthe temperatures anticipated duringthe winter.

Check battery and cablesWinter puts additional burdens onthe battery system. Visually inspectthe battery and cables as describedin section 7. The level of charge inyour battery can be checked by anauthorized Kia dealer or a servicestation.

Change to "winter weight" oilif necessaryIn some climates it is recommendedthat a lower viscosity "winter weight"oil be used during cold weather. Seesection 8 for recommendations. Ifyou aren't sure what weight oil youshould use, consult an authorizedKia dealer.

Check spark plugs and igni-tion systemInspect your spark plugs asdescribed in section 7 and replacethem if necessary. Also check allignition wiring and components to besure they are not cracked, worn ordamaged in any way.

To keep locks from freezingTo keep the locks from freezing,squirt an approved de-icer fluid orglycerine into the key opening. If alock is covered with ice, squirt it withan approved de-icing fluid to removethe ice. If the lock is frozen internally,you may be able to thaw it out byusing a heated key. Handle the heat-ed key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washeranti-freeze in systemTo keep the water in the windowwasher system from freezing, add anapproved window washer anti-freezesolution in accordance with instruc-tions on the container. Window wash-er anti-freeze is available from anauthorized Kia dealer and most autoparts outlets. Do not use enginecoolant or other types of anti-freezeas these may damage the paint fin-ish.

5 105


Don’t let your parking brakefreezeUnder some conditions your parkingbrake can freeze in the engagedposition.This is most likely to happenwhen there is an accumulation ofsnow or ice around or near the rearbrakes or if the brakes are wet. Ifthere is a risk the parking brake mayfreeze, apply it only temporarily whileyou put the gear shift lever in P(Park, automatic transaxle) andblock the rear wheels so the vehiclecannot roll. Then release the parkingbrake.

Don't let ice and snow accu-mulate underneathUnder some conditions, snow andice can build up under the fendersand interfere with the steering. Whendriving in severe winter conditionswhere this may happen, you shouldperiodically check underneath thevehicle to be sure the movement ofthe front wheels and the steeringcomponents are not obstructed.

Carry emergency equipmentDepending on the severity of theweather, you should carry appropri-ate emergency equipment. Some ofthe items you may want to carryinclude tow straps or chains, flash-light, emergency flares, sand, shov-el, jumper cables, window scraper,gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blan-ket, etc.


1065

If you are considering towing withyour vehicle, you should first checkwith your country's Department ofMotor Vehicles to determine theirlegal requirements.Since laws vary the requirements fortowing trailers, cars, or other types ofvehicles or apparatus may differ. Askan authorized Kia dealer for furtherdetails before towing.

You may require an additional wiringharness connector to install a trailerhitch. Please contact an authorizedKia dealer for more details.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer.* Toidentify what the vehicle traileringcapacity is for your vehicle, youshould read the information in“Weight of the trailer” that appearslater in this section.

Remember that trailering is differentthan just driving your vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes in han-dling, durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering requirescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

This section contains many time-tested, important trailering tips andsafety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. Please read thissection carefully before you pull atrailer.

Load-pulling components such asthe engine, transaxle, wheel assem-blies, and tires are forced to workharder against the load of the addedweight. The engine is required tooperate at relatively higher speedsand under greater loads. This addi-tional burden generates extra heat.The trailer also adds considerably towind resistance, increasing thepulling requirements.

TRAILER TOWING

CAUTION - Trailer installation

Follow instructions in this sec-tion when pulling a trailer.Pulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and resultin costly repairs not covered byyour warranty.

WARNING - Towing atrailer

Always check your towingequipment to confirm correctequipment size and installationbefore use. Using incompatibleor incorrectly installed trailerequipment can effect the vehi-cle operation and endanger youand your passengers.

WARNING - Weight limits

Before towing, make sure thetotal trailer weight, GCW (grosscombination weight), GVW(gross vehicle weight), GAW(gross axle weight) and trailertongue load are all within thelimits.

5 107


Hitches It's important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by, and rough roads area few reasons why you’ll need theright hitch. Here are some rules tofollow:• Will you have to make any holes in

the body of your vehicle when youinstall a trailer hitch? If you do, thenbe sure to seal the holes laterwhen you remove the hitch.If you don’t seal them, deadly car-bon monoxide (CO) from yourexhaust can get into your vehicle,as well as dirt and water.

• The bumpers on your vehicle arenot intended for hitches. Do notattach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to them. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

• Kia trailer hitch accessory is avail-able at an authorized Kia dealer.

Safety chains You should always attach chainsbetween your vehicle and your trail-er. Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chains maybe provided by the hitch manufactur-er or by the trailer manufacturer.Follow the manufacturer’s recom-mendation for attaching safetychains. Always leave just enoughslack so you can turn with your trail-er. And, never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer brakes If your trailer is equipped with a brak-ing system, make sure it conforms toyour local regulations and that it isproperly installed and operating cor-rectly.If your trailer weight exceeds themaximum allowed weight withouttrailer brakes, then the trailer will alsorequire its own brakes as well. Besure to read and follow the instruc-tions for the trailer brakes so you’ll beable to install, adjust and maintainthem properly.• Don’t tap into or modify your vehi-

cle's brake system.

WARNING - Trailerbrakes

Do not use a trailer with its ownbrakes unless you are absolute-ly certain that you have proper-ly set up the brake system. Thisis not a task for amateurs. Usean experienced, competenttrailer shop for this work.


1085

Driving with a trailer Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Before settingout for the open road, you must get toknow your trailer. Acquaint yourselfwith the feel of handling and brakingwith the added weight of the trailer.And always keep in mind that thevehicle you are driving is now a gooddeal longer and not nearly so respon-sive as your vehicle is by itself.Before you start, check the trailerhitch and platform, safety chains,electrical connector(s), lights, tiresand mirror adjustment. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start your vehicleand trailer moving and then apply thetrailer brake controller by hand to besure the brakes are working.This letsyou check your electrical connectionat the same time.During your trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secure,and that the lights and any trailerbrakes are still working.

Following distance Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving your vehicle without a trailer.This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sud-den turns.

Passing You’ll need more passing distanceup ahead when you’re towing a trail-er. And, because of the increasedvehicle length, you’ll need to gomuch farther beyond the passedvehicle before you can return to yourlane. Due to the added load to theengine when going uphill the vehiclemay also take longer to pass than itwould on flat ground.

Backing up Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. Then, to movethe trailer to the left, just move yourhand to the left. To move the trailer tothe right, move your hand to theright. Always back up slowly and, ifpossible, have someone guide you.

Making turns When you’re turning with a trailer,make wider turns than normal. Dothis so your trailer won’t strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,or other objects near the edge of theroad. Avoid jerky or sudden maneu-vers. Signal well in advance beforeturning or lane changes.

5 109


Turn signals when towing a trailer When you tow a trailer, your vehiclehas to have a different turn signalflasher and extra wiring. The greenarrows on your instrument panel willflash whenever you signal a turn orlane change. Properly connected,the trailer lights will also flash to alertother drivers you’re about to turn,change lanes, or stop.When towing a trailer, the greenarrows on your instrument panel willflash for turns even if the bulbs on thetrailer are burned out. Thus, you maythink drivers behind you are seeingyour signals when, in fact, they arenot. It’s important to check occasion-ally to be sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking. You must also check thelights every time you disconnect andthen reconnect the wires.Do not connect a trailer lighting sys-tem directly to your vehicle’s lightingsystem. Use only an approved trailerwiring harness.An authorized Kia dealer can assistyou in installing the wiring harness.

Driving on grades Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before you start down a long orsteep downgrade. If you don’t shiftdown, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would gethot and no longer operate efficiently.On a long uphill grade, shift downand reduce your speed to around 70km/h (45 mph) to reduce the possi-bility of engine and transaxle over-heating.If your trailer weighs more than themaximum trailer weight without trail-er brakes and you have an automat-ic transaxle, you should drive in D(Drive) when towing a trailer.Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)when towing a trailer will minimizeheat build up and extend the life ofyour transaxle.

CAUTIONAlways use an approved trailerwiring harness. Failure to usean approved trailer wiring har-ness could result in damage tothe vehicle electrical system.


1105

Towing up hill • When towing a trailer on steep

grades (in excess of 6%) pay closeattention to the engine coolanttemperature gauge to ensure theengine does not overheat.If the needle of the coolant temper-ature gauge moves across the dialtowards “H” (HOT), pull over andstop as soon as it is safe to do so,and allow the engine to idle until itcools down.You may proceed oncethe engine has cooled sufficiently.

• You must decide driving speeddepending on trailer weight anduphill grade to reduce the possibil-ity of engine and transaxle over-heating.

Parking on hills Generally, if you have a trailerattached to your vehicle, you shouldnot park your vehicle on a hill. Peoplecan be seriously or fatally injured,and both your vehicle and the trailercan be damaged if they unexpected-ly roll downhill.However, if you ever have to parkyour trailer on a hill, here's how to doit:1.Pull the vehicle into the parking

space. Turn the steering wheel inthe direction of the curb (right ifheaded downhill, left if headed uphill).

2.If the vehicle has an automatictransaxle, place the vehicle in P(Park).

3.Set the parking brake and shut offthe engine.

4.Place chocks under the trailerwheels on the down hill side of thewheels.

5.Start the vehicle, hold the brakes,shift to neutral, release the parkingbrake and slowly release thebrakes until the trailer chocksabsorb the load.

6.Reapply the brakes, reapply theparking brake and shift the vehicleto P (Park) for automatic transaxle.

7.Shut off the vehicle and release thevehicle brakes but leave the park-ing brake set.

5 111


When you are ready to leave afterparking on a hill

1. With the automatic transaxle in P(Park), apply your brakes and holdthe brake pedal down while you:• Start your engine;• Shift into gear; and• Release the parking brake.

2. Slowly remove your foot from thebrake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clearof the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance when trailer tow-ing Your vehicle will need service moreoften when you regularly pull a trail-er. Important items to pay particularattention to include engine oil, auto-matic transaxle fluid, axle lubricantand cooling system fluid. Brake con-dition is another important item tofrequently check. Each item is cov-ered in this manual, and the Indexwill help you find them quickly. Ifyou’re trailering, it’s a good idea toreview these sections before youstart your trip.Don’t forget to also maintain yourtrailer and hitch. Follow the mainte-nance schedule that accompaniedyour trailer and check it periodically.Preferably, conduct the check at thestart of each day’s driving. Mostimportantly, all hitch nuts and boltsshould be tight.

• When towing check transaxle fluidmore frequently.

CAUTION - Air conditionDo not use the A/C while usingyour vehicle to tow uphill. Dueto higher load during trailerusage, overheating might occuron hot days or during uphilldriving.


1125

If you do decide to pull a trailerHere are some important points ifyou decide to pull a trailer:• Consider using a sway control. You

can ask a hitch dealer about swaycontrol.

• Do not do any towing with your vehi-cle during its first 2,000 km (1,200miles) in order to allow the engine toproperly break in. Failure to heedthis caution may result in seriousengine or transaxle damage.

• When towing a trailer, be sure to con-sult an authorized Kia dealer for fur-ther information on additional require-ments such as a towing kit, etc.

• Always drive your vehicle at a mod-erate speed (less than 100 km/h (60mph)).

• On a long uphill grade, do notexceed 70 km/h (45 mph) or theposted towing speed limit, whicheveris lower.

• The chart contains important consid-erations that have to do with weight:

Item Theta II 2.0 Theta II 2.4 Lambda II 3.3

Maximumtrailerweight

Without brakeSystem

750 (1,650) 750 (1,650) 750 (1,650)

With brakeSystem

907 (2,000) 907 (2,000) 907 (2,000)

With trailer package

1,587 (3,500) - 2,267 (5,000)

Maximum tongue weight 159 (350) 127 (280) 226 (500)

To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you shouldread the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this sec-tion.

[kg (lbs.)]

5 113


Weight of the trailer

What is the maximum safe weight ofa trailer? It should never weigh morethan the maximum trailer weight withtrailer brakes. But even that can betoo heavy.It depends on how you plan to useyour trailer. For example, speed, alti-tude, road grades, outside tempera-ture and how often your vehicle isused to pull a trailer are all important.The ideal trailer weight can alsodepend on any special equipmentthat you have on your vehicle.

Weight of the trailer tongue

The tongue load of any trailer is animportant weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossvehicle weight (GVW) of your vehi-cle. This weight includes the curbweight of the vehicle, any cargo youmay carry in it, and the people whowill be riding in the vehicle. And if youwill tow a trailer, you must add thetongue load to the GVW becauseyour vehicle will also be carrying thatweight.

The trailer tongue should weigh amaximum of 10% of the total loadedtrailer weight, within the limits of themaximum permissible trailer tongueload. After you've loaded your trailer,weigh the trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they aren’t, you may beable to correct them simply by mov-ing some items around in the trailer.

C190E01JM

Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight

C190E02JM

Gross Axle Weight Gross Vehicle WeightWARNING - Trailer

Always follow the loadinginstructions provided with yourtrailer. Improper loading caneffect vehicle operation andresult in an accident.


1145

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recom-mended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacityweight.

OUMA054204/OUMA054205/OUMA054206/OUMA054207/OUMA054208/OUMA054209

Tire and loading information label

5 115


Vehicle capacity weight:5 persons : 420kg (930 lbs.)7 persons : 506kg (1,120 lbs.)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-mum combined weight of occupantsand cargo. If your vehicle is equippedwith a trailer, the combined weightincludes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:Total - 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons,Rear seat : 3 persons)

- 7 persons(Front seat : 2 persons,Rear seat : 5 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximumnumber of occupants including adriver, your vehicle may carry.However, the seating capacity maybe reduced based upon the weight ofall of the occupants, and the weightof the cargo being carried or towed.Do not overload the vehicle as thereis a limit to the total weight, or loadlimit including occupants and cargo,the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity:* 2.0L EngineWithout trailer brakes: 750 kg (1,650 lbs)With trailer brakes: 907 kg (2,000 lbs)With trailer package: 1,587 kg (3,500 lbs)

* 2.4L EngineWithout trailer brakes: 750 kg (1,650 lbs)With trailer brakes: 907 kg (2,000 lbs)With trailer package: N/A

* 3.3L EngineWithout trailer brakes: 750 kg (1,650 lbs)With trailer brakes: 907 kg (2,000 lbs)With trailer package: 2,267 kg (5,000 lbs)


1165

Towing capacity is the maximumtrailer weight including its cargoweight, your vehicle can tow.

Cargo capacity:The cargo capacity of your vehiclewill increase or decrease dependingon the weight and the number ofoccupants and the tongue load, ifyour vehicle is equipped with a trail-er.

Steps for determining correctload limit1.Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXX kgor XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's plac-ard.

2.Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

3.Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

4.The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity. For example, ifthe "XXX" amount equals 635 kg(1400 lbs.) and there will be five 68kg (150 lbs.) passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is295 kg (650 lbs).(635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5.Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

6.If your vehicle will be towing a trail-er, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of your vehi-cle.

5 117


Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weightand seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle'scapacity weight.

C190F01JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 635 kg

Weight (1400 lbs)Subtract Occupant

B Weight 136 kg

68 kg (150 lbs) × 2(300 lbs)

CAvailable Cargo and 499 kg

Luggage weight (1100 lbs)

Example 1

A B C

C190F02JM




B Weight 340 kg

68 kg (150 lbs) × 5(750 lbs)



A B C

Example 2

C190F03JM




B Weight 390 kg

78 kg (172 lbs) × 5(860 lbs)



A B C

Example 3


1185

Certification labelThe certification label is located onthe driver's door sill at the center pillar.This label shows the maximum allow-able weight of the fully loaded vehi-cle. This is called the GVWR (GrossVehicle Weight Rating). The GVWRincludes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel and cargo.This label also tells you the maxi-mum weight that can be supportedby the front and rear axles, calledGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).To find out the actual loads on yourfront and rear axles, you need to goto a weigh station and weigh yourvehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out your loadequally on both sides of the center-line.

The label will help you decide howmuch cargo and installed equipmentyour vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle- like suitcases, tools, packages, oranything else - they are moving asfast as the vehicle. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is a crash,the items will keep going and cancause an injury if they strike the driv-er or a passenger.

WARNING - Over loadingNever exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle, the GAWR foreither the front or rear axle andvehicle capacity weight.Exceeding these ratings canaffect your vehicle’s handlingand braking ability.

5 119


✽✽ NOTICEOverloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be cov-ered by your warranty. Do not over-load your vehicle.

WARNING - Loose cargoDo not travel with unsecuredblunt objects in the passengercompartment of your vehicle(e.g. suit cases or unsecuredchild seats). These items maystrike occupant during a sud-den stop or crash.

WARNING - Over loadingDo not overload your vehicle.Overloading your vehicle cancause heat buildup in your vehi-cle's tires and possible tire fail-ure, increased stopping dis-tances and poor vehicle han-dling all of which may result in acrash.

This section will guide you in theproper loading of your vehicle and/ortrailer, to keep your loaded vehicleweight within its design rating capa-bility, with or without a trailer.Properly loading your vehicle willprovide maximum return of the vehi-cle design performance. Before load-ing your vehicle, familiarize yourselfwith the following terms for determin-ing your vehicle's weight ratings, withor without a trailer, from the vehicle'sspecifications and the certificationlabel:

Base curb weight This is the weight of the vehicleincluding a full tank of fuel and allstandard equipment. It does notinclude passengers, cargo, or option-al equipment.

Vehicle curb weightThis is the weight of your new vehiclewhen you picked it up from your deal-er plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo weightThis figure includes all weight addedto the Base Curb Weight, includingcargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross axle weight)This is the total weight placed oneach axle (front and rear) - includingvehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)This is the maximum allowableweight that can be carried by a singleaxle (front or rear). These numbersare shown on the certification label.The total load on each axle mustnever exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)This is the Base Curb Weight plusactual Cargo Weight plus passen-gers.

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)This is the maximum allowableweight of the fully loaded vehicle(including all options, equipment,passengers and cargo). The GVWRis shown on the certification labellocated on the driver’s door sill.

VEHICLE WEIGHT GLOSSARY

5 120



Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3

• If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

• If the engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4• If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4

• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4

Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

6


26

ROAD WARNING Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher servesas a warning to other drivers to exer-cise extreme caution whenapproaching, overtaking, or passingyour vehicle.

It should be used whenever emer-gency repairs are being made orwhen the vehicle is stopped near theedge of a roadway.Depress the flasher switch with theignition switch in any position. Theflasher switch is located in the centerfacia panel. All turn signal lights willflash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher oper-ates whether your vehicle is run-ning or not.

• The turn signals do not work whenthe hazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when usingthe hazard warning flasher whilethe vehicle is being towed.

OUM064001

OUM064020L

■ Type A

■ Type B

6 3


If the engine stalls at a cross-road or crossingIf the engine stalls at a crossroad orcrossing, set the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position and then push thevehicle to a safe place.

If you have a flat tire whiledrivingIf a tire goes flat while you are driv-ing:1.Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal and let the vehicle slowdown while driving straight ahead.Do not apply the brakes immedi-ately or attempt to pull off the roadas this may cause a loss of control.When the vehicle has slowed tosuch a speed that it is safe to doso, brake carefully and pull off theroad. Drive off the road as far aspossible and park on a firm levelground. If you are on a dividedhighway, do not park in the medianarea between the two traffic lanes.

2.When the vehicle is stopped, turnon your emergency hazard flash-ers, set the parking brake and putthe transaxle in P (Park, automatictransaxle).

3.Have all passengers get out of thevehicle. Be sure they all get out onthe side of the vehicle that is awayfrom traffic.

4.When changing a flat tire, followthe instruction provided later in thissection.

If the engine stalls while driv-ing1.Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau-tiously off the road to a safe place.

2.Turn on your emergency flashers.3.Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, contact anauthorized Kia dealer or seek otherqualified assistance.

✽✽ NOTICEIf there was a check engine light andloss of power or stall and if safe to doso, wait at least 10 seconds to restartthe vehicle after it stalls. This mayreset the car so it will no longer runat low power condition.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING


46

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT STARTIf engine doesn't turn over orturns over slowly1.If your vehicle has an automatic

transaxle, be sure the shift lever isin N (Neutral) or P (Park) and theemergency brake is set.

2.Check the battery connections tobe sure they are clean and tight.

3.Turn on the interior light. If the lightdims or goes out when you operatethe starter, the battery is dis-charged.

4.Check the starter connections tobe sure they are securely tight-ened.

5.Do not push or pull the vehicle tostart it. See instructions for "Jumpstarting".

If engine turns over normallybut does not start1.Check the fuel level.2.With the ignition switch in the

LOCK position, check all connec-tors at the ignition coils and sparkplugs. Reconnect any that may bedisconnected or loose.

3.Check the fuel line in the enginecompartment.

4.If the engine still does not start, callan authorized Kia dealer or seekother qualified assistance.

WARNING - Push/pull start

Do not push or pull the vehicleto start it. Push or pull startingmay cause the catalytic con-verter to overload and create afire hazard.

6 5


EMERGENCY STARTING

Connect cables in numerical orderand disconnect in reverse order.

Jump starting Jump starting can be dangerous ifdone incorrectly. Therefore, to avoidharm to yourself or damage to yourvehicle or battery, follow these jumpstarting procedures. If in doubt, westrongly recommend that you have acompetent technician or towing serv-ice jump start your vehicle.

CAUTION - Push/pull startto 12 Volt Battery

Use only a 12-volt jumper sys-tem. You can damage a 12-voltstarting motor, ignition system,and other electrical partsbeyond repair by use of a 24-volt power supply (either two12-volt batteries in series or a24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - BatteryNever attempt to check the elec-trolyte level of the battery asthis may cause the battery torupture or explode.

1VQA4001

Dischargedbattery

Jumper Cables

Boosterbattery

WARNING - Frozenbatteries

Do not attempt to jump start thevehicle if the discharged batteryis frozen or if the electrolytelevel is low as the battery mayrupture or explode.

WARNING - Sulfuric acidrisk

When jump starting your vehi-cle be careful not to get acid onyourself, your clothing or on thevehicle. Automobile batteriescontain sulfuric acid. This ispoisonous and highly corro-sive.

WARNING - BatteryKeep all flames or sparks awayfrom the battery. The batteryproduces hydrogen gas whichwill explode if exposed to flameor sparks.


66

Jump starting procedure 1.Make sure the booster battery is

12-volt and that its negative termi-nal is grounded.

2.If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, do not allow the vehicles tocome in contact.

3.Turn off all unnecessary electricalloads.

4.Connect the jumper cables in theexact sequence shown in the illus-tration. First connect one end of ajumper cable to the positive termi-nal of the discharged battery (1),then connect the other end to thepositive terminal of the boosterbattery (2).Proceed to connect one end of theother jumper cable to the negativeterminal of the booster battery (3),then the other end to a solid, sta-tionary, metallic point (for example,the engine lifting bracket) awayfrom the battery (4). Do not con-nect it to or near any part thatmoves when the engine is cranked.

Do not allow the jumper cables tocontact anything except the correctbattery terminals or the correctground. Do not lean over the bat-tery when making connections.

5.Start the engine of the vehicle withthe booster battery and let it run at2,000 rpm, then start the engine ofthe vehicle with the dischargedbattery.

If the cause of your battery discharg-ing is not apparent, you should haveyour vehicle checked by an author-ized Kia dealer.

Push-starting Vehicles equipped with automatictransaxle lock system cannot bepush-started.Follow the directions in this sectionfor jump-starting.

WARNING - Tow startingvehicle

Never tow a vehicle to start itbecause the sudden surge for-ward when the engine startscould cause a collision with thetow vehicle.

WARNING - Batterycables

Do not connect the jumpercable from the negative terminalof the booster battery to thenegative terminal of the dis-charged battery. This can causethe discharged battery to over-heat and crack, releasing bat-tery acid.

6 7


IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATSIf your temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, you experience a lossof power, or hear loud pinging orknocking, the engine will probably betoo hot. If this happens, you should:

1.Pull off the road and stop as soonas it is safe to do so.

2.Place the shift lever in P (Park,automatic transaxle) and set theparking brake. If the air condition-ing is on, turn it off.

3.If engine coolant is running outunder the vehicle or steam is com-ing out from underneath the hood,stop the engine. Do not open thehood until the coolant has stoppedrunning or the steaming hasstopped. If there is no visible lossof engine coolant and no steam,leave the engine running andcheck to be sure the engine cool-ing fan is operating. If the fan is notrunning, turn the engine off.

4.Check to see if the water pumpdrive belt is missing. If it is notmissing, check to see that it istight. If the drive belt seems to besatisfactory, check for coolant leak-ing from the radiator, hoses orunder the vehicle. (If the air condi-tioning had been in use, it is nor-mal for cold water to be drainingfrom it when you stop).

5.If the water pump drive belt is bro-ken or engine coolant is leakingout, stop the engine immediatelyand call the nearest authorized Kiadealer for assistance.

6.If you cannot find the cause of theoverheating, wait until the enginetemperature has returned to nor-mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,carefully add coolant to the reser-voir to bring the fluid level in thereservoir up to the halfway mark.

7.Proceed with caution, keepingalert for further signs of overheat-ing. If overheating happens again,call an authorized Kia dealer forassistance.

Serious loss of coolant indicatesthere is a leak in the cooling systemand this should be checked as soonas possible by an authorized Kiadealer.

WARNING - Under thehood

While the engine is running,keep hair, hands and clothingaway from moving parts suchas the fan and drive belts to pre-vent injury.

WARNING - Radiator capDo not remove the radiator capwhen the engine is hot. Thismay result in coolant beingblown out of the opening andcause serious burns.


86

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIREJack and tools

The jack and wheel lug nut wrenchare stored in the luggage compart-ment.Remove the panel indicated in theillustration.(1) Jack handle(2) Jack(3) Wheel lug nut wrench(4) Socket

Jacking instructions The jack is provided for emergencytire changing only.To prevent the jack from “rattling”while the vehicle is in motion, store itproperly.Follow jacking instructions to reducethe possibility of personal injury.

• Always move the vehicle complete-ly off the road and onto the shoul-der before trying to change a tire.The jack should be used on a firmlevel ground. If you cannot find afirm, level place off the road, call atowing service company for assis-tance.

• Be sure to use the correct front andrear jacking positions on the vehi-cle; never use the bumpers or anyother part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

• Do not allow anyone to remain inthe vehicle while it is on the jack.

• Make sure any children presentare in a secure place away fromthe road and from the vehicle to beraised with the jack.

WARNING - Changingtires

Never attempt vehicle repairs inthe traffic lanes of a public roador highway.

OUM064003

WARNING - Tire JackDo not place any portion of yourbody under a vehicle that isonly supported by a jack sincethe vehicle can easily roll off thejack. Use vehicle supportstands.

6 9


Removing and storing thespare tire

Your spare tire is stored underneathyour vehicle, directly below the cargoarea.To remove the spare tire:1. Open the tailgate.2. Find the spare tire fixing bolt cover

and remove the cover (1).If necessary, separate the toolcase only after removing theclamp (2).

3. Connect the socket and wheel lugnut wrench.

4. Use the wheel lug nut wrench toloosen the bolt enough to lowerthe spare tire.Turn the wrench counterclockwiseuntil the spare tire reaches theground.

WARNING- Running vehicle on jack

Do not start or run the engine ofthe vehicle while the vehicle ison the jack as this may causethe vehicle to fall off the jack.

OUM064004

OUM064005


106

5. After the spare tire reaches theground, continue to turn thewrench counterclockwise, anddraw the spare tire outside. Neverrotate the wrench excessively, oth-erwise the spare tire carrier maybe damaged.

6. Remove the retainer (1) from thecenter of the spare tire.

To store the spare tire:1. Lay the tire on the ground with the

valve stem facing up.2. Place the wheel under the vehicle

and install the retainer (1) throughthe wheel center.

3. Turn the wrench clockwise until itclicks.

OUM064007

WARNINGEnsure the spare tire retainer isproperly aligned with the centerof the spare tire to prevent thespare tire from “rattling”.Otherwise, it may cause thespare tire to fall off the carrierand lead to an accident.

OUM064006

6 11


Changing tires

1. Park on a level surface and applythe parking brake firmly.

2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P(Park) with automatic transaxle.

3. Activate the hazard warning flash-ers.

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,jack and spare tire from the vehi-cle.

5. Block both the front and rear of thewheel that is diagonally oppositefrom the jack position.

• To prevent vehicle movement whilechanging a tire, always set theparking brake fully, and alwaysblock the wheel diagonally oppo-site the wheel being changed.

• We recommend that the wheels ofthe vehicle be blocked, and that noperson remain in a vehicle that isbeing jacked.

OUMA064035

OUMA064034


126

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-terclockwise one turn each, but donot remove any nut until the tirehas been raised off the ground.

7. Place the jack at the front (1) orrear (2) jacking position closest tothe tire you are changing. Placethe jack at the designated loca-tions under the frame. The jackingpositions are plates welded to theframe with two tabs and a raiseddot to index with the jack.

8. Insert the wheel lug nut wrenchinto the jack and turn it clockwise,raising the vehicle until the tire justclears the ground. This measure-ment is approximately 30 mm (1in.).Before removing the wheel lugnuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-ble and that there is no chance formovement or slippage.

OUM064008

OUM064021

OUM064009

OUM064010

6 13


9. Loosen the wheel nuts andremove them with your fingers.Slide the wheel off the studs andlay it flat so it cannot roll away. Toput the wheel on the hub, pick upthe spare tire, line up the holeswith the studs and slide the wheelonto them. If this is difficult, tip thewheel slightly and get the top holein the wheel lined up with the topstud. Then jiggle the wheel backand forth until the wheel can slideover the other studs.

Wheels may have sharp edges.Handle them carefully to avoid possi-ble severe injury. Before putting thewheel into place, be sure that thereis nothing on the hub or wheel (suchas mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that pre-vents the wheel from fitting solidlyagainst the hub.

10. To install the wheel, hold it on thestuds, put the wheel nuts on thestuds and tighten them fingertight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it iscompletely seated, then tightenthe nuts as much as possiblewith your fingers again.

11. Insert the wrench into the jackand lower the vehicle to theground by turning the wheel nutwrench counterclockwise.WARNING - Installing a

wheelMake sure the wheel makesgood contact with the hub wheninstalled. If the contact of themounting surface between thewheel and hub is not good, thewheel nuts could come looseand cause the loss of a wheel.Loss of a wheel may result inloss of control of the vehicle.


146

Then position the wrench as shownin the drawing and tighten the wheelnuts. Be sure the socket is seatedcompletely over the nut. Do not standon the wrench handle or use anextension pipe over the wrench han-dle. Go around the wheel tighteningevery nut following the numericalsequence shown in the image untilthey are all tight. Then double-checkeach nut for tightness. After changingwheels, have an authorized Kia deal-er tighten the wheel nuts to theirproper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:11~13 kgf·m (65~79 lbf·ft)

If you have a tire gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure.If the pressure is lower than recom-mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the cor-rect pressure. If it is too high, adjustit until it is correct. Always reinstallthe valve cap after checking oradjusting the tire pressure. If the capis not replaced, dust and dirt may getinto the tire valve and air may leakfrom the tire. If you lose a valve cap,buy another and install it as soon aspossible.After you have changed the wheels,always secure the flat tire in its placeand return the jack and tools to theirproper storage locations.

Note that most lug nuts do not havemetric threads. Be sure to useextreme care in checking for threadstyle before installing aftermarket lugnuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult anauthorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION - Reusing lugnuts

Make certain during wheelremoval that the same nuts thatwere removed are reinstalled -or, if replaced, that nuts withmetric threads and the samechamfer configuration are used.Your vehicle has metric threadson the wheel studs and nuts.Installation of a non-metricthread nut on a metric stud willnot secure the wheel to the hubproperly and will damage thestud so that it must be replaced.

OUM064011

6 15


To prevent the jack, wheel lug nutwrench and spare tire from rattlingwhile the vehicle is in motion, storethem properly.Check the inflation pressures assoon as possible after installing thespare tire. Adjust it to the specifiedpressure, if necessary. Refer to“Tires and wheels” in section 8.

Important - use of compact sparetireYour vehicle is equipped with a com-pact spare tire. This compact sparetire takes up less space than a regu-lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than aconventional tire and is designed fortemporary use only.• You should drive carefully when

the compact spare is in use. Thecompact spare should be replacedby the proper conventional tire andrim at the first opportunity.

• The operation of this vehicle is notrecommended with more than onecompact spare tire in use at thesame time.

The compact spare should be inflat-ed to 420 kPa (60 psi).

✽✽ NOTICECheck the inflation pressure afterinstalling the spare tire. Adjust it tothe specified pressure, as necessary.

WARNING - Wheel studsIf the studs are damaged, theymay lose their ability to retainthe wheel.This could lead to theloss of the wheel and a collisionresulting in serious injuries.

WARNINGThe compact spare tire is foremergency use only. Do notoperate your vehicle on thiscompact spare at speeds over80 km/h (50 mph). The originaltire should be repaired orreplaced as soon as possible toavoid failure of the spare possi-bly leading to personal injury ordeath.


166

When using a compact spare tire,observe the following precautions:• Under no circumstances should

you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); ahigher speed could damage thetire.

• Ensure that you drive slowlyenough for the road conditions toavoid all hazards. Any road hazard,such as a pothole or debris, couldseriously damage the compactspare.

• Any continuous road use of this tirecould result in tire failure, loss ofvehicle control, and possible per-sonal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-mum load rating or the load-carry-ing capacity shown on the sidewallof the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. Thecompact spare tire diameter issmaller than the diameter of a con-ventional tire and reduces theground clearance approximately25 mm (1 inch), which could resultin damage to the vehicle.

• Do not take this vehicle through anautomatic vehicle wash while thecompact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use the compact spare tireon any other vehicle because thistire has been designed especiallyfor your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread lifeis shorter than a regular tire.Inspect your compact spare tireregularly and replace worn com-pact spare tires with the same sizeand design, mounted on the samewheel.

• The compact spare tire should notbe used on any other wheels, norshould standard tires, snow tires,wheel covers or trim rings be usedwith the compact spare wheel. Ifsuch use is attempted, damage tothese items or other vehicle com-ponents may occur.

• Do not use more than one compactspare tire at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer while the com-pact spare tire is installed.

6 17


Jack label1. Model Name2. Maximum allowable load3. When using the jack, set your

parking brake.4. When using the jack, stop the

engine.5. Do not get under a vehicle that is

supported by a jack.6. The designated locations under

the frame7. When supporting the vehicle, the

base plate of jack must be verticalunder the lifting point.

8. Move the shift lever to the P posi-tion on vehicles with automatictransmission.

9. The jack should be used on firmlevel ground.

10. Jack manufacturer11. Production date12. Representative company and

address

OHYK064001

OHYK064005

OHYK064002

• Type A■ Example

• Type B

• Type C

❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. Formore detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.


186

TOWINGTowing service

If emergency towing is necessary,we recommend having it done by anauthorized Kia dealer or a commer-cial tow-truck service. Proper liftingand towing procedures are neces-sary to prevent damage to the vehi-cle. The use of wheel dollies orflatbed is recommended.

For trailer towing guidelines informa-tion, refer to “Trailer towing” in sec-tion 5.

On AWD vehicles, your vehicle mustbe towed with a wheel lift and dolliesor flatbed equipment with all thewheels off the ground.

On FWD vehicles, it is acceptable totow the vehicle with the rear wheelson the ground (without dollies) andthe front wheels off the ground.If any of the loaded wheels or sus-pension components are damagedor the vehicle is being towed with thefront wheels on the ground, use atowing dolly under the front wheels.When being towed by a commercialtow truck and wheel dollies are notused, the front of the vehicle shouldalways be lifted, not the rear.

OUM064022

dolly

dolly

WARNING - Side and curtain Air bag

If your vehicle is equipped withside and curtain air bag, set theignition switch to LOCK or ACCposition when the vehicle isbeing towed.The side and curtain air bagmay deploy when the ignition isON, and the rollover sensordetects the situation as arollover.

CAUTIONThe AWD vehicle should neverbe towed with the wheels on theground. This can cause seriousdamage to the transaxle or theAWD system.

6 19


When towing your vehicle in anemergency without wheel dollies :1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC

position.2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).3. Release the parking brake.

CAUTION - Towing• Do not tow the vehicle back-

wards with the front wheels onthe ground as this may causedamage to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-typeequipment. Use wheel lift orflatbed equipment.

CAUTION - Towing gearposition

Failure to place the transaxleshift lever in N (Neutral) maycause internal damage to thetransaxle.

OUM064013

OUM064012

Maintenance

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-29

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39• Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

• Recharging battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-52

• Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

• Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54

• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55

• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56

• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

• Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

• All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

• Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

• Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

• Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

• Low aspect ratio tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65

7

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66• Inner panel fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

• Engine compartment fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . 7-69

• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71

Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82• Front lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83

• Side repeater lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87

• Rear combination lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-88

• High mounted stop lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90

• License plate light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91

• Interior light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92

Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93

• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98

Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-101• Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-101

• Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:

Onboard refueling vapor recovery) system . . . . . 7-101

• Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1027

7 3

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OUM074100L

■■ Gasoline Engine (Theta II 2.4L) - GDI

❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box

6. Positive battery terminal

7. Negative battery terminal

8. Radiator cap

9. Engine oil dipstick

10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

Maintenance

47

OUM074115L

■■ Gasoline Engine (Theta II 2.0L) – T-GDI





4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box




9. Radiator cap


7 5

Maintenance

OUMA074001




4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box





10. Radiator cap

■■ Gasoline engine (Lambda II 3.3L) – GDI


Maintenance

67

MAINTENANCE SERVICESYou should exercise the utmost careto prevent damage to your vehicleand injury to yourself whenever per-forming any maintenance or inspec-tion procedures.Should you have any doubts con-cerning the inspection or servicing ofyour vehicle, we strongly recom-mend that you have an authorizedKia dealer perform this work.An authorized Kia dealer has factorytrained technicians and genuine Kiaparts to service your vehicle proper-ly. For expert advice and quality serv-ice, see an authorized Kia dealer.Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-cient servicing may result in opera-tional problems with your vehicle thatcould lead to vehicle damage, anaccident, or personal injury.

Owner’s responsibility

✽✽ NOTICEMaintenance Service and RecordRetention are the owner's responsi-bility.

You should retain documents thatshow proper maintenance has beenperformed on your vehicle in accor-dance with the scheduled mainte-nance service charts shown on thefollowing pages. You need this infor-mation to establish your compliancewith the servicing and maintenancerequirements of your vehicle war-ranties.Detailed warranty information is pro-vided in your Warranty & ConsumerInformation manual.Repairs and adjustments required asa result of improper maintenance ora lack of required maintenance arenot covered.

We recommend you have your vehi-cle maintained and repaired by anauthorized Kia dealer. An authorizedKia dealer meets Kia’s high servicequality standards and receives tech-nical support from Kia in order to pro-vide you with a high level of servicesatisfaction.

7 7

Maintenance

Owner maintenance precau-tions Improper or incomplete service mayresult in problems. This section givesinstructions only for the maintenanceitems that are easy to perform.As explained earlier in this section,several procedures can be done onlyby an authorized Kia dealer with spe-cial tools.

✽✽ NOTICEImproper owner maintenance dur-ing the warranty period may affectwarranty coverage. For details, readthe separate Warranty & ConsumerInformation manual provided withthe vehicle. If you're unsure aboutany servicing or maintenance proce-dure, have it done by an authorizedKia dealer.

WARNING - Maintenancework

Do not wear jewelry or looseclothing while working underthe hood of your vehicle withthe engine running. These canbecome entangled in movingparts, if you must run the enginewhile working under the hood,make certain that you removeall jewelry (especially rings,bracelets, watches, and neck-laces) and all neckties, scarves,and similar loose clothingbefore getting near the engineor cooling fans.

Maintenance

87

OWNER MAINTENANCE The following lists are vehicle checksand inspections that should be per-formed by the owner or an author-ized Kia dealer at the frequenciesindicated to help ensure safe,dependable operation of your vehi-cle.Any adverse conditions should bebrought to the attention of your deal-er as soon as possible.These Owner Maintenance Checksare generally not covered by war-ranties and you may be charged forlabor, parts and lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule When you stop for fuel:• Check the engine oil level.• Check the coolant level in the

coolant reservoir.• Check the windshield washer fluid

level.• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

While operating your vehicle:• Note any changes in the sound of

the exhaust or any smell ofexhaust fumes in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steeringwheel. Notice any increased steer-ing effort or looseness in the steer-ing wheel, or change in its straight-ahead position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantlyturns slightly or “pulls” to one sidewhen traveling on smooth, levelroad.

• When stopping, listen and checkfor unusual sounds, pulling to oneside, increased brake pedal travelor “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in theoperation of your transaxle occurs,check the transaxle fluid level.

• Check the automatic transaxle P(Park) function.

• Check the parking brake.• Check for fluid leaks under your

vehicle (water dripping from the airconditioning system during or afteruse is normal).

WARNING - Hot coolantBe careful when checking yourengine coolant level when theengine is hot. Scalding hotcoolant and steam may blowout under pressure.

7 9

Maintenance

At least monthly:• Check the coolant level in the

engine coolant reservoir.• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turnsignals and hazard warning flash-ers.

• Check the inflation pressures of alltires including the spare.

At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall):• Check the radiator, heater and air

conditioning hoses for leaks ordamage.

• Check the windshield washerspray and wiper operation. Cleanthe wiper blades with clean clothdampened with washer fluid.

• Check the headlight alignment.• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,

shields and clamps.• Check the lap/shoulder belts for

wear and function.• Check for worn tires and loose

wheel lug nuts.

At least once a year:• Clean the body and door drain

holes.• Lubricate the door hinges and

checks, and hood hinges.• Lubricate the door and hood locks

and latches.• Lubricate the door rubber weather-

strips.• Check the air conditioning system.• Inspect and lubricate the automat-

ic transaxle linkage and controls.• Clean the battery and terminals.• Check the brake fluid level.

Maintenance

107

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE Follow the Normal MaintenanceSchedule if the vehicle is usuallyoperated where none of the followingconditions apply. If any of the follow-ing conditions apply, follow theMaintenance Under Severe UsageConditions.• Repeated driving short distance of

less than 8 km (5 miles) in normaltemperature or less than 16 km (10miles) in freezing temperature

• Extensive engine idling or lowspeed driving for long distances

• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy,unpaved, graveled or salt-spreadroads

• Driving in areas using salt or othercorrosive materials or in very coldweather

• Driving in heavy dust condition• Driving in heavy traffic area• Driving on uphill, downhill, or

mountain road repeatedly

• Towing a trailer or using a camper,or roof rack

• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, othercommercial use of vehicle towing

• Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)• Frequently driving in stop-and-go

condition

If your vehicle is operated under theabove conditions, you shouldinspect, replace or refill more fre-quently than the following NormalMaintenance Schedule. After 120months or 240,000km (150,000miles) continue to follow the pre-scribed maintenance intervals.

7 11

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEThe following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, thefrequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, onebottle of additive is recommended. Additives are avail-able from your authorized Kia dealer along with infor-mation on how to use them. Do not mix other addi-tives.

*2 : Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenancefree but periodic inspection is recommended for thismaintenance schedule depends on fuel quality.

*3 : Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changedanytime they have been submerged in water.

*4 : Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or enginevibration and adjust if necessary.

*5 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occuror tension is reduced excessively.

*6 : Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 10,000km(6,500miles) or 6 months

Maintenance

127

24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months

❑ Rotate tire❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)❑ Replace engine oil and filter *6

(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)❑ Add fuel additive *1

(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean orreplace.


NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE


❑ Rotate tire❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Replace engine oil and filter *6





7 13

Maintenance








Maintenance

147

(Continued)

❑ Replace air cleaner filter❑ Replace engine oil and filter *6





NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months

❑ Rotate tire❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Inspect brake fluid ❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2

❑ Inspect parking brake❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

(Continued)

7 15

Maintenance


❑ Rotate tire❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3

❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *3

❑ Replace engine oil and filter *6








joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)- 2.0T-GDI❑ Replace engine oil and filter *6





Maintenance

167








7 17

Maintenance


(Continued)

❑ Inspect drive belts(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 monthsafter every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months) *5

❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)



(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)❑ Replace coolant

(First, 100,000 km (60,000 miles) or 60 months after every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months)






❑ Inspect parking brake❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Inspect valve clearance *4

(Continued)

Maintenance

187

(Continued)

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3


❑ Inspect drive belts(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)*5









❑ Rotate tire❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

(Continued)







7 19

Maintenance











❑ Inspect parking brake❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Inspect drive belts

(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months) *5

(Continued)

Maintenance

207



(Every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - 2.4/3.3GDI❑ Add fuel additive *1





(Continued)


❑ Replace air cleaner filter❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)- 2.0T-GDI❑ Replace engine oil and filter *6



❑ Add fuel additive *1




7 21

Maintenance



joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Inspect drive belts






NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.*6 : Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 10,000km

(6,500miles) or 6 months


❑ Rotate tire❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect air cleaner filter❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3







Maintenance

227

(Continued)












❑ Inspect parking brake❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Inspect valve clearance *4

❑ Inspect drive belts(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months) *5

(Continued)


7 23

Maintenance








Maintenance

247

(Continued)








joint, upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts❑ Inspect drive belts



❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - 2.0 T-GDI❑ Replace engine oil and filter *6


(Continued)

7 25

Maintenance











❑ Inspect parking brake❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3


(Continued)

Maintenance

267


No check, No service required

❑ Automatic transaxle fluid

(Continued)

❑ Inspect drive belts(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months) *5









7 27

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONSThe following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Referto the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEMMAINTENANCE

OPERATIONMAINTENANCE INTERVALS

DRIVING CONDITION

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER 2.4L/3.3L R

EVERY 6,000 KM (3,750 MILES) OR 6 MONTHS A, B, C, D, E, F, G,

H, I, J, K2.0L R

EVERY 5,000 KM (3,000 MILES) OR 3 MONTHS

AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E

SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY A, B, H, I, K

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 96,000 KM (60,000 MILES) A, C, E, F, G, I

FRONT BRAKE DISC/PADS, CALIPERS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

REAR BRAKE DISC/PADS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

Maintenance

287

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONSA-Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles)

in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freez-ing temperature

B-Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-tances

C-Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads

D-Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or invery cold weather

E-Driving in heavy dust condition

F - Driving in heavy traffic areaG- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roadH- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rackI -Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle

towingJ - Driving over 170 km/h (106 mph)K- Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

MAINTENANCE ITEMMAINTENANCE

OPERATIONMAINTENANCE INTERVALS

DRIVING CONDITION

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE &BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPERARM BALL JOINT

I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS IEVERY 12,000 KM (7,500 MILES)

OR 6 MONTHSC, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

TRANSFER CASE OIL (AWD) R EVERY 120,000 KM (75,000 MILES) C, D, E, G, H, I, J

REAR AXLE OIL (AWD) R EVERY 120,000 KM (75,000 MILES) C, D, E, G, H, I, J

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E

PROPELLER SHAFT IEVERY 12,000 KM (7,500 MILES)

OR 6 MONTHSC, E

7 29

Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMSEngine oil and filterThe engine oil and filter should bechanged at the intervals specified inthe maintenance schedule. If thevehicle is being driven in severe con-ditions, more frequent oil and filterchanges are required.

Drive beltsInspect all drive belts for evidence ofcuts, cracks, excessive wear or oilsaturation and replace if necessary.Drive belts should be checked peri-odically for proper tension andadjusted as necessary.

Fuel filter (for gasoline)Kia gasoline vehicle is equipped alifetime fuel filter that integrated withthe fuel tank. Regular maintenanceor replacement is not needed butdepends on fuel quality. If there aresome important safety matters likefuel flow restriction, surging, loss ofpower, hard starting problem etc, fuelfilter inspection or replace is needed.The fuel filter be Inspected orreplaced by an authorized Kia dealer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-nectionsCheck the fuel lines, fuel hoses andconnections for leakage and dam-age. Have an authorized Kia dealerreplace any damaged or leakingparts immediately.

Vapor hose and fuel filler capThe vapor hose and fuel filler capshould be inspected at those inter-vals specified in the maintenanceschedule. Make sure that a newvapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-rectly replaced.

Maintenance

307

Vacuum crankcase ventilationhoses (if equipped) Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-dence of heat and/or mechanicaldamage. Hard and brittle rubber,cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, andexcessive swelling indicate deterio-ration. Particular attention should bepaid to examine those hose surfacesnearest to high heat sources, suchas the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assurethat the hoses do not come in con-tact with any heat source, sharpedges or moving components whichmight cause heat damage ormechanical wear. Inspect all hoseconnections, such as clamps andcouplings, to make sure they aresecure, and that no leaks are pres-ent. Hoses should be replacedimmediately if there is any evidenceof deterioration or damage.

Air cleaner filterA Genuine Kia air cleaner filter isrecommended when the filter isreplaced.

Spark plugsMake sure to install new spark plugsof the correct heat range.

Valve clearance (if equipped)Inspect for excessive valve noiseand/or engine vibration and adjust ifnecessary. An authorized Kia dealershould perform the operation.

Cooling systemCheck the cooling system compo-nents, such as the radiator, coolantreservoir, hoses and connections forleakage and damage. Replace anydamaged parts.

CoolantThe coolant should be changed atthe intervals specified in the mainte-nance schedule.

7 31

Maintenance

Automatic transaxle fluid Automatic transaxle fluid should notbe checked under normal usageconditions.But in severe conditions, the fluidshould be changed at an authorizedKia dealer in accordance to thescheduled maintenance at the begin-ning of this section.

✽✽ NOTICEAutomatic transaxle fluid color isbasically red. As the vehicle is driven, the auto-matic transaxle fluid will begin tolook darker.It is the normal condition and youshould not judge the need to replacethe fluid based upon the changedcolor.

Brake hoses and linesVisually check for proper installation,chafing, cracks, deterioration andany leakage. Replace any deteriorat-ed or damaged parts immediately.

Brake fluidCheck the brake fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir. The level shouldbe between “MIN” and “MAX” markson the side of the reservoir. Use onlyhydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

CAUTIONUse only specified automatictransaxle fluid.The use of a non-specified fluid could result in atransaxle malfunction and fail-ure. (Refer to "Recommendedlubricants and capacities" insection 8.)

Maintenance

327

Parking brakeInspect the parking brake systemincluding the parking brake lever (orpedal) and cables.

Brake discs, pads, calipersand rotorsCheck the pads for excessive wear,discs for run out and wear, andcalipers for fluid leakage.

Exhaust pipe and mufflerVisually inspect the exhaust pipes,muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-rioration, or damage. Start theengine and listen carefully for anyexhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-nections or replace parts as neces-sary.

Suspension mounting boltsCheck the suspension connectionsfor looseness or damage. Retightento the specified torque.

Steering gear box, linkage &boots/lower arm ball jointWith the vehicle stopped and engineoff, check for excessive free-play inthe steering wheel.Check the linkage for bends or dam-age. Check the dust boots and balljoints for deterioration, cracks, ordamage. Replace any damagedparts.

7 33

Maintenance

Power steering pump, belt andhoses (if equipped)Check the power steering pump andhoses for leakage and damage.Replace any damaged or leakingparts immediately. Inspect the powersteering belt (or drive belt) for evi-dence of cuts, cracks, excessivewear, oiliness and proper tension.Replace or adjust it if necessary.

Drive shafts and bootsCheck the drive shafts, boots andclamps for cracks, deterioration, ordamage. Replace any damagedparts and, if necessary, repack thegrease.

Air conditioning refrigerant Check the air conditioning lines andconnections for leakage and dam-age.

Maintenance

347

ENGINE OILChecking the engine oil level

1. Be sure the vehicle is on levelground.

2. Start the engine and allow it toreach normal operating tempera-ture.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for afew minutes (about 5 minutes) forthe oil to return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,and re-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again andcheck the level. The level shouldbe between F and L.

WARNING - Radiatorhose

Be very careful not to touch theradiator hose when checking oradding the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.

CAUTION - Replacingengine oil

Do not overfill the engine oil. Itmay damage the engine.

OXM079004

OYP074062N

■ Type A

■ Type B

7 35

Maintenance

If it is near or at L, add enough oil tobring the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oilfrom being spilled on engine com-ponents.

Use only the specified engine oil.(Refer to “Recommended lubricantsand capacities” in section 8.)

Changing the engine oil andfilterHave engine oil and filter changed byan authorized Kia dealer accordingto the Maintenance Schedule at thebeginning of this section.

WARNINGUsed engine oil may cause irri-tation or cancer of the skin ifleft in contact with the skin forprolonged periods of time.Always protect your skin bywashing your hands thoroughlywith soap and warm water assoon as possible after handlingused oil.

OXM079005

OYP074045N

■ Type A

■ Type B

Maintenance

367

ENGINE COOLANTThe high-pressure cooling systemhas a reservoir filled with year roundantifreeze coolant. The reservoir isfilled at the factory.Check the antifreeze protection andcoolant level at least once a year: atthe beginning of the winter season,and before traveling to a colder cli-mate.

Checking the coolant level • Turn the engine off and wait until itcools down. Use extreme carewhen removing the radiator cap.Wrap a thick towel around it, andturn it counterclockwise slowly tothe first stop. Step back while thepressure is released from the cool-ing system.When you are sure all the pressurehas been released, press down onthe cap, using a thick towel, andcontinue turning counterclockwiseto remove it.

• Even if the engine is not operating,do not remove the radiator cap orthe drain plug while the engine andradiator are hot. Hot coolant andsteam may still blow out underpressure, causing serious injury.

WARNINGRemoving radiatorcap

Never attempt to remove theradiator cap while the engine isoperating or hot. Doing socould result in serious personalinjury from escaping hotcoolant or steam.

CAUTION - Radiator capNever attempt to remove theradiator cap while the engine isoperating or hot. Doing somight lead to cooling systemand engine damage.

7 37

Maintenance

Check the condition and connectionsof all cooling system hoses andheater hoses. Replace any swollenor deteriorated hoses.The coolant level should be filledbetween F and L marks on the sideof the coolant reservoir when theengine is cool.If the coolant level is low, add enoughspecified coolant to provide protec-tion against freezing and corrosion.Bring the level to F, but do not over-fill. If frequent additions are required,see an authorized Kia dealer for acooling system inspection.

Recommended engine coolant• When adding coolant, use only

deionized water or soft water foryour vehicle and never mix hardwater in the coolant filled at the fac-tory. An improper coolant mixturecan result in serious malfunction orengine damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has alu-minum engine parts and must beprotected by an ethylene-glycol-based coolant to prevent corrosionand freezing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanolcoolant or mix them with the spec-ified coolant.

• Do not use a solution that containsmore than 60 percent antifreeze orless than 35 percent antifreeze.This would reduce the effective-ness of the solution.

OUMA074221

WARNING - Cooling fanUse caution whenworking near theblade of the coolingfan. The electricmotor (cooling fan) is

controlled by engine coolanttemperature, refrigerant pres-sure and vehicle speed. it maysometimes operate even whenthe engine is not running.

Maintenance

387

For mixture percentage, refer to thefollowing table.

Changing the coolantHave the coolant changed by anauthorized Kia dealer according tothe Maintenance Schedule at thebeginning of this chapter.Put a thick cloth around the radiatorcap before refilling the coolant inorder to prevent the coolant fromoverflowing into engine parts such asthe alternator.

OXMA073007

AmbientTemperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

Antifreeze Water-15°C (5°F) 35 65

-25°C (-13°F) 40 60

-35°C (-31°F) 50 50

-45°C (-49°F) 60 40

WARNING Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator capwhen the engine and radiatorare hot. Scalding hot coolantand steam may blow out underpressure which may result inserious injury.

7 39

Maintenance

BRAKE FLUIDChecking the brake fluid level

Check the fluid level in the reservoirperiodically. The fluid level should bebetween MAX (Maximum) and MIN(Minimum) marks on the side of thereservoir.Before removing the reservoir capand adding brake fluid, clean thearea around the reservoir cap thor-oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-ination.

If the level is low, add fluid to theMAX (Maximum) level. The level willfall with accumulated mileage. This isa normal condition associated withthe wear of brake linings. If the fluidlevel is excessively low, have thebrake system checked by an author-ized Kia dealer.

Use only the specified brake fluid.(Refer to “Recommended lubricantsor capacities” in chapter 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

In the event the brake systemrequires frequent additions of fluid,the vehicle should be inspected byan authorized Kia dealer.When changing and adding brakefluid, handle it carefully. Do not let itcome in contact with your eyes. Ifbrake fluid should come in contactwith your eyes, immediately flushthem with a large quantity of freshtap water. Have your eyes examinedby a doctor as soon as possible.

Brake fluid, which has been exposedto open air for an extended timeshould never be used as its qualitycannot be guaranteed. It should bedisposed of properly.

OYP074048K

CAUTION - Proper fluidOnly use brake fluid in brakesystem. Small amounts ofimproper fluids (such as engineoil) can cause damage to thebrake system.

CAUTION - Brake fluidDo not allow brake fluid to con-tact the vehicle's body paint, aspaint damage will result.

Maintenance

407

WASHER FLUIDChecking the washer fluidlevel

The reservoir is translucent so thatyou can check the level with a quickvisual inspection.

Check the fluid level in the washerfluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-sary. Plain water may be used ifwasher fluid is not available.However, use washer solvent withantifreeze characteristics in cold cli-mates to prevent freezing.

ODMNMC2019

OYP074049K

■ Type A

■ Type B

WARNING - FlammableFluid

Do not allow the washer fluid tocome in contact with openflames or sparks.The windshieldwasher fluid reservoir is flamma-ble under certain circumstances.This can result in a fire.

WARNING - Coolant• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluidreservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severelyobscure visibility whensprayed on the windshieldand may cause loss of vehiclecontrol.

WARNING - Windshieldfluid

Do not drink the windshieldwasher fluid. The windshieldwasher fluid is poisonous tohumans and animals.

7 41

Maintenance

Checking the parking brake

Check whether the stroke is withinspecification when the parking brakepedal is depressed with 30 kg (66 lb,294 N) of force. Also, the parkingbrake alone should securely hold thevehicle on a fairly steep grade. If thestroke is more or less than specified,have the parking brake adjusted byan authorized Kia dealer.Stroke : 8~9 notch

PARKING BRAKE

OCM050015

Maintenance

427

Filter replacement

It must be replaced when necessary,and should not be washed.You can clean the filter when inspect-ing the air cleaner element.Clean the filter by using compressedair.

1. Pull out the air cleaner cover. 2. Unlock by turning the locking leverupward.

3. Pull the air cleaner filter to replace.4. Lock the cover with the reverse

order.

AIR CLEANER

OUM074007

OUM074008 OUMA074009

7 43

Maintenance

Replace the filter according to theMaintenance Schedule.If the vehicle is operated in extreme-ly dusty or sandy areas, replace theelement more often than the usualrecommended intervals. (Refer to“Maintenance under severe usageconditions” in this chapter.)

CAUTION - Air filter main-tenance

• Do not drive with the air clean-er removed; this will result inexcessive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleanerfilter, be careful that dust ordirt does not enter the airintake, or damage may result.

• Use a Kia genuine part. Use ofnon-genuine parts could dam-age the air flow sensor.

Maintenance

447

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)Filter inspectionThe climate control air filter shouldbe replaced according to the mainte-nance schedule. If the vehicle isoperated in severely air-pollutedcities or on dusty rough roads for along period, it should be inspectedmore frequently and replaced earlier.When you replace the climate controlair filter, replace it performing the fol-lowing procedure, and be careful toavoid damaging other components.

1. Open the glove box and removethe support strap (1).

2. With the glove box open, removethe stoppers on both sides.

OUM074011 OUM074012

7 45

Maintenance

3. Remove the climate control air fil-ter case by pulling out right side ofthe cover.

4. Replace the climate control air filter.5. Reassemble in the reverse order

of disassembly.When replacing the climate controlair filter install it properly. Otherwise,the system may produce noise andthe effectiveness of the filter may bereduced.

OYP074008KOUM074013

Maintenance

467

WIPER BLADES Blade inspection

Commercial hot waxes applied byautomatic vehicle washes have beenknown to make the windshield diffi-cult to clean.

Contamination of either the wind-shield or the wiper blades with for-eign matter can reduce the effective-ness of the windshield wipers.Common sources of contaminationare insects, tree sap, and hot waxtreatments used by some commer-cial vehicle washes. If the blades arenot wiping properly, clean both thewindow and the blades with a goodcleaner or mild detergent, and rinsethoroughly with clean water.

Blade replacement When the wipers no longer cleanadequately, the blades may be wornor cracked, and require replacement.To prevent damage to the wiper armsor other components, do not attemptto move the wipers manually.The use of a non-specified wiperblade could result in wiper malfunc-tion and failure.

1JBA5122 CAUTION - Wiper bladesTo prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents on or near them.

7 47

Maintenance

Front windshield wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn thewiper blade assembly to exposethe plastic locking clip.

2. Compress the clip and slide theblade assembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

Rear window wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm and pull outthe wiper blade assembly.

1LDA5023

CAUTION - Wiper armsDo not allow the wiper arm tofall against the windshield,since it may chip or crack thewindshield.

1JBA7037

1JBA7038

OHM078062

Maintenance

487

2. Install the new blade assembly byinserting the center part into theslot in the wiper arm until it clicksinto place.

3. Make sure the blade assembly isinstalled firmly by trying to pull itslightly.

To prevent damage to the wiper armsor other components, have anauthorized Kia dealer replace thewiper blade.

OHM078063

7 49

Maintenance

BATTERYFor best battery service

• Keep the battery securely mount-ed.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.• Keep the terminals and connec-

tions clean, tight, and coated withpetroleum jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte fromthe battery immediately with asolution of water and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to beused for an extended time, discon-nect the battery cables.

Always read the followinginstructions carefully whenhandling a battery.If any electrolyte gets intoyour eyes, flush your eyeswith clean water for at least15 minutes and get immedi-ate medical attention.If electrolyte gets on yourskin, thoroughly wash thecontacted area. If you feelpain or burning sensation,get medical attention imme-diately.An inappropriately disposedbattery can be harmful to theenvironment and humanhealth. Dispose the batteryaccording to your local law(s)or regulation.

Never attempt to recharge the bat-tery when the battery cables are con-nected.

WARNING - Risk of explosion

Keep lit cigarettes andall other flames orsparks away from thebattery.The battery containshydrogen -- a highlycombustible gas whichwill explode if it comesin contact with a flame orspark.Keep batteries out of thereach of childrenbecause batteries con-tain highly corrosiveSULFURIC ACID andelectrolytes. Do notallow battery acid tocontact your skin, eyes,clothing or paint finish.Wear eye protectionwhen charging or work-ing near a battery.Always provide ventila-tion when working in anenclosed space.

OUM074014

Maintenance

507

✽✽ NOTICEIf you connect unauthorized elec-tronic devices to the battery, the bat-tery may be discharged. Never useunauthorized devices.

Battery recharging Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,calcium-based battery.• If the battery becomes discharged

in a short time (because, for exam-ple, the headlamps or interiorlamps lamps were left on while thevehicle was not in use), recharge itby slow charging (trickle) for 10hours.

• If the battery gradually dischargesbecause of high electric load whilethe vehicle is being used, rechargeit at 20-30A for two hours.

WARNING - Risk of elec-trocution

Never touch the electrical igni-tion system while the vehicle isrunning. This system workswith high voltage which can"zap" you.

7 51

Maintenance

Recharging batteryWhen recharging the battery,observe the following precautions:• The battery must be removed from

the vehicle and placed in an areawith good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, orflame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charging,and stop or reduce the chargingrate if the battery cells begingassing (boiling) violently or if thetemperature of the electrolyte ofany cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).

• Wear eye protection when check-ing the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger inthe following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger mainswitch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp fromthe negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp fromthe positive battery terminal.

• Before performing maintenance orrecharging the battery, turn off allaccessories and stop the engine.

• The negative battery cable must beremoved first and installed lastwhen the battery is disconnected.

Reset itemsItems should be reset after the bat-tery has been discharged or the bat-tery has been disconnected.• Auto up/down window

(See chapter 4)• Sunroof (See chapter 4)• Trip computer (See chapter 4)• Climate control system

(See chapter 4)• Integrated Memory System

(See chapter 3)• Audio (See chapter 4)

Maintenance

527

TIRES AND WHEELSTire care For proper maintenance, safety, andmaximum fuel economy, you mustalways maintain recommended tireinflation pressures and stay withinthe load limits and weight distributionrecommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire infla-tion pressuresAll tire pressures (including thespare) should be checked when thetires are cold. “Cold Tires” means thevehicle has not been driven for atleast three hours or driven less than1.6 km (one mile).Recommended pressures must bemaintained for the best ride, vehiclehandling, and minimum tire wear.For recommended inflation pressure,refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter8.

All specifications (sizes and pres-sures) can be found on a labelattached to the driver’s side centerpillar.

WARNING - Tire underinflation

Inflate your tire consistent withthe instructions provided in thismanual. Severe under inflationcan lead to severe heat build-up, causing blowouts, treadseparation and other tire fail-ures that can result in the lossof vehicle control. This risk ismuch higher on hot days andwhen driving for long periods athigh speeds.

OUM074049L

7 53

Maintenance

• Underinflation also results inexcessive wear, poor handling andreduced fuel economy. Wheeldeformation also is possible. Keepyour tire pressures at the properlevels. If a tire frequently needsrefilling, have it checked by anauthorized Kia dealer.

• Overinflation produces a harshride, excessive wear at the centerof the tire tread, and a greater pos-sibility of damage from road haz-ards.

• Warm tires normally exceed rec-ommended cold tire pressures by28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do notrelease air from warm tires toadjust the pressure or the tires willbe underinflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflationvalve caps. Without the valve cap,dirt or moisture could get into thevalve core and cause air leakage. Ifa valve cap is missing, install anew one as soon as possible.

Tire pressureAlways observe the following:• Check tire pressure when the tires

are cold. (After vehicle has beenparked for at least three hours orhasn't been driven more than 1.6km (one mile) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of your sparetire each time you check the pres-sure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle. Becareful not to overload a vehicleluggage rack if your vehicle isequipped with one.

Checking tire inflation pres-sureCheck your tires once a month ormore.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to checkUse a good quality gauge to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if yourtires are properly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey're underinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. - "Cold"means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least three hours or driven nomore than 1.6 km (1 mile).

Maintenance

547

Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gauge firm-ly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflationpressure matches the recommendedpressure on the tire and loadinginformation label, no further adjust-ment is necessary. If the pressure islow, add air until you reach the rec-ommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in thecenter of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gauge. Besure to put the valve caps back onthe valve stems. They help preventleaks by keeping out dirt and mois-ture.

• Inspect your tires frequently forproper inflation as well as wear anddamage. Always use a tire pres-sure gauge.

• Tires with too much or too littlepressure wear unevenly causingpoor handling, loss of vehicle con-trol, and sudden tire failure leadingto accidents, injuries, and evendeath. The recommended cold tirepressure for your vehicle can befound in this manual and on the tirelabel located on the driver's sidecenter pillar.

• Remember to check the pressureof your spare tire. Kia recommendsthat you check the spare everytime you check the pressure of theother tires on your vehicle.

Tire rotation To equalize tread wear, it is recom-mended that the tires be rotatedevery 12,000 km (7,500 miles) orsooner if irregular wear develops.During rotation, check the tires forcorrect balance.When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, severe braking orsevere cornering. Look for bumps orbulges in the tread or side of tire.Replace the tire if you find either ofthese conditions. Replace the tire iffabric or cord is visible. After rotation,be sure to bring the front and rear tirepressures to specification and checklug nut tightness.Refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter8.

7 55

Maintenance

Disc brake pads should be inspectedfor wear whenever tires are rotated.Rotate radial tires that have anasymmetric tread pattern only fromfront to rear and not from right to left.

Wheel alignment and tire bal-ance The wheels on your vehicle werealigned and balanced carefully at thefactory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.In most cases, you will not need tohave your wheels aligned again.However, if you notice unusual tirewear or your vehicle pulling one wayor the other, the alignment may needto be reset.If you notice your vehicle vibratingwhen driving on a smooth road, yourwheels may need to be rebalanced.

WARNING - Mixing tires• Do not use the compact spare

tire (if equipped) for tire rota-tion.

• Do not mix bias ply and radialply tires under any circum-stances. This may causeunusual handling characteris-tics.

CAUTION - Wheel weightImproper wheel weights candamage your vehicle's alu-minum wheels. Use onlyapproved wheel weights.

CBGQ0707A

S2BLA790A

Without a spare tire

Directional tires (if equipped)

Maintenance

567

Tire replacement

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wearindicator will appear as a solid bandacross the tread. This shows there isless than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of treadleft on the tire. Replace the tire whenthis happens.Do not wait for the band to appearacross the entire tread before replac-ing the tire.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. The tire sizeaffects wheel speed. When replacingtires, all 4 tires must use the samesize originally supplied with the vehi-cle. Using tires of a different size cancause the ABS (Anti-lock BrakeSystem) and ESC (ElectronicStability Control) to work irregularly.

✽✽ NOTICEWe recommend that when replacingtires, use the same which were origi-nally supplied with the vehicle. Ifnot, driving performance could bealtered.

Compact spare tire replacement A compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular size tire.Replace it when you can see thetread wear indicator bars on the tire.The replacement compact spare tireshould be the same size and designtire as the one provided with yournew vehicle and should be mountedon the same compact spare tirewheel. The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularsize wheel, and the compact sparetire wheel is not designed for mount-ing a regular size tire.

OEN076053

Tread wear indicator

CAUTION - WheelsWheels that do not meet Kiaspecifications may fit poorlyand result in damage to thevehicle or unusual handling andpoor vehicle control.

7 57

Maintenance

Wheel replacement When replacing the metal wheels forany reason, make sure the newwheels are equivalent to the originalfactory units in diameter, rim widthand offset.A wheel that is not the correct sizemay adversely affect wheel andbearing life, braking and stoppingabilities, handling characteristics,ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-ance, snow chain clearance,speedometer and odometer calibra-tion, headlamp aim and bumperheight.

Tire tractionTire traction can be reduced if youdrive on worn tires, tires that areimproperly inflated or on slipperyroad surfaces. Tires should bereplaced when tread wear indicatorsappear. Slow down whenever thereis rain, snow or ice on the road toreduce the possibility of losing con-trol of the vehicle.

Tire maintenance In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decreasetire wear. If you find a tire is wornunevenly, have your dealer check thewheel alignment.When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. Thiswill increase vehicle ride comfort andtire life. Additionally, a tire shouldalways be rebalanced if it is removedfrom the wheel.

Tire sidewall labeling

This information identifies anddescribes the fundamental charac-teristics of the tire and also providesthe Tire Identification Number (TIN)for safety standard certification. TheTIN can be used to identify the tire incase of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand nameManufacturer or Brand name isshown.

I030B04JM

1

1

23

4

5,6

7

Maintenance

587

2. Tire size designation A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tiresize designation. You will need thisinformation when selecting replace-ment tires for your vehicle. The fol-lowing explains what the letters andnumbers in the tire size designationmean.Example tire size designation:(These numbers are provided as anexample only; your tire size designa-tor could vary depending on yourvehicle.)P235/65R17 108T

P - Applicable vehicle type (tiresmarked with the prefix “P’’ areintended for use on passengervehicles or light trucks; however,not all tires have this marking).

235 - Tire width in millimeters.65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s chapter

height as a percentage of itswidth.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).17 - Rim diameter in inches.108 - Load Index, a numerical code

associated with the maximumload the tire can carry.

T - Speed Rating Symbol. See thespeed rating chart in this chapterfor additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor-tant information that you need if youever have to replace one. The follow-ing explains what the letters andnumbers in the wheel size designa-tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:7.0JX17

7.0 - Rim width in inches.J - Rim contour designation.17 - Rim diameter in inches.

7 59

Maintenance

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-ferent speed ratings currently beingused for passenger vehicle tires. Thespeed rating is part of the tire sizedesignation on the sidewall of thetire. This symbol corresponds to thattire's designed maximum safe oper-ating speed.

3. Checking tire life (TIN : TireIdentification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years old,based on the manufacturing date,(including the spare tire) should bereplaced by new ones. You can findthe manufacturing date on the tiresidewall (possibly on the inside of thewheel), displaying the DOT Code.The DOT Code is a series of num-bers on a tire consisting of numbersand English letters. The manufactur-ing date is designated by the last fourdigits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOOThe front part of the DOT means aplant code number, tire size andtread pattern and the last four num-bers indicate week and year manu-factured.For example:DOT XXXX XXXX 1616 representsthat the tire was produced in the 16thweek of 2016.

S 180 km/h (112 mph)T 190 km/h (118 mph)H 210 km/h (130 mph)V 240 km/h (149 mph)Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)

Maximum SpeedSpeedRatingSymbol

WARNING - Tire ageReplace tires within the recom-mended time frame. Failure toreplace tires as recommendedcan result in sudden tire failure,which could lead to a loss ofcontrol and an accident.

Maintenance

607

4. Tire ply composition and mate-rial

The number of layers or plies of rub-ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicate thematerials in the tire, which includesteel, nylon, polyester, and others.The letter "R" means radial ply con-struction; the letter "D" means diago-nal or bias ply construction; and theletter "B" means belted-bias ply con-struction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressure

This number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflationpressure.

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform tire quality gradingQuality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder and maxi-mum chapter width.For example:TREADWEAR 200TRACTION AATEMPERATURE ATires degrade over time, even whenthey are not being used. Regardlessof the remaining tread, we recom-mend that tires be replaced afterapproximately six (6) years of normalservice. Heat caused by hot climatesor frequent high loading conditionscan accelerate the aging process.

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified govern-ment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times (1½) as well on the gov-ernment course as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditionsof their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.These grades are molded on theside-walls of passenger vehicle tires.The tires available as standard oroptional equipment on your vehiclemay vary with respect to grade.

7 61

Maintenance

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on spec-ified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor traction perform-ance.The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead brak-ing traction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B and C representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled condi-tions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel.Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of perform-ance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Tire terminology and definitionsAir Pressure: The amount of airinside the tire pressing outward onthe tire. Air pressure is expressed inpounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-pascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional acces-sories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatictransaxle, power seats, and air con-ditioning.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cordsthat is located between the plies andthe tread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords thathold the tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid at alternateangles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Maintenance

627

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount ofair pressure in a tire, measured inpounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-pascals (kPa) before a tire has builtup heat from driving.Curb Weight: This means the weightof a motor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant, but without passengers andcargo.DOT Markings: The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric des-ignator which can also identify thetire manufacturer, production plant,brand and date of production.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the Front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire, thatmust always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Light truck (LT) tire: A tire designat-ed by its manufacturer as primarilyintended for use on lightweight trucksor multipurpose passenger vehicles.Load ratings: The maximum loadthat a tire is rated to carry for a giveninflation pressureLoad Index: An assigned numberranging from 1 to 279 that corre-sponds to the load carrying capacityof a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which acold tire may be inflated. The maxi-mum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The loadrating for a tire at the maximum per-missible inflation pressure for thattire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicle isdesigned to seat multiplied by 68 kg(150 pounds).Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The sideof a asymmetrical tire that has a par-ticular side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The outwardfacing sidewall bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same moldings onthe inner facing sidewall.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tireused on passenger cars and somelight duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.

7 63

Maintenance

Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallelcords Pneumatic tire: A mechanicaldevice made of rubber, chemicals,fabric and steel or other materials,that, when mounted on an automo-tive wheel provides the traction andcontains the gas or fluid that sustainsthe load.Production options weight: Thecombined weight of installed regularproduction options weighing over 2.3kg (5 lb.) in excess of the standarditems which they replace, not previ-ously considered in curb weight oraccessory weight, including heavyduty breaks, ride levelers, roof rack,heavy duty battery, and special trim.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-ed tire inflation pressure and shownon the tire placard.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire andupon which the tire beads are seat-ed.Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.Speed Rating: An alphanumericcode assigned to a tire indicating themaximum speed at which a tire canoperate.Traction: The friction between thetire and the road surface. Theamount of grip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called "wearbars," that show across the tread of atire when only 1/16 inch of treadremains.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards, a tire informationsystem that provides consumers withratings for a tire's traction, tempera-ture and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testing proce-dures. The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire.Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-ber of designated seating positionsmultiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus therated cargo and luggage load.Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tire dueto curb and accessory weight plusmaximum occupant and cargoweight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to eachaxle its share of the curb weight,accessory weight, and normal occu-pant weight and driving by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-ly attached to a vehicle showing theoriginal equipment tire size and rec-ommended inflation pressure.

Maintenance

647

All season tires Kia specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good per-formance for use all year round,including snowy and icy road condi-tions. All season tires are identifiedby ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mudand Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snowtires have better snow traction thanall season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires Kia specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior perform-ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-formance is substantially reduced insnow and ice. Summer tires do nothave the tire traction rating M+S(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.if you plan to operate your vehicle insnowy or icy conditions, Kia recom-mends the use of snow tires or allseason tires on all four wheels.

Snow tiresIf you equip your vehicle with snowtires, they should be the same sizeand have the same load capacity asthe original tires. Snow tires shouldbe installed on all four wheels; other-wise, poor handling may result.Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4 psi) more air pressure than the pressurerecommended for the standard tireson the tire label on the driver's side ofthe center pillar, or up to the maxi-mum pressure shown on the tiresidewall, whichever is less.Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75mph) when your vehicle is equippedwith snow tires.

Radial-ply tiresRadial-ply tires provide improvedtread life, road hazard resistance andsmoother high speed ride. The radi-al-ply tires used on this vehicle are ofbelted construction, and are selectedto complement the ride and handlingcharacteristics of your vehicle.Radial-ply tires have the same loadcarrying capacity, as bias-ply or biasbelted tires of the same size, and usethe same recommended inflationpressure. Mixing of radial-ply tireswith bias-ply or bias belted tires isnot recommended. Any combina-tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or biasbelted tires when used on the samevehicle will seriously deterioratevehicle handling. The best rule to fol-low is: Identical radial-ply tires shouldalways be used as a set of four.

7 65

Maintenance

Longer wearing tires can be moresusceptible to irregular tread wear. Itis very important to follow the tirerotation interval shown in this chap-ter to achieve the tread life potentialof these tires. Cuts and punctures inradial-ply tires are repairable only inthe tread area, because of sidewallflexing. Consult your tire dealer forradial-ply tire repairs.

Low aspect ratio tire(if equipped)Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspectratio is lower than 50, are providedfor sporty looks.Because the low aspect ratio tiresare optimized for handling and brak-ing, it may be more uncomfortable toride in and there is more noise com-pare to normal tires.

CAUTIONBecause the sidewall of the lowaspect ratio tire is shorter thanthe normal, the wheel and tire ofthe low aspect ratio tire is easi-er to be damaged. So, follow theinstructions below.- When driving on a rough road

or off road, drive cautiouslybecause tires and wheels maybe damaged. And after driving,inspect tires and wheels.

- When passing over a pothole,speed bump, manhole, or curbstone, drive slowly so that thetires and wheels are not dam-aged.

- If the tire is impacted, we rec-ommend that you inspect thetire condition or contact anauthorized Kia dealer.

- To prevent damage to the tire,inspect the tire condition andpressure every 3,000km.

CAUTION• It is not easy to recognize tire

damage with your own eyes.But if there is the slightesthint of tire damage, eventhough you cannot see the tiredamage with your own eyes,have the tire checked orreplaced because the tiredamage may cause air leak-age from the tire.

• If the tire is damaged by driv-ing on a rough road, off road,pothole, manhole, or curbstone, it will not be covered bythe warranty.

• You can find out the tire infor-mation on the tire sidewall.

Maintenance

667

FUSESA vehicle’s electrical system is pro-tected from electrical overload dam-age by fuses.This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,one located in the driver’s side panelbolster, the other in the engine com-partment near the battery.If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-sories, or controls do not work, checkthe appropriate circuit fuse. If a fusehas blown, the element inside thefuse will melt.If the electrical system does notwork, first check the driver’s sidefuse panel.Always replace a blown fuse withone of the same rating.If the replacement fuse blows, thisindicates an electrical problem. Avoidusing the system involved and imme-diately consult an authorized Kiadealer.Three kinds of fuses are used: bladetype for lower amperage rating, car-tridge type, and multi fuse for higheramperage ratings.

WARNING - Fusereplacement

• Never replace a fuse with any-thing but another fuse of thesame rating.

• A higher capacity fuse couldcause damage and possibly afire.

• Never install a wire or alu-minum foil instead of theproper fuse - even as a tem-porary repair. It may causeextensive wiring damage anda possible fire.

• Do not arbitrarily modify oradd-on electric wiring of thevehicle.

CAUTIONDo not use a screwdriver or anyother metal object to removefuses because it may cause ashort circuit and damage thesystem.

OUM074043L

Normal

■ Blade type

■ Cartridge type

■ Multi fuse

Blown

NNNNoooorrrrmmmmaaaa llll BBBBlllloooowwww nnnn

Normal Blown

■ BFT

NNNNoooorrrrmmmmaaaa llll BBBBlllloooowwww nnnn

7 67

Maintenance

✽✽ NOTICE• When replacing fuse, turn the

ignition “OFF” and turn offswitches of all electrical devicesthen remove battery (-) terminal.

• The actual fuse/relay panel labelmay differ from equipped items.

Inner panel fuse replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and allother switches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.If the switch is located in the “OFF”position, a caution indicator will bedisplayed in the cluster.

3. Pull the suspected fuse straightout. Use the removal tool providedon the engine compartment fusepanel cover.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace itif it is blown.Spare fuses are provided in theengine compartment fuse panel.

5. Push in a new fuse of the samerating, and make sure it fits tightlyin the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorizedKia dealer.

OUMA074015

OUM074016

Maintenance

687

If you do not have a spare, use afuse of the same rating from a circuityou may not need for operating thevehicle, such as the power outletfuse.If the head lamp, turn signal lamp,stop signal lamp, fog lamp, DRL, taillamp, HMSL do not work and thefuses are OK, check the fuse panelin the engine compartment. If a fuseis blown, it must be replaced.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the headlamp, fog lamp, turn sig-nal lamp, or tail lamp malfunctioneven without any problem to thelamps, have the vehicle checked byan authorized Kia dealer for assis-tance.

✽✽ NOTICE - Fuse Panel Covers• Put all switches in ON when driv-

ing.• If the vehicle remains idle for over

1 month, put all switches in OFFto prevent the batteries from beingdischarged.

• Excluding long-term parking forover 1 month, the contact points ofswitches may wear out uponextensive use. Please refrain fromexcessive use of switches.

Fuse switch

Always, put the fuse switch at the ONposition.If you move the switch to the OFFposition, some items such as audioand digital clock must be reset andtransmitter (or smart key) may notwork properly. When the switch isOff, the caution indicator will be dis-played on the instrument cluster.Always place the fuse switch in theON position while driving the vehicle.

OUMA074017

7 69

Maintenance

Engine compartment fusereplacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and allother switches off.

2. Remove the fuse panel cover bypressing the tab and pulling thecover up. When the blade typefuse is disconnected, remove it byusing the clip designed for chang-ing fuses located in the engineroom fuse box. Upon removal,securely insert reserve fuse ofequal quantity.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace itif it is blown. To remove or insertthe fuse, use the fuse puller in theengine compartment fuse panel.

4. Push in a new fuse of the samerating, and make sure it fits tightlyin the clips. If it fits loosely, consultan authorized Kia dealer.

Multi fuse

If the main fuse is blown, it must beremoved as follows:1. Turn off the engine.2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.3. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-

ture above.4. Replace the fuse with a new one

of the same rating.5. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

OUM074020

CAUTION - Fuse PanelCovers

After checking the fuse panel inthe engine compartment,securely install the fuse panelcover through the audible click-ing sound.If not, electrical failures mayoccur from water contact.

OUM074018

Maintenance

707

✽✽ NOTICEDo not disassemble nor assemble themulti fuse when it is secured withnuts and bolts. Incorrect or partialassembly torque may cause a fire.Have the vehicle checked by anauthorized Kia dealer.

Main fuse

If the main fuse is blown, it must beremoved as follows:1. Turn off the engine.2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.3. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-

ture above.4. Replace the fuse with a new one

of the same rating.5. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

✽✽ NOTICEThe electronic system may not func-tion correctly even when the engineroom and internal fuse box’s indi-vidual fuses are not disconnected. Insuch case the cause of the problemmay be disconnection of the mainfuse (BFT type), which is locatedinside the positive battery terminal(+) cap. Since the main fuse is designed moreintricately than other parts, have thevehicle checked by an authorizedKia dealer.

OUMA074044

CAUTIONVisually inspect the battery capto ensure it is securely closed. Ifthe battery cap is not securelyclosed, moisture may enter thesystem and damage the electri-cal components.

7 71

Maintenance

Fuse/relay panel description

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,you can find the fuse/relay labeldescribing fuse/relay name andcapacity.

✽✽ NOTICENot all fuse panel descriptions inthis manual may be applicable toyour vehicle. It is accurate at thetime of printing. When you inspectthe fuse panel in your vehicle, referto the fuse panel label.

OUMA074021

OUMA077220

Maintenance

727

Description Fuse rating Protected component

AIR BAG IND. 10A Cluster, A/C Control Module

A/CON 3 30A Fuse - A/CON 2, Blower Motor

A/CON 2 7.5A A/C Control Module (Auto)

START 7.5A E/R Junction Block (Start Relay), Transaxle Range Switch

AIR BAG 15A SRS Control Module, Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor

MODULE 2 10ACrash Pad Switch, 4WD ECM, Lane Departure Warning Module, Console Switch, Rear Parking AssistSensor LH/RH, Rear Parking Assist Buzzer, Rear Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH (Center), Blind SpotDetection Radar LH/RH, Electronic Parking Brake Module

ACC 10APCB Block (PDM (ACC) Relay, Power Outlet Relay), BCM, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit,360° camera monitoring Unit, Smart Key Control Module, AMP, USB Charger, Telematics Unit

MODULE 4 10A Auto Head Lamp Leveling Device Module, Head Lamp Leveling Device Actuator LH/RH

BRAKE SWITCH 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch

MODULE 3 10AA/C Control Module, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Electro Chromic Mirror, Driver IMS Control Module, ATMShift Lever Indicator, Rear Seat Warmer LH, Front Air Ventilation Control Module, Front Seat WarmerControl Module, Telematics Unit

MODULE 1 10A BCM, Stop Lamp Switch, Driver/Passenger Doormodule

SMART KEY 1 15A Smart Key Control Module

7 73

Maintenance


A/CON (RR) 15A ICM Relay Box (Rear Blower Motor Relay)

SUNROOF 2 20A Sunroof Control Module (Roller)

SUNROOF 1 20A Sunroof Control Module (Glass)

CLUSTER 10A Instrument Cluster

GATEWAY 10A Gateway (MCU IG1)

IMMO. 10A Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module

IG1 15A E/R Junction Block (Fuse - MDPS 3, TCU 1), PCB Block (Fuse - ABS 3, SENSOR 6, ECU 1, CRUISE)

MULTIMEDIA 15A USB Charger, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Telematics Unit

MEMORY 2 10AInstrument Cluster, Data Link Connector, A/C Control Module, Rear A/C Control Module, Clock Spring,MUT, Electro Chromic Mirror, Driver/Passenger Door Module, Passenger Power Window Switch, Driver IMSControl Module

DOOR LOCK 20A Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay, Tail Gate Relay, DRIVER/PASSENGER/RL/RR DOOR MODULE

SMART KEY 2 10A Start/Stop Button Switch, Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module

AEB 10A AEB Unit

WASHER 15A BCM, Multifunction Switch

MDPS 7.5A MDPS UNIT(COLUMN TYPE), Steering Angle Sensor

Maintenance

747


MEMORY 1 10A BCM

HEATED STEERING

15A BCM

WIPER (RR) 15A Rear Wiper Relay, Rear Wiper Motor

A/CON 1 7.5AA/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer, E/R Junction Block (Blower Relay), ICM Relay Box (Rear Blower MotorRelay)

HEATED MIRROR 10A A/C Control Module, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror

MODULE 5 10A BCM, Smart Key Control Module

MODULE 6 7.5A360° camera monitoring Unit, Rear A/C Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer LH, Front Air Ventilation ControlModule, Front Seat Warmer Control Module, AC Inverter Module, Crash Pad Switch

S/HEATER (RR) 15A Rear Seat Warmer LH

S/HEATER (FRT) 20A Front Air Ventilation Control Module, Front Seat Warmer Control Module

P/WINDOW (RH) 25ARear Safety Power Window RH, Rear Power Window Switch RH, Passenger Safety Power Window Module,Passenger Door Module, Passenger Power Window Switch

AMP 1 25A AMP

MODULE 7 7.5A Gateway (MCU B+), Sport Mode Switch, Key Solenoid

7 75

Maintenance


INTERIOR LAMP 10AGlove Box Lamp, Ignition Key Ill. & Door Warning Switch, Driver Foot Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH Switch,Cargo Lamp, Center Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp, Rear Personal Lamp LH/RH

FUEL LID 10A Fuel Filler & Tail Gate Switch

P/SEAT (DRV) 30A Driver IMS Control Module, Driver Seat Manual Switch

P/SEAT (PASS) 30A Passenger Seat Manual Switch

AMP 2 25A AMP

P/WINDOW (LH) 25ARear Safety Power Window LH, Rear Power Window Switch LH, Driver Safety Power Window Module,Driver Door Module

Maintenance

767

Engine compartment fuse panel

OUMA074050

OUM074023

7 77

Maintenance


MULTIFUSE

MDPS 1 100A MDPS Unit (Rack Type)

MDPS 2 80A MDPS Unit (Column Type)

COOLINGFAN 1

80A Cooling Fan 1 Relay

B+1 60A IGPM (Fuse - S/HEATER (RR), P/SEAT (DRV), P/SEAT (PASS), P/WINDOW (LH))

B+2 60A IGPM (Fuse - S/HEATER (FRT), P/WINDOW (RH), FULE LID, AMP 1, AMP 2)

B+3 60AIGPM (IPS 1, Fuse - MODULE 7, Leak Current Autocut Device Fuse - MULTIMEDIA, MEMORY 2,MEMORY 1), INTERIOR LAMP

B+5 50A IGPM (IPS 0/IPS 2/IPS 3/IPS 4/IPS 5/IPS 6/IPS 7/IPS 8, Fuse - S/ROOF 1)

FUSE

B+4 40AIGPM (Fuse - DOOR LOCK, SMART KEY 1, SMART KEY 2, BRAKE SWITCH, A/CON (RR), S/ROOF 2)

ABS 2 20A ESC Module

ABS 1 40A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

INVERTER 30A AC Inverter Module

POWER TAILGATE

30A Power Tail Gate Module

TRAILER 30A Trailer Power Outlet

BLOWER 40A Blower Relay

Maintenance

787


FUSE

AMS 10A Battery Sensor

VACUUMPUMP

20A [G4KH] Vacuum Pump

TCU 2 15A [G4KJ/G4KH] PCM

EPB 1 15A Electronic Parking Brake Module

EPB 2 15A Electronic Parking Brake Module

4WD 20A 4WD ECM

ECU 2 15A PCM

ECU 3 15A [G6DH] IDB (Injector Driver Box)

MDPS 3 7.5A MDPS Unit (Rack Type)

TCU 1 10A Transaxle Range Switch

B/UP LAMP 7.5A Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH, BCM, Electro Chromic Mirror, Audio(UVO)

7 79

Maintenance


ABS 3 7.5A ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

ECU 1 10A PCM, [G6DH] IDB (Injector Driver Box)

IG 2 40A RLY. 4 (Start Relay), PDM (IG2) Relay, Ignition Switch

POWER OUTLET 1

20A Front Power Outlet & Cigarette Lighter

SENSOR 6 7.5A [G4KH] Brake Vacuum Switch, Vacuum Pump

POWER OUTLET 2

20A Front Power Outlet

CRUISE 7.5A Smart Cruise Control Radar

ECU 4 20A [G4KJ/G4KH] PCM (E-CVVT Relay)

WIPER 25A Wiper Low Relay

DEICER 15A Front Deicer Relay

ECU 5 20A [G4KJ/G4KH] PCM (E-CVVT Relay)

IG 1 40A PDM (IG1) Relay, PDM (ACC) Relay, Ignition Switch

SENSOR 4 10A[G4KJ/G4KH] Oxygen Sensor (Up/Down) [G6DH] PCM, Oxygen Sensor #1/#2/#3/#4

SENSOR 5 15A[G4KJ/G4KH]PCM [G6DH] IDB (Injector Driver Box)

Maintenance

807


POWER OUTLET 3

20A Rear Power Outlet

SENSOR 1 20A [G4KJ/G4KH] Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4 [G6DF] Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4/#5/#6, Condecser #1/#2

SENSOR 3 10A [G4KJ/G4KH] Fuel Pump Relay [G6DF] Fuel Pump Relay, PCM

POWER OUTLET 4

20A Luggage Power Outlet

REAR HEATED

40A Rear Defogger Relay

SENSOR 2 10A

[G4KJ/G4KH] E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan 1 Relay), Oil Control Valve (Exhaust), Purge Control SolenoidValve, Canister Close Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, RCV Control Solenoid Valve (G4KH)

[G6DH] E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan 1 Relay), Variable Intake Solenoid Valve #1/#2, Purge ControlSolenoid Valve, Oil Control Valve #1/#2/#3/#4 (Intake/Exhaust), PCM, Canister close valve

FUEL PUMP 20A Fuel Pump Relay

HORN 15A Horn Relay

B/ALARMHORN

10A Burglar Alarm Horn Relay

7 81

Maintenance

Relay NO. Relay Name Type

E31 Blower Relay MICRO

E32 START #2 Relay MICRO

E33 Cooling Fan #1 Relay MINI

Maintenance

827

LIGHT BULBSPlease prepare lamps with appropri-ate standards in case of emergen-cies. (Refer to chapter 8 for furtherinformation)When changing lamps and sorts,first turn off the engine at a safeplace, firmly apply the side brake andtake out the battery’s negative (-) ter-minal.

Use only the bulbs of the specifiedwattage.

✽✽ NOTICE• If the light bulb or lamp connector

is removed from an operatinglamp activated by electricity, thefuse box’s electronic device mayscan it as a malfunction.Therefore, a lamp malfunctionhistory may be recorded inDiagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) inthe fuse box.

• It is normal for an operating lampmay blink temporarily. Since thisoccurrence is due stabilizationfunction of the vehicle’s electroniccontrol device, if the lamp lightsup normally after temporaryblinking, there is no problem inthe vehicle. However, if the lamp continues toblink several times or turn offcompletely, there may be an errorin the vehicle’s electronic controldevice. So please have the vehiclechecked by an authorized Kiadealer immediately.

WARNING - Working onthe lights

Prior to working on the light,firmly apply the parking brake,ensure that the ignition switchis turned to the LOCK positionand turn off the lights to avoidsudden movement of the vehi-cle and burning your fingers orreceiving an electric shock.

CAUTION - Light replace-ment

Be sure to replace the burned-out bulb with one of the samewattage rating. Otherwise, itmay cause damage to the fuseor electric wiring system.

CAUTION - HeadlampLens

To prevent damage, do notclean headlamp lens with chem-ical solvents or strong deter-gents.

7 83

Maintenance

If you don’t have necessary tools, thecorrect bulbs and the expertise, con-sult an authorized Kia dealer. Inmany cases, it is difficult to replacevehicle light bulbs because otherparts of the vehicle must be removedbefore you can get to the bulb. This isespecially true if you have to removethe headlamp assembly to get to thebulb(s).Removing/installing the headlampassembly can result in damage tothe vehicle.If unauthentic parts or substandardlights are used when changing lights,it may lead to fuse disconnection andmalfunction, and other wiring dam-ages.Do not install extra lamps or LED tothe vehicle. If supplementary lightsare installed, it may lead to lamp mal-function and flickering of the lights. Inaddition, the fuse box and other writ-ing may be damaged.

Front lamp bulb replacement (1) Headlamp (High and DRL)(2) Headlamp (Low)(3) Turn signal lamp(4) Side marker lamp(5) Position lamp(6) Fog lamp (if equipped)

OUMA074027

OUMA074114

■ Type A

■ Type B

Maintenance

847

Headlamp bulb • Always handle them carefully, andavoid scratches and abrasions. Ifthe bulbs are lit, avoid contact withliquids. Never touch the glass withbare hands. Residual oil maycause the bulb to overheat andburst when lit. A bulb should beoperated only when installed in aheadlamp.

• If a bulb becomes damaged orcracked, replace it immediatelyand carefully dispose of it.

• Wear eye protection when chang-ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cooldown before handling it.

WARNING - HIDHeadlamp low beam(if equipped)

Do not attempt to replace orinspect the low beam (XENONbulb) due to electric shock dan-ger. If the light bulb does notoperate, have your vehiclechecked by an authorized Kiadealer.

OXM079200N

WARNING - Halogenbulbs

Handle halogen bulbs with care.• Halogen bulbs contain pres-

surized gas that will produceflying pieces of glass if bro-ken.

7 85

Maintenance

Headlamp (bulb type) -high/low

1. Open the hood.2. Remove the headlamp assembly

from the body of the vehicle3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover

by turning it counterclockwise.4. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socketcounterclockwise until the tabs onthe socket align with the slots onthe assembly.

5. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.6. Inset a new bulb into the socket.

7. Install the socket in the assemblyby aligning the tabs on the socketwith the slots in the assembly.Push the socket into the assemblyand turn the socket clockwise.

8. Install the headlamp bulb cover byturning it clockwise.

Turn signal lamp

Follow the steps 1 to 3 from the pre-vious page.4. Remove the socket from the


5. Remove the bulb from the socketby pressing it in and rotating itcounterclockwise until the tabs onthe bulb align with the slots in thesocket. Pull the bulb out of thesocket

OUM074108L

Turn signal

OUM074053L

High lamp Low lamp

Maintenance

867

6. Insert a new bulb by inserting itinto the socket and rotating it untilit locks into place.


✽✽ NOTICEIf bulb will not rotate inside socket,remove bulb, rotate 180°, and tryagain.

Front fog lamp bulbs (if equipped)

1. Remove the front bumper undercover.

2. Reach your hand into the back ofthe front bumper.

3. Disconnect the power connectorfrom the socket.

4. Remove the bulb-socket from thehousing by turning the socketcounter clockwise until the tabs onthe socket align with the slots onthe housing.

5. Install the new bulb-socket into thehousing by aligning the tabs onthe socket with the slots in thehousing. Push the socket into thehousing and turn the socket clock-wise.

6. Connect the power connector tothe socket.

7. Reinstall the front bumper undercover.

✽✽ NOTICEAlways have the headlamp aimingadjusted after an accident or afterthe headlamp assembly is reinstalledat an authorized Kia dealer.

OUMA074109

7 87

Maintenance

Headlamp low (HID), Positionlamp (LED)/Side markerlamp(LED) replacementIf the light bulb does not operate,have the vehicle checked by anauthorized Kia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEHID lamps have superior perform-ance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lampsare estimated by the manufacturerto last twice as long or longer thanhalogen bulbs depending on theirfrequency of use. They will probablyrequire replacement at some pointin the life of the vehicle. Cycling theheadlamps on and off more thantypical use will shorten HID lampslife. HID lamps do not fail in thesame manner as halogen incandes-cent lamps. If a headlamp goes outafter a period of operation but willimmediately relamp when the head-lamp switch is cycled it is likely theHID lamp needs to be replaced. HIDlamping components are more com-plex than conventional halogenbulbs thus have higher replacementcost.

Side repeater lamp replace-ment

If the light bulb does notoperate,have the vehicle checked byan authorized Kia dealer. A skilledtechnician should check or repair theside repeater lamp, for it may dam-age related out side mirror parts ofthe vehicle.

OUM074028

Maintenance

887

Rear combination lamp bulbreplacement

Outside lamp Type A1. Open the liftgate.2. Open the service cover.3. Remove the nuts from the vehicle.4. Remove the rear combination

lamp assembly from the body ofthe vehicle.

OUMA074031

OUM074032

OUM074033

OUM074030L

OUM074029

■ Type A

■ Type B

Stop&tail Tail

Turn signalBack up

Turn signalBack up

Stop&tail Stop&tail

Side marker

Side marker

7 89

Maintenance

5. Disconnect the connectorbetween lamp and the body.

6. Remove the socket from theassembly by turning the socketcounterclockwise until the tabs onthe socket align with the slots onthe assembly.

7. Remove the bulb from the socketby pressing it in and rotating itcounterclockwise until the tabs onthe bulb align with the slots in thesocket. Pull the bulb out of thesocket.



10. Reinstall the light assembly tothe body of the vehicle.

* If your vehicle is equipped with LEDtype stop and tail lamps replacewith LED assembled units. Pleasecontact an authorized Kia dealer.

Type B (Stop and tail lamp)

If the lamp bulb does not operate,have the vehicle checked by anauthorized Kia dealer.

Inside lamp

OUMA074035

OUMA074112

OUM074036

■ Type A

■ Type B

OUM074034

OUMA074111

■ Type A

■ Type B

Maintenance

907

1. Open the liftgate.2. Remove the service cover.3. Remove the socket from the


4. Remove the bulb from the socketby pressing it in and rotating itcounterclockwise until the tabs onthe bulb align with the slots in thesocket. Pull the bulb out of thesocket.



7. Install the service cover by puttingit into the service hole.

* If your vehicle is equipped with LEDtype stop and tail lamps replacewith LED assembled units. Pleasecontact an authorized Kia dealer.

High mounted stop lampreplacement

1. Open the liftgate.2. Gently remove the center cover of

the rear tailgate trim.3. Disconnect the electrical connec-

tor.

4. Loosen the retaining nuts andremove the spoiler.

OUM074056L

ODMEMC2019

OUMA074232

7 91

Maintenance

5. Remove the high mounted stoplamp assembly (A) after looseningthe nuts and washer nozzle (B).

6. Reinstall a new lamp assembly inthe reverse order of removal.

License plate lamp bulbreplacement

1. Loosen the lens retaining screwswith a phillips head screwdriver.

2. Remove the lens.3. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.4. Install a new bulb.5. Reinstall the lens securely with the

lens retaining screws.

OUMA074231

OUMA074230

B

A

Maintenance

927

Interior lamp bulb replacement1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,

gently pry the lens from the interi-or light housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.4. Align the lens tabs with the interior

light housing notches and snapthe lens into place.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the LED lamp does not operate,we recommend that you checked onauthorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Interiorlamps

Prior to working on the InteriorLights, ensure that the “OFF”button is depressed to avoidburning your fingers or receiv-ing an electric shock.

■ Room lamp

■ Map lamp

■ Glove box lamp

■ Luggage lamp

■ Vanity mirror lamp

OUM074039/OUM074040/OUM074041/OYP074032K/OXM079041

7 93

Maintenance

APPEARANCE CAREExterior careExterior general caution It is very important to follow the labeldirections when using any chemicalcleaner or polish. Read all warningand caution statements that appearon the label.

Finish maintenanceWashing

To help protect your vehicle’s finishfrom rust and deterioration, wash itthoroughly and frequently at leastonce a month with lukewarm or coldwater.If you use your vehicle for off-roaddriving, you should wash it after eachoff-road trip. Pay special attention tothe removal of any accumulation ofsalt, dirt, mud, and other foreignmaterials. Make sure the drain holesin the lower edges of the doors androcker panels are kept clear andclean.Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,industrial pollution and similardeposits can damage your vehicle’sfinish if not removed immediately.Even prompt washing with plainwater may not completely remove allthese deposits. A mild soap, safe foruse on painted surfaces, may beused.After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-oughly with lukewarm or cold water.Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-ish.

After washing the vehicle, test thebrakes while driving slowly to see ifthey have been affected by water. Ifbraking performance is impaired, drythe brakes by applying them lightlywhile maintaining a slow forwardspeed.

CAUTION - Headlight LensTo prevent damage, do notclean headlight lens with chem-ical solvents or strong deter-gents.

Maintenance

947

High-pressure washing

• When using high-pressure wash-ers, make sure to maintain suffi-cient distance from the vehicle.Insufficient clearance or excessivepressure can lead to componentdamage or water penetration.

• Do not spray the camera, sensorsor its surrounding area directly witha high pressure washer. Shockapplied from high pressure watermay cause the device to not oper-ate normally.

• Do not bring the nozzle tip close toboots (rubber or plastic covers) orconnectors as they may be dam-aged if they come into contact withhigh pressure water.

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will nolonger bead on the paint.Always wash and dry the vehiclebefore waxing. Use a good qualityliquid or paste wax, and follow themanufacturer’s instructions. Wax allmetal trim to protect it and to main-tain its luster.Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-als with a spot remover will usuallystrip the wax from the finish. Be sureto re-wax these areas even if the restof the vehicle does not yet need wax-ing.Do not apply wax on embossedunpainted unit, as it may tarnish theunit.

CAUTION - Wet engine• Water washing in the engine

compartment including highpressure water washing maycause the failure of electricalcircuits located in the enginecompartment.

• Never allow water or other liq-uids to come in contact withelectrical/electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle asthis may damage them.

OJB037800

7 95

Maintenance

Finish damage repair Deep scratches or stone chips in thepainted surface must be repairedpromptly. Exposed metal will quicklyrust and may develop into a majorrepair expense.If your vehicle is damaged andrequires any metal repair or replace-ment, be sure the body shop appliesanti-corrosion materials to the partsrepaired or replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance• To remove road tar and insects,

use a tar remover, not a scraper orother sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal parts from corrosion, apply acoating of wax or chrome preser-vative and rub to a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastalareas, cover the bright metal partswith a heavier coating of wax orpreservative. If necessary, coat theparts with non-corrosive petroleumjelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenanceRoad salt and other corrosive chem-icals are used in cold weather statesto melt snow and prevent ice accu-mulation. If these chemicals are notregularly removed, they will corrodethe vehicle underbody and over timedamage fuel lines, the fuel tankretention system, the vehicle sus-pension, the exhaust system, andeven the body frame. The NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administrationhas warned all vehicle owners of allbrands of the need to take the follow-ing steps:• Wash the undercarriage of your

vehicle regularly during the winterand whenever your vehicle hasbeen exposed to such salts orchemicals.

• Do a thorough washing of theundercarriage at the end of thewinter.

CAUTION - Drying vehicle• Wiping dust or dirt off the

body with a dry cloth willscratch the finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abra-sive cleaners, acid detergentsor strong detergents contain-ing high alkaline or causticagents on chrome-plated oranodized aluminum parts.This may result in damage tothe protective coating andcause discoloration or paintdeterioration.

Maintenance

967

Aluminum wheel maintenance The aluminum wheels are coatedwith a clear protective finish.• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,

polishing compound, solvent, orwire brushes on aluminum wheels.They may scratch the finish.

• Clean the wheel when it hascooled.

• Use only a mild soap or neutraldetergent, and rinse thoroughlywith water. Also, be sure to cleanthe wheels after driving on saltedroads. This helps prevent corro-sion.

• Avoid washing the wheels withhighspeed vehicle wash brushes.

• Do not use any alkaline or aciddetergents It may damage and cor-rode the aluminum wheels coatedwith a clear protective finish.

Corrosion protectionProtecting your vehicle from corro-sion

By using the most advanced designand construction practices to combatcorrosion, we produce vehicles ofthe highest quality. However, this isonly part of the job. To achieve thelong-term corrosion resistance yourvehicle can deliver, the owner'scooperation and assistance is alsorequired.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corro-sion on your vehicle are:• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneaththe vehicle.

• Removal of paint or protectivecoatings by stones, gravel, abra-sion or minor scrapes and dentswhich leave unprotected metalexposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehi-cle is regularly exposed to corrosivematerials, corrosion protection isparticularly important. Some of thecommon causes of accelerated cor-rosion are road salts, dust controlchemicals, ocean air and industrialpollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions inwhich corrosion is most likely tooccur. For example, corrosion isaccelerated by high humidity, partic-ularly when temperatures are justabove freezing. In such conditions,the corrosive material is kept in con-tact with the vehicle’s surface bymoisture that evaporates slowly.Mud is particularly corrosivebecause it dries slowly and holdsmoisture in contact with the vehicle.Although the mud appears to be dry,it can still retain the moisture andpromote corrosion.

7 97

Maintenance

High temperatures can also acceler-ate corrosion of parts that are notproperly ventilated so the moisturecan be dispersed. For all these rea-sons, it is particularly important tokeep your vehicle clean and free ofmud or accumulations of other mate-rials. This applies not only to the vis-ible surfaces but particularly to theunderside of the vehicle.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion frombeginning by observing the following:

Keep your vehicle cleanThe best way to prevent corrosion isto keep your vehicle clean and freeof corrosive materials. Attention tothe underside of the vehicle is partic-ularly important.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area— where road salts are used, nearthe ocean, areas with industrialpollution, acid rain, etc.—, youshould take extra care to preventcorrosion. In winter, hose off theunderside of your vehicle at leastonce a month and be sure to cleanthe underside thoroughly whenwinter is over.

• When cleaning underneath thevehicle, give particular attention tothe components under the fendersand other areas that are hiddenfrom view. Do a thorough job; justdampening the accumulated mudrather than washing it away willaccelerate corrosion rather thanprevent it. Water under high pres-sure and steam are particularlyeffective in removing accumulatedmud and corrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels,rocker panels and frame members,be sure that drain holes are keptopen so that moisture can escapeand not be trapped inside to accel-erate corrosion.

Keep your garage dryDon't park your vehicle in a damp,poorly ventilated garage. This cre-ates a favorable environment for cor-rosion. This is particularly true if youwash your vehicle in the garage ordrive it into the garage when it is stillwet or covered with snow, ice ormud. Even a heated garage can con-tribute to corrosion unless it is wellventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Maintenance

987

Keep paint and trim in good con-ditionScratches or chips in the finishshould be covered with "touch-up"paint as soon as possible to reducethe possibility of corrosion. If baremetal is showing through, the atten-tion of a qualified body and paintshop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings arehighly corrosive and may damagepainted surfaces in just a few hours.Always remove bird droppings assoon as possible.

Don't neglect the interiorMoisture can collect under the floormats and carpeting and cause corro-sion. Check under the mats periodi-cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.Use particular care if you carry fertil-izers, cleaning materials or chemi-cals in the vehicle.These should be carried only inproper containers and any spills orleaks should be cleaned up, flushedwith clean water and thoroughlydried.

Interior careInterior general precautions Prevent chemicals such as perfume,cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-er, and air freshener from contactingthe interior parts because they maycause damage or discoloration. Ifthey do contact the interior parts,wipe them off immediately. If neces-sary, use a vinyl cleaner, see productinstructions for correct usage.

CAUTION - Electricalcomponents

Never allow water or other liq-uids to come in contact withelectrical/electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as thismay damage them.

CAUTION - LeatherWhen cleaning leather products(steering wheel, seats etc.), useneutral detergents or low alco-hol content solutions. If you usehigh alcohol content solutionsor acid/alkaline detergents, thecolor of the leather may fade orthe surface may get stripped off.

7 99

Maintenance

CAUTION - Prime Nappaleather seat cover(If equipped)

Prime Nappa/semi-anilineleather is top-quality leatherretaining the hide's natural tex-ture. Pores, scars or blood ves-sels, etc. of the original animal'sskin are visible. Pressure marksor wrinkles may be made whenused. Prolonged exposure tosunlight or heat may cause dis-coloration. These things occurdue to the natural characteris-tics of cowhides. If the leather isexposed to rain or gets wet,remove water with a dry clothand dry the leather in the shadeto minimize damage.Make sure to keep sharp objectsaway from the leather as thesecan create scratches on the sur-face. For light-colored leather,be careful of spots or colortransfer, such as from jeans.

CAUTION - Nappa leatherseat cover (If equipped)

Nappa leather retains the hide'sown soft texture with visiblepores, scars or blood vessels,etc. Pressure marks or wrinklesmay be made when used.Prolonged exposure to sunlightor heat may cause discol-oration. These things occur dueto the natural characteristics ofcowhides. If the leather isexposed to rain or gets wet,remove water with a dry clothand dry the leather in the shadeto minimize damage.Make sure to keep sharp objectsaway from the leather as thesecan create scratches on the sur-face. For light-colored leather,be careful of spots or colortransfer, such as from jeans.

CAUTION - Natural leatherseat cover (If equipped)

Natural leather has visiblepores, scars or blood vessels,etc. Pressure marks or wrinklesmay be made when used.Prolonged exposure to sunlightor heat may cause discol-oration. These things occur dueto the natural characteristics ofcowhides. If the leather isexposed to rain or gets wet,remove water with a dry clothand dry the leather in the shadeto minimize damage.Make sure to keep sharp objectsaway from the leather as thesecan create scratches on the sur-face. For light-colored leather,be careful of spots or colortransfer, such as from jeans.

Maintenance

1007

Cleaning the upholstery and inte-rior trim Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt fromvinyl with a whisk broom or vacuumcleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with avinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-ric with a whisk broom or vacuumcleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-tion recommended for upholstery orcarpets. Remove fresh spots imme-diately with a fabric spot cleaner. Iffresh spots do not receive immediateattention, the fabric can be stainedand its color can be affected. Also, itsfire-resistant properties can bereduced if the material is not proper-ly maintained.Using anything but recommendedcleaners and procedures may affectthe fabric’s appearance and fire-resistant properties.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder beltwebbing Clean the belt webbing with any mildsoap solution recommended forcleaning upholstery or carpet. Followthe instructions provided with thesoap. Do not bleach or re-dye thewebbing because this may weakenit.

Cleaning the interior windowglass If the interior glass surfaces of thevehicle become fogged (that is, cov-ered with an oily, greasy or waxyfilm), they should be cleaned with aglass cleaner. Follow the directionson the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION - Rear windowDo not scrape or scratch theinside of the rear window. Thismay result in damage of the rearwindow defroster grid.

7 101

Maintenance

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMThe emission control system of yourvehicle is covered by a written limitedwarranty. Please see the warrantyinformation contained in theWarranty & Maintenance booklet inyour vehicle.Your vehicle is equipped with anemission control system to meet allapplicable emission regulations.There are three emission controlsystems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control sys-tem

(2) Evaporative emission control sys-tem

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper functionof the emission control systems, it isrecommended that you have yourvehicle inspected and maintained byan authorized Kia dealer in accor-dance with the maintenance sched-ule in this manual.

Caution for the Inspection andMaintenance Test (With ElectronicStability Control (ESC) system)• To prevent the vehicle from mis-

firing during dynamometer test-ing, turn the Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system off bypressing the ESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing iscompleted, turn the ESC systemback on by pressing the ESCswitch again.

1. Crankcase emission controlsystem

The positive crankcase ventilationsystem is employed to prevent airpollution caused by blow-by gasesbeing emitted from the crankcase.This system supplies fresh filtered airto the crankcase through the airintake hose. Inside the crankcase,the fresh air mixes with blow-bygases, which then pass through thePCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission con-trol (including ORVR:Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery) system

The Evaporative Emission ControlSystem is designed to prevent fuelvapors from escaping into the atmos-phere.(The ORVR system is designed toallow the vapors from the fuel tank tobe loaded into a canister while refu-eling at the gas station, preventingthe escape of fuel vapors into theatmosphere.)

Maintenance

1027

CanisterFuel vapors generated inside the fueltank are absorbed and stored in theonboard canister. When the engine isrunning, the fuel vapors absorbed inthe canister are drawn into the surgetank through the purge control sole-noid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve(PCSV)The purge control solenoid valve iscontrolled by the Engine ControlModule (ECM); when the enginecoolant temperature is low duringidling, the PCSV closes so that evap-orated fuel is not taken into theengine. After the engine warms upduring ordinary driving, the PCSVopens to introduce evaporated fuel tothe engine.

3. Exhaust emission control system

The Exhaust Emission ControlSystem is a highly effective systemwhich controls exhaust emissionswhile maintaining good vehicle per-formance.

Vehicle modifications This vehicle should not be modified.Modification of your vehicle couldaffect its performance, safety ordurability and may even violate gov-ernmental safety and emissions reg-ulations.In addition, damage or performanceproblems resulting from any modifi-cation may not be covered underwarranty.• If you use unauthorized electronic

devices, it may cause the vehicle tooperate abnormally, wire damage,battery discharge and fire. For yoursafety, do not use unauthorizedelectronic devices.

Engine exhaust gas precautions(carbon monoxide) • Carbon monoxide can be present

with other exhaust fumes.Therefore, if you smell exhaustfumes of any kind inside your vehi-cle, have it inspected and repairedimmediately. If you ever suspectexhaust fumes are coming intoyour vehicle, drive it only with allthe windows fully open. Have yourvehicle checked and repairedimmediately.

WARNING - ExhaustEngine exhaust gases containcarbon monoxide (CO). Thoughcolorless and odorless, it isdangerous and could be lethal ifinhaled. Follow the instructionson this page to avoid CO poi-soning.

7 103

Maintenance

• Do not operate the engine in con-fined or closed areas (such asgarages) any more than what isnecessary to move the vehicle in orout of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in anopen area for more than a shorttime with the engine running,adjust the ventilation system (asneeded) to draw outside air into thevehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stoppedvehicle for any extended time withthe engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails tostart, excessive attempts to restartthe engine may cause damage tothe emission control system.

Operating precautions for catalyt-ic converters (if equipped)

WARNING - Catalyticconverter

Keep away from the catalyticconverter and exhaust systemwhile the vehicle is running orimmediately thereafter. Theexhaust and catalytic systemsare very hot and may burn you.

WARNING - Fire• Do not park, idle or drive the

vehicle over or near flamma-ble objects, such as grass,vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.A hot exhaust system canignite flammable items underyour vehicle.

• Also, do not remove the heatsink around the exhaust sys-tem, do not seal the bottom ofthe vehicle or do not coat thevehicle for corrosion control.It may present a fire risk undercertain conditions.

Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-alytic converter emission controldevice.Therefore, the following precautionsmust be observed:• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for

gasoline engines.• Do not operate the vehicle when

there are signs of engine malfunc-tion, such as misfire or a noticeableloss of performance.

• Do not misuse or abuse theengine. Examples of misuse arecoasting with the ignition off anddescending steep grades in gearwith the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at highidle speed for extended periods (5minutes or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with anypart of the engine or emission con-trol system. All inspections andadjustments must be made by anauthorized Kia dealer.

• Avoid driving with an extremely lowfuel level. Running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, dam-aging the catalytic converter.

Failure to observe these precautionscould result in damage to the catalyt-ic converter and to your vehicle.Additionally, such actions could voidyour warranties.

7 104

Maintenance


Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 8-6• Recommended SAE viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

8

28

DIMENSIONS


ENGINE

ITEM 5 Seats 7 Seats

Overall length [mm (in.)] 4,760 (187.4) ←Overall width [mm (in.)] 1,890 (74.4) ←

Overall height[mm (in.)]

Without Roof rack 1,685 (66.3) ←

With Roof rack 1,690 (66.5) ←

Tread [mm (in.)]

Front

235/65 R17 1,633 (64.2) ←235/60 R18 1,628 (64.0) ←235/55 R19 1,628 (64.0) ←

Rear

235/65 R17 1,644 (64.7) ←235/60 R18 1,639 (64.5) ←235/55 R19 1,639 (64.5) ←

Wheelbase [mm (in.)] 2,780 (109.4) ←

ITEMGasoline

Theta II 2.0 T-GDIGasoline

Theta II 2.4Gasoline

Lambda II 3.3Displacement

[cc (cu. in)]1,998 (121.92) 2,359 (143.95) 3,342 (203.94)

Bore x Stroke [mm (in.)]

86x86 (3.39x3.39) 88x97 (3.46X3.81)92x83.8

(3.62X3.29)Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-2-3-4-5-6No. of cylinders 4. In-line 4. In-line V - type

8 3

BULB WATTAGE


* If equipped

Light Bulb Wattage (W) Bulb type

Front

Headlamps (Low) 55 H7SPLHeadlamps (Low) - HID type* 35 D3SHeadlamps (High) 55 H7LFront turn signal lamps 27W PY27/8W

Front position lamps Bulb type - -LED type LED LED

Daytime running light 55W H7L

Front fog lamps Type A 35 H8LType B 27 #881Type C LED LED

Side Repeater lamps Bulb type - -LED type LED LED

Rear

Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside)Bulb type

21/5 P21/5Rear tail lamps (Inside) 5 P21/5Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside)

LED typeLED LED

Rear tail lamps (Inside) LED LEDRear turn signal lamps 27 PY27WBack-up lamps 16 W16WHigh mounted stop lamp LED LEDLicense plate lamps 10W C5W x 2

Interior

Map lamps 20 (LED*) FESTOON (LED*)Room lamps 10 FESTOONRear Personal Lamps LED* LED*Vanity mirror lamps 5 FESTOONGlove box lamp 5 FESTOONLuggage room lamp 8 FESTOON

48

TIRES AND WHEELS


CAUTIONWhen replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make them work irregularly.

*1: Load Index*2: Speed Symbol*3: Normal load : Up to 3 persons

✽✽ NOTICE• It is permissible to add 21 kPa (3 psi) to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expected soon.

Tires typically loose 7 kPa (1 psi) for every -11°C (12°F) temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are expect-ed, re-check your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.

• We recommend that when replacing tires, use the same originally supplied with the vehicles. If not, that affects drivingperformance.

• When driving in high altitude grades, it is natural for the atmospheric pressure to decrease. Therefore, please check thetire pressure and add more air when necessary. Additionally required tire air pressure per km above sea level: 10 kPa/km (1.5 lb/po²/km).

Item Tire sizeWheelsize

SupplierLoad

CapacitySpeed

capacityInflation pressure [kPa (psi)] Wheel lug

nut torque[Kgf·m

(lbf·ft, N·m)]

Normal load *3 Maximum load

LI *1 Kg SS *2 Km/h Front Rear Front Rear

Full sizetire

235/65 R17 7.0JX17Kumho 104 900 H 210

235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34)

9~11(65~79,88~107)

Hankook 104 900 H 210

235/60 R18 7.5JX18Kumho 103 875 H 210

235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34)Nexen 103 875 H 210

235/55 R19 7.5JX19Kumho 101 825 H 210

235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34)Michelin 101 825 H 210

Compactspare tire

T165/90 R17 4.0TX17 Kumho 116 1250 M 130 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)

8 5

GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT


AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

LUGGAGE VOLUME

Item Weight of volume Classification

RefrigerantFRONT A/CON 650 ± 25g

R-134aFRONT + REAR A/CON 850 ± 25g

Compressor lubricantFRONT A/CON 120 ± 10g

PAG(FD46XG)FRONT + REAR A/CON 210 ± 10g

We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details.

ITEM 5 Seats 7 SeatsTheta II 2.0

[kg (lbs.)]AT

2WD 2,320 (5,115) 2,470 (5,445)4WD 2,380 (5,247) 2,530 (5,578)

Theta II 2.4[kg (lbs.)]

AT2WD 2,280 (5,026) 2,420 (5,335)4WD 2,340 (5,159) 2,490 (5,490)

Lambda II 3.3[kg (lbs.)]

AT2WD - 2,490 (5,489)4WD - 2,550 (5,622)

ITEM 5 Seats 7 Seats

SAEMIN. 1,099L (38.8 cu ft) 1,077L (38.0 cu ft)MAX. 2,082L (73.5 cu ft) 2,066L (72.9 cu ft)

MIN : Behind rear seat (2nd row)

MAX : Behind front seat (1st row)

68


RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIESTo help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant Volume Classification

Engine oil *1 *2 (drain and refill)

Recommends (or equivalent)

GasolineEngine

Theta II 2.0 T-GDI

4.8 l (5.07 US qt.)

ACEA A5 or above * If the ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in

your country, you are able to use API serviceSL, IL SAC GF-3, ACEA A3.

Theta II 2.4 GDI 4.8 l (5.07 US qt.)

API Service SM or above/ILSAC GF-4 or above/ACEA A5 or above * If the API service SM, ILSAC GF-4, ACEA A5

engine oil is not available in your country, youare able to use API service SL, IL SAC GF-3,ACEA A3.

Lambda II 3.3GDI

5.7 l (6.02 US qt.)

ACEA A5 or above * If the ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in

your country, you are able to use API serviceSL, IL SAC GF-3, ACEA A3.

Automatic transaxle fluidGasolineEngine

Theta II 2.0 T-GDI

7.8 l (8.24 US qt.)

ATF SP-IV or equivalentTheta II 2.4 GDI 7.1 l (7.50 US qt.)

Lambda II 3.3GDI

7.8 l (8.24 US qt.)

8 7


*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econ-omy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measurein everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

Lubricant Volume Classification

CoolantGasolineEngine

Theta II 2.0 T-GDI

7.3 l (7.71 US qt.)Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water

(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminumradiator)

Theta II 2.4 GDI 7.9 l (8.35 US qt.)

Lambda II 3.3GDI

9.3 l (9.83 US qt.)

Brake fluid0.41~0.45 l

(0.445~0.485 US qt.)FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Rear differential oil (AWD)0.53 ~ 0.63 l

(0.56 ~ 0.67 US qt.)HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90(SHELL HD AXLE OIL 75W90 or equivalent)

Transfer case oil (AWD)GasolineEngine

Theta II 2.0 T-GDI

0.34 ~ 0.36 l(0.36 ~ 0.38 US qt.)

HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90 (SHELL HD AXLE OIL 75W90 or equivalent)

Theta II 2.4 GDI0.34 ~ 0.36 l

(0.36 ~ 0.38 US qt.)Lambda II 3.3

GDI0.67 ~ 0.73 l

(0.70 ~ 0.77 US qt.)

Fuel 71 l (75 US qt.) Refer to Fuel requirements in section 1

88


Recommended SAE viscositynumberAlways be sure to clean the areaaround any filler plug, drain plug, ordipstick before checking or drainingany lubricant. This is especiallyimportant in dusty or sandy areasand when the vehicle is used onunpaved roads. Cleaning the plugand dipstick areas will prevent dirtand grit from entering the engine andother mechanisms that could bedamaged. Engine oil viscosity (thick-ness) has an effect on fuel economyand cold weather operating (enginestart and engine oil flowability).Lower viscosity engine oils can pro-vide better fuel economy and coldweather performance, however,higher viscosity engine oils arerequired for satisfactory lubrication inhot weather. Using oils of any viscos-ity other than those recommendedcould result in engine damage. Whenchoosing an oil, consider the rangeof temperature your vehicle will beoperated in before the next oilchange. Proceed to select the rec-ommended oil viscosity from thechart.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature°C

(°F)-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

Gasoline Engine Oil(Theta II 2.0 T-GDI) *1

20W-50

10W-30

15W-40

5W-30, 5W-40

*1 : For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil ofa viscosity grade SAE 5W-30 (ACEA A5). However, if the engine oilis not available in your country, select the proper engine oil usingthe engine oil viscosity chart.

*2 : For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil ofa viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4 / ACEA A5).However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select theproper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

*3 : For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil ofa viscosity grade SAE 5W-30 (ACEA A5). However, if the engine oilis not available in your country, select the proper engine oil usingthe engine oil viscosity chart.

Gasoline Engine Oil(Theta II 2.4 GDI) *2

10W-30

5W-20, 5W-30

Gasoline Engine Oil(Lambda II 3.3 GDI) *3

10W-30

5W-30

8 9


VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the number used in register-ing your vehicle and in all legal mat-ters pertaining to its ownership, etc.The number is punched on the floorunder the front passenger seat.

The VIN is also on a plate attachedto the top of the dashboard. Thenumber on the plate can easily beseen through the windshield fromoutside.

The vehicle certification labelattached on the driver’s side centerpillar gives the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN).

VEHICLE CERTIFICATIONLABEL

OUM084001

■ Frame number

OUM084005

■ VIN label

OUM084004

108


The tires supplied on your new vehi-cle are chosen to provide the bestperformance for normal driving.The tire label located on the driver'sside center pillar gives the tire pres-sures recommended for your vehicle.

The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown in the drawing.

ENGINE NUMBERTIRE SPECIFICATION ANDPRESSURE LABEL

OUM084002

OYF081013N

OUM084007

OYP084003K

■ Gasoline engine (THETA 2.4L GDI)

■ Gasoline engine (THETA 2.0L T-GDI)

■ Gasoline engine (Lambda 3.3L GDI)

Index

I

Index

2I

Advanced smart cruise control system (ASCC). . . . . . 5-65

Limitations of the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

Speed setting (ASCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66

To adjust the sensitivity of advanced smart

cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74

To convert to cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

Vehicle to vehicle distance setting (ASCC). . . . . . . 5-70

Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system . . . 3-44

Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61

Do not install a child restraint on the front

passenger’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57

How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag . . 3-62

Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Side air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67

SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

Filter replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

All wheel drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

All wheel drive (AWD) transfer mode selection . . . 5-22

For safe all wheel drive operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Tight corner brake effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91

Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91

Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98

Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB)/

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

AEB warning message and system control . . . . . . . 5-52

Brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

Limitation of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

Recognizing pedestrians. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle

in front (front radar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

System setting and activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172

AUX, USB and iPod® port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174

How vehicle audio works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175

Steering wheel remote controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173

Using iPod® device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180

Using the USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179

Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141

3rd row air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149

Automatic heating and air conditioning. . . . . . . . . 4-143

Checking the amount of air conditioner

refrigerant and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . 4-153

Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152

Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144

System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150

A

I 3

Index

Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Automatic transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Recharging battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

Before driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /

LCA (Lane Change Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

Non-operating condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Anti-lock brake system (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

AUTO HOLD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Electronic parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Good braking practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

Parking brake – Foot type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Child restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158

Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61

To cancel cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

To decrease the cruising speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

To resume cruising speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

To set cruise control speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

To temporarily accelerate with

the cruise control on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

To turn cruise control off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

C

B

Index

4I

Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129

Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Impact sensing door unlock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle . . . . . 4-23

Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-22

Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81

Drive mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81

Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96

Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Push-starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-101

Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-101

Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:

Onboard refueling vapor recovery) system . . . . . 7-101

Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Checking the coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Checking the engine oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

ENGINE START/STOP button position . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . 5-9

Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . 7-29

Exterior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171

Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171

Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Folding key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

Emergency fuel filler lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

Opening the fuel filler lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

F

E

D

I 5

Index

Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . 1-3

Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66

Engine compartment fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . 7-69

Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71

Inner panel fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

Gross vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

If the engine overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4

If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4

If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing . . . . . . 6-3

If the engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75

Icy Road Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

Instrument cluster control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

LCD display control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

Transaxle shift indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Interior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161

AC inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165

Bottle holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162

Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168

Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161

Floor mat anchor (s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168

Luggage net holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164

Seat cooler (air ventilation seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163

Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162

Side curtain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169

Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164

USB charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

I

H

G

Index

6I

Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

Luggage lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126

Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127

Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Ignition switch position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Lane departure warning system (LDWS). . . . . . . . . . . 5-92

The LDWS does not operate when . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

Warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79

LCD modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79

Liftgate (for manual liftgate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Closing the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Emergency liftgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Opening the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82

Front lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83

High mounted stop lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90

Interior light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92

License plate light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91

Rear combination lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-88

Side repeater lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87

Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

Check headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119

Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118

High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117

Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118

Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Manual climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130

3rd row air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant

and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139

Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139

Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131

System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

ML

K

I 7

Index

Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69

Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

Sunroof open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

Sunshade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Checking the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Power liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Closing the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Emergency liftgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Opening the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Smart power liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109

Non-operational conditions of rear

parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110

Operation of the rear parking assist system. . . . . . 4-109

Rear parking assist system precautions . . . . . . . . . 4-111

Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112

Rearview camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113

Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Recommended SAE viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Driver position memory system (for power seat) . . . 3-9

Front seat adjustment - manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Front seat adjustment - power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Headrest (for front seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Headrest (for rear seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

P

R

S

O

Index

8I

Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98

Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100

Driving in flooded areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101

Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101

Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102

Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98

Highway driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102

Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98

Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99

Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100

Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159

Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159

Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159

Luggage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160

Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160

Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Disarmed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

Low aspect ratio tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65

Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures. . . . . . . 7-52

Snow tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

Tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56

Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54

Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55

Wheel replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

T

I 9

Index

Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108

Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

If you do decide to pull a trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112

Maintenance when trailer towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111

Safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

Trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

Trip modes (trip computer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

A/V mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

One time driving information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

ASCC/LDWS mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

Trip Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

Turn by turn mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

User settings mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders . . . . . . 1-6

Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114

Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114

Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114

Vehicle weight glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

GVW (Gross vehicle weight). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

Warning and indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Checking the washer fluid level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

Headlight (headlamp) escort function . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

Pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154

Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155

Defogging logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156

Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154

Winter driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103

V

W

Index

10I

Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-165

Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . 5-104

Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

Check spark plugs and ignition system . . . . . . . . . 5-104

Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . 5-105

Don't let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105

Snowy or icy conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103

To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

Use approved window washer

anti-freeze in system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant. . . . . . . . 5-104

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Blade inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121

Front windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123

Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . 4-124

Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121

360° camera monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114

ETC

Documents

Kia, THE COMPANY · Kia, THE COMPANY Thank you for ... This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-